Home

Dell 720N Laptop User Manual

1. 0 00000 ce eee eee 5 16 Speeding Up Conversion Time by Renaming NFS Directories 5 16 Descriptores sace aues t sete ae bett oo ake cutus t gk an alaa E to d 5 16 STE Dis idco VR dese Br oh Noe RENDER ae SRM SP EE 5 16 How to Manage UNIX Access to NTFS Files ooo oo ooooooooooooo 5 16 UNIX Users Need Windows NT Credentials to Access NTFS Files 5 16 WAFL Credential Caching sss ceed na mde dm 5 17 How to Manage the WAFL Credential Cache o o oo oooooooooo oo o 5 17 The Default Configuration lt neeite bita ema aus a ka eee 5 17 Two Ways to Manage the WAFL Credential Cache 5 17 Global Cache Management Options onanan aana 5 17 When to Use the wcc Command o ooocoooo eee 5 17 The wecComnmahd Syntax id vete tet Rh pP NS bier 5 18 The wee Command Options s oett rer eoo usce aca 5 18 Setting How Long Each WAFL Credential Cache Entry Is Valid 5 19 Descriptions s side eo a Ae den d ru ae s Le oes 5 19 S GD s Sud uasa dec steele dead bad iet wat thes HA RAUS Pula Bees 5 20 Adding An Entry to the WAFL Credential Cache o o ooooooooo o 5 20 DESCHDIONG Er x 5 20 Prerequisites sme ERE ERR bi NAT paa te Beeb as 5 20 CalltlOngx s s cb rero tod te otn N ohh ate a bas av e uaa 5 20 SS mote Cr est toii tait ditis t codon retro eS 5 20 Deleting Entries From the WAFL Credential Cache o ooooooo oo 5 21 Description x i cad be e s le la
2. Specifying a Search Order To specify a different order in which the filer contacts host name services create the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume Each line must have the following format as described in Table 4 4 map service Table 4 4 Format Descriptions for a Search Order Parameter Description map One of the following maps or data bases hosts passwd netgroup group Of shadow service One or more of the following files for local files in the etc directory in the root volume dns for DNS nis for NIS Network Administration 4 7 Example Search Order You can list services in the order in which you want the filer to contact the services For example the following file instructs the filer to contact first NIS for hosts then DNS and finally local files in etc in the root volume For passwords the contact order is NIS then local files in etc in the root volume hosts nis dns files passwd nis files When the filer resolves a host the search stops NOTE When performing CIFS operations the filer can use WINS servers for host X name service However filer commands unrelated to CIFS use the etc hosts file DNS or NIS to resolve host names as described in the following sections Using the etc hosts File for Host Name Resolution The filer can use the etc hosts file in the root volume to resolve host names used in the etc rc etc syslog conf etc dgateways etc exports etc netg
3. 000002000020 1 8 Monitoring and Maintaining Network Access ooooococccooo 1 8 Chapter 2 Monitoring and Maintaining Filer Hardware 0020000005 1 9 Periodic Administration Tasks iilii iln 1 9 Filer Administration Basics 2 1 CWSI WW X s A 2 1 About This Chapter iot eee tr be aote ee ed Dg d metn t 2 1 Using the Administration Host iilii 2 1 About the Administration Host 0 0 ccc een 2 1 Administration Host Privileges ooooooooocooooo lese 2 1 Administration Host Entry in the etc hosts equiv file 2 2 Administration Host as the Mail Host iilii sls 2 2 Designating a Different Mail Host 2 2 2 0 00 000 2 2 Requirements for Using an NFS Client as the Administration Host 2 2 Requirements for Using a CIFS Client as the Administration Host 2 2 The Root Vol rme ni ote a Poe SAE Sede Re ae oo Ee Pais whe des 2 2 Aboutthe Root Volumes LA alt atid e Dee s HD 2 2 Designating the Root Volume 6 eee eee 2 3 About the Volume Name Prefix 0 0 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 2 3 Syntax to Refer to the Root Volume From NFS ClientS 2 3 Editing GontiguratiOnr Files xx 3 ides ctr RR MR dee Sed Da 2 3 What Editor to Use ERI ets HE e cte 2 3 Where Configuration Files Reside 0 0 0 0c eee 2 3 Choosing an NFS or a CIFS Client 0 0 0 0 0000s 2 3 Editing Files From an NES Client 324005200642
4. Variable Description description A string describing the purpose of the share It must contain only characters in the current code page It is required by the CIFS protocol and is displayed in the share list in Network Neighborhood on the client If the description contains spaces you must enclose it in single quotation marks groupname The name of the group you want all files in the share to get the group membership of n The maximum number of users that you specify can con nect to the share at the same time The limit on this number is dependent on filer memory and is shown in Limits on CIFS Open Files Sessions and Shares path The path name relative to the root of the filer s file system of the root directory of the share NOTE Because the cifs shares command is case sensitive be sure that you use the appropriate case when entering the path name Separators used in the path name must be forward slashes sharename The name of the share which is used by CIFS users to obtain access to the directory on the filer If sharename already exists the cifs shares add com mand fails CAUTION Do not create shares whose names end with a dollar sign doing so might cause conflicts with reserved names In particular do not create shares called C or ADMINS C is a reserved share name and ADMINS is an illegal share name Example The following example creates a new share called library cifs shares a
5. 2 8 Deleting Administrative Users ee 2 8 Description ao io d soles be ut tasa dad wh Se eese Tr esc E 2 8 ZdUtION st trente sts Ris etr fe Ha Wr t HAC OIN sa IM c 2 9 SLC odes iut O Lope siehe Pico sd P S efe Le er E 2 9 Listing Administrative US FS uu paces ma A We ee e olas cedo qtu 2 9 ESCAPA e hehe EUREN 2 9 SIGD 4 obe etat e A a thls on A RA ron cio 2 9 Changing an Administrative User Password 2 00 0 0 eee 2 9 Description s s eee dte e AREE o E RD 2 9 RESTTICUONS ner agreed enter deb det d debeo dcs t ADR Do eA ions 2 9 Steps to Change an Administrative Password Using a Console Or TENET 5 eR tese ae Er ded atat Up e Da M be ir quy et dead es ted dod dod d 2 10 Step to Change an Administrative Password Using rsh 2 10 Halting and Rebooting the Filer llli 2 10 Data Storage Inm NVRAM E sia ta tunt een eoi eR aba 2 10 NVRAM Event During Orderly Shutdown illii 2 10 Procedure to Halt the Filer uus to a ata psu 2 10 Procedure to BOOUINE FICK uan PA e Rt a OUR T e 2 11 Procedure to Reboot thesFller i ua AS 2 11 Where the Filer Boots From es sdb s ea E re et ate ncs 2 11 Use the Halt Command to Avoid Data LOSS o oooooocoooo ooo 2 11 ForMore Information eR od rta bd dpi 2 11 Understanding the Filer Default Configuration 0o o oooooooooooo o 2 12 About the Default Configuration liliis eese 2 12 Default Exported and Shared Directories loin 2 12 Defaul
6. Detailed Options Informatiori 9 21 19 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide APPENDIX A Command Reference This appendix provides the commands that you use to control a filer and are grouped in the following sections e User Commands File Formats e Headers Tasks and Macros e System Services and Daemons Command Reference A 1 A 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide User Commands This section contains user commands Command Reference A 3 arp NAME arp address resolution display and control SYNOPSIS arp hostname arp a arp d hostname arp s hostname ether adaress temp pub DESCRIPTION The arp command displays and modifies the tables that the address resolution proto col uses to translate between Internet and Ethernet addresses With no flags arp displays the current ARP entry for host name The host may be specified by name or by number using Internet dot notation OPTIONS a Displays all of the current ARP entries d Deletes an entry for the host called hostname s Creates an ARP entry for the host called hostname with the Ethernet address ether address The Ethernet address is given as six hex bytes sepa rated by colons The entry will be permanent if the words following s includes the keyword temp Temporary entries that consist of a complete Internet address and a matching Ethernet
7. The settings of a share can be changed at any time even if the share is in use sharename is the name of the existing share that is to be changed comment description changes the description of the share For more information about the share description setting see the Creating new shares section above nocomment changes the description of the share to an empty string maxusers userlimit changes the user limit on the share For more information about the user limit setting see the Creating new shares section above nomaxusers removes the user limit on the share forcegroup groupname changes the forcegroup setting For more information about the forcegroup setting see the Creating new shares section above noforcegroup specifies that files to be created in the share do not belong to a particular UNIX group That is each file belongs to the same group as the owner of the file SEE ALSO cifs access A 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs stat NAME cifs stat print CIFS operating statistics SYNOPSIS cifs stat interval DESCRIPTION The cifs stat command has two forms If you specify the interval the command continues displaying a summary of CIFS activity until interrupted The information is for the preceding interval seconds The header line is repeated in the display every 10 lines If you do not specify the interval the command displays
8. 0 ne 6 14 Disabling the Root Directory note hea e e EE eee eee ee 6 14 Turning Off WebNFS Service 0 eee 6 14 Displaying NFS Statistics asana natae aae pia a ee es 6 15 About Displaying NFS Statistics eese 6 15 The nfsstat Command Displays NFS and RPC StatisticS 6 15 Sylitaxi st docemus ds NT EM A oerte 6 15 OPON S at a GL de ak hl he tos as el dee ara 6 15 Example no OpDtlOns acu sacada neka me eX as SR RC ERI ETE 6 16 Example using the option illii 6 17 Example using the h option illii 6 17 Example resetting counters with the z option llle 6 18 CIFS Administration oooooooo ooo 7 1 Whats CIES Ia iut rd toit E NEL aid ER to e En PO s 7 1 What You Can Do Only From the Filer Command Line or FilerView 7 1 Effects of Renaming a Volume on Shares ll eee 7 1 Scope of Hiis Chapter s s eee teg iere he pP HER b egets 7 1 CIES limitations soo ie ote ls eR Fm mont whoa acte dude toos da 7 2 Introductions ue AA ATEREEPSATIASO eh TAS 7 2 User Manager Limitations x42 s ci ee roe Mats cod ee RC e ces 7 2 Server Manager Limitations llle es 7 2 Limits on CIFS Open Files Sessions and Shares o o o oooooooooo ooo 7 2 Limits for the Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N 7 2 Changing or Viewing the Filer s Description llle 7 2 When to Change or View a Filer s Description liliis lisse 7 2 XXIII
9. If a write from a CIFS client to a filer causes a quota to be exceeded the user experi ence depends on the operating system and the application Following are two examples Anapplication might display a message as follows Cannot write file filenam When a user tries to copy a file to the filer using the Explorer in Windows 95 the error is as follows Cannot create or replace filename Cannot read from the Source file or disk Increasing the Maximum Number of Files About Increasing the Maximum Number of Files Initially the maximum number of files on the filer is set at one for every 32 KB of disk space The number is increased automatically when you add a new disk The increase is determined by the filer and is not a userspecified value Unlike UNIX which requires that you specify the maximum number of files in a file System when you create the file system the filer enables you to use themaxfiles command to increase the number of files for each volume at any time NOTE Use caution when increasing the maximum number of files because after you X increase this number you can never reduce it As new files are created the file system consumes the additional disk space required to hold the inodes for the additional files there is no way for the filer to release that disk space An inode is a data structure containing information about files Viewing the Number of Files in a Volume To see how many files are in a
10. Setting the Console Encoding Description Use this procedure to set how the console displays non ASCII information You would change the encoding if your console does not accept or display characters properly using the current encoding The default encoding is nfs Step To set the encoding of the filer console enter the following command options console encoding encoding encoding is one of the following encoding styles You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input e nfs The NFS character set of the root volume You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Usersb 11 e sgml SGML character format You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input utf8 UTF 8 character sets For input any character greater than Ox7F is treated as the beginning of a UTF 8 encoding Setting the Language of a Volume Description This procedure sets the language that a volume uses to store file names You com plete this procedure when you want the files names stored in a volume to use a different language than the default language You should complete this procedure before any files are created in the volume so that all file names use the same language After you complete the procedure the filer stores file names in the selected volume using a character set that best fits the language you select
11. Table 7 6 Windows File Access Detail Displays Field Description Object Server The name of the subsystem server process calling the audit check function This is always SECURITY because this is a security log Object Type The type of object being accessed Object name The name such as a file name of the object being accessed New Handle ID The new handle identifier of the open object Operation ID A unique identifier associating multiple events result ing from a single operation Process ID The identifier of the client process accessing the object Primary User Name The user name of the user requesting the object access When impersonation is taking place this is the user name with which the server process is logged on Primary Domain The name of the computer or SYSTEM if the user identified by Primary User Name is SYSTEM If the computer is a member of a Windows NT Server domain this can also be the name of the domain containing the primary user s account Primary Logon ID A unique identifier assigned when the primary user logged on CIFS Administration 7 27 Table 7 6 Windows File Access Detail Displays continued Field Description Object User Name Your login Client Domain The name of your computer or the domain contain ing the client user s account Client Logon ID A unique identifier assigned when the client user logged on Accesses The types of accesses to the object that were attempted P
12. When You Can Modify the snapmirror conf File You can modify the etc snapmirror conf line at any time Format of the snapmirror conf File Each entry of the etc snapmirror conf file is in the following format source filer source vol destination filer destination vol argument schedule Meaning of Each Field in asnapmirror conf Entry The following list describes the meaning of each field in a snapmirror conf entry e source fileris the host name of the filer from which data is replicated source volis the source volume name For example for the vo 7 volume type vol1 Do not type the full path name vol vol1 e destination fileris the host name of the filer to which data is replicated e destination volis the destination volume mirror name For example for the vol volume type vo11 Do not type the full path name vol vol1 e argument is kbs kilobytes per second the maximum speed at which data is transferred Enter a value greater than or equal to 11 By default the filer transfers the data as fast as it can Enter a dash to indicate that you want to use the default value for argument NOTE The actual data transfer speed might be limited by factors such as network X bandwidth For example if you specify a large value such as 1 000 000 the filer might still transfer the data at 2 000 kilobytes per second e schedule is the schedule used by the destination filer for updating the mirror You must not leave any f
13. command on the trusted host EXAMPLE The following example shows how to enter the version command from a trusted host named adminhost through a remote shell adminhost rsh I root filer version SEE ALSO hosts equiv useradmin A 170 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide snmpd NAME snmpd snmp agent daemon DESCRIPTION The filer supports an SNMP version 1 compatible agent that provides support for both the MIB II management information base for TCP IP based internets as well as a Dell Custom MIB A number of user configurable options for the SNMP agent can be set and que ried from the console using the snmp command see snmp Due to weak authentication in SNMP version 1 SetRequest commands that allow the remote setting of configuration variables have been disabled MIB II Under MIB II information is accessible for the system interfaces at ip icmp tcp udp and snmp MIB II groups The transmission and egp groups are not supported The coldStart linkDown linkUp and authenticationFailure traps are implemented Traps are configured using the snmp command Dell CUSTOM MIB The Dell Custom MIB provides a means to obtain detailed information about many aspects of filer operation via SNMP The following is a summary of the top level groups in the Custom MIB and the information they contain product Product level information such as the software version string
14. ity on a system or to investigate a security breach e f someone who should have access to a file cannot get access examining the event can provide a clue to resolving the problem e If a file has been changed in a way that indicates a security breach event auditing might provide clues about the nature of the breach if subsequent changes occur Active Event Log Naming The active event log is the file to which system writes access logging information The default active event log is etc log adtlog evt You can specify another active event log with the cifs access_logging filename option You can change active event logs at any time The other logs remain available for reading until you delete them Log Access Anyone can read an event log You cannot write to an event log or clear one but you can delete one 7 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Event Log Detail Displays How to Examine an Event in Detail You examine an event in detail by double clicking it and looking at the resulting event details display There are the following kinds of event details displays e Windows file access detail displays UNIX file access detail displays Unsuccessful file access detail display e Lost record event detail display Windows File Access Detail Displays Windows file access detail displays show the following information displayed in the detail screens as shown in Table 7 6
15. snapshot snapshot name style style volume volume name DESCRIPTION The filestats utility provides a summary of file usage within a volume It must be used on a snapshot and the only required argument is the snapshot name The volume name defaults to volO if not specified If the volume you are examining is named otherwise specify the name explicitly OPTIONS The following options are supported ages ages Specifies the breakdown of ages as a set of comma separated time values The values are in seconds but as a convenience you can add an H or D suffix to a number to get hours and days For example 900 4H 7D would pro duce a breakdown with 4 categories files accessed in the last 15 minutes files accessed in the last four hours files accessed in the last week and all other files expr expression This lets you specify a boolean expression that will be evaluated for each inode encountered and if the expression is true then the inode will be selected and included in the various breakdowns of file usage The expres sion can contain variables which are merely the name of an inode attribute enclosed in curly braces For example size is evaluated as the size of the current inode The valid inode attributes that you can use in expressions are tid The tree id for qtrees type The file type numeric currently perm Permissions flags Additional flags nlink Count of hard links uid User id numeric of
16. 19 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The cifs symlinks enable Option Default On Description When you set cifs symlinks enable to On the default setting if the object being accessed by a CIFS client is a symbolic link the filer follows the link with the condition that the ultimate target turns out to reside within the originating share This ensures that the client has access permission to the target This applies both to rela tive symbolic links links to paths beginning with a character other than and treated as a path relative to the parent directory of the symbolic link and absolute symbolic links links to paths beginning with and treated as a path relative to the root of the file system For more information about this option refer to Managing Symbolic Links for CIFS Access in Chapter 5 DNS Options What the DNS Options Do The DNS options control how the filer works with DNS For more information about DNS see Chapter 4 Network Administration The dns domainname Option Default None Description Sets the DNS domain name to the specified domain name The dns enable Option Default Off Description Enables the DNS client on the filer Before you enable DNS you must set the DNS domain and the etc resolv conf file must exist Detailed Options Information 19 7 HTTP Options What the HTTP Options Do The HTTP options enable and control HTTP
17. 2s act mte pi deb a tb NS tee da 4 29 Where to Look for Database File Verification Instructions 4 30 Error Message Example 00000 ees 4 30 Enabling and Disabling Database File Protection With nvfail 4 31 Des6rlptlons teet Bas P ER Ss Se Ad ona Rab wee RUE uds 4 31 Step to Enable nvfall 2 22 24 ae cle Seca daa A n aie ah paki a 4 31 Step to Disablesnvialle crane eee ete rp 4 31 Using the nvfail rename File for Additional Database Protection 4 31 Descriptions susi Lu deem s aset eet def e ete ol es bos 4 31 ROeStIHCIOTIS sue okey doa UU A ha Fh VR Ru Ru ud 4 31 SPSS O a E 4 31 File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 1 About TihissGhapter i aia a ida 5 1 About rl Shade e td ia tete ta 5 1 FilecEockingtit ractioris i ue Eu ERA Sh NER Mm ed eur 5 1 About This SecHon xr eee P EET ie 5 1 VDeS Ob AAA eie oo bue dris t Host eM o itio ii 5 1 Types OR LOCKS iet nr a dU hd 5 1 Managing Symbolic Links for CIFS Access 0 2 iles 5 2 About Symbolic Links 2 di REG Poke we Mad pte RW nra 5 2 Controlling Access to Symbolic Links liliis ee eee 5 2 Enabling Symbolic Links lisse 5 2 How to Enable and Disable Symbolic Links llli 5 3 How to Redirect Absolute Symbolic Links ooo ooo ooo oooo 5 3 How to Prevent Symbolic Link Cycling llle 5 4 NFS and CIFS Use of the Read Only Bit liliis ss 5 4 About Read only Bits v
18. Common Internet File System CIFS and Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP protocols are used for file sharing or transfers This guide doesn t cover basic system or network administration topics such as Internet Protocol IP addressing routing and network topology it emphasizes the characteristics of the Dell filer Other Documents You May Need Besides this System Administrator and Command Reference Guide the following documentation is included with your system e The Getting Started document provides step by step instructions for setting up your computer system The Quick Reference card provides the filer commands and command options The Installation and Troubleshooting Guide provides instructions for installing system hardware and includes troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures for testing your computer system vi e The User s Guide provides instructions for configuring and operating a new filer that runs Data ONTAP 5 3 software You may also have one or more of the following documents NOTE Documentation updates are sometimes included with your system to describe changes to your system or software Always read these updates before consulting any other documentation because the updates often contain the latest information e Documentation is included with any options you purchase separately from your system This documentation includes information that you need to configure and install these options Installation in
19. Instead of specifying a host name or netgroup name in the exportfs command specify the subnet in one of the following formats dotted lP num bits The dotted P field is either an IP address or a subnet number The num bits field specifies the size of the subnet by the number of leading bits of the netmask network subnet netmask netmask The subnet field is the subnet number The netmask field is the netmask In UNIX it is illegal to export a directory that has an exported ancestor in the same file system Data ONTAP 5 3 does not have this restriction For example you can export both the directory and the home directory In determining per missions the filer uses the longest matching prefix EXAMPLES In the following example all network clients can mount the home directory but only the adminhost can mount the directory exportfs o access adminhost root adminhost home exportfs The following examples show different forms of the exportfs command that export the home directory to the 123 45 670 subnet with the 255 255 255 0 netmask exportfs o rw 123 45 67 0 24 home exportfs o rwz123 45 67 24 home exportfs o rwz network 123 45 67 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 exportfs o rwz 123 45 67 0 255 255 255 0 FILES etc exports directories and files exported to NFS clients etc hosts host name data base etc netgroup network groups data base SEE ALSO exports hosts netgroup NOTES Data ONTAP 5 3 su
20. Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears 4 Double click the name of a filer Result The Filer Properties window appears 5 Click the Shares button Result Information about each share on the filer appears Using the cifs Shares Command to View Information About Shares To display information about a share or shares that exist enter the following command cifs shares sharename where sharename is the specific name of the share about which you want informa tion If you want information about all shares leave sharename blank Examples of Displaying Share Information The following command example displays the share information only for the share library created by the cifs shares add command described in Creating a Share with the cifs Shares Command cifs shares library The following command displays information about all shares cifs shares 7 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The sample output is from cifs shares Name Mount Point Description HOME vol muffin home Default Share everyone Full Control techpubs g Full Control C vol muffin Remote Administration everyone Full Control BUILTIN Administrators Full Control openhome vol muffin writers home readable home dirs user limit 1200 forcegroup techpubs everyone x techpubs g r x stock vol muffin Not half baked user limit 10 everyone Full Control flour vol muffin
21. Result The Access Through Share Permissions window appears To add a new user or group click Add Result The Add Users and Groups window appears Adding a name with the Add Users and Groups window 7 Click the arrow next to the List Names From field to choose a domain that con tains names that you want to add Result A list of names appears in the Names list box Specify one or more names in either of the following two ways a Click one or more names in the Names list box b Type valid user or group names in the Add Names text box Click Add in the window where you selected the names Result The names are added to the Add Names field of the Add Users and Groups window CIFS Administration 7 21 10 If you want add or modify the access type by selecting one or more names and choosing an access type from the Type of Access list Steps in the Access Through Share Permissions window 1 To assign or change an access type select a name or names in the Names list then click the arrow next to Type of Access and select an access type 12 To remove one or more names from the list select a name or names in the Names list then click Remove 3 Click OK Final step in the Properties window 14 Click OK to put the changes into effect Giving Access With the cifs access Command You use the cifs access command to assign access to a share from the filer com mand line To change the permissions run the command with t
22. Review HTTP utilization if licensed for HTTP Review NFS utilization if licensed for NFS Sysstat command df command etc messages file cifs stat command httpstat command nfsstat command Introducing Dell Filers 1 9 Table 1 7 Periodic Administration Tasks continued How Often Task Command or File Weekly Review filer disk usage on a per quota report user level command Test connectivity to NT Domain cifs testdc Controller command Review current shared CIFS cifs shares directories command Review NFS exports etc exports file Review filer network traffic netstat command statistics Review network interface perfor ifstat command mance statistics on a perinterface level Monthly Make sure that the PowerVault shelfchk command 700N storage systems are con nected properly Review filer uptime Review filer OS revision Review current NIS server uptime command version command ypwhich command 1 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 2 Filer Administration Basics Overview About This Chapter This chapter describes routine filer administration procedures that you need regard less of the file sharing protocols licensed for your filer This chapter emphasizes the filer characteristics that distinguish the filer from a general purpose server Using the Administration Host About the Administration Host The filer r
23. Table 17 2 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface TRANSMIT Statistic Meaning Packets Number of packets attempted to be transmitted Bytes Number of bytes attempted to be transmitted Errors Number of hardware errors encountered while attempt ing to transmit Collisions Number of collisions that occurred while transmitting Late collisions Excess coll Queue full List full No carrier Underflow Defer Time out Stopped List underflow Loss of carrier o buffers Requeue Threshold up Threshold dn Threshold lvl frames Number of collisions terminated due to a late collision Number of times transmission was terminated due to excessive collisions Number of times the queue was full Number of frames that were dropped due to the unavail ability of descriptors Number of times the carrier signal was not present dur ing transmission Number of times the transmitter terminated the mes sage because data arrived late from memory Number of times transmission had to be deferred Number of times the transmit jabber timer expired Number of times the receive process stopped Number of frames that had to be dropped due to the unavailability of descriptors Number of times the carrier was lost Number of times buffers were unavailable Number of times the frame was requeued due to list underflow Number of times the transmit threshold was increased Number of times the tra
24. The etc sm notify file contains a list of network hosts that made an NLM lock request to the filer Each time the filer reboots it tries to notify the hosts of its new state information You can remove this file if you want the filer to stop notify ing the hosts in this file snap sched vo name weeks days hours 8 ist sets the schedule for automatic snapshot creation The argument vol name identifies the volume the schedule should be applied to The second argu ment indicates how many weekly snapshots should be kept on line the third how many daily and the fourth how many hourly If an argument is left off or set to zero then no snapshot of the corresponding type is created Daily snapshots are created at 24 00 of each day except Sunday and weekly snap shots are created at 24 00 on Sunday Only one snapshot is created at a time If a weekly snapshot is being created for instance no daily or hourly snapshot will be created even if one would otherwise be scheduled For example the command snap sched vol0 2 6 indicates that two weekly snapshots and six daily snapshots of volume vo O should be kept on line No hourly snapshots will be created For snapshots created on the hour an optional list of times can be included indicating the hours on which snapshots should occur For example the command snap sched vol0 2 6 8 8 12 16 20 indicates that in addition to the weekly and daily snapshots eight hourly snapshots sh
25. The adminhost and time node host names must be known to the filer Time Synchronization With SNTP You control how time is synchronized using SNTP and whether time changes are logged by using the timed options 2 82 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide When to Use SNTP You use SNTP when you need a high degree of accuracy List of timed Options Before using SNTP you set the t imed options as described in Synchronizing Filer System Time or accept the default settings The t imed options are listed in Table 2 20 For details about the t imed options see Timed Options Table 2 20 List of timed Options Timed option Function Default timed enable Determines whether the timed daemon Off runs timed log Determines whether to log time Off changes initiated by the t imed daemon to the console timed max skew Sets the maximum allowable 30m discrepancy between filer time and server time timed proto Selects whether to use the protocol ntp used by the rdate command or SNTP timed sched Schedules when to synchronize the time hourly with a time server timed servers Specifies up to five time servers inorder None of contact priority Synchronizing Filer System Time Description This procedure describes how to set the t imed options to synchronize filer system time You can do this any time After you complete this procedure filer time is contin ually updated a
26. URL translations to be applied to incoming HTTP requests SYNOPSIS etc httpd translations DESCRIPTION The HTTP daemon supports four URL translation rules to filter incoming HTTP requests The HTTP daemon applies each rule in succession stopping at the first successful Redirect Pass or Fail rule Map template result Any request which matches template is replaced with the result string given Redirect template result Any request which matches template is redirected to the result URL Note that this must be a full URL e g beginning with http Pass template result Any request which matches template is granted access and no further rule processing occurs An optional result can be used in place of the matching URL Fail template Any request which matches template is denied access Rule processing stops after a matched Fail Both templates and results may contain wildcards a star character The wildcard behaves like a shell wildcard in the template string matching zero or more characters including the slash character In the result string a wild card causes text from the corresponding match in the template string to be inserted into the result EXAMPLE This example redirects CGI queries to egi host prevents accesses to usr forbidden and maps requests to images to a local image directory Example URL translations Redirect cgi bin http cgi host Fail usr forbidden Map image b
27. ays device and configuration information for each tape drive ays detailed information about each l O device For SCSI or Fibre Chan ost adapters the additional information includes a separate line ribing each attached disk mt Command Reference A 97 sysstat NAME sysstat report filer performance statistics SYNOPSIS sysstat interval DESCRIPTION sysstat reports filer performance statistics such as the current CPU utilization the amount of network I O the amount of disk I O and the amount of tape I O By default sysstat prints a new line of statistics every 15 seconds The interval argument overrides the default causing sysstat to report once every interval sec onds Use control C to stop sysstat EXAMPLE This is an example of sysstat running on a lightly loaded NFS only filer filer sysstat 1 CPU NFS CIFS HTTP Net kB s Disk kB s Tape kB s Cache in out read write read write age 5 82 0 0 15 17 16 0 0 0 8 6 105 0 0 24 98 100 0 0 0 8 5 54 0 0 32 11 0 0 0 0 8 21 50 0 0 25 42 120 592 0 0 8 16 27 0 0 10 10 144 1008 0 0 8 17 90 0 0 64 1 16 104 0 552 8 15 0 0 65 12 0 0 0 460 8 5 60 0 0 30 28 24 0 0 0 8 1 60 0 0 32 30 28 0 0 0 8 4 57 0 0 46 45 40 0 0 0 8 5 66 0 0 23 16 8 0 0 0 8 AC filer gt From left to right the columns indicate CPU the percentage CPU utilization during the previous interval seconds A 98 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Refe
28. cp etc netgroup Smntdir netgroup A umount S mntdir done rmdir SSmntdir 6 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Exporting to Subnets About Exporting to Subnets You can export a directory to clients on a subnet rather than to individual clients Valid Export Options for Subnets The valid export options in the etc exports file for exporting to subnets are as follows ro subnet address subnet address rw subnet address subnet address root subnet address subnet address Format for IP Subnet Addresses The subnet address is a dotted IP subnet address and a mask written in the following format dotted ip num bits dotted ip can be e an IP address a b c d or e anlP subnet e a for a class A network e a b for a class B network e ab cfora class C network The size of the subnet is specified by the number of leading bits of the netmask num bits Export to a Subnet as You Do to a Client You export a directory to a subnet as you do to an individual client except that you specify a subnet address rather than a full IP address in an export option Example root access To export vol vol0 home on the filer for root access to a client named silver and all addresses of the form 123 45 67x with a netmask 255 255 255 0 24 leading bits place the following entry in the etc exports file vol vol0 home root silver 123 45 67 0 24
29. dump OufbB nrst0a 63 2097151 home To make a level 0 dump of the entire file system to a local tape drive no rewind device unit zero highest density with each tape file in the dump being less than 2 GB in size without operator intervention using a tape stacker with four tape files written per tape assuming that the dump requires no more than 10GB use filer dump OufbB nrst0a nrst0a nrst0a urst0a rst0a 63 2097151 This will write the first three files to the norewind device so that they and the next dump done after them will appear consecutively on the tape write the next file to the unload reload device This will cause the stacker to rewind and unload the tape after the file has been written and then load the next tape write the last file to the rewind device so that the tape will be rewound after the dump is complete To back up all files and directories in a volume named engineering that are not in a qtree you created use filer dump OufQ rst0a vol engineering To run the dump command through rsh enter the following command on a trusted host adminhost rsh filer dump OufbB adminhost dev rst0 63 2097151 home FILES etc dumpdates dump date record SEE ALSO quota rshd restore snap sysconfig tape dumpdates NOTES Restore As stated previously filer dump output format is compatible with SunOS 4 x Solaris 1 x and SunOS 5 x Solaris 2 x dump The filer supports a local restore command
30. llle 13 12 Tape Device Management 14 1 Introduction to Tape Device Management iilii siiis 14 1 Why You Want to Manage a Tape Device eser 14 1 Scope of This Chaptete sosta etam sete Iter PA etit 14 1 How the Filer Displays Information About Various Tape Drives 14 1 INTFOAUCUON 25a is dams e uto a feed eR aer ette k ne o Lat ttd 14 1 Qualified Tape Drives 14 1 Displaying Tape Device Information liiis een 14 2 DESCAPUON 2 dod pets etd bate ded Da th rt Ab aus do cd date 14 2 Step for Displaying Information About Qualified Tape Devices 14 2 Steps for Displaying Nonqualified Tape Devices o o ooooooo 14 2 Steps for Displaying Information About Tape Stackers 14 2 Displaying Tape Device Information Along With Other Filer Information 14 3 Example of the sysconfig t Command for a Qualified Tape Drive 14 3 Examples Of the sysconfig t Command for a Nonqualified Tape Drive 14 3 Example of the sysconfig m Command 0000000 ils ae 14 3 Example of the sysconfig v Command 00000 00 e eens 14 4 Using the mt Command to Control Tape Devices 0000000 14 4 The mt Command Syntax 2244 0 o ache b p ed pee lead dede 14 4 Moving a Tape to the End of Data n nananana llle 14 4 Appe ding a DU e Perd deo e a Re ac ae E 14 5 REWINGING a Tapes seis evade tee da Etre ed rue 14 5 Taking a Ta
31. nfsstat displays statistical information about NFS Network File System and RPC Remote Procedure Call for the filer It can also be used to reinitialize this infor mation If no arguments are given nfsstat displays statistical information since last zeroed with the z option or since reboot if statistics have not been zeroed If the interval argument is specified nfsstat continuously displays the summary information for the following NFS requests getattr lookup readlink read write create remove and readdir readdirplus The first line of data displayed and every 20th line thereafter contains cumulative statistics Each subsequent line shows incremental statistics for the interval in seconds since the last display Perclient statistics can also be collected and displayed by enabling the nfs per client stats enable options using the options command see options and invoking nfsstat with the h or the I options Perclient statistics are collected for up to the first 256 NFS clients that have mounted the filesystem on the given filer OPTIONS h Displays perclient statistics since last zeroed with the z option or since reboot if statistics have not been zeroed The statistics are displayed on a perclient basis with the IP address and host name where available of each client being displayed at the head of each client s block of statistics If an optional IP address or host name is specified with the h option only t
32. qtree oplocks vol users docs enable Example With A Volume To disable oplocks in the entire users volume if oplocks are enabled and the cifs oplocks enable option is set to On enter the following command qtree oplocks vol users disable This disables only files and directories that were not in a qtree when oplocks were enabled Effect of the cifs oplocks enable Option Setting the cifs oplocks enable option has the following effects e fthecifs oplocks enable option is set to Off all oplocks on the filer are turned off e fthecifs oplocks enable option is set back to On the setting for each qtree comes into effect and oplocks are turned on for those qtrees where oplocks are enabled Displaying qtree Information How to Display qtree Information To display all attributes of all qtrees on a filer use the qt ree command with no arguments 10 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The qtree Command Display The qt ree command lists for a filer the items described in Table 10 4 Table 10 4 qtree Command Display Field Contents Volume The volumes on a filer Keep in mind that a volume is itself a qtree qtree qtrees that are not volumes each is listed next to its volume Style The security style of each qtree Oplocks The oplocks setting of each qtree Example qtree Display For example qtree Volume qtree Style Oplocks bagels unix enabled b
33. ues from the file system statistics request with more than the specified number of bytes they ll incorrectly compute the amount of free space on the file system and may think that there s no free space on a file system that has more than 2GB free Command Reference A 65 options nfs v3 enable When enabled the NFS server supports NFS version 3 By default the feature is enabled it can be disabled if there is a problem with some client when using NFS version 3 and that client cannot be configured to use NFS version 2 nfs webnfs enable When enabled the NFS server supports WebNFS lookups By default WebNFS lookups are disabled nfs webnfs rootdir Specifies the WebNFS rootdir Once the rootdir is set WebNFS cli ents can issue lookups relative to the rootdir using the public filehandle nfs webnfs rootdir set After specifying the rootdir this option needs to be enabled for the rootdir setting to take effect Disabling this option disables the existing rootdir setting nis domainname Sets the NIS domain to the specified domainname nis enable Enables NIS client on the filer The NIS domain must be set prior to enabling NIS raid timeout Sets the time in hours as a number greater than or equal to 1 that the system will run after a single disk failure has caused the system to go into degraded mode The default is 24 If the raid timeout option is specified after the system is already in degraded mode the timeout is s
34. File numbering starts at 1 v Specifies that restore takes place in verbose mode That is restore displays each file name preceded with its file type The filer restores files faster without the v option y Specifies that restore not ask whether it should terminate when getting an error That is if there are bad blocks restore skips over them and contin ues This option is particularly useful if you use restore through rsh This is because without the y option if restore through rsh encounters a read error it terminates immediately A Specifies that restore does not restore Windows NT ACLs Using the restore Command Description Use the restore command if you want to recover data that was backed up by the filer s dump command After you recover the data the files contain the same data as they did when you ran the dump command You can use the restore command at any time Restrictions This section describes the restrictions of the restore command 13 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The i Function Key of the Solaris Ufsrestore Command The restore command is similar to the Solaris u srestore command except that the restore command doesn t support the i function key of u srestore This function key enables you to specify interactively individual files and directories to be restored from a tape However you can restore individual files and directories using th
35. Guest ACCOUNTS xs Lee E et OBS LR ep OR Sco ORAE 7 8 Setting Up a Guest Account oo 7 9 Disabling Guest ACCESS dali ERE er rd ESSA 7 9 Generic User ACCOUNTS s iae te Ba hei ees d adf ate ia 7 9 Who Can Use the Generic User Account o 7 9 Setting Up a Generic User Account 0 0 0 0 elles 7 10 Disabling generic useraccess oo 7 10 Displaying a Filler Share orita a a ee 7 10 Ways t Share Folders si Back da tada 7 10 Using Server Manager to Display a Filer s Shares o o 7 10 Using the cifs shares Command to Display a Filer s Shares 7 11 CANON a Mou A a Meu 7 11 Example of Displaying a filer s Shares o oooooooo oooo o ooo 7 11 Creating and Changing a Shares sies s ar ma eri ens 7 12 Ways to Share Folde S g sse ala ER oes a shabbir TS arc 7 12 Creating a Share From Server Manager iilii lisse 7 12 Changing the Share Description and User Limit With Server Manager 7 13 Creating a Share With the cifs shares Command o o o oo ooo 7 13 Examples iaa dt e at TL be o tol E qutt ded eo 7 14 Using the cifs shares Command to Change the Share 7 15 XXIV Displaying Information About Shares 0 0 000 0c 7 15 Methods of Displaying Information About SharesS o o oo ooo o 7 15 Using Server Manager to View Information About Shares 7 16 Using the cifs Shares Command to View Information About Shares 7 16 Ex
36. Has these permissions The root NFS e full permissions for the root user on the directory administration host no permissions for any other user or host nopermissions CIFS e read and write permissions to all files for the Administrator user when logged in to the filer using the root password no permissions for other users 2 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 5 Permissions for the Default Directories continued From this This directory client Has these permissions The home NFS permissions associated with individual users directory and with groups through UNIX security database CIFS permissions assigned by the filer administrator for the HOME share Accessing the Directories Table 2 6 shows how to access the default directories Replace filer with the host name of your filer Table 2 6 Accessing the Directories Fromthis To access client Do this The root NFS Mount filer vol Vol0 AE CIFS Map a drive to WilenC The home NFS Mount filer vol vol0 home teeny CIFS Map a drive to WileHOME Or Use the Network Neighborhood icon to locate the iler and locate the HOME share Contents of the etc Directory The root directory contains an etc directory in which the filer configuration files are stored You can modify the configuration files from the administration host able 2 7 describes the files in the
37. Ifthe filer still does not boot display the boot menu from diskette as described in Booting From System Boot Diskette then choose Normal Boot NVRAM Problem How the Filer Handles Inconsistent NVRAM Contents The filer performs a number of checks to ensure that the NVRAM contents are consis tent If the contents are inconsistent the filer performs one of following actions Inconsistency Due to Improperly Updated Volume If the inconsistency is due to a failure to update a volume properly the filer displays a message suggesting that you halt the filer with the halt command take the offend ing volume off line in Maintenance mode and reboot the filer Troubleshooting 18 3 Inconsistency Due to Log Updates for Off line Volume If the inconsistency is due to the log having updates for an off line volume the filer asks whether to discard them Inconsistency Due to Other Reasons If there are many inconsistencies that cannot be repaired the filer discards the incon sistent contents and creates a core dump file The file requests received during the last few seconds before the filer shuts down are lost This does not cause the file sys tem to become inconsistent but files written during the last 10 seconds before shutdown might contain old or incorrect data Also because the parity of some recently written stripes might be incorrect the filer must do a parity check on the entire RAID array The parity check and any correction i
38. Let READ ore RT DR ost 13 6 STOPS she nie a ar id Me eo use d eo bcp dob tue dede 13 6 Examples of the restore Command 00 000 ccc eee 13 7 Example of Restoring a Subtree 0 ee 13 7 Example of Restoring the Entire Filer 0 0 00 020000000 13 8 If There Is One Backup for Each Volume nanana anaana aaa 13 8 If Each Volume Was Backed Up as Subtrees or qtreeS 13 8 Examples of Restoring From Multiple Tapes ooo ooooooo o o o 13 9 Restoring the Volume to a Directory From Multiple Tapes Using Two Tape Drives iilii ees 13 9 Restoring a Volume to a Directory From Multiple Tapes Using One Tape Drive 2 0 ees 13 9 Example of Restoring a Named File From Multiple Tapes 13 9 Example i eta mtd aed dia ren tol Ar cedet deed dion 13 9 Examples Sane Wace bo ie AREE EIE WES monec s 13 10 Exatnple of Listinig Eil8s s et t e RS C lee tret 13 10 Restarting the restore Command 2 0 0 60 eee 13 10 DESCHDION n eene REA Wes Sek OAS AOR EERE APA SS PEARSE ESS 13 10 REStICHONS sas dos ha das adeeb tenho pant ade edna td 13 11 SC a nas da aah 13 11 Example eqs ey ra aes aoe Eee ene Ca ee ane 13 11 XXXIV Chapter 14 Chapter 15 How to Use a Filer Tape Drive to Restore Files to Another System 13 12 About THIS SeGtlOns th sas stubs c e tct RS a al totes 13 12 Begulremiente us he bags oat dE ebbe a aad sdb e stats 13 12 Format for Specifying Filer Tape Drive
39. Off Description Sets the filer to check for NVRAM errors during boot up Change the value to On when you want the filer to send error messages to notify you of NVRAM errors that can effect the validity of database files 19 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The raidsize Option Default None Description Sets the maximum size of a RAID group in volume Must be an integer greater than one The root Option Default None Description Makes volume the root volume The snapmirrored Option Default None Description The filer automatically sets this option to On if the volume is a mirror for data replica tion Otherwise the option is set to Off Change the value to Off if you want to convert a mirror to a regular volume After you make the change the volume is no longer read only and the filer stops making incremental changes to the volume for data replication NOTE You cannot set this option to On That is you cannot use this option to convert a regular volume to a mirror To use a volume as a mirror follow the instructions in Chapter 16 Data Replication Using SnapMirror to start replicating data to the volume Miscellaneous Options What the Miscellaneous Options Do The miscellaneous options control additional aspects of filer operation Detailed Options Informatioril 9 17 The console encoding Option Default nfs Description Table 1
40. The qtree command creates qtrees and specifies attributes for qtrees A qtree can be an entire volume or a subset of a volume It is similar to a partition in that you cannot move files into or out of a qtree There are however two dif ferences between a qtree and a partition A qtree is more flexible than a partition because you can change the size of a atree at any time A qtree enables you to apply attributes such as oplocks and security style to a subset of files and directories rather than to an entire volume If there are files and directories in a volume that do not belong to any qtrees you create the filer considers them to be in qtree 0 Otree O can take on the same types of attributes as any other qtrees You can use any qtree command whether or not quotas are enabled on your filer The qtree command without any arguments displays the attributes of all quota trees on the filer The qtree create command creates a qtree It is equivalent to the quota qtree command If name does not begin with a slash the qtree is created in the root volume To create a qtree in a particular volume specify name in this format vol vol name qtree name A atree can be created only in the root directory of a volume By default a qtree has the same security style as the root directory of the volume and oplocks are enabled The root directory of a volume by default uses the UNIX security style A atree does not have any restrictions on
41. The raid timeout Option Default 24 Description Sets the time in hours from 1 through 24 that the system runs in degraded mode before an automatic shutdown timed Options What the timed Options Do The timed options control whether and how the filer uses the timed daemon to synchronize time with a time server For additional information about time synchroni zation and using the t imed options see Filer System Time Synchronization and Synchronizing Filer System Time in Chapter 2 The timed enable Option Default Off Description Determines whether a time daemon t imed runs on the filer and synchronizes time with a time server The timed log Option Default Off Description Determines whether to log to the console time changes initiated by the timed daemon The timed max skew Option Default 30m Detailed Options Informatioril 9 13 Description Sets the maximum allowable discrepancy between filer time and server time If there is a large discrepancy it probably means that enough is wrong somewhere that the filer time should not be synchronized with the server time no time synchronization takes place and a message to that effect is sent to the console The value is an inte ger followed by one of the following letters e sfor seconds e mfor minutes e fh for hours The default is 30 minutes The timed proto Option Default ntp Description Selects whether to use the protocol used by t
42. Therefore if the filer is running CIFS the halt command invokes cifs terminate which requires the t option If the filer has CIFS clients and you invoke halt with out t it displays the number of CIFS users and the number of open CIFS files Then it prompts you for the number of minutes to delay cifs terminate automat ically notifies all CIFS clients that a CIFS shut down is scheduled in mins minutes and asks them to close their open files CIFS files that are still open at the time the filer halts will lose writes that had been cached but not written halt logs a message in etc messages to indicate that the filer was halted on purpose OPTION d Dumps system core before halting t mins Halts after the indicated number of minutes or after all CIFS files that were open have been closed whichever is sooner SEE ALSO cifs terminate reboot savecore messages A 42 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide help NAME help print summary of commands and help strings SYNOPSIS help command command DESCRIPTION help prints a summary for each command in its argument list With no argu ments help prints a list of all available Data ONTAP 5 3 commands Full UNIX style man pages for all filer commands and files are available in the etc man directory FILES etc man directory of UNIX style manual pages Command Reference A 43 hostname NAME hostname
43. Use this procedure to view events in a security log and check the events on the file and users you specified in the procedure Setting a System ACL on a File After you complete this procedure access information is displayed Prerequisites You should have the name of the security log that you want to view Steps To view events in a security log perform the following steps 1 Open the Event Viewer by selecting the following menu items Programs Admin istrative Tools and then Event Viewer Result The event viewer appears From the Log menu of the Event Viewer choose Open Result An Open window appears Choose the share that contains the log you want to look at Result A list of files appears Click the log file you want to examine An Open File Type window appears If Security is not selected select it Click OK Result The Event viewer appears and displays a list of Security events In the display symbols preceding event entries have the following meanings e Key Successful access attempts e Lock Unsuccessful access attempts To view an event detail double click the event Result An event detail screen appears 7 32 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Using Oplocks What Oplocks Do Oplocks opportunistic locks enable the redirector on a CIFS client in certain file sharing scenarios to perform client side caching of read ahead write behind and
44. WINS Broadcast 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20 WINS Broadcast 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20 WINS Broadcast 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20 WINS Broadcast 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20 WINS Broadcast 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20 WINS 0 WINS 3 WINS 20 WINS 0 WINS 3 WINS 20 WINS 0 WINS 3 WINS 20 WINS 0 WINS 3 WINS 20 WINS Command Reference A 19 cifs testdc NT DOMAIN 0 WINS NT DOMAIN 3 WINS NT DOMAIN 20 WINS Testing Primary Domain Controller ound 2 addresses rying 192 168 2 14 192 168 2 14 is alive rying 192 168 2 85 192 168 2 85 is alive ound PDC NT DOMAIN BDC Testing all Domain Controllers ound 4 addresses rying 192 168 2 14 192 168 2 14 is alive rying 192 168 2 85 192 168 2 85 is alive rying 198 95 22775 198 95 22775 is alive rying 192 168 2 14 192 168 2 14 is alive ound DC NEDOMAIN BDC ound DC FRENCHAO found DC NFDOMAIN BDC ound DC FRENCHAO A 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide date NAME date display or set date and time SYNOPSIS date u I Gc yy mm aa hhmmrt ss DESCRIPTION date displays the current date and time when invoked without arguments When invoked with an argument date sets the current date and time the argu ment for setting the
45. When these commands are in progress you cannot enter additional vol copy start commands because four volume copy operations are already running on the filer Two of the operations are for reading the vo 0 and vol2 volumes and two of the operations are for writing the vol and vol3 volumes Example Suppose you enter the following three vol copy start commands on a filer named filerA to copy volumes to another filer named filerB vol copy start vol0 filerB volO vol copy start voll filerB voll vol copy start vol2 filerB vol2 When these commands are in progress filerA runs three volume copy operations to read the volumes and filerB runs three volume copy operations to write the volumes You can enter an additional vol copy start command to copy between filerA and filerB because the command adds one more volume copy operation to each filer However you cannot enter an additional vol copy start command to copy vol umes locally on either filerA or filerB This is because the additional command would create two volume copy operations one for reading and one for writing on the filer Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Sef5 7 that performs the local copying The filer cannot support these two additional volume copy operations because three operations are already in progress Possible Errors If your filer does not meet a requirement described in Requirements and Recom mendation for Copying a Volume thevol copy start command gene
46. byte order Each is used as a transition time at which the rules for computing local time change Next come tzh timecnt one byte unsigned values each one tells which of the differ ent types of local time types described in the file is associated with the same indexed transition time These values serve as indices into an array of structures that appears next in the file these structures are written as a fourbyte signed tt gmtoff member in a standard byte order followed by a one byte signed tt isdst member and a one byte unsigned tt_abbrind member In each structure tt gmtoff gives the number of seconds to be added to GMT tt isdst tells whether this time is during a Daylight Savings Time period andtt abbrind serves as an index into the array of time zone abbreviation characters that follow the structure s in the file Then there are tzh_leapent pairs of four byte values written in standard byte order the first value of each pair gives the time at which a leap second occurs the second gives the total number of leap seconds to be applied after the given time The pairs of values are sorted in ascending order by time Then there are tzh ttisstdcnt standard wall indicators each stored as a one byte value they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types were specified as standard time or wall clock time A local time transition Command ReferenceA 157 zoneinfo specified in standard time ignores any offset due to
47. no rewind device urst m unload reload device rstOh rewind device nrstOh no rewind device urstOh unload reload device rstOa rewind device nrstOa no rewind device urstOa unload reload device SEE ALSO dump mt sysconfig format i format i format i format i format i format i format i format i EXB 8200C w compression EXB 8200C w compression EXB 8500 5 0GB EXB 8500 5 0GB EXB 8500 5 0GB EXB 8500C w compression EXB 8500C w compression EXB 8500C w compression A 116 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Command ReferenceA 117 Headers Tasks and Macros This section contains headers tasks and macros A 118 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME boot boot directory of Data ONTAP 5 3 executables SYNOPSIS etc boot DESCRIPTION The boot directory contains copies of the executable files required to boot the filer The download command see download copies these files from etc boot into the filer s boot block from which the system boots FILES etc boot etc boot netapp alpha etc boot fc hard alpha etc boot 1 alpha SEE ALSO download directory of Data ONTAP 5 3 executables symbolic link to current version of Data ONTAP 5 3 for filers with Alpha processors boot FCode for filers with Alpha processors second stage
48. see restore so the restoration process can be A 32 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide dump performed on the filer It can also be performed via a restore done on an NFS client machine if such a restore is being done the client system should be checked to ensure it supports SunOS compatible dump restore format Client Dump and Restore Capability If a client is to be used for performing filer dump and or restore it is impor tant to check what the maximum dump and restore capabilities of your client system are before setting up a dump schedule There are some client sys tems which do not support dump and restore of greater than 2 GB while others may support very large dumps and restores It is especially important to check the restore capability of your system when using the filer local tape dump since the filer supports dumps that are greater than 2 GB Tape Capacity and Dump Scheduling Along with the potential 2 GB restriction of dump or restore on a client sys tem it is important to consider your tape capacity when planning a dump schedule For the filer local tape option the Exabyte 8505 supports an approximate maximum capacity of 10GB per tape using compression If a cli ent system is used as the target for your dump the capacity of that tape drive should be checked for dump planning If your filer file system exceeds the capacity of the local tape drive or the cli ent sy
49. start Built in traps such as cold start are automatically sent to the hosts on the traphosts list when some event a reboot in the case of a cold start occurs User specified traps only exist after they are defined by a series of snmp traps commands Traps are persistent After you set a trap it remains across reboots until you specifi cally remove it Host Name Resolution How the Filer Resolves Host Names The filer resolves host names by searching maps or databases for services to use The filer tries name resolution services in a default order or in the order that you spec ify in the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume 4 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Name Resolution Search By default first the filer tries to resolve host names locally by searching the etc hosts file in the root volume and in the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume If it cannot resolve the host name the filer tries NIS if NIS is enabled If the filer still cannot resolve the host name the filer requests services from a DNS server if DNS is enabled You can specify any or all of the resolution methods Default Search Order Table 4 3 shows the default search order for each map Table 4 3 Default Search Order for Maps Map Services in search order hosts root files NIS DNS passwd root files NIS netgroup root files NIS group root files NIS shadow root files NIS
50. system files include a sample file named etc httpd mimetypes sample Before you start using HTTP make a copy of etc httpd mimetypes sample and name the copy etc httpd mimetypes If the file etc httpd mimetypes is not installed the HTTP server looks for the file etc httpd mimetypes sample as a fallback EXAMPLE map ps files to PostScript ps application postscript Command ReferenceA 133 httpd passwd NAME httpd passwd file of passwords required for HTTP access SYNOPSIS etc httpd passwd DESCRIPTION The password file containing the encrypted form of the password that an HTTP client must supply to have access to a file in a controlled access directory tree as declared in etc httpd access The password is encrypted in the regular UNIX style User of NCSA or Apache can use their htpasswd program to generate the user_id passwd pair The HTTP access control does not use the existing CIFS password database on the filer because in http basic authentication in each request for protected pages the value of passwd is sent over the network in clear text and without encryption would compromise the user s password NOTE Encrypted password file can only be generated and imported from a UNIX client SYNTAX user id1 encrypted passwd1t used id2 encrypted passwd2 SEE ALSO httpd access A 134 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide httpd translations NAME httpd translations
51. the language that your clients use To do so you choose a language and the filer uses a character set that is appropriate to the language Every Volume Has a Language Every volume uses a language and therefore a character set that you specify for file names The root volume determines the code page for PCs and the console character set Language Selection The language you specify controls the name translation between UNIX and Windows names File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 7 A NOTE If a filer is licensed for CIFS you must set a language for every volume on the filer What a Language Applies to The filer uses a character set appropriate to a given language The language you select determines which character set the filer uses for the following names User names e Share names e System and domain names M C NOTE The following must be in ASCII Otree names e Snapshot names e Volume names Kinds of Character Sets Supported The filer supports the following types of character sets Table 5 1 shows what proto cols and operating systems use a particular character set You use this information to determine what directory format you use Table 5 1 Character Sets Supported Character set type Description Used by ASCII Unicode UNIX UTF8 A 7 bit character set used by most computers Does not allow letters with accents that is diacritics A 16 bit character encoding s
52. word nameserver followed by an IP address as follows nameserver ip address For details about name server query policies see the resolv conf b man page Enabling DNS without using setup If you didn t start DNS during setup you can start DNS by performing the following steps 1 Create a etc resolv conf file in the root volume The file consists of up to three lines each specifying a name server host in the following format nameserver ip address For example nameserver 192 9 200 10 nameserver 192 9 200 20 nameserver 192 9 200 30 Network Administration 4 9 2 Edit the etc rc file in the root volume to make sure that the option specifying the DNS domain name is set and that the option to enable DNS is set to On For example options dns domainname com options dns enable on 3 Reboot the filer or enter the commands at the filer prompt Result DNS is now enabled You no longer have to update the filer s etc hosts file in the root volume every time you add a new host to the network unless you specify files first in the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume Disabling DNS To disable DNS enter the following command or put the command in the etc rc file in the root volume to make the change permanent options dns enable off Changing your DNS domain name To change your DNS domain name enter the following command or put the command in the etc rc file in the root volume to make the change permanent opt
53. 16 1 096 Nov 13 08 00 hourly 4 54 16 1 096 Nov 13 00 00 nightly 1 58 16 1 0 Nov 12 20 00 hourly 5 snap create vol_name name creates a snapshot of volume vo name with the specified name snap delete vo name name deletes the existing snapshot belonging to volume vo name that has the specified name snap rename vol name oldname newname gives an existing snapshot a new name You can use the snap rename com mand to move a snapshot out of the way so that it won t be deleted automatically Command Reference A 93 snmp NAME snmp set and query SNMP agent variables SYNOPSIS snmp snmp authtrap 0 1 snmp community add delete ro rw snmp contact contact snmp init 1 snmp location ocation snmp traphost add delete hostname paddress snmp traps on off reset delete snmp traps trapnamel parameter value on off reset delete DESCRIPTION The snmp command is used to set and query configuration variables for the SNMP agent daemon see snmpd If no options are specified snmp lists the current values of all variables OPTIONS In all the following options specifying the option name alone prints the current value of that option variable If the option name is followed by one or more vari ables then the appropriate action to set or delete that variable will be taken Any nim variable with an inclusive space or tab must be enclosed in single quotes It is r
54. 4 20 Virt alImterfaGes d sot mur dpt ee ee dE S nd dits 4 20 Trunking Supported by Virtual Interface Feature o o oooooooo 4 20 Naming Virtual Interfaces nee 4 20 Trunking Virtual Interfaces ceu iSt eo ede RR DD RERO eles whee 4 21 You Can Trunk Virtual Interfaces llis 4 21 Second Level Interface Configurations 0 0 00 eee eee 4 21 Second Level Virtual Interfaces on a SINIS FIGS seus sette t RN OO RIDERE EN Dd cir 4 21 Why Use Second Level Virtual Interfaces on a Single Filer 4 21 Example of a Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer 4 21 Virtual Interface Management liliis 4 22 Use the vif Commands to Manage Virtual Interfaces 4 22 Put These vif Commands in etc rc liliis 4 22 Creating a Single Mode Trunk 0 0 0 e 4 23 DESCUIDO mess Ws Erotic dto 4 23 PPrereguisites te Sue esa deed es Needed mde tee LA 4 23 O eset va oa e oat de a s 4 23 EXaIples s xam a ssec RES odit o LOVE eco M it aves s 4 23 Specifying a Preferred Link in a Single Mode TruNk o o o oooooo o 4 23 D eScriptiOD ai dua teretes dote re cd ees attivi Grete 13 4 23 SLED MA Pn ie ee at eae g 4 24 Removing a Link From Preferred Status in a Single Mode Trunk 4 24 Descriptloms ueneno rx x tad ae eel eid ARN Coni da tees 4 24 S eDun diis e abt a Rh eae de ds 4 24 Creating a Multiple Mode Trunk o oo oooooooooooo re 4 24 Description o ace
55. 4 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide mount filer etc Smntdir mv mntdir hosts mntdir hosts bak N cp etc hosts mntdir hosts umount mntdir N done V rmdir mntdir Substitute the name of each filer in the for filer in list in place of filer1 filer2 and so on Using DNS The filer includes DNS client capabilities to query DNS servers for host name to IP address and IP address to host name translation services With DNS enabled you no longer have to update the filer s etc hosts file in the root volume every time you add a new host to the network If you use the default search order or put files before DNS in the etc nsswitch conf file you still have to update the etc hosts file if one of its entries changes before the filer tries to resolve host names NOTE To prevent naming inconsistencies Dell recommends that when you enable DNS you use only the default etc hosts file in the root volume Enabling DNS during setup At setup if you enter y in response to the following prompt setup prompts you for a DNS domain name as follows Do you want to run DNS resolver n y Please enter DNS domain name After you enter a DNS domain name setup prompts you for the IP addresses for up to three DNS name servers Based on the IP addresses you enter setup generates the etc resolv conf file in the root volume Entries in etc resolv conf file consist of the
56. 553 up indications 6 broken indications 0 indication up at 28Jan1999 23 57 28 consecutive 6 transitions 0 e3b state up since 28Jan1999 23 57 24 00 00 05 mediatype 100tx fd flags enabled address set 1 input packets 34 input bytes 2915 output packets 5 output bytes 210 Network Administration 4 27 up indications 4 broken indications 0 indication up at 28Jan1999 23 57 28 consecutive 4 transitions 0 Displaying Trunk Statistics Description Use this procedure to display statistics for a specified trunk over a specified period of time After you complete this procedure you get information that for example is use ful in troubleshooting trunk problems You can use this procedure any time Step To display statistics enter the following command vif stat trunk interval where trunk is the name of the trunk If you don t specify a trunk the status of all trunks is displayed interval is the interval in sec onds The default is one second Sample Output This is sample output for the scat option vif stat vif0 Virtual interface trunk vif0 e3a e3b In Out In Out 8637076 47801540 158 159 1617 9588 0 0 1009 5928 0 0 1269 7506 0 0 1293 7632 0 0 920 5388 0 0 1098 6462 0 0 2212 13176 0 0 1315 7776 0 0 4 28 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Destroying a Trunk Description Use this procedure to destroy or delete a trunk You destroy a tr
57. 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide A Although you can convert a mirror into a regular volume you cannot set the snapmirrored option to on to convert a regular volume into a mirror To start using a volume as a mirror follow the instructions in Chapter 16 Data Replication Using SnapMirror to mirror data to the volume CAUTION After you convert a mirror into a regular volume the filer stops using it for data replication If you want to use the volume as a mirror again you must take the volume off line and follow the instructions in Chapter 16 Data Replication Using SnapMirror to restart the process of replicating data into the volume Making a Volume Inactive To remove a volume from active use upon next reboot enter vol offline volume Reactivating an Off line Volume To reactivate an off line volume enter vol online volume Adding a Foreign Volume To add a foreign volume that is a volume that was previously installed on another filer you move the disks that contain the volume from the old filer to the destination filer To add a foreign volume perform the following steps 1 Follow the instructions in the hardware guide to remove the disks from the old filer 2 Turn off the destination filer and install the disks in the destination filer s Power Vault 700N storage system 3 Turn on and boot the destination filer Results When the destination filer boots it places the fore
58. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Network Appliance reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time and without notice Network Appliance assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Network Appliance The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license under any patent rights trademark rights or any other intellectual property rights of Network Appliance The product described in this manual may be protected by one or more U S patents foreign patents or pending applications RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7103 October 1988 and FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 Trademarks used in this text Dell the DELL logo and PowerVault are trademarks of D
59. Changing a Filer s Description From Server Manager 7 3 Viewing a Filer s Description From the Filer Command Line 7 3 Changing a Filer s Description From the Filer Command Line 7 3 Adding GIES Users tothe Filen ss xus ERRARE GS ee 7 3 When You Add GIES USerss c iore ree aie ere Pe be des 7 3 When Authenticating With a Domain Controller o o o o o o 7 4 What is the etc usermap cfg file o oooo ooooooooooooo o 7 4 Format of the etc usermap cfg file ooo ooo oooo ooooo 7 4 FORMAT variables s iron s e e te ee 7 4 The following symbol conventions are in effect o o o o 7 5 NamMe TEQUIFEMENTS a aas dam ret debe o eque t mes den date alae ud 7 6 Defaultifile Contents s 5 cortes baee eno eb E I kl 7 6 When Authenticating With the UNIX Password Database 7 6 Adding Local Groups to the Filer lee 7 6 How to Adda bocal Group o LE a IDE Y 7 6 Adding a Group With the New Local Group Window o o 7 6 Using CIFS Commands With a Remote Shell Program o oo o o o o 7 7 What You Can Use a Remote Shell Program for nnana anaana anaana 7 7 UNIX Example xot eo t RS etd co t SUA 7 8 Automating Access Rights 2 7 8 Required Information in hosts equiv File llli seen 7 8 Enabling Guest and Generic ACCESS eee 7 8 Two Ways to Give Access to Unauthenticated or Occasional Users 7 8
60. Daylight Savings Time On the other hand a time specified in wall clock time takes the prevailing value of Daylight Savings Time in to account Finally there are tzh_ttisgmtent GMT local indicators each stored as a one byte value they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types were specified as GMT or local time SEE ALSO timezone A 158 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide System Services and Daemons This section contains system services and daemons Command ReferenceA 159 autosupport NAME autosupport email notification daemon SYNOPSIS Data ONTAP 5 3 is capable of sending email notification to other designated addressees in certain situations The email contains useful information to help them solve or recognize problems quickly and proactively The system can also be configured to send a short alert notification containing only the reason for the alert to a separate list of recipients This email is sent only for critical events that might require some corrective action and can be useful for Administrators with alphanumeric pagers that can accept short email messages DESCRIPTION The autosupport mechanism contacts a server system that is listening on the SMTP port 25 to send email A list of up to 5 mailhosts can be specified and they will be tried in order to send mail out It sends mail to up to 5 recipient email addresses The information
61. Files and directories have UNIX permissions mixed Both NTFS and UNIX security are allowed a file or directory can have either Windows NT permissions or UNIX permissions qtree Security Styles in Detail Table 10 3 describes the security styles in detail and the effects of changing to each style gtree Administration 10 3 Table 10 3 qtree Security Styles in Detail Security Description Effect of changing to style the style NTFS User access is determined as follows Windows NT per missions determine CIFS requests Windows NT permissions file access for a file determine user access if Windows NT that had them if the permissions have been set on a file change is from a NFS requests Windows NT permissions mixed qtree Other and a mapped CIFS identity determine wise UNIX style access UNIX groups are not used in the permission bits mapping from a UNIX identity to a CIFS determine file identity access for files cre ated before the NOTE You cannot change permissions in change an NTFS qtree from a UNIX client UNIX User access depends on the protocol as The filer disregards follows any Windows NT permissions estab CIFS requests Windows users are lished previously mapped to a UNIX UID and UNIX permis sions determine access In a UNIX qtree a user cannot set Win dows NT permissions A Windows user can change UNIX permissions from Win dows using SecureShare Access as described in Sending a Message to All
62. For example options dns domainname company com options dns enable on 3 Reboot the filer for these changes to take effect If the above options com mands are also entered from the console the reboot can be avoided Enabling DNS with the setup command At setup time one can choose to enable DNS when prompted to do so setup then queries for the Internet addresses of up to three DNS nameservers SEE ALSO setup rc resolv conf A 164 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NIS NAME NIS NIS client service DESCRIPTION The NIS client service provides information about hosts user passwords user groups and netgroups on a network In NIS terminology each of the above is referred to as the map and the specific information being looked up is called the key For example the hosts map is like the etc hosts file it provides a transla tion from host names to IP addresses The NIS service typically has two parts a client component which requests information and a name server which provides it Data ONTAP 5 3 supports only the NIS client When the filer needs to resolve a key in a given map it looks at the etc nsswitch conf see nsswitch conf file to figure out the order in which the various databases should be consulted For example in case of the hosts map the lookup order may be file nis dns This means that the filer will first consult the etc hosts file If the host name i
63. NFS Administration 6 11 Example 2 read write access To export vol vol0 home for read and write access to all addresses of the form 123 45 x y with a 16 bit netmask 255 255 0 0 place the following entry in the etc exports file vol vol0 home rw 123 45 0 0 16 Example 3 equivalent methods for exporting The following entries in the etc exports file are equivalent They export vol vol0 home to a client named host1 the specified subnet and a client named host2 vol vol0 home rw host1 123 45 67 8 24 host2 vol vol0 home rw host1 123 45 67 24 host2 Configuring a Filer for WebNFS About Configuring a Filer for WebNFS The Filer Can Respond to NFS Requests From Browsers The filer can use NFS rather than HTTP to respond to file transfer requests made through Web browsers that support the WebNFS protocol The filer does not need a license for the HTTP protocol to respond to WebNFS requests however the filer must be licensed for the NFS protocol Web Browser Requirements To access files through the WebNFS protocol users type URLs that start with nfs Web browsers must be capable of sending requests using the WebNFS protocol Advantages of WebNFS With WebNFS the filer can transfer files much faster than with HTTP because the WebNFS protocol can transfer several files including graphics files with only one TCP connection The HTTP protocol in version 1 1 requires a separate connection for each file tha
64. PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Trunking Virtual Interfaces You Can Trunk Virtual Interfaces You create a trunk of virtual interfaces to eliminate a switch as a single point of failure A trunk of virtual interfaces is known as a second level virtual interface NOTE With second level interfaces if a switch fails and there is a failover to another switch it might take a few minutes for the spanning tree relay to be reconfigured Second Level Interface Configurations You can use second level virtual interfaces on a single filer Second Level Virtual Interfaces on a Single Filer Why Use Second Level Virtual Interfaces on a Single Filer You use second level virtual interfaces on a single filer to maintain service even if a Switch fails Example of a Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer A subnetwork has two switches that are capable of trunking over multiple port con nections The filer has a two link multiple mode trunk to one switch and a two link multiple mode trunk to the second switch You can create a second level trunking sin gle mode that contains both of the multiple mode trunks When the second level trunk is configured using the ifconfig 1 command only one of the two multiple mode trunks is brought up as the active link If all the underlying interfaces in the active trunk fail the second level trunk activates the link corresponding to the other trunk Ne
65. Rr trabe ee Dn 9 1 Simplitying Tape Backup sam inate tee eps acre te eget Bak ets 9 1 Snapshots Use Little Disk Space 0 2 0 00 lesse 9 1 Creating Snapshots for Your Needs re coitar netaa nan ea F e ant 9 1 Snapshots Maintain Original File PermissiOnS oo o oooo ooo oo 9 2 How Snapshots Volks Lex ep e 9 2 EXAMP Ecne aiaia ste tb eese ele soror eo lor wale tu b tete 9 2 Diagram ota Snapshot coss d Rue REPE de Bie ESTE 9 2 Snapshot Commands and Options 0 2 0 000002 eee 9 4 Snapshot Commands o 9 4 Snapshot Optiors s c e Pere RN IE S LE a 9 4 Automatic Snapshot Creation essei skas aea ag eee 9 5 Types of Automatic Snapshots llis 9 5 Example 1 of snap sched Command 9 6 xxviii Example 2 of snap sched Command 00 00000 cece eee 9 6 Snapshots Created by This Schedule ooo oooooooooooo 9 6 Resulta eer ttt fle Ed ROME NOE di tA edet al de eS 9 7 User Defined Automatic SnapshotS oooooooooooooo eee 9 7 EXGMPIG c fui sti eos ouest a S Res hate eta a ey ste ecd 9 8 Understanding Snapshot Disk Consumption 0 00 00 eee eee 9 8 About Snapshot Disk Consumption 00 0000 aana aaeeea 9 8 Disk Consumption by Multiple Identical SnapshotS o o o o 9 8 Using the df Command to Display Snapshot Use 0 9 8 Sample df command output 2 0 000000 eee 9 8 How the Snapshot Reserve Works 0 000 000 cee ee eee 9 9 Snapsh
66. Steps To set a SACL on a file complete these steps 1 ZU ight click the file you want to monitor esult The Properties tab for that file appears ick the Security tab esult The Security properties window appears ick the Auditing button esult A blank File Auditing window appears for the file you specified ick the Add button esult The Add Users and Groups window appears R C R C R C R C ick the arrow next to the List Names From text box to choose a domain that contains names that you want to add Result A list of names in the selected domain appears in the Names list box To add a name type one or more user names in the Add Names list box or select one or more names and click Add Specify one or more names in one of these ways e Click one or more names in the Names list box e Type valid user or group names in the Add Names list box Click Add in the window where you selected the names Result The names are added to the Add Names field of the Add Users and Groups window If you want display the full name of a user associated with an account name by clicking Show Full Name Click OK Result The names appear in the Name field of the File Auditing window and the Events to Audit check boxes are enabled NOTE Execute Delete Change Permissions and Take Ownership events are not currently supported CIFS Administration 7 31 Viewing Events in a Security Log Description
67. The following sections explain how to determine the amount of disk space used by snapshots Disk Consumption by Multiple Identical Snapshots Suppose a snapshot contains a 1 MB file that hasn t changed since the filer created the snapshot If that file is removed from the active file system the snapshot then consumes 1 MB of disk space The same version of that 1 MB file might be referenced by several snapshots hourly 0 hourly 1 and hourly 2 If these snapshots all contain the 1 MB file that hasn t changed since the filer created those snapshots only 1 MB of disk space is consumed by the snapshots even though all three snapshots contain the file Using the df Command to Display Snapshot Use To provide information about snapshot disk utilization the d command on the filer treats snapshots as a partition different from the active file system Sample df command output Following is a partial sample d command output df Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 2000000 1000000 65 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 500000 500000 50 9 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NOTE The numbers in this example were rounded off to make the example easier to understand Also to make the output easier to read the Mounted on column is not included in the sample af output in the following sections In this example the vol0 volume contains 4 GB of disk space It has 1 GB or 2
68. To display the filer s current routing table use the netstat r command For example netstat r Routing tables Internet Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use Interface default nwo UG 1 138 e0 298 295 227 link 1 UC 0 0 e0 298 295 227 1 link41 UHL 1 24 e0 nwo 8 0 20 79 9 79 UHL 1 0 e0 298 295 227 255 link41 UHL 1 3696 e0 If you must enter explicit information into the filer s routing table use the route com mand See the route 1 man page about how to add or modify information in the routing table If the filer cannot find an explicit route in the routing table for a particular destination it uses the default route This means that the filer sends the traffic to the default router which is specified in the etc dgateways file in the root volume Specifying Default Routers One default router is specified during setup You can however add potential default routers at any time to the etc dgateways file in the root volume For each added router you should also specify the metric which is a number indicating the route pref erence for the router The highest preference is 1 which is also the default preference for the router specified during setup The lowest preference is 15 For information about the format of the etc dgateways file refer to The etc dgateways File on page 13 Using the routed Daemon to Manage Multiple Routers To help manage multiple routers and to enable you to create redundant routing schemes
69. You can only list one database file name per line in thenv ail rename file but you can list as many files as you want Steps To create the nv ail rename file complete the following steps 1 Use an editor to create or modify thenv ail rename file in the filer s etc directory Network Administration 4 31 2 List the path name and file name one file per line within thenvfail rename file for example vol voll home dbs oracle WG73 dbf 3 Save the file 4 32 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 5 File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users About This Chapter About File Sharing This chapter describes how the filer works with NFS and CIFS clients simultaneously Because these clients interact with a file server differently you need to understand how the read and write operations performed by one client affect the operations per formed by the other client File Locking Interactions About This Section This section describes in general what happens when a client program using one pro tocol tries to read or write a file that is currently used by a client program using a different protocol in an environment consisting of CIFS and NFS users For details about locking in a particular protocol consult the documentation for that protocol Types of Clients There are CIFS clients and NFS clients Types of Locks NFS locks are advisory while CIFS locks a
70. You follow this procedure when you want to specify the name of a file to which the system writes access logging information You can do this at any time After you complete this procedure if access logging is enabled the system writes access logging information to the file you specified Prerequisites You must have the path name of the file to use This file must be in an existing writ able directory Step To specify the active log center the following command at the command line options cifs access logging filename path name path name is the path name in UNIX format of the file to which you want the system to write access logging information Setting a System ACL on a File Description Use this procedure to set a system ACL SACL on a file You must complete this pro cedure to monitor access activity on a file You complete this procedure when you have decided to monitor access to a file by specified users or groups The procedure is the standard Windows NT procedure for setting a SACL on a file After you com plete this procedure if access logging is enabled the filer logs accesses to the file by the users or groups you specified Prerequisites You must have the following items to complete the procedure The name of the file you want to monitor The name of the users or groups whose access to the file you want to monitor 7 30 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide
71. You have not read any tapes yet Unless you know which volume your file s are on you should start with the last volume and work towards the first Specify next volume 2 Mount tape volume 2 Enter none if there are no more tapes otherwise enter tape name default rst0a rstla You have read volumes 2 Specify next volume 1 Mount tape volume 1 Enter none if there are no more tapes otherwise enter tape name default rstla rstOa After prompting for the tape devices the filer also displays the following question set owner mode for yn y To keep the original owner and permission modes for the restored files and directo ries enter y Example of Listing Files The following example lists the names of all files backed up to rst 0a restore tf rst0a The following example lists the names of all files in the vol vol0 home directory on rstOa after you backed up the vol vol0 volume restore tf rst0a home Restarting the restore Command Description Restart the restore command if data recovery is interrupted for reasons such as a power outage or a Ctrl C inadvertently entered by someone on the filer console When you restart the restore command the filer restarts data recovery from the 13 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide last tape file that was successfully used for restoring data You do not have to start the command from the beginning of the
72. You must have the names and IP addresses of those you want to add to the WAFL credential cache Cautions If you add more entries than the maximum number of entries allowed the older entries are deleted Step To add an entry to the WAFL credential cache enter the following command WCC a u uname i ipaddress uname is the UNIX name of a user ipaddress is the IP address of the host that the user is on 5 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Deleting Entries From the WAFL Credential Cache Description This procedure deletes entries from the WAFL credential cache You do this to force the lookup of UIDs the next time they are used but you don t want to wait until the entries time out automatically Prerequisites You must have the name and optionally the IP address of the person or group you want to remove from the WAFL credential cache Caution If the Windows NT name is the name of a group this procedure removes all mem bers of that group from the WAFL credential cache Step To remove an entry from the WAFL credential cache enter the following command wcc x name name can be one of the following specifications e s followed by a Windows user name or group name e ufollowed by a UNIX name You can further narrow the specification of a user by adding i followed by the IP address of the host that the user is on Displaying WAFL Credential Cache Statis
73. a A RE UE FAS 8 5 About Virtual Hosting an rt is ates a A AGNES 8 5 To Set Up and Enable Virtual HOStINQ oooooooooooooooo ooo 8 5 Directing HTTP Requests oooooococcoooo eee 8 6 Mapping Virtual Host Addresses 0 000 000 cece eee 8 6 Specifying MIME Content Type Values 0 0 00 0 0000 ees 8 7 About MIME Content Type Values 0 00 0000 cee eee 8 7 Modifying MIME Content Type Mappings 000000000 8 7 Translatingiu Risin aaa anri ar aceite of EP Eod p ert ue ir Mex ruat cda secs 8 8 How the Filer Responds to URLS or oce es 8 8 Translation Rules Supported by the Filer n naana naana 8 8 The Map Rules s to ee A ie hn ed a ad 8 8 The Redirect Rule sac eae race ire bebo bez Melek a plex n wed 8 9 WE Pass Rule RERBA ERRERIqeSUEYA IONS n eR ipe 8 9 The Fall Rule sese ts EL br Eneas 8 9 How the Filer Processes Rules ooooocococcoooco eee eee eee 8 9 Displaying HTTP Connection Information 0 0000000 cee eee 8 10 Information in the etc log httpd log File 0 0 00 220002 8 10 Displaying ETT EPSStatIstles cs enne e AA ede ERROR s 8 11 litipstat Statistic LI vpes GRA me De A det ad 8 11 SYNTAX ota skim ete ve xe ede x ees cos tel dor ac eR due e dul 8 11 Chapter 9 Snapshots 15 eoe x ove SANS RIA cr el Understarndirig Shapshots e cedere De o c est oco eee xd 9 1 Whatlsa Snapshot kes eis sk iasi metie AR RA RS RA EAE eho EEA 9 1 ACCESSING Snapshots 1 5 d e
74. about the computer in the filer s etc hosts file or in the DNS database Standard output provided that you enter the dump command through rsh Because the console is not a standard output device you cannot write to stan dard output if you enter the dump command on the console Incremental Backups You can specify the level of backup in a dump command dump level which ranges from level O to level 9 A level O backup is a full backup It writes all data in the dump path to the backup media Backups at dump level ranging from level 1 to level 9 are incremental backups In an incremental backup only files changed since the previous level are written to the backup media Where to Enter the Dump Command You can enter the dump command through the console or through rsh Benefits of Entering the dump Command Through rsh Entering the dump command through rsh gives you these benefits When the dump command is in progress you can still use the console to man age the filer If the dump command entered on the console is backing up a large number of files you cannot use the console for a long time e You can start multiple dump commands through rsh e Itisless likely to inadvertently terminate the dump command If you enter a dump command on the console it could be terminated by a Ctrl C entered on a host connected to the filer using telnet e You can automate filer backups through shell scripts e You can write data to standard
75. access data on the filer CIFS Common Internet File System used by Windows clients e HTTP HyperText Transmission Protocol used by the World Wide Web e NFS Network File System used by UNIX systems Files written using one protocol are accessible to clients of any protocol provided that filer licenses and permissions allow it For example an NFS cli ent can access a file created by a CIFS client and a CIFS client can access a file created by an NFS client The filer protects disk data in the following ways e Network Transaction Logging the filer records network transactions in case of fail ures and reconstructs transactions on recovery e Disk Redundancy the filer reconstructs data disks in case of disk failure Mail notifications about filer problems is automati cally sent to the customerdefined administrator accounts How You Administer a Filer You administer the filer usi following methods of admi Command execution Command execution Configuration file editi ng the Data ONTAP 5 3 operating system You can use the nistering a filer hrough the filer s command line hrough Microsoft Windows NT9 operating system ng Command execution hrough FilerView 1 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Command Execution Through the Filer s Command Line You use the filer s command line to execute all Data ONTAP 5 3 ad
76. as follows Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 3000000 0 100 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 500000 500000 50 If you remove 100 MB of files the disk space used by these files is no longer part of the active file system so the space is reassigned to the snapshots instead If you enter the d command the output is as follows Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 2900000 100000 97 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 600000 400000 60 The filer reassigns 100 MB of space from the active file system to the snapshot reserve Because there was reserve space for snapshots removing files from the active file system freed space for new files Snapshots 9 9 Administering Snapshot Disk Space Even with the snapshot reserve the job of administering snapshot disk space con sumption is important There is no way to prevent snapshots from consuming disk space greater than the amount reserved for them Consider what would happen in the example if all files in the active file system were deleted Before the deletion the af output was as follows Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 3000000 0 100 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 500000 500000 50 After removing all the data in the file system the df command generates the follow ing output Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 2500000 500000 83 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 3500000 0 350 Explanation The entire 3 GB i
77. boot code for filers with Alpha processors Command ReferenceA 119 crash NAME crash directory of system core files SYNOPSIS etc crash DESCRIPTION If a filer crashes it creates a core file in the crash directory The core files are very useful for finding and fixing bugs in Data ONTAP 5 3 so notify Dell technical support of any core files on your filer See savecore for more details about how core files are saved FILES etc crash core saved core files etc crash core small compact core file etc crash bounds suffix for next core file etc crash minfree free KB in FS to maintain after savecore SEE ALSO savecore A 120 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide dgateways NAME dgateways default gateways list SYNOPSIS etc dgateways DESCRIPTION The etc dgateways file is used by the routed command to construct a set of potential default gateways The file is comprised of a series of lines each in the following format gateway metric gateway is the name or address of a gateway to be used as a potential default gateway metric is a metric indicating the preference weighting of the gateway 1 is the value to use for highest preference 15 for the least If no value is specified met ric will default to the value 1 There can be a maximum of 128 valid entries in the etc dgateways file addi tional ones will be ignored with an error message being displayed Dupli
78. can access a filer through any of the follow ing tools e Filer console telnet rsh Creating Administrative Users Description The useradmin command enables you to increase filer security by creating multiple administrative users rather than sharing the root name and password among multiple administrators Prerequisites You must be logged in as root or as an existing administrative user to use the command Restrictions The user name is sensitive It cannot contain any of the 15 characters shown in Table 2 4 The password should contain at least six characters including at least two alpha char acters and one numeric or special character Filer Administration Basics 2 7 Table 2 4 Character Restrictions for User Name Character Character asterisk less than sign back slash pipe colon plus sign comma question mark equal sign right bracket forward slash semicolon gt greater than sign space left bracket Steps to Create a New Administrative User Using a Console or Telnet To create a new administrative user using the filer console or a telnet session per form the following steps 1 Enter the following command useradmin useradd user name user name is the new administrative user login name 2 Enter a password for the new user when prompted Step to Create a New Administrative User Using rsh To create a new administrative user u
79. cards tape drive adapters and PowerVault 700N storage system adapters Serial ports The two serial ports are as follows The console port connects to the filer a serial terminal that you can use as a console e The diagnostics port is not used About PowerVault 700N Storage Systems PowerVault 700N Storage Systems Contain Disks A PowerVault 700N storage system contains the disks that store the data that the filer serves PowerVault 700N Storage System Environmental Information PowerVault 700N storage systems collect information about the presence of disks fan status power supply status and temperature PowerVault 700N storage systems send messages to the console if parameters exceed permissible operating conditions About Data ONTAP 5 3 Data ONTAP 5 3 Overview You administer the filer using Data ONTAP 5 3 commands Data ONTAP 5 3 manages data in the following three ways e Data storage management e Data organization management Data access management Introducing Dell Filers 1 5 Data Storage Management Data ONTAP 5 3 stores data on disks in PowerVault 700N storage systems Disks are organized into RAID groups and RAID groups are organized into volumes These items are explained in Table 1 5 along with what aspects of them you can administer Table 1 5 Data Storage Management Concepts Data Storage Concept Explanation Storage Administrative Actions RAID Redun dant Array of In
80. change the description and user limit with Server Manager perform the following steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears 4 Choose Computer Shared Directories Result The Shared Directories window appears 5 Double click a share name Result The Share Properties window appears 6 Type a new description of the share in the Comments field if you want 7 If you do not want to limit the number of users that can connect to the share at the same time select Maximum Allowed under User Limit 8 Tolimit the number of users that can connect to the share at the same time click the arrows next to Users until the desired number appears 9 Click Permissions to change share level permissions 10 Click OK Result The window disappears and the new values go into effect Creating a Share With the cifs shares Command Following is the syntax for the cifs shares command for creating a share cifs shares add sharename path comment description forcegroup groupname maxusers n Table 7 4 describes the parameters CIFS Administration 7 13 Table 7 4 Creating a Share With cifs shares Command
81. changed Step To return to preserving the case of CIFS file names enter the following command options cifs save case on Directory Conversion Time Directory Conversion Can Take a Considerable Amount of Time Although the conversion process to Unicode directory format is automatic the initial conversion of a directory can take a considerable amount time especially if the direc tory contains a large number of files It is important to take these conversion times into consideration when deciding when to convert the directories While a directory is being converted the filer might not be able to perform any other file system or network operations until the conversion is complete When There Is no Need to Convert If there are portions of the directory tree that will never have CIFS access there is no need to convert them However any future CIFS access to an unconverted directory immediately triggers its conversion File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Usersb 15 How to Speed Up Directory Conversion If you have a directory that contains more than 50 000 files before triggering a con version you can use an NFS client to distribute files among a greater number of subdirectories This speeds up the conversion process and avoids a possible crash Speeding Up Conversion Time by Renaming NFS Directories Description Use this procedure to convert a directory to Unicode format if you have access to a Windows NT client connected
82. ck kk Stopping and Restarting CIFS Sessions Ways to Stop CIFS Sessions If you want to stop CIFS sessions for all clients or for a single client do one of the following From Windows NT use Server Manager as described in Disconnecting Users With Server Manager e From the filer command line use the cifs shares command to display share infor mation as described in Using the cifs Terminate Command Disconnecting Users With Server Manager To stop CIFS sessions with Server Manager follow these steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears 4 Inthe Server Manager window double click the name of a filer Result The Properties window for the filer appears 5 Click Users Result The User Sessions window appears CIFS Administration 7 37 6 To disconnect one or more users do one of the following e To disconnect a single user or selected users select them then click Disconnect To disconnect all users click Disconnect All Result The selected users are disconnected NOTE If at least one of the selected users has open resources an alert box X appears for you t
83. command deletes the share created by the cifs shares add command described in Creating a Share with the cifs Shares Command cifs shares delete library Creating a Home Share for Each User When to Create a Home Directory You can create a share that contains home directories of registered CIFS users For example if there are users called user and user2 the share contains directories for user1 and user2 When user1 connects to the filer and asks for its list of shares the display shows a share called user1 but not user2 or any other individual user home directories To prevent access by the wrong user set Windows permissions A NOTE If Domain user and Domain2 user are the same they do not have different and UNIX permissions at the root of the user s home directory Accessing a Home Directory Users access their home directories in the same way as any other share That is users can open the share with Network Neighborhood by mapping a drive or by using a UNC name The UNC name is filer username 7 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Share Name Length Limitations Because share names are truncated to 12 characters the home directory name might show a truncated version of the user s account name For example consider the 13 letter name administrator From the filer point of view the home directory for administrator has a name that exactly matches the account name
84. commands performing Windows filer tasks 1 3 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide
85. compression fileno O blockno 0 resid 0 To skip over a previously created dump file to append a dump onto a no rewind tape device use the fsf forward space file command filer mt f nrstOa fsf 1 SEE ALSO sysconfig tape A 54 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide netstat NAME netstat show network status SYNOPSIS netstat an netstat mnrs netstat i I interface dn netstat w interval i I interface dn netstat p protocol DESCRIPTION The netstat command symbolically displays the contents of various network related data structures There are a number of output formats depending on the options for the information presented The first form of the command displays a list of active sockets for each protocol The second form presents the contents of one of the other network data struc tures according to the option selected The third form will display cumulative statistics for all interfaces or with an inter face specified using the 4 option cumulative statistics for that interface It will also display the sum of the cumulative statistics for all configured network interfaces The fourth form continuously displays information regarding packet traffic on the interface that was configured first or with an interface specified using the 1 option packet traffic for that interface It will also display the sum of the cumula tive traffic
86. date and time is interpreted as follows cc First 2 digits of the year e g 19 for 1999 yy Next 2 digits of year e g 99 for 1999 mm Numeric month A number from 01 to 12 dd Day a number from 01 to 31 hh Hour a number from 00 to 23 mm Minutes a number from 00 to 59 SS Seconds a number from 00 to 59 If the first 2 digits of the year are omitted they default to 19 if all 4 digits of the year are omitted they default to the current year If the month or day are omitted they default to the current month and day respectively If the seconds are omit ted they default to O Time changes for Daylight Saving and Standard time and for leap seconds and years are handled automatically OPTIONS u Display or set the date in GMT universal time instead of local time EXAMPLES To set the current time to 21 00 date 2100 To set the current time to 21 00 and the current day to the 6th of the current month date 062100 To set the current time to 21 00 and the current day to December 6th of the cur rent year date 12062100 Command Reference A 21 date To set the current time to 21 00 and the current day to December 6th 1999 date 9912062100 To set the current time to 21 00 and the current day to December 6th 2002 date 200212062100 SEE ALSO rdate timezone A 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide df NAME df display free disk space SYNOPSI
87. disk Procedure to Halt the Filer To halt the filer enter the following command halt The filer displays the following prompt ok 2 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Procedure to Boot the Filer To boot the filer perform the following steps 1 Ensure that the ok prompt is displayed on the console 2 Enter the following command boot Procedure to Reboot the Filer You can halt and reboot the filer in a single operation by entering the following command reboot Where the Filer Boots From When the filer boots it uses the boot diskette in its diskette drive if there is one Otherwise the filer boots from its hard disk Use the Halt Command to Avoid Data Loss You should always execute the halt command before turning the filer Off for the fol lowing reasons e The halt command flushes all data from NVRAM to disk eliminating a potential point of failure e The halt command avoids potential data loss on CIFS clients e IfaCIFS client is disconnected from the filer the users applications are termi nated and changes made to open files since the last save are lost CAUTION Never interrupt CIFS service by halting the filer without giv ing advance warning to CIFS users Before turning the filer Off use the halt orcifs terminate command to send a warning message to CIFS users This method gives users an opportunity to save files and exit applica
88. disk space or the number of files To impose these restrictions on a atree edit the etc quotas file Refer to the quo tas man page for more information about the file format To make the changes to the etc quotas file go into effect use the quota command Refer to the quota man page for more information about the quota command If you enter the qtree create command without arguments the command dis plays all existing qtrees and their attributes A 72 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide qtree To delete a qtree remove it from a client as you would any directory You can cre ate up to 254 qtrees on a filer The qtree security command changes the security style for files and directories Security style means the method the filer uses to determine whether a user has access to a file If name is the path name to a qtree the security style applies to the files and directories in the specified gtree The path name to a qtree does not need to end with a slash If name is a path name to a volume the security style applies to those directories and files in qtree 0 Any new atree you create inherits the security style from qtree O by default The path name to a volume must end with a slash The security style can be one of the following values UNIX The user s UID and GID and the UNIX style permission bits of the file or directory determine user access The filer uses the same method for de
89. displays the status of all volume copy operations in progress In the command output the operations are differentiated from one another with unique volume copy operation numbers ranging from 0 to 3 For more information about volume copy operation numbers see Results of the vol copy start Command Where to Enter the vol copy status Command If you start a volume copy operation from the filer s console you can enter the vol copy status command only through rsh when the copy operation is in progress This is because you do not have access to the filer prompt on the console when the filer is copying the volume If data is being copied between two filers you can enter this command through an rsh connection to either filer The operation numbers displayed on the source filer and the destination filer are different because the reading and the writing are consid ered two different operations Example of a vol copy status Command The following example illustrates a vol copy start command that copies the vol0 volume to the vol volume on the same filer vol copy start S vol0 voll Copy Volume vol0 on machine 127 0 0 1 to Volume voll Reading the dump stream VOLCOPY Starting on volume 1 This dump contains 257 blocks 10 04 pm volcopy restore 1 begun 10 04 pm volcopy restore 1 5 done Estimate 3 minutes remaining 10 04 pm volcopy restore 1 95 done Estimate 1 minutes remaining Before the filer prompt is displaye
90. dump command is in progress the filer does not allow MM you to delete the snapshot for backup n file If you are backing up data l from an hourly daily or weekly snapshot make sure that the snapshot scheduler does not delete the snapshot before the dump command is finished Metadata Being Backed Up In addition to backing up data within files the dump command backs up these types of metadata e UNIX group ID owner ID and file permissions UNIX access time and modify time 12 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide e File type including UNIX symbolic links and hard links e File size e DOS name attributes and create time e Windows NT ACLs NOTE The CIFS attributes DOS name attributes and create time and Windows NT ACLs can be restored only with the filer s restore command You cannot use the Solaris ufsrestore command to restore these attributes although the ufsrestore command can restore the data in CIFS created files How to Exclude Certain Types of Data From the Backup Options in the dump command enable you to exclude certain types of data from the backup Windows NT ACLs You can choose not to back up Windows NT ACLs if the data is used only by NFS clients Exclude List You can choose to exclude files and directories from a backup if you do not need those files and directories again For example you can exclude temporary files gener ated by some applicati
91. eer dot bine Rice ans 13 1 XXXIII No Disk Slots Are Available for Expansion 000 13 1 The Entire Filer ls Damaged and Unusable o oo 13 1 When You Do Not Recover Data From Tape 2 22000005 13 2 Different Methods for Recovering Data o oooooooooooo oo 13 2 What Data Cannot Be Recovered 020000 eee 13 2 UNIX Flle Permissions and Windows NT ACLs auaa aannaaien 13 2 Scope ot This Chapter uti src Ge ae a tenes aks Seek ia E iE 13 2 Thexrestore Command Syntax a s resid the de sob ete d ist 13 2 The restore Command Syntax llis 13 2 Rules for Using the restore Command 0 00 0002 e eee ee 13 3 The restore Command Function Keys 00 0000 c eee eee 13 3 The restore Command options 0 00000 ee eee 13 3 Using the restore Command s rece cet e ede ede Rem a 13 4 DESCRIPTIONS of ee e te o it eet a n ES ei ot ee Ra 13 4 RESTICUONS tarder eae pal Gee be he da Be eee tnis 13 4 The i Function Key of the Solaris Ufsrestore Command 13 5 Incremental Only Restores liliis eese 13 5 Parallel RESTOS 2o n LA Die ee A ek TT 13 5 PrerequisSit Ss 1o d scs Yate Ope tue DER Lc uf ul o DARE ON 13 5 Where to Enter the restore Command liillilll llis 13 5 Steps ie stet a redit tes MR dba bed debel ae de o ete e quedo 13 6 Performing a Full Restore of a Volume Containing qtrees 13 6 DescripHlornm s
92. enable Option Default On Description Enables the SNMP server on the filer The telnet enable Option Default On Description Enables the Telnet server on the filer The telnet hosts Option Default All hosts Description Specifies a list of hosts that can log in to the filer using telnet You can limit telnet access to up to five specified hosts The hosts should be listed in a comma separated list You can disable telnet for all hosts by specifying a hyphen Detailed Options Informatioril 9 19 The vol copy throttle Option Default 10 Description Specifies the default speed of vol copy operations The speed ranges from 10 full speed to 1 one tenth of full speed The wafl convert ucode Option Default Off Description Setting this option to On forces conversion of all directories to Unicode format when accessed from both NFS and CIFS By default conversion to Unicode format occurs as follows Access from CIFS causes conversion of pre 4 0 and 4 0 format directories e Access from NFS causes conversion of 4 0 format directories The wafl create ucode Option Default Off Description Setting this option to On forces Unicode format directories to be created by default both from NFS and CIFS By default all directories are created in pre 4 0 format and the first CIFS access converts a directory to Unicode format The wafl default nt user Option Default None Description Speci
93. etc dgateways file 4 12 etc hosts 4 8 etc netgroup file 6 9 etc nvfail rename 4 29 4 31 etc resolv conf file 4 9 errors in 18 10 configuration files accessing 1 3 configuration problems booting with diskette for 18 10 filer accessibility 18 10 lost passwords 18 11 with etc rc file 18 10 console encoding setting 5 11 console encoding option 5 11 19 18 copying a volume changing the speed of 15 10 how to stop 15 10 possible errors during 15 8 copying a volume continued recommendation for 15 4 requirements for 15 3 copy on write technique 9 1 9 3 cpio copying files with 18 17 creating nvfail rename file 4 31 creating and changing shares 7 12 creating atrees 10 6 creating volumes 3 11 D data access management 1 7 Data ONTAP displaying version 17 1 overview 1 5 data rebuild on the hot spare disk 18 7 data reconstruction speed 3 6 when filer is shut down degraded mode 3 5 database file protection 4 29 enabling disabling nvfail 4 31 default route in routing table 4 12 router 4 12 degraded mode 3 5 meaning of 3 11 reasons for 3 5 timeout period for automatic shutdown 3 5 when a hot spare disk is available 3 5 when a hot spare disk is not available 3 5 deprecated MIB objects 4 3 destroying a volume 3 14 df command 9 8 11 11 18 18 diagnostic messages 18 1 Index 3 directories conversion time 5 15 created by snapshots 9 16 Unicod
94. etc directory If the backup for the subtree is in multiple tape files restore prompts you for the next tape volume when appropriate See Examples of Restoring From Multi ple Tapes for a sample screen display when more than one tape contains the dump volume 13 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 7 After the restore is finished remove the tape from the drive Install another tape that contains the next lowest level of incremental dump Example If you have dump tapes containing level 1 level 2 and level 3 dumps of vol volO etc load the tape with the level 1 dump in the drive and repeat the restore command Repeat this step until the backup of the highest dump level level 3 in this example is restored 8 From the client remove the restore symboltable file in the directory that you just restored 9 Repeat Steps 4 through 8 for the vol vol0 home subtree Examples of Restoring From Multiple Tapes This section provides examples illustrating how to restore vol volO that was backed up to multiple tapes using the following command dump OfB rst0a rstla 600 vol vol0 Restoring the Volume to a Directory From Multiple Tapes Using Two Tape Drives The following command restores the volume to the vol vol0 myexample directory from two tapes that are in different tape drives restore rfD rst0a vol vol0 myexample When the restore command prompts you for the next tape drive
95. file access detail display 7 28 Windows file access detail displays 7 27 cifs 7 10 7 12 7 19 7 21 7 37 cifs access command 7 22 cifs access delete command 7 23 CIFS guest access 7 8 CIFS guest account 7 8 CIFS login tracing toggling 5 26 cifs restart command 7 40 CIFS sessions starting 7 37 stopping 7 37 cifs sessions command 7 35 cifs shares add command 7 13 cifs shares change command 7 15 cifs shares command 7 11 7 16 cifs shares delete command 7 18 cifs stat command 7 34 cifs terminate command 7 38 cifs access_logging enable option 7 29 7 30 cifs access logging filename option 19 3 cifs access logging filername option 7 30 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Cifs bypass traverse checking option 19 3 Cifs cifs show snapshot option 19 6 o ifs guest account option 19 3 cifs home dir option 7 19 19 4 cifs netbios aliases option 19 5 o ifs oplocks enable option 19 4 o ifs perm check use gid option 19 5 cifs save case option 5 15 o ifs scopeid option 19 5 cifs search domains option 19 6 Oo ifs symlinks cycleguard option 5 4 19 6 Q ifs symlinks enable option 5 3 19 7 clients accessing snapshots from 9 16 NFS statistics in the custom MIB 4 4 collisions 18 13 configuration of volumes 3 7 planning for multiple volumes 3 8 configuration files etc dgateways 4 13
96. file system For example you might want to hot swap a disk into a filer to replace a disk or to add a hot spare disk Understanding Usable Space on Each Disk A disk s usable space can be different from its physical space The information here applies to data parity and hot spare disks Disks from different manufacturers might differ slightly in size even though they belong to the same size category Handling Disk Failures If one block on a data disk fails the filer uses the parity disk in its RAID group to reconstruct the data on that block The block is mapped to a new location on disk If an entire data disk fails the parity disk for that RAID group prevents any data loss and enables the filer to continue running Although the filer can continue to function with a failed disk if it cannot reconstruct that failed disk on a hot spare it automatically shuts down after 24 hours to 3 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide encourage you to replace the failed disk You can change the amount of time from 24 hours to another value using the raid timeout option to the options command Effects of Disk Failure on Filer Operation The effects of a disk failure on filer operation depend on whether the filer has a hot spare disk Without a hot spare disk If the filer is not equipped with a hot spare disk after a disk fails the filer enters a state called degraded mode In this state the
97. filer cgi bin displayfares http filer cgi bin displaydates the filer expands the wildcard character to displayfares and displaydates and redirects the requests to the host named cgi host To the client the results of these requests are the same as the results of the following requests http cgi host cgi bin displayfares http cgi host cgi bin displaydates Displaying HTTP Connection Information Information in the etc log httpd log File You can read the etc log httpd log file if you are interested in the following types of information for each HTTP connection e P address of HTTP client Name of authorized users if the requested page is protected making requests The names are in the etc httpd passwd file If the page is not protected dashes appear instead of a name e Time of connection in dd mm y y hh mm ss format gmt is used Request line from connecting host for example get company html e STATUS code returned by the server as defined in the HTTP 1 0 specifications e TOTAL bytes sent in response by the filer not including the MIME header Following is an example of the etc log httpd log file 192 9 77 2 26 Aug 1996 16 45 50 GET top html 200 1189 192 9 77 2 26 Aug 1996 16 45 50 GET header html 200 531 8 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 192 7 15 6 26 Aug 1996 16 45 51 GET logo gif 200 1763 198 9 200 2 26 Aug
98. filer prompt ler is licensed for NFS by entering the license command If the following message appears nfs not licensed or if a message with protocols other than NFS appears but NFS is absent you must get a license for NFS as described in Getting Technical Assistance X NOTE For information about how to get a license contact Dell technical support Make sure that the fi Make sure that the fi a Boo N Sometimes a client c er can correctly look up the client host name Make sure that NFS service has been turned On using thenfs on command er and the client are using correct IP addresses and names an see the filer but gets a Permission Denied message when requesting a mount If this happens follow these steps Make sure that you defined the file systems correctly in the filer s etc exports file on th on the filer e Oncertain client e root volume and that you ran the export f s command s the mount request does not come from the root user using a privileged port The filer denies such mount requests by default to ensure secure access To grant such mount requests enter the following options command options nfs mount rootonly off To make this cha file on the root v nge permanent add the preceding command to your etc rc olume 18 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Windows Access Problems Kinds of Access Problems Th
99. for RAID data reconstruction When RAID data reconstruction is in progress use the sysstat command to check the system load on the filer If the load is light increase the speed of RAID data recon struction to maximize CPU utilization For more information about the sysstat command refer to the section Displaying Filer Statistics in Chapter 17 Volume Concepts Section Contents This section covers the following topics Understanding volumes e Determining the number of volumes to use Planning a multiple volume configuration e Installing a foreign volume Understanding Volumes Data on the filer is organized in volumes A volume is an independent file system with its own RAID groups The initial configuration for new filers running includes one 2 to 14 disk volume a root file system All remaining disks are spares Volume naming conventions You choose the volume names The names must fol low these naming conventions begin with either a letter or an underscore contain only letters digits and underscores contain no more than 255 characters The root volume Each filer must have a root volume to boot The root volume of a filer configured with either a single volume or multiple volumes is the volume whose etc directory is used by the filer for configuration information 3 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The filer uses two naming conventions to i
100. for efficiency which d does not count as part of the file system Space Using the df Command With qtrees When you enter a df command with a path name on a client the command returns the amount of free space in the file system containing the path name For example if the filer is mounted on the client as 1 filer the d command on the client displays the disk information about the filer file system as follows df t filer engineering jdoe Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on filer 2097151 1646923 450228 79 t filer However if you defined qtrees on the filer the information about available space could be misleading because the actual space available might be less For example if engineering is a qtree with a disk quota of 1 800 MB the space available in the f filer engineering directory is less than that in the d command output shown in the preceding example If you have qtrees on the filer Dell recommends that you mount each gtree sepa rately For example if the filer named filer has two qtrees vol home engineering and vol home marketing mount filer vol home engineering and filer vol home market ing on two mount points for example t filer engineering and t filer marketing Quotas and Maximum Number of File31 11 In this way the filer takes the gtrees into consideration when responding to ad command from a client and returns the amount of free space in each qtree as opposed to the space ava
101. for the engr atree filer qtree oplocks vol vol1 engr disable The following example enables oplocks for the vol1 volume filer qtree oplocks vol vol1 disable The following example displays the security and oplocks attributes for all volumes and qtrees on the filer filer qtree Volume Tree Style Oplocks volO UNIX enabled volO marketing ntfs enabled vol1 UNIX enabled vol1 engr ntfs disabled SEE ALSO options quota quotas A 74 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide quota NAME quota control filer disk quotas SYNOPSIS quota on off resize volume quota report path quota qtree name DESCRIPTION A quota limits the amount of disk space and the number of files that a particular user or group can consume A quota can also restrict the total space and files used in a qtree or the usage of users and groups within a qtree A request that would cause a user or group to exceed an applicable quota fails with a disk quota exceeded error A request that would cause the number of blocks or files in a qtree to exceed the qtree s limit fails with an out of disk space error User and group quotas do not apply to the root user tree quotas however do apply even to root The quota command controls quotas and the etc quotas file describes the quo tas to impose All quotas are established on a pervolume basis For further information on
102. host f you use a tape file size larger than 2 GB you must know the maximum tape file size supported by the system that you plan to use for restoring the data If the maximum tape file size is 2 GB on the system for restoring data that system might not be able to restore data from a tape file greater than 2 GB e The remote host must support the rmt protocol The filer being backed up must have a trusting relationship with the remote host 12 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Recommendations for Performing a Backup About This Section Some recommendations in this section are applicable to all kinds of backups some recommendations depend on your priorities such as your need to minimize backup time or to minimize tape handling General Recommendations Follow the recommendations in this section when you back up data from the filer Avoid Backing Up Too Much Data in a Single Dump Command The reasons are listed below e The dump command cannot be restarted That is if the dump command encoun ters an error you cannot correct the error and proceed from the point where the command fails You must start the command from the beginning e The backup takes a long time to finish This leaves you with a long time period during which changed data cannot be written to tape by an incremental backup Store Incremental Backups for the Same Dump Path on the Same Tape If you want t
103. host the dump command can reload the tape only if that host supports automatic reloading e Standard output which is specified as in the dump command Determining the Amount of Backup Data Description Before you enter the dump command you must determine the amount of backup data so that you can estimate the number of tape files and the number of tapes required for the backup The procedure for estimating the amount of data depends on whether the data is in a qtree Step for Estimating the Amount of Data If You Back Up A qtree To display the number of kilobytes used for the qtree enter the quota report command Data Backup 12 7 Steps for Estimating the Amount of Data if You Back Up Data Not In A qtree The procedure for estimating the amount of backup data depends on whether the filer is mounted on an NFS client or is shared by a CIFS client If the Filer Is Mounted on an NFS Client Follow these steps to determine the amount of backup data from an NFS client 1 Onthe NFS client change directory to the mount point 2 Enter the following command for each directory you want to back up du s pathname Example If the NFS client mounts the filer to filer and you want to back up the etc and home directories enter these commands cd filer du s etc home The command output shows the amount of space allocated for the directories Refer to the documentation for your client system for interpreting the output be
104. image bin usr local http images 8 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The Redirect Rule The redirect rule specifies that if a component of a URL matches the template the request is redirected to the URL defined in the result field The result field for the redirect rule must be specified as a complete URL beginning with http and the host name For example if etc httpd translations contains the following entry redirect cgi bin http cgi host the filer redirects CGI requests to another HTTP server named cgi host This is essen tial for calls to cgi bin because the filer does not execute them The Pass Rule The pass rule specifies that if a component of a URL matches the template the filer accepts the request processes the request as is and disregards other rules For example if etc httpd translations contains the following entry pass image bin the filer processes the request for any URL containing image bin as is even though there is another rule specified as follows map image bin usr local http images If the pass rule includes the result field the filer accepts the request processes the request by using the URL defined in the result field and disregards other rules The Fail Rule The fail rule specifies that if a component of a URL matches the template the filer denies access to that component and disregards other rules For example i
105. in a Volume Other Than the Root Volume 10 6 Modifying the Security Style of a gtree loeis 10 7 When to Change the Security Style of a gtree o o o oooooooo 10 7 How to Change the Security Style of aqtree ooooooooooo 10 7 Example Witha gtrees ua e REIR C Rees DR SER 10 7 Example With a Volume 2 erbe p a er RS ERR Ss dd 10 7 Modifying qtree Oplocks Settings liliis 10 7 When to Change Oplocks Settings llle een 10 7 Changing Oplocks Settings o oooooooooooooo eee 10 8 Example With A Qtree o ooocoococococo ses 10 8 Example With A Vol re 32a rm a tbe eem e ede etl pak ee 10 8 Effect of the cifs oplocks enable Option o ooooooooooooooo oo 10 8 Displaying gtree Infoermations cea dt Rote obe s ee ce RR e 10 8 How to Display qtree Information llle 10 8 The qtree Command Display liiis 10 9 Example qtreeDispl yzc i iu eode ettet walk des eee 10 9 Explanation of Example qtree Display ooooooooooo o o 10 9 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Quotas and Maximum Number of Files 11 1 Restricting or Tracking Disk Usage by Using Disk Quotas 11 1 About DISk QUotas 2 kie Sac hee Ule E teta 11 1 Format of the Quotas File enren urta Ree teme X M AS 11 1 Quota Targ t Fields see eoi td oe PER D EET ER 11 2 Quota Target fora User Quotas ocu Pe ha a ans 11 2 Quota Target for a Group Quota 11 2 Q
106. in the following situation If a default quota applies to the creator of a file an active quota record is created for the owner of the file If a newly added quota target is the user or group that has an active quota record the quota resize command does not ignore the newly added quota target That is if a user or group has written to a file that is under the control of a default quota a newly created entry in the quotas file for this user or group takes effect after a quota resize command After you edit the quotas file if you want to make sure that all entries take effect enter the quota off command followed by the quota on command In this way all quotas listed in the file become active Creating an Active Quota for a Quota Target You can use the quota resize command so that quotas can take effect on targets that have not created any files Because a quota becomes active when a quota target has written a file you can make an entry in the quotas file an active quota by following these steps 1 Create a file 2 Change ownership of the file to the quota target 11 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Because the quota target now has an active quota record you can enter the quota resize command including the volume name to make the quota entry go into effect This procedure takes less time than executing the quota off command fol lowed by the quota on command because only
107. in the New Local Group window 15 16 To remove one or more names from the list select a name or names in the Names list then click Remove Click OK to put the additions into effect Using CIFS Commands With a Remote Shell Program What You Can Use a Remote Shell Program for You can use a remote shell program such as rsh to execute CIFS commands create scripts containing CIFS commands to automate similar access rights tasks CIFS Administration 7 7 UNIX Example For example using rsh on the administration host you can set access rights for a specific user as follows rsh 1 root n filer cifs access home jsmith r x In this example the filer name is filer the user is jsmith and the share is home The user has read execute and browsing rights to the directory on the filer that has been defined as the home share Automating Access Rights Because you can use CIFS commands through a remote shell program you can auto mate the task of defining access rights for multiple CIFS filers with similar user information For example you can create a script containing CIFS commands to enter similar user information for each filer at your site Required Information in hosts equiv File Make sure that the following entries are added to the hosts equiv file in the etc directory host user host root where host is the host you are using and user is your name NOTE Make sure that you include both lines or not all re
108. information for all configured network interfaces The fifth form displays statistics about the protocol specified by protocol OPTIONS a Show the state of all sockets normally sockets used by server pro cesses are not shown d With either interface display option 4 or an interval as described below show the number of dropped packets l interface Show information only about this interface When used in the third form with an interval specified as described below information about the indicated interface is highlighted in a separated column The default interface highlighted is the first interface configured into the system i Show the state of interfaces that have been configured m Show statistics recorded by the memory management routines for the network s private pool of buffers Command Reference A 55 netstat n Show network addresses as numbers netstat normally interprets addresses and attempts to display them symbolically This option may be used with any of the display formats that display network addresses p protocol Show statistics about protocol which is one of tcp udp ip or icmp A null response typically means that there are no interesting numbers to report The program will complain if protocol is unknown or if there is no statistics routine for it S Show per protocol statistics If this option is repeated counters with a value of zero are suppressed r Show the routing tables When
109. instructions about examining database file validity Error Message Example When you enable nvfail and the filer encounters NVRAM errors the message sent to the console and the etc messages file looks like the following All filehandles have been invalidated due to previous NVRAM failure All filesystems must be remounted by the client s If you created an nv ail rename file you receive an additional message Renaming files in etc nvfail rename nvfail rename old file name new file nam 4 30 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Enabling and Disabling Database File Protection With nvfail Description Use the nvfail option with the vol options command to provide database file protection by turning NVRAM error processing On or Off The default setting is Off Step to Enable nvfail To enable the nvfail option enter the following command vol options volume name nvfail on volume name is the name of the volume Step to Disable nvfail To disable the nvfail option enter the following command vol options volume name nvfail off volume name is the name of the volume Using the nvfail rename File for Additional Database Protection Description Use the optional nv ail rename file when you want to rename database files after the filer detects NVRAM errors This enables you to examine the files for consistency before clients can access them Restrictions
110. lock information A client can then work with a file read or write it without regularly reminding the server that it needs access to the file in question This improves perfor mance by reducing network traffic When to Use Oplocks Under some circumstances if a process has an exclusive oplock on a file and a sec ond process attempts to open the file the first process must relinquish the oplock and access to the file The redirector must then invalidate cached data and flush writes and locks resulting in possible loss of data that was to be written Data Loss Possibilities Any application that has write cached data can lose that data under the following set of circumstances e thas an exclusive oplock on the file e It is told to either break that oplock or close the file e During the process of flushing the write cache the network or target system generates an error Error Handling And Write Completion The cache itself does not have any error handling the applications do When the application makes a write to cache the write is always completed If the cache in turn makes a write to the target system over a network it must assume that the write is completed because if it does not the data is lost When to Turn Oplocks Off CIFS oplocks on the filer are On by default You might turn CIFS oplocks Off under either of the following circumstances Youare using a database application whose documentation recommends th
111. most systems are lightly loaded By default disk scrubbing is enabled You might want to disable scrubbing if you have a recurring problem that scrubbing encounters Example For example there might be an unrecoverable error on a disk that you can not fix before the next disk scrub The following commands disable and enable disk scrubbing options raid scrub enable off options raid scrub enable on Commands to start and stop disk scrubbing You can also manually start and stop disk scrubbing regardless of the current value On or Off of the raid scrub enable option Following are the commands for starting and stopping scrubbing manually disk scrub start disk scrub stop Sample messages logged from scrubbing Messages from the disk scrubbing pro cess are sent to the system error logging daemon Following are sample messages that can appear e If the filer finds an inconsistent parity block during scrubbing it prints the follow ing messages Inconsistent parity on volume volume name RAID group n stripe tn Rewriting bad parity block on volume volume name RAID group n stripe dn NOTE An Inconsistent parity error message might indicate file system corruption If you get such an error contact Dell technical support for assistance e If the filer finds a media error on the parity disk it prints the following message Rewriting bad parity block on volume volume name RAID group n stripe tn Disk and File System Ma
112. must be arger than the current value If no argument is specified maxfiles displays the current value of max for all volumes in the system If just the vo name argument is given the current value of max for the specified volume is displayed Because each allowable file consumes disk space and because the value of max can never be reduced increasing max consumes disk space permanently If maxfiles identifies a new size as unreasonably large it will query the user to ver ify that the new value is correct The filer s df command see df can be used to determine how many files have currently been created in the file system SEE ALSO df A 52 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME mt mt magnetic tape positioning and control SYNOPSIS mt f t tapedevice command count command count DESCRIPTION mt is used to position or control the specified magnetic tape drive supporting the commands listed below Commands that support a count field allow multiple operations to be performed the rewind status and offline commands do not sup port a count field mt will output failure messages if the specified tape drive cannot be opened or if the operation fails The f option specifies which tape device to use Use sysconfig t to list all tape devices on the filer t has the same effect as f USAGE eof weof fsf bsf fsr bsr erase rewind s
113. name then renaming the temporary file to the original name Therefore take care in using symbolic links whose ultimate target is a file as opposed to a directory If the original file were targeted directly by a symbolic link this sequence of operations would have the result unintended by the applica tion of the file being stored in the directory where the symbolic link was and the renamed symbolic link pointing at the original file rather than to the updated file For symbolic links to directories this type of situation does not arise Because many PC applications work as described previously if there are symbolic links that point to files a PC could encounter such symbolic links It is best to disable symbolic links for CIFS when there are symbolic links that point to files If you expect many files to be changed by applications that update files as described you might want to disable symbolic links for CIFS How to Enable and Disable Symbolic Links You enable and disable symbolic links with the cifs symlinks enable option The option is On by default To disable symbolic links for CIFS use options cifs symlinks enable off To reenable symbolic links for CIFS use options cifs symlinks enable on How to Redirect Absolute Symbolic Links In a UNIX environment the NFS client interprets the file system location represented by an absolute symbolic link The CIFS client cannot do this In a CIFS environment the fi
114. name of each file it treats preceded by its file type y restore will not ask whether it should abort the restore if it encounters an error It will always try to skip over the bad block s and continue as best it can DIAGNOSTICS Complains about bad key characters Complains if it gets a read error If y has been specified or the user responds y restore will attempt to continue the restore If a backup was made using more than one tape volume restore will notify the user when it is time to mount the next volume There are numerous consistency checks that can be listed by restore Most checks are self explanatory or can never happen Common errors are given below filename not found on tape The specified file name was listed in the tape directory but was not found on the tape This is caused by tape read errors while looking for the file and from using a dump tape created on an active file system expected next file inumber got inumber A file that was not listed in the directory showed up This can occur when using a dump created on an active file system Incremental dump too low When doing incremental restore a dump that was written before the previ ous incremental dump or that has too low an incremental level has been loaded Incremental dump too high When doing incremental restore a dump that does not begin its coverage where the previous incremental dump left off or that has too high an incre mental level has b
115. noteto Option 0 0 0 00 19 3 DIAC PR bh twos SOAS ink waded ck bs 19 3 DESCIPUON uu eds ra ne Adee dr dta ea ae eau d odie was 19 3 xli xlii GIESODEIODS xt atte ica cle tna o de retos Gic bedeckt Mo fef ehe eck tee deca What the CIFS Options Do The cifs access logging enable Option 0 0 00 Default D scripti nrs i ud ok A ta E IPS The cifs access logging filename Option o oooooooooooooo ooo Default DescriptlOPiss td ds Abo pre ru eua The cifs bypass traverse checking Option 000055 Default Description sustenta d pcs eget debes Y ax The cifs guest account Option liiis Default Descriptions o e e AA ede eR E vt dede e eed Thiescifs horie dir OptlOmss s coo erue bes Default Descriptio at ire duse A hare Poe Re o ke the cifsadle tiimieout Opine ee Default Description ena a aay A Maa cha RU ARES The cifs netbios aliases Option 0 0 0 00000 eee ee Default DDescriptlOn ics es da qe i weed Ta E eie Gia ae cated The citsS oplocks zeriable Option s ere a rx ete e i Default DD scriptiQrsa 82d ebur rapid ias e The cifs perm check use gid Opti0N 20 00 00 eee eee Default IJeSctlptlOD ceo dtr Ere to Lua Etape Lacie Llc LAT ie or he eifs scopeid Option oasis eedem oa Ya ares Default DESCrIDLON Awa phate Em The cifs search domains Option n naana 0 00000 elles Default IJeSctIpt
116. now accessible only to the group engineering which consists of the following user IDs bob larry nancy rose Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Using the HTTP Virtual Firewall About the HTTP Virtual Firewall The HTTP virtual firewall feature enables you to maintain security on your filer You can restrict HTTP requests by marking the subnetwork interface over which they arrive as untrusted An untrusted interface provides only HTTP access to your filer on a read only basis Mark an interface untrusted if it meets all the following conditions e You know you are going to service HTTP requests over that interface e You don t want to allow requests through protocols other than HTTP You want to restrict access to the filer through that interface to read only access By default a subnetwork interface is trusted Syntax Mark an interface as untrusted or trusted by setting an option to the ifconfig com mand Following are examples of the command e To mark the eO interface as untrusted enter the following command ifconfig e0 untrusted To mark the eO interface as trusted enter the following command ifconfig e0 trusted Using Virtual Hosting About Virtual Hosting Virtual hosting enables a filer to respond to requests directed to more than one IP address through a single physical interface This means that a filer with only one phys ical interface
117. of the file system at the time the snapshot was created Accessing Snapshots Any client of a filer can access snapshots to recover old versions of files for example files that were accidentally changed or deleted The snapshot feature enables users to restore their own files without help because files in snapshots can be viewed and copied by those who have permission to do so with the original files Simplifying Tape Backup Snapshots also simplify tape backup The filer dump command automatically creates a snapshot of the active file system if necessary before backing up the data to tape However it is not necessary if you are backing up an existing snapshot Because a snapshot is a read only copy of the file system it does not change even when files in the active file system are changing As a result dump can make a safe and consistent backup without requiring you to take the filer off line Snapshots Use Little Disk Space The filer uses a copy on write technique to create snapshots quickly without consum ing any disk space Snapshots begin to consume extra space only as blocks in the active file system are modified and written to new locations on disk For more infor mation about the copy on write technique used by snapshots refer to How Snapshots Work Creating Snapshots for Your Needs The filer creates and deletes snapshots automatically at preset intervals You can also create and delete snapshots manually Each volume o
118. one of the interfaces configured for the filer How the Filer Replies to Requests The following list describes how the filer uses its interfaces to respond to different types of packets NFS over UDP requests The filer does not use the conventional IP routing mecha nisms to reply to NFS overUDP requests The filer sends the response on the network interface on which the request was received to the same address that gener ated the request For example the filer named filer uses the iler e1 interface to send packets in response to NFS requests received on the iler e1 interface This way of handling NFS over UDP requests enables you to attach multiple interfaces of the filer to networks with the same IP subnetwork number while keeping NFS over UDP traffic isolated to the appropriate physical networks Because of this scheme it is possible that NFS overUDP responses might be returned through a different path than you might expect from an examination of the IP routing table using netstat r This scheme generally works well although it can result in different routes than expected if your environment contains one way routes For example the IP packets might not be routed as you intended if you configured the network so that the IP traffic from host1 to host2 is routed through router1 and the IP traffic from host2 to host1 is routed through router2 NFS over TCP CIFS and HTTP requests The filer tries to return NFS overTCP and HTTP tr
119. order in which contacted 4 7 names resolving 4 7 volume naming conventions 3 6 netstat command 4 12 4 14 17 4 18 13 network interfaces balancing traffic among 17 9 configuring 4 15 network statistics displaying 17 4 networks connections checking 18 13 how filer sends and receives traffic 4 14 management services using SNMP 4 2 networks continued network mask configuring using ifconfig 4 15 problems with 18 12 statistics 18 12 using ifconfig to configure 4 15 NFS how interfaces respond to packets 4 14 options 19 9 problems with 18 14 statistics in custom MIB 4 3 statistics displaying nfsstat commana 6 1 6 15 NFS guest access 7 8 NFS over UDP requests 4 14 nfs big_endianize_fileid option 17 9 nfs mount_rootonly option 19 9 nfs per_client_stats enable option 19 10 nfs tcp enable option 19 10 nfs v2 df 2gb lim option 19 10 nfs v2 df_2gb_lim option 18 18 19 10 nfs v3 enable option 19 10 nfs webnfs enable option 19 11 nfs webnfs rootdir option 19 11 nfs webnfs rootdirset option 19 11 nfsstat command 6 15 nightly snapshots 9 5 NIS changing domain name 4 11 disabling 4 11 domain name specifying with option 19 11 enabling during setup 4 11 without using setup 4 11 maps supported 4 10 options 19 11 propagating changes etc hosts on filer 4 8 etc netgroup on filer 6 10 Index 7 nis domainname option 19 11 nis enable option 19 12 no atime update opt
120. ping prints hostis alive Otherwise ping will resend the ECHO REOUESI ond If the host does not respond after count seconds default va will print no answer from host T once a sec ue is 20 ping When the s flag is specified ping sends one datagram per second and prints one line of output for every ECHO RESPONSE that it receives ping computes the round trip times and packet loss statistics When the count number of pack ets have been sent or if the command is terminated with a C the summary statistics is displayed The default packetsize is 56 which translates into 64 ICMP bytes when combined with the 8 bytes of ICMP header OPTIONS R Record route Includes the RECORD ROUTE option in the ECHO REQUEST packet and displays the route buffer on returned packets Note that the IP header is only large enough for nine such routes Many hosts ignore or dis card this option r Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host network If the host is not on a directly attached network an returned s Send one datagram every second on an attached error is Y Verbose output ICMP packets other than ECHO RESPONSE that are received are listed SEE ALSO ifconfig netstat Command Reference A 71 qtree NAME qtree create and manage qtrees SYNOPSIS qtree qtree create name qtree security name UNIX ntfs mixed qtree oplocks name enable disable DESCRIPTION
121. restore has been interrupted Lists the names of the specified files if they occur on the backup If no file argument is given then the root directory is listed which results in the entire content of the backup being listed Extracts the named files If a named file matches a directory whose contents were backed up the directory is recursively extracted The owner modifica tion time and mode are restored If no filename argument is specified the backup root directory is extracted This results in the entire backup being restored The following characters may be used in addition to the letter that selects the function desired Command Reference A 79 restore b The next argument to restore is used as the block size of the media in kilo bytes If the b option is not specified restore tries to determine the media block size dynamically f Thenext argument to restore is used as the name of the archive instead of the standard input If the name of the file is restore reads from standard input S The next argument to restore is a number which selects the file on a multi file dump tape File numbering starts at 1 D By default files will be restored into the directory from which they were dumped If the D option is specified the next argument to restore is the full absolute pathname of a directory into which the files should be restored v Normally restore does its work silently The v verbose key causes it to type the
122. savecore SEE ALSO rc Command Reference A 87 setup NAME setup update filer configuration SYNOPSIS setup DESCRIPTION setup queries the user for the filer configuration parameters such as hostname IP address and timezone It installs new versions of etc rc etc hosts etc exports etc resolv conf etc hosts equiv and etc dgateways to reflect the new configuration When setup completes the configuration files have been updated but their new contents do not take effect until the filer is rebooted see reboot The old contents of the configuration files are saved in rc bak exports bak resolv conf bak hosts bak hosts equiv bak and dgateways bak One piece of information that setup requests is the name and IP address for adminhost In etc exports adminhost is granted root access to so that it can access and modify the configuration files in ete All other NFS clients are granted access only to home If no adminhost is specified then all clients are granted root access to This is not recommended for sites where security is a concern If an adminhost is specified then an additional line is added to the etc hosts file to point the default mailhost to the adminhost If a default gateway is provided to setup it will be used in etc rc to specify a default route see route and will also be used as the first entry in etc dgateways The hostname that is provided to setup is used to construct default
123. server or a mail forwarder such as the sendmail program or Microsoft Exchange server By default the admin istration host defined during setup is used as a mail host You can specify more mail hosts About Configuring autosupport You can specify up to five addresses of email recipients Refer to Use the Options Command to Configure Autosupport for more information about specifying the email address and other options Events That Trigger autosupport Email The mail host sends email about your filer after any of the events listed in Table 2 19 Table 2 19 autosupport Email Trigger Events Event Subject line of the email message Low NVRAM lithium battery BATTERY LOW Disk failure DISK FAIL Disk scrub occurred DISK SCRUB Fan failure FAN FAIL Shutdown because of OVER TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN overheating Partial RPS failure POWER SUPPLY DEGRADED System reboot REBOOT PowerVault 700N storage sys SHELF FAULT tem error Spare disk failure SPARE FAIL Weekly backup of etc messages WEEKLY LOG option autosupport doit THE STRING SPECIFIED IN OPTION command autosupport doit 2 28 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Contents of Automatic Email Messages Each email message generated by autosupport contains the following types of information date and time stamp of the m
124. services For more information about HTTP on the filer see Chapter 8 HTTP Administration The httpd admin enable Option Default On Description Enables HTTP access to the filer s on line Help files and other files used by FilerView The httpd enable Option Default Off Description Enables the HTTP server The httpd log max file size Option Default 2147483647 2 GB 1 byte Description Specifies the number of bytes etc log httpd log the HTTP log file can grow to The maximum value is 500 GB The httpd rootdir Option Default None 19 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Description Specifies the root directory containing files and directories that HTTP transfers to clients The httpd timeout Option Default 900 seconds 15 minutes Description Specifies the minimum amount of time in seconds before an idle HTTP connection times out The httpd timewait enable Option Default On Description When you set this option to On the filer drops an HTTP connection one minute after the client closes it When you set this option to Off the connection is not dropped and resources are consumed until the connection times out NFS Options What the NFS Option Does The NFS option enables and controls NFS services For more information about NFS see Chapter 6 NFS Administration The nfs mount_rootonly Option Default On Descri
125. set or display Dell filer name SYNOPSIS hostname name DESCRIPTION hostname prints the name of the current host The hostname can be set by sup plying an argument This is usually done in the initialization script etc rc which is run at boot time name must exist in the etc hosts data base FILES etc hosts host name data base etc rc System initialization command script SEE ALSO hosts rc A 44 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide httpstat NAME httpstat display HTTP statistics SYNOPSIS httpstat tz interval DESCRIPTION httpstat displays statistical information about HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol for the filer It can also be used to reinitialize this information If no arguments are given httpstat displays statistical information since last reboot or last zeroed with the z option If the t option is specified statistical information since the last reboot is given The output consists of the number of GET requests successfully processed gets rejected requests badcalls currently open HTTP connections open conn and the maximum number of simultaneous connections peak conn If the interval argument is specified httpstat will continuously display the sum mary information for all the statistics The first line of data displayed contains cumulative statistics Each subsequent line shows incremental statistics for the interval in seconds sin
126. software failure causes the filer to crash the filer creates a core file that Dell technical support can use to troubleshoot the problem Core File Storage in etc crash On the first boot after a system crash the filer stores the core file in the etc crash directory on the root volume What the savecore Command Does The savecore command which is included in the default etc rc file on the root volume e Produces a core n nz file The n in the file name is a number The string nz indi cates that the file is compressed Displays a message on the system console e Logs a message in etc messages on the root volume Core Dump Space Needed A core dump file contains the contents of memory and NVRAM Core dumps are writ ten to a set of areas at the beginning of all the disks The core dump area on each disk has a fixed size of approximately 20 447232 bytes Therefore a filer or appliance with a large amount of memory can have an insufficient amount of core dump disk space to store a full core dump Table 2 13 shows how many disks are needed to store a full core dump for the amount of memory you might have in a specific filer or appliance Table 2 13 Core Dump Space Memory in MB Disks Needed 32 64 96 128 oOo N Ol A 160 192 10 2 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 13 Core Dump Space continued Memory in MB Disks Needed 224 12 256
127. spare disk and if it is moved to another filer it will not be used by that filer as a spare disk disk remove disk name removes the specified spare disk from the RAID configuration spinning the disk down when removal is complete You can use disk remove to remove a spare disk so that it can be used by another filer as a replacement for a failed disk or to expand file system space disk scrub start starts a RAID scrubbing operation on all RAID groups The raid scrub enable option is ignored scrubbing will be started regardless of the setting of that option the option is applicable only to scrubbing that gets started periodi cally by the system disk scrub stop stops a RAID scrubbing operation SEE ALSO sysconfig A 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide disk fw update NAME disk fw update update disk firmware SYNOPSIS disk fw update disk name DESCRIPTION Use the disk fw update command to update out of date firmware on all disks or a specified disk on a filer Each filer is shipped with a etc disk fw directory that contains the latest firmware revisions This command makes disks inaccessi ble for up to 2 minutes so network sessions using the filer should be closed down before running it This is particularly true for CIFS sessions which will nor mally be terminated while this command executes Warning messages for disks being updated should be ignored while t
128. sysconfig r liiis 17 1 Displaying Tape Drive Information Using sysconfig t 17 2 Displaying Overall Filer Information Using sysconfig v 17 2 Displaying Overall Filer Information Using sysconfig 17 2 Displaying Volume Information llle 17 2 Use the Vol status Command o 17 2 Displaying Volume State Information With Vol StatuS 17 2 Displaying Disk Information Using Vol status d ooooooo ooo o 17 2 Displaying RAID Information Using Vol status T oo ooooo oooo oo 17 3 Displaying RAID Information for Each Group Using Vol status V 17 3 Displaying Filer Statistics zx xou mores Re ees RES NER be E ea 17 3 Use the sysstat and uptime Commands een 17 3 About the sysstat COMMAand o o o o oo ees 17 3 About the uptime CoMmMand o o ooooooo eee 17 4 Example ratos addat aere Se la cO rer rale fu do eM 17 4 Displaying Network Statistics liliis 17 4 Use the fietstat Commands pia e EET CBE XE 17 4 About the netstat Command naasna saasaa 000 cece 17 4 Displaying Interface Statistics eee 17 4 Use the ifstat COMMANG luxe es Eb lala RE eds 17 4 ifsStat SyritaX e csse vi ta eBP Au e be e e oe 17 4 Chapter 18 Explanation of Interface Statistics 0 0 0 0 000 eee 17 5 Ethernet a oat aser Be TELA EI Ae ide 17 5 GB Ethernet matar ido a ed bet oe eder ee 17 7 Improving Filer PerforMance o o ooooooooo
129. tec Eee UR d eto oce be ciere cc edt 16 7 Exatriple 4o toe bod xe rc ee s i a eiii Moa dies URL ED M e tU 16 7 The ete Shapmirrorcont Elles s iti e etu ts ux ed a oe rons 16 8 Purpose of the snapmirror conf File llle 16 8 When You Can Modify the snapmirror conf File o oo o o oo o o 16 8 Format of the snapmirror conf File llli sss 16 8 Meaning of Each Field in asnapmirror conf Entry ooooooooo oo 16 8 Rules for Specifying the Update Schedule o o o ooooooooooo oo 16 9 Example LT 16 9 When Changes to snapmirror conf Take EffeCt o o ooo o ooo o 16 9 Recommendation en RI pac ROTE Sr UE y 16 9 Replicating a Volume 4 ir o os eese dat edt D A 16 9 Descrip ue esu v Ua ls ESAE UR Cni Yes 16 9 Prerequisites orita Ee ii Db pcan RR biben 16 10 REStICHONS LT pA UD 16 10 Caution Sie se oom s et eA oa Oe BET ts 16 10 Recomrrietidatlons 2o ecd oce reta eee ee db OA Rd Sel dus 16 10 STEPS cus su oam d ER RH pe tr mes uo T p eRe qan da dud 16 11 Disabling Data Replication for the Entire Filer o oooooooooo oo o 16 12 BIS cielo cM ETE 16 12 SIeBS iss ix e wv Oe ex eee VERRE VAR 16 12 Resuming Data Replication for the Entire File o o o oooo ooo 16 13 IJescrptiont i ve n eL NS A E s ote is o uua 16 13 PrefequiSites rei dra pere ER bU eB eis 16 13 STGD ides se dor deed d perc vectes a ate Dabo Ded 16 13 Disabling Data Replication for One Volume 0
130. the add option cifs shares add sharename path comment description maxusers userlimit forcegroup groupname sharename name of the new share clients use this name to access the share path full path name of the directory on the filer that corresponds to the root of the new share comment description description of the new share CIFS clients see this description when brows ing the filer s shares If the description includes spaces it must be enclosed in double quotation marks If you do not specify a description the descrip tion is blank maxusers userlimit maximum number of simultaneous connections to the new share userlimit must be a positive integer If you do not specify a number the filer does not impose a limit on the number of connections to the share forcegroup groupname name of the group to which files to be created in the share belong The groupname is the name of a group in the UNIX group database Deleting existing shares To delete a share use the delete option cifs shares delete sharename sharename is the name of the share to be deleted A share cannot be deleted if it is in use Command Reference A 15 cifs shares Changing the settings of existing shares To change the settings of an existing share use the change option cifs shares change sharename comment description nocomment maxusers userlimit nomaxusers forcegroup groupname noforcegroup
131. the filer to perform network management tasks such as gathering status and diagnostic information The information is sent to network management stations which are client workstations on a network The network management stations use third party applications to process the information The information that is exchanged to perform these tasks is described in ASCII files called Management Information Bases MIBs Data SNMP Provides For diagnostic and other network management services the filer supports the SNMP MIB II specification Based on SNMP version 1 this specification provides data about the following MIB II groups system interfaces address translation e P e ICMP TCP e UDP SNMP MIB II SNMP commands enable users to specify up to eight communities and trap notifica tions for up to eight management stations Command to Configure the SNMP Agent To use SNMP configure the SNMP agent using the snmp command A typical set of SNMP commands in the etc rc file in the root volume is as follows snmp contact jdoe abc com 555 555 1212 snmp location ABC corporation engineering lab snmp community add ro private snmp traphost add snmp mgrl snmp init 4 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide SNMP Commands Supported by Dell SNMP commands that Dell supports are described in detail in the snmp 1 man page The following paragraphs provide brief explanatio
132. the format of the etc quotas file refer to the quotas man page With no arguments the quota command indicates whether quotas are on or off in each volume The following list describes how to use the various quota commands quota on volume activates quotas in the specified volume based on the contents of etc quotas The volume name may be omitted if the sys tem has only one volume Changing etc quotas has no effect until the next time quota on or quota resize is executed The filer remembers whether quotas are on or off even after a reboot so quota on should not be added to etc rc When quotas are first turned on the filer scans the file system to determine current file and space usage for each user and group with a quota This may take several minutes during which quo tas are not in effect although the file system is still accessible Executing quota with no arguments during this period indi cates that quotas are initializing and reports how much of the initialization process has completed quota off volume turns quotas off on the specified volume The volume name may be omitted if the system has only one volume quota resize volume adjusts currently active quotas in the specified volume to reflect changes in the etc quotas file For instance if you edit Command Reference A 75 quota an entry in etc quotas to increase a user s quota quota resize will cause the change to take effect The volume name may be omitted if th
133. the rights assigned in a share s Access Control List ACL and are limited by the UNIX permissions assigned o a file e PC security is like FAT File Allocation Table file system security with per file permissions f the owner of a file or directory accesses an item the owner permissions are checked to see whether they allow access f someone other than the owner of a file or directory accesses an item the group permissions are checked to see whether they allow access NFS Access to Windows Files The following principles apply to accessing Windows files from NFS e Windows NT permissions are mapped to UNIX permissions Each Windows NT user who sets Windows NT permissions is mapped to a UNIX user and UNIX group except that if the owner is a generic user the owner is mapped to root with restrictions e Windows NT permissions for Owner are mapped to UNIX owner permissions gtree Administration 10 5 e Windows NT permissions for Everyone are mapped to UNIX Group and UNIX Other permissions NFS Access to UNIX Files NFS accesses to UNIX files obey UNIX security rules Creating a qtree How to Create a qtree To create a qtree use the following command qtree create pathname Result The qtree pathname is created with the following properties Volume the root volume unless you specify another volume Name pathname e Security style that of the root directory of the volume Oplocks settings
134. the same name Any lines after this line are disregarded by the filer You can use either spaces or tabs as separators CIFS Administration 7 5 Name requirements Windows NT and UNIX names have different requirements as follows e Windows NT names are case insensitive and can contain non ASCII characters within the character set in the current code page Windows NT user names can contain spaces in which case you must enclose the name in quotation marks e UNIX user names are case sensitive and must be in ASCII Default file contents If the filer is domain authenticated by default the etc usermap cfg file contains the following line domainladministrator root When Authenticating With the UNIX Password Database To add a user enter the user s information into the NIS password and group maps NOTE If you do not use NIS create entries for the user in the filer s etc passwd and X etc group files Adding Local Groups to the Filer How to Add a Local Group You add a local group to the filer with the New Local Group window in the User Man ager for Domains Adding a Group With the New Local Group Window To create a new local group perform the following steps 1 Open User Manager for Domains by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the User menu choose Select Domain 3 Select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result The User Manager wi
135. tlenecks or inefficiencies in your NFS setup NOTE A full description of the meaning of NFS statistics is outside the scope of this guide A good source of information about this topic is Managing NFS and NIS by Hal Stern O Reilly amp Associates Inc Syntax The syntax of the nfsstat command is as follows nfsstat interval h ip address host name 1 o E mZ 1 nfsstat h ip address host name nfsstat 1 nfsstat z Options Table 6 2 describes the options for the nfsstat command Table 6 2 nfsstat Command Options Option Description none When no options are specified the command displays sta tistical information since the last time the filer was rebooted interval When an interval is specified the command displays statis tics continually The interval specifies the number of seconds the command waits between updates NFS Administration 6 15 Table 6 2 nfsstat Command Options continued Option Description h Displays statistics for a single client You must provide the client s host name or IP address as an argument to the h option e To use the h option you must enable the nfs per client stats enable option by entering the following command options nfs per client stats enable on Enable the perclient statistics collection mode as soon as possible after you start the filer or reset the counters with nfsstat z Otherwise nfsstat 1 reports incorrectly low pe
136. to Displaying Tape Device Information in Chapter 14 You must know the amount of data to be backed up For information about deter mining the amount of backup data refer to Determining the Amount of Backup Data Steps Follow these steps to determine the number of tapes required for the backup 1 Determine the capacity of the tape drives you are using for the backup 2 Determine the amount of data that needs to be backed up 3 Determine the amount of space that will be left unused on a tape For example if the dump command specifies several tape files the command automatically writes to the next tape file even though there is space left in the current tape Example The following dump command starts the second tape file on rst 1a after writing 2 000 000 tape blocks to the first tape file even though the tape in rstOa contains unused space dump OufB rst0a rstla 2000000 vol vol0 Prerequisites for the dump Command About This Section The prerequisites for the dump command depend on the format of the dump com mand For example the prerequisites for backing up data to a remote tape drive and to a local tape drive are different This section describes the general prerequisites that must be met regardless of the dump command format It also describes the specific prerequisites for specific backup procedures Data Backup 12 9 General Prerequisites You must meet these prerequisites for the dump command to run successful
137. to Avoid Displaying Useless Data 18 18 DOS Windows and Macintosh Clients Might Have Display Problem 18 18 Filer df Command Always Shows Correct Disk Space 18 18 qtrees Affect Disk Space Displayed by df 05 18 19 Filer Quota Report Command Always Displays Correct Usage 18 19 Serious Error Messages s te toe eme eter Fes te gas ob ot Ae edo 18 19 Panic Messages Mean Serious Problems nananana anaana aaaea 18 19 What to Do After a Panic Message 0 2 2 ee 18 19 Chapter 19 Detailed Options Information 19 1 ADOUT ODTIONS s ina tease herds aet need det WR er e E rS ERR enc HRS 19 1 About Setting Detailed Information 2 19 1 Option Values xdg dua uS ERA E SAESA ia CE 19 1 Autosupport Options 225 5T eI A ada id 19 1 What the Autosupport Options Do n anaua eee 19 1 The autosupport doit Option 0 0 0 nee 19 2 BIACIS AI RCM 19 2 26S GTIBtIOTD 2 43 ek Lope ide Ae e e es Se Bh So aie n 19 2 The autosupport enable Option 00 0 0 eee 19 2 BA 19 2 Description s s criam reb A s ER oe er EXE 19 2 The autosupportitom Optlor aor ee teen dee oe scc 19 2 DSTA Be A s t ure 19 2 D6SCrDtlOPh s 16st atre AIR tack oe ee UD wig ofan i ted 19 2 The autosupport mailhost OPON sesi pardi sad pades deita ooo 19 2 Detalle ti a pack bee en eee ie Bee een es 19 2 DESENOUON tx er Ret nie AE Ee EET al aad Deh ae ons 19 2 The autosupport
138. to a filer using the filer s cest ore command or the Solaris u srestore command What the dump Command Can Back Up The dump command can back up a file a directory a qtree or an entire volume In the dump command you specify the complete path name to be backed up In this chapter this path name is referred to as the dump path How the dump Command Uses Snapshots to Back Up Data The dump path can exist in the filer s active file system or in a snapshot If the dump path is in an active file system the filer takes a snapshot of the active file system before it writes the data to tape The snapshot capability ensures that the data written to tape is consistent As a result you need not take the filer or volume off line before initiating the backup The dump command names each snapshot it creates snapshot for backup n The n at the end of the snapshot name is an integer starting at 0 Each time the dump com mand creates a snapshot it increments the integer by 1 The filer resets the integer to O when it is rebooted The dump command automatically deletes the snapshot after it successfully finishes the backup When the filer executes multiple dump commands simultaneously the dump com mands create multiple snapshots For example if the filer is running two dump commands simultaneously you find these snapshots in the volumes from which data is being backed up snapshot for backup 0 and snapshot for backup 1 CAUTION When the
139. to perform incremental backups in the future X It takes a string as argument You can specify a comma separated list of strings If the name of a file in the dump path matches one of the strings the dump command excludes that file from the backup Each string for the X option applies to files at every direc tory under the dump path The following list describes the rules for specifying the strings e To exclude a file the name of the file must match the string exactly For example if you specify core only those files whose names are core are excluded A file named a core is not excluded You can use the asterisk as a wildcard character The wildcard character must be the first or last character of the string Each string can contain up to two wildcard charac ters For example you can specify core core or core butnot core 1 Because the strings in the list are comma separated if you want to exclude files whose names contain a comma pre cede the comma in the string with a backslash e You can specify up to 32 strings for the X option Using the dump Command to Back Up Data to Tape Description You can enter the dump command at any time to back up data in a specified path After the dump command is finished the data in the path is written to tape Data Backup 12 15 Prerequisites You must meet all the prerequisites described in Prerequisites for the Dump Command Restrictions You
140. to the filer After you complete this procedure you have a Unicode directory containing files that were in a non Unicode directory and its files are accessible to CIFS clients Step To convert directories to Unicode format quickly perform the following steps 1 Create a new CIFS directory from a Windows NT client on the same volume in the same qtree as the directory you want to convert 2 With the NFS mv command rename files from the directory you want to convert into the directory you just created 3 Optionally remove the old directory 4 Optionally rename the new directory How to Manage UNIX Access to NTFS Files UNIX Users Need Windows NT Credentials to Access NTFS Files If a user is using UNIX and tries to open a file with an ACL in a mixed or NTFS Windows NT security style gtree the filer uses NTFS security semantics to deter mine whether the user has access to the file The filer does this by converting the UNIX UID User ID into a Windows NT creden tial which is also known as a WAFL Write Anywhere File Layout credential Windows uses the credential to verify that a user has access rights to the file A UNIX user can have both a UNIX name and a Windows name As part of the process of creating a WAFL credential the filer contacts an NT domain controller to look up a user s SID Security ID and groups 5 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide WAFL Creden
141. tope RE CER eia e REN DNA ENSE eA 4 24 PreredulSites xa caosa de A Son bM Soe bo ER eoe bg A e ehe tn S 4 25 Sj RC PERPE MEM A M GM aL hI E A tide AOL ot 4 25 Example ERU E Ried nid ee beet RE bes 4 25 Creating a Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer 4 25 Description 2 o6 oe dove ur hk ex Welch HE te EUIS 4 25 MU t ve E bs a AO eft 4 26 EXAM care ea ue A dM Mu Roue M dtu d ida 4 26 Adding Physical Interfaces to a Trunk 0 eee 4 26 IDeSCriptlOriz oed d Reb los dre dus Deck PN CR te RT dd 4 26 SEDE ei stt o as e Se trate use odore he E eee 4 27 XVII Chapter 5 xviii Descriptor end ec rate ree ote ihre AE EN SE 4 27 jc Hu 4 27 Sample Output ed Oke BARS S SERIES A YR RN aes 4 27 Displaying TrunkStatiStic 1 p whew tsk IERI ee dE EE 4 28 DESCRIPTION erc in Dak eink tet ete EU Menit o Bes redit usata e tas 4 28 STE Dis ve a CHAISE EXCEL ES wash 4 28 Sample Output iue rea so cbe brune du enda wes secet e cesta 4 28 Destroying a Tr nk 1 ue CD eu e ed 4 29 DeserIptlonmzi ih od hiro e cb Bh esto ack RR Ner ess 4 29 Prerequlsite xus o doit west dn dom des ab e dct aab d panel mak a tet du 4 29 SIGD ds dto dades ates Rame ar Mite E pu cere ghe dus ssepe ete m in an d 4 29 Database File Protectlons i ad x bt LE e Eus 4 29 How Data ONTAP 5 3 Provides Database File Protection 4 29 How to Provide Additional Protection for Database Files 4 29 How nvfall VWOrKS
142. two main sections e Disk management tasks e Volume management tasks Alternatively you can perform these procedures using the FilerView program which has a graphical interface Disk Management Tasks About This Section This section contains procedures for managing the filer s disks and RAID groups Setting the Size of a Volume s RAID Groups To set the RAID group size of a volume when you create it enter the command vol create volume r n where volume is the name of the volume and n is the number of disks you want in each RAID group Every RAID group must contain at least two disks Changing the Size of a RAID Group After Creating It To change the size of a RAID group enter the command vol volume options raidsize size where size is the number of disks you want in the RAID group NOTE You can only change the size of the last RAID group in a volume You cannot change the size of RAID groups after they have been filled Disk and File System Management 3 9 Installing New Disks New disks are ones that have never been used Perform the following steps to install new disks 1 Install one or more disks according to the refer to the nstallation and Trouble shooting Guide for your PowerVault 700N storage system The system displays a message confirming that one or more disks were installed then waits 15 seconds as the disk s is turned on The system recognizes the disks as a hot spare disks If you added multiple disk
143. users or groups access rights to each share adapter card A SCSI card network card hot swap adapter card serial adapter card or VGA adapter that plugs into a filer expansion slot Address Resolution The procedure for determining a Media Access Control MAC address corre sponding to the address of a LAN or WAN destination administration host The client you specify during filer setup for managing the filer The setup pro gram automatically configures the filer to accept telnet and rsh connections from this client to give permission to this client for mounting the and home directories and to use this client as the mailhost for sending autosupport email messages At any time after you run the setup program you can configure the filer to work with other clients in the same way as it does with the administra tion host authentication A security step performed by a domain controller for the filer s domain or by the filer itself using its etc passwd file autosupport A filer daemon that triggers e mail mes sages from the customer site to a specified e mail recipient when there is a potential filer problem big endian A binary data format for storage and transmission in which the most signifi cant bit or byte comes first CIFS Common Internet File System A proto col for networking PCs client A computer that shares files on a filer console A terminal that is attached to a filer s ser
144. vol copy command set enables you to copy one volume to another The com mands in this command set control copying both data in the active file system and data in snapshots from one volume to another The source and destination volumes of the copy can reside on the same filer or on different filers For more information about snapshots see Chapter 9 Snapshots When to Copy Volumes Table 15 1 describes some situations where you might find copying volumes useful Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Sef5 1 Table 15 1 vol copy Command Situations Situation Reasons for copying one volume to another You want to copy data After you copy the data clients can switch to the from one filer to destination filer in the following scenarios another regularly to ensure high data When you shut down the source filer for soft availability ware or hardware upgrades e If a network client process accidentally deletes a large number of files on the source filer cli ents can continue to have access to the files when you are restoring the files to the source filer e fthe source filer is not available for reasons Such as natural disasters you can pu the desti nation filer on line to continue file service is a model You want to migrate The destination filer has more storage or data from one filer to that supports newer technology such as FC AL another disks You want to move a Splitting a volume volum
145. vol2 2is created on filerA Volume voll working used total date name 0 0 0 ov 17 10 52 filerB_vol2 2 busy 0 0 0 0 ov 17 10 51 filerB _vol2 1 1 0 0 0 ov 17 10 00 hourly 0 1 0 0 08 ov 17 00 00 nightly 0 1 0 0 0 ov 15 16 00 hourly 1 1 0 1 0 ov 15 15 00 hourly 2 After filerB_vol2 2 is transferred from filerA to filerB both the filerB vol2 1 and filerB vol2 2 snapshots exist on filerB On filerA however filerB_vol2 7 is no longer needed and is deleted only filerB vol2 2 remains Consequences of Deleting a Required Snapshot The filer fails to replicate data if it cannot find the required snapshots in the source and destination volumes This section provides an example illustrating what happens if you inadvertently delete a snapshot required for data replication In this example data is replicated from vol vol1 of filerA to vol vol2 of filerB Suppose you use the snap delete command on filerA to delete the filerB_vol2 2 snap shot When filerB tried to update the mirror according to the schedule in the snapmirror conf file it could not find the snapshot to determine what incremental changes are required in the mirror As a result filerB displays the following error message The source filer requires a complete transfer The destination volume is online and must be offline for a complete transfer FilerA displays the following error message Destination f
146. volume configuration is probably all you need You can create additional volumes in the future Use of multiple volumes There are several factors to consider before deciding to create and use multiple volumes Configuring with multiple volumes aids in the administration of filers that have large storage capacities enabling you to e Perform administrative and maintenance tasks for example backup and restore on individual volumes rather than on a single large file system e Set option command values for example snap sched raidsize minra no atime update and so on differently for individual volumes Disk and File System Management 3 7 Take individual volumes off line for example to perform administrative tasks on their file systems or associated RAID groups while the other volumes remain on line without interrupting the availability of the data on them Limitations of configuring with multiple volumes include e The filer s storage space is partitioned Additional administrative overhead is introduced for example defining export points e You can expand but not concatenate shrink or split volumes You cannot perform a local copy of a volume s contents you must use dump and restore Of ndmp copy Planning a Multiple Volume Configuration Before you configure a filer with multiple volumes you must decide on the number and sizes of volumes you want to configure When deciding the number and sizes of vol
147. wcc s bluebottle NT UNIX account name s NT DOMAIN bluebottl pcuser CkCkckckckckck ck ckck ck ck KKK UNIX uid 65534 NT membership NT DOMAIN bluebottle NT DOMAINNDomain Users BUILTINNUsers User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users kCkckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 25 Toggling CIFS Login Tracing Description You can enable login information to be displayed after every CIFS login You can do this any time you need to troubleshoot mapping problems Login problems are often the cause of users being denied access to files they should have access to CIFS login tracing is especially useful in producing verbose messages when a login attempt fails Caution Turning on CIFS login tracing should be used carefully because every CIFS login is traced and results in console messages Constant use of CIFS login tracing can result in many console and log messages Step to Turn On CIFS Login Tracing To turn on CIFS login tracing enter the following command options cifs trace login on Sample Output If user jdoe attempts to log in messages like the following appear on the console on Jan 4 15 21 38 PST CIFSAuthen Login attempt by DELL jdoe from SMITH PC on Jan 4 15 21 38 PST CIFSAuthen User authenticated by DC on Jan 4 15 21 38 PST CIFSAuthen PC user name maps to UNIX user smith on Jan 4 15 21 38 PST CIFSAu
148. xxx s AES SUR AE ERG OR RA USE 12 11 General Recommendations lle 12 11 Avoid Backing Up Too Much Data in a Single Dump Command 12 11 Store Incremental Backups for the Same Dump Path On the Same Tape cnet koet ap ma n a aa Te ETA 12 11 Write Down Otree Information Before Backing Up qtrees 12 11 Recommendations for Minimizing Backup Time and Data Loss 12 11 Use Multiple Local Tape Drives lliiiilllseiilsss 12 12 Organize Data to be Backed Up o ooooooococooco lesse 12 12 Limit the Amount of Data in Each Backup o ooooooo oo o 12 12 Schedule the Backups Appropriately ooooooooooooo oo 12 12 Avoid Using an Exclude List 0 2 2 0 iiis 12 12 Recommendations for Minimizing Downtime During Data Recovery 12 12 Recommendations for Minimizing the Number of Tape Drives Required ch sa is we mane SR d 12 12 The durnp Gorimand Syntax uut ed der ELE PR GE s 12 13 Command Syntax x ex e v eL e desto o o e eb EO das 12 13 Rules for Entering the dump Command o ooooooooooo 0200s ee 12 13 Example of a Simple dump Command 00000 iss 12 13 Options reete MESI RENE New oe eee ee 12 13 ALUMNES frau S ca dob Ra Re keel e e er d 12 13 Lato A ei ea ur ete Te Atte os Naat d 12 14 Descriptions of dump Options 0 00 0 000 cee eee 12 14 Using the dump Command to Back Up Data to Tape 12 15 Description a ume peter as adc dut eb n
149. 0 0 May 05 12 00 hourly 1 0 0 0 0 May 05 08 00 hourly 2 The cumulative disk space used by snapshots does not increase because no changes were made to the file system However if you had deleted 20 MB from the file 9 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide system before the filer took the hourly 0 snapshot the snap list command would have displayed the following output used total date name 0 0 0 May 05 16 00 hourly 0 20 20 1 1 May 05 12 00 hourly 1 20 20 1 1 May 05 08 00 hourly 2 In the used column the cumulative values for Aourly 1 and hourly 2 are both 20 but the cumulative value for hourly 2 is not 40 This is because both snapshots point to the same 20 MB of data the data that you just deleted The cumulative values for hourly 1 and hourly 2 are different if you delete and create data between snapshots in the following way 1 Delete 20 MB of data and create 20 MB of new data after hourly 2 2 Delete the 20 MB of data created in Step 1 after hourly 1 After the data deletions and additions the snap 1ist command displays the follow ing output used total date name 0 0 0 0 May 05 16 00 hourly 0 20 20 1 1 May 05 12 00 hourly 1 33 20 2 15 May 05 08 00 hourly 2 In this scenario hourly 1 and hourly 2 each consume 20 of the used disk space 20 MB out of 100 MB However this time they reference di
150. 0 0 4H 0 0 7D 785 21568 MAX 882 146000 3 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide About the timetype Option The timetype option enables you to specify the time types that you want to list in the age comparison able 3 1 describes the valid timetype values you can use with the timetype option Table 3 1 Valid Values for timetype Option Value Definition a Access time m Modification time c File change time last size status change er File creation time About the sizes Option The sizes option enables you to specify the breakdown of sizes using a comma to separate each value Default values are in bytes but you can also use the following three suffixes at the end of a number you specify e K kilobytes e M megabytes e G gigabytes a special value you use to list all unique file sizes one line per unique size Using this command can result in output of several thousands of lines Example of the Sizes Option For example to display file sizes in four categories files with less than 500 kilobytes files with less than 2 megabytes files with less than 1 gigabyte and all other files enter the following command filestats sizes 500K 2M 1G volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 The output looks like the following FILE SIZE CUMULATIVE COUNT CUMULATIVE TOTAL KB 500K 862 4969 2M 866 10748 1G 882 146000 MAX 882 146000 Disk an
151. 0 000002 16 13 DeSGrIptlOnk x dcs dedos IUE ca er ne VON ES ote 16 13 Steps to Disable Data Replication for One Volume o 16 14 Steps to Disable Data Replication While Data Transfer Is in Progress 16 14 XXXVII Chapter 17 xxxviii Checking Data Replication StatuS o oo ooooooooo nee 16 14 Descripioric ees der o Elec et etes Pase Te iet E diae 16 14 PEE QUISILG 2 sede dett ede e re CS e RC eg cedi de odas 16 14 SIGDu ss cee PRE ASAE AE US AO 16 15 Example a a Rech eic dE REPRE EE 16 15 When No Data Replication Is in ProgresS oooooooooo o 16 15 When Data Replicating Is in Progress oooooocoococoo 16 15 Converting a Mirror to a Regular Volume lilii lesse 16 15 I9 SCFIDHOLDS os oot xtatis mr het Ob e at pre edo ic tide 16 15 Prerequisites 02 5 ede Ed bb esed Eti m ret 16 16 SEPS ses desse sale dete des date td pum dedo meh matita bd 16 16 Differences Between the vol copy Command and SnapMirror 16 16 Differenees as e de pt E EHE RR 16 16 System Information and Performance 17 1 Displaying the Data ONTAP Version 2 0 0 0 200000000 eee 17 1 How to Display the Data ONTAP Version 00 0c cece eee 17 1 Displaying Filer Configuration Information liiis 17 1 Use the syscontig COMMANA issii casas bb eee Re Meee EXE 17 1 Displaying Disk Information Using sysconfig d 0005 17 1 Displaying RAID Information Using
152. 0K 24 group 750M 75K vol eng projl tree 750M 75K writers group vol eng projl 300M 50K user 50M 10K NOTE If the quota is a tree quota the field in the type column of the quotas file displays t ree not qt ree Keep a record of your quotas file in a safe place and update it as you change it in case you must do a restore without having access to the root volume Quotas and Maximum Number of Files11 1 Quota Target Field Specifies the user group or gtree on which you want to impose restrictions You can assign more than one quota to a user or group but only one quota to a qtree The entries can be in any order Quota Target for a User Quota You specify a user with one of the following targets e a file or subdirectory whose UID matches the user e the user s name as defined in the etc passwd file or the NIS password map e the user s UID The methods are equivalent and inform the filer of the UID of the target A file or directory is used only as the source of a UID there are no quota implications for that file or directory The UID of the user must not be 0 Any file or subdirectory you use in the Quota Target field is referenced repeatedly throughout the life of the system so if you use a path name choose a path name that will last for as long as the user account remains on the system For example use a user s home directory for a user quota Quota Target for a Group Quota You specify a group with one of the following
153. 19 19 Default tices ome c e ob be esce e poco E ER 19 19 DESCRIPTION A o Nee oe e ee o E iy e ERE 19 19 s rmp enable Options ox soho oat eat bee hee 19 19 Defaults con mato ses cene demde owl oem Week elem dated dtd 19 19 DESCHIPUOM eR PLE ATTIC EMT 19 19 t lnet enable Option ta 2 auct a eee ene rre dore 19 19 jetaullizz sd eo cote irs e t t anto e e cel E Ir ed Tt 19 19 DESCrIDIONS sm A RE REI ep I 19 19 telnet hosts OPtlOn neget ate S etr repa way nace tabo 19 19 Default a a a oh 19 19 DescrlptlOn tede p ERROR E a 19 19 vol copy throttle Option 0 0 0 2 ee 19 20 Default srs sede ed a Rea eae dd ette 19 20 D escrlptlOri aub socie reos ap Rp da ace rd a 19 20 wafl convert ucode Option 00 000 cee eee eee ee 19 20 Default s ore Boa Ra S 19 20 Descriptions zs emot etae et t oe A LO ba e ot a 19 20 wafl create ucode Option 00 00 ses 19 20 Default 1 dS ar dehet ep bu e 19 20 DesecriptiOtissns et dde Nadie era eite Ratna td 19 20 watlidefault nt userOptiori ce Bee Pb DERE 19 20 Default zm ted c es eb te ecce ROMA ed En 19 20 Description ast ecce nt ERY uix aU wae dea cine beams 19 20 wafl default unix user Option 2 0 0 0 000 cee eee eee 19 21 Default oen iets secte omaes sca cuite a rM ie t e 19 2 DeESCAPUON nue o da ERN Bic rads a DER 19 21 watl maxdirsize Qptloh iu ser el ede pe Ue oy ei ess 19 21 Default d ws cub Ca er a i AN 19 2 DD scripti nraus cias rai lia i
154. 1996 16 45 57 GET task top html 200 334 192 9 20 5 authuser 26 Aug 1996 16 45 57 GET task head html 200 519 Displaying HTTP Statistics httpstat Statistic Types The httpstat command displays four types of statistics about HTTP operations on the filer as shown in Table 8 3 Table 8 3 httpstat Statistic Types Column Description gets Successful requests for files badcalls Requests for nonexistent files open conn Number of HTTP connections currently open peak conn Largest number of simultaneous HTTP connections since the filer was booted or since the z option was used Syntax The syntax for the ht tpstat command is as follows httpstat t z interval If you use no arguments httpstat displays HTTP statistics accumulated since the last reboot or since the last time the z argument was used The z argument resets both the gets and badcalls counters The t argument displays statistics since the last filer reboot You can specify the interval in seconds at which the filer displays the statistics Fol lowing is an example of ht tpstat httpstat HTTPD statistics gets badcalls open conn peak conn 45 11 5 17 HTTP Administration 8 11 8 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 9 Snapshots Understanding Snapshots What Is a Snapshot A snapshot is a read only copy of the entire file system it reflects the state
155. 4 15 invalid volume name message 18 5 IP addresses setting using ifconfig 4 15 ip match_any_ifaddr option 19 18 ip path_mtu_discovery enable option 19 18 L languages Supported list 5 9 large files 4 1 LCD filer main unit 1 4 legal characters in file names 5 6 local groups CIFS adding to filer 7 6 localhost 15 4 lost data from disk failures 18 6 lost passwords 18 11 lost record event detail display CIFS 7 28 Is command listing snapshot files 9 17 9 18 M Makefile NIS 4 8 6 10 making a volume inactive 3 13 management tasks for disks 3 9 for volumes 3 11 maps 7 6 maxfiles command 11 10 maximum number of files 11 10 media type for an Ethernet interface 4 15 messages for disk failures 18 6 MIB objects deprecated 4 3 multivolume locations 4 3 MIB Network Appliance custom 4 3 MIB II 4 2 MIME Content Type specifying 8 7 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide minra option 17 9 minra volume option 19 15 monitoring status of volumes 3 12 mounting files if there are qtrees 11 11 problems with 18 14 mounting volumes 3 7 mt command 14 4 MTU setting 4 16 multiple RAID groups 3 1 multiple volumes configuration planning 3 8 limitations of 3 8 multiple mode trunks creating 4 24 trunks multiple mode 4 19 multivolume MIB objects locations 4 3 N name services specifying the
156. 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The cifs netbios aliases Option Default None Description Specifies a list of alternative names for the filer Use a comma separated list of names The cifs oplocks enable Option Default On Description When this option is On the filer enables clients to use oplocks opportunistic locks on files Oplocks provide a significant performance enhancement but have the potential to cause lost cached data on some networks with impaired reliability or latency partic ularly wide area networks In general you should disable this option only if there are problems with databases and to isolate problems The cifs perm check use gid Option Default On Description This option affects security checking for Windows clients of files with UNIX security where the requestor is not the file owner In all cases Windows client requests are checked against the share level ACL If the requestor is the owner the User permis sions determine the access If the requestor is not the owner and if perm check use gid is On files with UNIX security are checked using normal UNIX rules that is if the requestor is a member of the file s owning group the Group permissions are used otherwise the Other per missions are used The cifs scopeid Option Default blank Detailed Options Information 19 5 Description Specifies a second element for a single el
157. 45 ssl E a RE S 5 4 How NFS Treats the Read Only Bit o oooooooooooooocooco oo 5 4 How the Filer Tracks the NFS or CIFS Client Read Only Bit 5 5 Naming Files Used by Both NFS and CIFS 0 0 0 0 0 000 cece eee 5 5 About File Naming Conventions 0 0 0000 cee es 5 5 Maximum Length of File Names o ooo oooocooooooo eee 5 5 How the Filer Generates Short 8 3 File Names o o ooo o oo o o 5 6 Which Clients Support Short File Names illii illl 5 6 Legal Characters Used in File Names o n a nannaa naana e eee 5 6 Case Sensitivity in File NaM S s cesi cies cebes sir iiis atapa eee 5 7 Languages and Character Sets nananana uaaa aaeeea 5 7 File Names Languages and Character Sets anaa aa aaaea 5 7 File Names Use Character Sets lilii elles 5 7 Every Volume Has a Language o ooooooooooooo eese 5 7 Language Selectivo to mette a demde Res TRUE a 5 7 What a Language Applies to 0 0 000 0c eee 5 8 Kinds of Character Sets Supported ea einki r a e WAT ia 5 8 Languages Supported ooo 5 9 How to Choose a Language o ooooooooooo 5 10 Language ProC dur esy ines nees ga pe aed pagt used ge NAE t tdeo qub 5 11 Displaying a List of Supported Languages saasaa sanaaa aeaa 5 11 Descriptio sis o ed eR e Ot Db e T Se s 5 11 SIGD oco Lb vex Per Oe n e nl eee etc ede rs 5 11 Setting the Console Encoding s s asra ses E xh 5 11 DescriptiOn i ias cbr ERE Ee doubts
158. 471 3 172 17 230 8 baker FSOPS 202614527 1 172 17 230 9 moriarty FSOPS 1006881 0 175 17 230 10 doyle FSOPS 1185 0 Example using the h option The following lines show the output of the nfsstat command when you specify the h option with a host name nfsstat h eng host Client 172 17 25 3 eng host Server rpc calls badcalls nullrecv badlen xdrcall 33374 0 0 0 0 NFS Administration 6 17 Server nfs calls badcalls 33345 0 Server nfs V2 null getattr setattr root lookup readlink read 0 0 8410 25 19 0 0 0 13687 41 42 0 489 22 wrcache writ creat remov renam link symlink 0 0 3225 10 12 0 7 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 mkdir rmdir readdir statfs 0 0 0 0 416 1 29 0 Server nfs V3 null getattr setattr lookup access readlink read 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 write create mkdir symlink mknod remove rmdir 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rename link readdir readdir fsstat fsinfo pathconf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 commit 0 0 Example resetting counters with the z option The following command resets the counters nfsstat z 6 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 7 CIFS Administration What Is CIFS CIFS Common Internet File System is a file sharing protocol based on the Server Message Block SMB protocol widely in use by personal computers and workstations running a wide variety of operat
159. 5 reserved for snapshots the idea of reserving space for snapshots is described in more detail later That leaves 3 GB for the active file system and 2 GB of the file sys tem is in use It is important to understand that the vol vol0 snapshot line counts data that exists only in a snapshot Because data that also exists in the active file system needs to be stored on disk anyway it is misleading if the filer charged the space to snap shots In the example half of the 1 GB reserved for the snapshot is used How the Snapshot Reserve Works By default the snapshot reserve is 2096 of disk space For information about how to adjust the amount of the snapshot reserve refer to Changing the Snapshot Reserve This section uses several examples to explain the advantages of reserving disk space for snapshots Snapshots Use Deleted Active File Disk Space If the filer created a snapshot when the disks were full removing files from the active file system wouldn t create any free space because everything in the active file sys tem would also be referenced by the newly created snapshot The filer would have to delete the snapshot before it could create any new files The following example shows how disk space being freed by deleting files in the active file system ends up in the snapshot If the filer creates a snapshot when the active file system is full and there is still space remaining in the snapshot reserve the df command output is
160. 5l6pBb2rJDA 1234 12 David u dave bin csh dan MNRWDsW srMfE 2345 23 Dan jim HNRyuuiuMFerx If the system keeps the passwords in the etc shadow the file etc passwd would be exactly the same but the password field would be empty root 0 1 Operator bin csh dave 1234 12 David u dave bin csh A 140 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide passwd dan 2345 23 Dan jim SEE ALSO shadow options nis nsswitch conf quota cifs access cifs setup Command ReferenceA 141 quotas NAME quotas quota description file SYNOPSIS etc quotas DESCRIPTION The etc quotas file describes disk quotas that go into effect when quotas are enabled All quotas are established on a pervolume basis If a volume name is not specified in an entry of the etc quotas file the entry applies to the root volume The following sample etc quotas file describes different kinds of quotas QuotaTarget type disk files mhoward user 500M 50K Ifine user vol home 500M tracker user stooges groupO vol vol0 750M 75K vol vol0 export tree 750M 75K mhoward user vol vol0 export 50M 5K stooges group vol vol0 export 100M 10K user vol home 100M 10K groupO vol volO 500M 70K user vol vol0 export 20M 2K group vol vol0 export 200M 20K The first non comment line in the file restricts the user mhoward to 500 MB of disk space and 51 200 files in the root volume The second line
161. 70 company com gt From autosupport To jdoe Date Thu 26 Sep 1996 07 51 27 0700 Resent Date Thu 26 Sep 1996 7 58 42 PDT Subject System Alert from filer REBOOT on Thu Sep 26 07 51 27 PDT 1996 Short messages are useful if the person who should be notified of urgent events reads email on a small screen such as the screen on an alphanumeric pager Filer System Time Synchronization Commands for Synchronizing Time The filer uses two commands and a set of options to control and synchronize the sys tem time e he date command sets the time locally For example the following command sets the system date and time to 9 25 a m on May 22 1999 date 199905220925 e The rdate command synchronizes the filer s time with the time on another host with an accuracy of one second e SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol synchronizes the filer s time with the time on a time server with a theoretical maximum accuracy of one nanosecond actual accuracy depends on the accuracy of the time server and network delays Time Synchronization with the rdate Command The rdate command synchronizes the filer s time with a target computer s time using the UDP time service typically UDP port 37 This service is available on most UNIX computers Check etc services and etc inetd conf on the target computer to see whether this service is supported Filer Administration Basics 2 31 NOTE There is currently no Windows 9x or Windows NT c
162. 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide To replicate data for the first time the filer transfers all data in all snapshots in the source volume to the mirror After the filer finishes transferring the data it brings the mirror on line This version of the mirror is the base line for future incremental changes How the Filer Updates the Mirror To make incremental changes on the mirror the filer takes regular snapshots on the source volume according to the schedule specified in the etc snapmirror conf file By comparing the current snapshot with the previous snapshot the filer determines what changes it needs to make to synchronize the data in the source volume and the data in the mirror For example if a file is deleted from the source volume SnapMirror deletes the corresponding file in the mirror the next time it updates the mirror For more information about how SnapMirror uses snapshots to transfer data from the source volume to the mirror refer to Snapshots Created During Data Replication Number of Volume Copy Operations SnapMirror Generates When SnapMirror transfers data from one volume to another it generates two vol ume copy operations in the same way as the vol copy command Refer to Volume Copy Operations in Chapter 18 for the meaning of a volume copy operation What Happens After You Replicate a Volume After you replicate a volume the active file system and all snapshots in the source vol ume are ava
163. 9 creates a volume named vol1 with 20 9 GB disks Because no RAID group size is specified the default size 14 disks is used The newly created vol ume contains one RAID group with 14 disks and another group with six disks vol create vol1 d 8a 1 8a 2 8a 3 creates a volume named vol1 with the specified disks vol create vol1 10 vol options vol1 raidsize 5 The first command creates a volume named vol1 with 10 disks which belong to one RAID group The second command specifies that if any disks are subsequently added to this volume they will not cause any current RAID group to have more than five disks Each existing RAID group will continue to have 10 disks and no more disks will be added to that RAID group When new RAID groups are created they will have a maximum size of five disks vol options vol1 root The volume named vol1 becomes the root volume after the next filer reboot vol options vol1 nosnapdir on In the volume named vol1 the snapshot directory is invisible at the client mount point or at the root of a share Also for UNIX clients the snapshot directories that are normally accessible in all the directories become inaccessible vol status r vol1 displays the RAID information about the volume named vol1 RAID group 0 RAID Disk HA DISK_ID Used MB blks Phys MB blks parity 0 3 4000 8192000 4095 8386728 data 0 2 4000 8192000 4095 8386728 vol copy start s nightly 1 volO filer1 vol0 copies the nightly snapshot n
164. 9 without etc rc file 18 2 broadcast filer address setting using ifconfig 4 15 Index 1 C cables checking 18 13 CGI requests redirecting 8 9 changing size of RAID groups 3 9 character set types supported 5 8 CIFS 7 20 access event displays 7 27 access event log 7 26 access logging disabling 7 29 enabling 7 29 active event log default 7 26 specifying 7 30 adding users 7 4 assigning and changing access rights 7 20 creating shares 7 12 deleting a share 7 17 displaying session information 7 35 displaying share information 7 15 displaying shares 7 10 d e e isplaying statistics 7 34 vent auditing configuration 7 29 vents viewing 7 32 ile name case 5 14 ile names preserving case 5 15 iler command line only operations 7 1 generic account creation by default 7 9 users 7 9 guest access 7 9 home directory shares creating 7 18 local groups adding to filer 7 6 login tracing toggling 5 26 lost record event detail display 7 28 oplocks 7 33 options 19 3 restoring files 13 2 rsh use to enter filer commands 7 7 session information displaying 7 35 h CIFS continued shares changing description 7 16 creating and changing 7 12 deleting 7 17 displaying 7 10 displaying information 7 15 renaming volume effect on 7 1 statistics displaying 7 34 symbolic links 5 2 system ACL SACL setting 7 30 UNIX file access detail displays 7 28 unsuccessful
165. 9 1 Default sas me sete dom tdt eet eet e eem ddp tret weld 19 1 Description IE TM TIME 19 11 The nfs webnfs rootdir set Option lilii liess 19 11 Detalla Amedeo ort kie qc ie D tds cel Lu d etd ENT 19 1 DD scripti mnxa oie ee oh A REI Ehe pie Ie 19 1 US 19 1 What the NIS Options Do 2 2 5 debe un da dae RERS a 19 11 Thenis domainhame Options ter ERE ERIS PA Db 19 1 Detaultz s Ao et E E EE eu WR Mee dene 19 1 Description s tired ata eR mt BEY Dp iYa A RR EUER IC MES 19 12 The nis nable Option ik sas te accion teres dp resur ees te dee g 19 12 Detalla add ta esa Rat atrio sues b AUTE 19 12 DESCANSE 19 12 RAID Options ke be sce erc ds dad 19 12 What the RAID Options Do n aasan eee 19 12 The raid reconstruct speed Option 0 00002 eee eee 19 12 Detallada ade aaa tern Seer ee i cand ANA 19 12 DDescHpltlOnss e ied ea ag facie a ae eo 19 12 The raid scrub enable Option 0 00 00 cee 19 12 Default iue penu dw oth a RAN Seba edd URN bd 19 12 DJ scripti nrsa 24 ene oA RAs Sa pian ee aS ee eh 19 12 EhGitald time OUL OPlOns acie eec the hat e CURES 19 13 Default ESSE bi de e HET e NM WERE 19 13 Descriptions e ei d ate Sedet db es Lc RE ee d otra 19 13 med Optio Ss Ao oe e ose M a rs A th 19 13 What the timed Options Do 2 2 esee 19 13 The timed enable Option i besser emenda queat 19 13 Defaults ue a E we ad pace RI EM oa A oe Rhee 19 13 IDescriptlOn s cerae ria 19 13 ThE timed log
166. 9 1 specifies how non ASCII character information is presented The value can be one of the following Table 19 1 console encoding Values Value Description nfs NFS character set You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input sgml SGML character format You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input utf8 UTF8 character sets For input any character greater than Ox7F is the beginning of a UTF 8 encoding The ip match any ifaddr Option Default On Description If the option is On the default the filer accepts any packet that is addressed to it even if that packet came in on the wrong interface A NOTE If you are concerned about security you should turn this Off The ip path_mtu_discovery enable Option Default On Description Enables or disables path MTU discovery which is currently used only by TCP When enabled the filer can discover and use the largest packet size that the filer can send to another host without fragmenting a packet This means that the filer doesn t have to limit itself to sending many small packets which takes more time and resources than sending fewer large packets 19 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide If you cannot establish a connection set this option to Off The rsh enable Option Default On Description Enables the rsh server on the filer The snmp
167. 94 groucho 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 366 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 377 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 june 2 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 332 2 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 352 3 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 351 4 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 292 0 266 350 5 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 The routed status display shows the following information e whether RIP snooping is active On or Off the current list of default gateways the metrics of the default gateways 1 through 15 the state of the gateways ALIVE or DEAD the last time each gateway was heard from The etc dgateways File The etc dgateways file in the root volume is the configuration database for the routed daemon From the routers that routed has determined to be alive routed selects the one with the highest preference to be the default router When the filer cannot find an explicit route for a packet it routes the packet to the default router Network Administration 4 13 The file consists of lines with the following format gateway metric where gateway is the name or the IP address of a default router and metric is a pref erence indicator which ranges from 1 highest to 15 lowest as shown below Z Gateway Metric 192 9 200 10 1 eng gateway 2 NOTE Each entry for such a default router must have an IP address that belongs to X the IP subnet of
168. 982 1647982808 1376457959 1221 filer cifs lookup NT DOMAIN mday SID S 1 5 21 39724982 1647982808 1376457959 1221 filer cifs lookup BUILTIN Administrators SID S 1 5 32 544 filer cifs lookup S 1 5 32 544 name BUILTIN Administrators filer cifs lookup nonexistantuser lookup failed Command Reference A 9 cifs restart NAME cifs restart restart CIFS service SYNOPSIS cifs restart DESCRIPTION cifs restart restarts CIFS service if it has been terminated by cifs terminate A 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs sessions NAME cifs sessions information on current CIFS activity SYNOPSIS cifs sessions s user DESCRIPTION The cifs sessions command displays information about CIFS users who are con nected to the filer If you omit the user argament the command displays a summary of information about the filer and lists the users who are connected to the filer EXAMPLES cifs sessions Server Registers as HAWLEYR TOKYO in group NT DOMAIN Filer is using ja for DOS users WINS Server 10 10 10 55 Selected domain controller NTDOM PC user shares files HAWLEY PC hawleyr root 1 4 If you include the user argument the command displays information about the specified user along with the names and access level of files that user has opened If you use as the specified user the command lists all users Executing the command for user sam migh
169. After you complete this procedure you have increased throughput compared to using only a single interface You can perform this procedure any time you have a configured switch and the physical interfaces available 4 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Prerequisites You need the following items to complete the procedure e A switch that supports manually configurable trunking configured according to the manufacturer s instructions for a multiple mode trunk e Aname for the trunk that meets the following criteria t must begin with a letter t must not contain a space t must not already be in use for a virtual interface Trunk names are case sensitive e Alist of the interfaces you want the trunk to consist of Step To create a trunk in which all interfaces are active at once enter the following command or put it in the in the etc rc file vif create multi trunk interfaces where trunk is the name of the trunk and interfaces is a list of the interfaces that make up the trunk Example The multiple mode trunk shown in Single Mode Trunks was created with the fol lowing command vif creatre multi MultiTrunkl e0 el e2 e3 Creating a Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer Description You use this procedure to create a second level virtual interface on a single filer You follow this procedure when you have available two switches configu
170. CD To locate the MIB on the CD read the contents txt file Installing the MIB Install the MIB file on your network management workstation according to the installation procedure for your workstation so that your workstation can obtain information from the filer about the objects that are part of the MIB Using deprecated single volume objects Single volume objects are deprecated but you can use them for single volume systems as before If you are using a single volume filer you do not need to make changes to use the new MIB Finding multivolume objects The descriptions of the deprecated single volume objects contain the names of the corresponding new multivolume objects For multivolume objects use the new objects rather than the deprecated ones Network Administration 4 3 About MIB Group Contents The top level groups in the custom MIB and the information they contain are described in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 MIB Group Contents Group name Contents cifs Statistics like those displayed by the cifs stat command filesys Information related to the file system including the equiva ent of the maxfiles and df commands and some of the information from the snap list command nfs Statistics like those displayed by the n sstat command including statistics for each client if perclient statistics are enabled The perclient statistics are indexed by client IP addresses product Product level information such as the softwa
171. CIFS Administration 7 1 CIFS limitations Introduction This section describes CIFS limitations when operating on files on the filer User Manager Limitations The Policy menu items and the New Users menu item are permanently disabled Server Manager Limitations The following Server Manager features are not supported stopping and starting services specifying the recipients of alerts Limits on CIFS Open Files Sessions and Shares Limits for the Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N The filer is subject to limits on file access through CIFS Table 7 1 shows access limits for the 720N 740N and 760N filers with at least 120 MB of memory Table 7 1 CIFS File Access Limits Type of access Maximum number Users 14 825 Files 269 500 Locked files 88 960 Shares 29 650 Changing or Viewing the Filer s Description When to Change or View a Filer s Description The description of a filer appears next to its name wherever a machine s description comments appear Initially the filer has no description You might want to change the description to something more informative so that you can distinguish filers from each 7 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide other You might want to view the description of a filer to find out for example what a particular filer does or who is in charge of it Changing a Filer s Description From Server Manager To change the description o
172. CIFS users to the filer at any time The method you use for adding users to the filer depends on whether you are authenticating with a domain controller or the UNIX password database When Authenticating With a Domain Controller To add a user create an account for the CIFS user within your Windows NT domain environment If you want the user to also use UNIX files either create an entry in the etc passwd file on the filer or include the user in the etc usermap cfg file What is the etc usermap cfg file The etc usermap cfg file explicitly maps Windows NT users to the correct UNIX account and UNIX users to a Windows NT account The file can be coded as follows e Asa text file with non ASCII characters encoded in the NFS character set e Asa UNICODE file created using the Windows NT tools Notepad or Microsoft Word The filer automatically detects which of these forms is in use Format of the etc usermap cfg file The format of the etc usermap cfg file is a list of text records in the following format IP qual NT domainN NTUser direction IP qual UnixUser Lines are processed sequentially Format variables Table 7 2 describes the variables in the etc usermap cfg file description Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 7 2 etc usermap cfg Format Variables Variable Description P qual An IP qualifier that the filer uses in matching a user You use an IP q
173. Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 17 System Information and Performance Displaying the Data ONTAP Version How to Display the Data ONTAP Version To display the version of Data ONTAP currently running on a filer use the version command The display shows the version number and the date of the version as follows version NetApp Release 5 3 Fri May 12 03 06 00 PDT 1998 Displaying Filer Configuration Information Use the sysconfig Command The sysconfig command displays information about the filer s hardware configura tion The exact types of information displayed depend on the command options Displaying Disk Information Using sysconfig d The sysconfig d command displays product information about each disk in the filer Displaying RAID Information Using sysconfig r The sysconfig r command displays RAID configuration information about the parity disk data disks and hot spare disks if any This information is useful for the fol lowing purposes Locating a disk referenced in a screen message Refer to Using Disks of Various Sizes in Chapter 3 for more information about disk identifiers System Information and Performance17 1 e Determining how much space on each disk is available to the filer Refer to Understanding Usable Space on Each Disk in Chapter 3 for more information about disk capacity Determining the status of the disk operations such as RAID scrubbing recon struction parity verificatio
174. Credential Cache Entry Is Valid e To display information about every CIFS login attempt use the CIFS login tracing feature as described in Toggling CIFS Login Tracing When to Use the wcc Command You use the wcc command to perform the following tasks Addnames to or remove names from the WAFL credential cache as described in Adding an Entry to the WAFL Credential Cache and Deleting Entries from the WAFL Credential Cache Monitor the WAFL credential cache by displaying statistics about it as described in Displaying WAFL Credential Cache Statistics File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users5 17 Troubleshoot file access and other problems by displaying what name mappings would be as described in Displaying a Mapping Result for a UNIX Name on and Displaying a Mapping Result for a Windows Name The wcc Command Syntax The wcc command has five basic types each with its own function The type is deter mined by the first option as follows wcc a adds a name to the WAFL credential cache wcc d displays statistics about the WAFL credential cache wcc s displays what the mapping of a Windows NT name would be wcc u displays what the mapping of a UNIX name would be wcc x removes entries from the WAFL credential cache The wcc Command Options Each wcc command type has a different set of options as shown in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 wcc Command Options Type Other options Function WCC a u uname i i
175. Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR AND COMMAND REFERENCE GUIDE Information in this document is subject to change without notice O 1998 1999 Network Appliance Inc Licensed to Dell Computer Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden No part of this book covered by copyright may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or storage in an electronic retrieval system without prior written permission of the copyright owner Portions of this product are derived from the Berkeley Net2 release and the 4 4 Lite 2 release which are copyrighted and publicly distributed by The Regents of the University of California Copyright O 1980 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of this product are derived from NetBSD which is copyrighted and publicly distributed by Carnegie Mellon University Copyright O 1994 1995 Carnegie Mellon University All rights reserved Author Chris G Demetriou Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby granted provided that both the copyright notice and its permission notice appear in all copies of the software derivative works or modified versions and any portions thereof and that both notices appear in supporting docu
176. Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 12 Host Name Example Interface Host name Single port Ethernet card in slot O filer O Quad port Ethernet card in slot 1 filer1a file 1b file 1c file 1d Reasons to Follow a Special Recovery Procedure Certain configuration errors can require you to follow a special recovery procedure because e The filer does not have a local text editor e Problems with interface configuration can make the filer inaccessible to clients from which the etc rc file can be edited Procedure When the Filer Does Not Boot If configuration errors prevent the filer from booting from the hard disk try booting from the diskette For more information see the section Booting from System Boot Diskette in Chapter 18 Procedure When Administration Host Cannot Access the Filer If your filer becomes inaccessible from the administration host after you change the etc rc file perform the following steps to recover from the error 1 Enter commands on the console to configure the interface with the correct address 2 Enterthe exportfs command to export the filer root directory to the administra tion host 3 Edit the filer etc rc file from the administration host 4 Reboot the filer f the changes do not correct the problem repeat Steps 1 through 4 Filer Administration Basics 2 21 Core Files About Core Files When a hardware or
177. Dell technical support for instructions Initializing disks destroys all data on your disks Data Hecovery 13 1 When You Do Not Recover Data From Tape Recover a deleted file from tape only if you cannot recover the deleted file from any snapshot on the filer If the file is in a snapshot copying the file to the active file sys tem is faster than recovering the file from tape Different Methods for Recovering Data The filer supports these methods for recovering data that was backed up by the filer s dump command Using the restore command on the filer to restore the file from a local or remote tape drive If you use a remote tape drive the host for the tape drive must support the rmt protocol e Using the UNIX ufsrestore command on a client that supports the SunOS 5 x Solaris 2 x uf sdump format CAUTION Use the Solaris ufsrestore command only if your filer runs NFS exclusively If your filer runs the CIFS protocol do not use the Solaris l ufsrestore command Doing so results in data loss What Data Cannot Be Recovered The restore command cannot recover data that was backed up by commands issued on other systems For example do not try to use the filer s restore com mand to recover a tape file created by the Solaris uf sdump command UNIX Flle Permissions and Windows NT ACLs A file recovered by the restore command has the same UNIX file permissions and Windows NT ACLs as it did when it was backed up If you restore a fil
178. How ShapMittor MVorks oe ERG E EC bed e d ode eds 16 2 Command and Configuration File for Controlling SnapMirror 16 2 How the Filer Creates a Baseline Version of the Mirror 16 2 How the Filer Updates the Mirror 0000 02 e cee eee 16 3 Number of Volume Copy Operations SnapMirror Generates 16 3 What Happens After You Replicate a Volume n n saaana anaana anana 16 3 Differences Between a Mirror and a Regular VoluMe 16 3 Snapshots Created During Data Replication 0 2000000 16 4 Naming Conventions for Snapshots Used by SnapMirror 16 4 EXaImpl8s a ae eor ee entium mau tes etur qoo eiut WA a tech a 16 4 Consequences of Deleting a Required Snapshot 16 5 How SnapMirror Works With Quotas 2 2 0 0 00002 eee 16 6 Quotas on th Mior eS L3 Pe Mahe FER EASA RI Rave US oes 16 6 How to Apply the Same Quota Restrictions on the Former Mirror 16 6 How SnapMirror Works With the Dump Command 0 5 16 6 How to Back Up Data in the Mirror llis 16 6 Effect of the Dump Command on the Mirror Update Schedule 16 6 The etc snapmirror allow File sisse 16 7 Purpose of the snapmirror allow File nnna anaua aaaea aaaea aaa 16 7 When You Can Modify the snapmirror allow File o 16 7 Format of the snapmirror allow File oils 16 7 Exatipl amp du o rte
179. IP address Marks a network interface up This may be used to enable a network inter face after an ifconfig down It happens automatically when setting the first address on a network interface If the network interface was reset when pre viously marked down the hardware will be re initialized Establishes an additional network address for this network interface This is sometimes useful when changing network numbers and one wishes to accept packets addressed to the old network interface It is required when creating IP virtual host addresses alias Remove a network address for this network interface trusted Specifies that the network to which the network interface is attached is trusted relative to firewall style security default Command Reference A 47 ifconfig untrusted Specifies that the network to which the network interface is attached is not trusted relative to firewall style security wins Specifies that the network interface is to be registered with Windows Inter net Name Services default Such registration is only performed when CIFS is running and at least one WINS server has been configured wins Specifies that the network interface is not to be registered with Windows Internet Name Services SEE ALSO hosts networks A 48 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide ifstat NAME ifstat display device level statistics for network interfaces
180. IS etc resolv conf DESCRIPTION The resolver configuration file contains information that is read by the resolver routines The file is designed to be human readable and contains a list of key words with values that provide various types of resolver information The different configuration options are nameserver address This specifies the Internet address in dot notation of a name server that the resolver should query Up to 3 name servers may be listed one per keyword If there are multiple servers the resolver queries them in the order listed When a query to a name server on the list times out the resolver will move to the next one until it gets to the bottom of the list It will then restart from the top retrying all the name servers until a maximum number of retries are made search domain list This specifies the search list for host name lookup The search list is normally determined from the local domain name by default it begins with the local domain name then successive parent domains that have at least two components in their names This may be changed by listing the desired domain search path following the search keyword with spaces or tabs separating the names Most resolver queries will be attempted using each component of the search path in turn until a match is found Note that this process may be slow and will generate a lot of network traffic if the servers for the listed domains are not local and that queri
181. If you used one dump command to back up each volume follow the procedure in Example of Restoring a Subtree to restore each volume The only difference is that you use vol volume name as the directory to which the backup is restored If Each Volume Was Backed Up as Subtrees or qtrees If you used separate dump commands to back up files directories and qtrees that make up each volume restore each file directory and qtree For example if the root volume contains two directories vol vol0 etc and vol vol0 home and you used the dump commands to back them up separately perform the following steps to restore the entire volume In this example the files are restored from a local tape drive 1 If you are not restoring qtrees go to Step 4 If you want to restore gtrees go to Step 2 2 Create directories on the filer using the qt ree command that is used as the top of the subtrees to be restored Examples qtree etc qtree home 3 Set the security for each qtree created in Step 2 4 Install the tape that contains the level O backup for the vol vol0 etc subtree in the local tape drive NOTE The restore command doesn t support incremental only restores You must begin the restoration from a level 0 dump 5 Enter the sysconfig t command on the filer to determine the name of the tape device 6 Enter the following command on the filer restore rfD rst0a vol vol0 etc This command restores the backup in rst 0a to the vol vol0
182. LT7000 rst0l rewind device format is 81633 bpi 40 GB w comp nrstO0l no rewind device format is 81633 bpi 40 GB w comp urstO0l unload reload device format is 81633 bpi 40 GB w comp rst m rewind device format is 85937 bpi 35 GB nrst m no rewind device format is 85937 bpi 35 GB urstOm unload reload device format is 85937 bpi 35 GB rst h rewind device format is 85937 bpi 50 GB w comp nrst0h no rewind device format is 85937 bpi 50 GB w comp urst0h unload reload device format is 85937 bpi 50 GB w comp rst0a rewind device format is 85937 bpi 70 GB w comp nrst a no rewind device format is 85937 bpi 70 GB w comp urst0a unload reload device format is 85937 bpi 70 GB w comp Examples Of the sysconfig t Command for a Nonqualified Tape Drive The following example of the sysconfig t command displays information about a nonqualified tape drive that the filer has not registered as a clone sysconfig t Tape drive 6 5 DLT9000 Non qualified tape drive The following example of the sysconfig t command displays information about a nonqualified tape drive that the filer has registered as a clone sysconfig t Tape drive 6 5 DLT9000 emulates Digital DLT7000 Example of the sysconfig m Command The following example of the sysconfig m command displays information about a tape library attached to the filer sysconfig m Media changer 6 6 BHTi Quad 7 mc0 media chang
183. Lab Add the lines with your information even if you do not use SNMP This informa tion is sent in the notification and will help Dell support contact you proactively in case of a problem Command ReferenceA 163 DNS NAME DNS Domain Name System DESCRIPTION Domain Name Service provides information about hosts on a network This ser vice has two parts a resolver which requests information and a nameserver which provides it Data ONTAP 5 3 supports only the resolver When the filer needs to resolve a host address it first looks at the etc nsswitch conf see nsswitch conf file to get the order in which various name services are to be consulted If the name services before DNS fail in their lookup and DNS is enabled then the DNS name server is contacted for address resolution DNS can be enabled on the filer by running the setup command see setup or by manually editing the configuration files as described below If DNS is enabled by running the setup command then the DNS domain name needs to be entered Enabling DNS without the setup command 1 Create the etc resolv conf file see resolv conf with up to 3 nameservers Each line contains the keyword nameserver followed by the IP address of the server For example nameserver 192 9 200 1 nameserver 192 9 201 1 nameserver 192 9 202 1 2 Edit the etc rc file see rc to make sure that the option specifying the DNS domain name is set and the option to enable DNS is on
184. N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide vif The following example displays statistics about virtual interface 1 filer vif stat vif1 Virtual interface trunk vif1 ebd ebc ebb eba In Out In Out In Out In Out 8637076 47801540 158 159 7023083 38300325 8477195 47223431 1617 9588 0 0 634 3708 919 5400 1009 5928 0 0 925 5407 1246 7380 1269 7506 0 0 862 5040 1302 7710 1293 7632 0 0 761 4416 964 5676 920 5388 0 0 721 4188 981 5784 1098 6462 0 0 988 5772 1003 5898 2212 13176 0 0 769 4500 1216 7185 1315 7776 0 0 743 4320 530 3108 SEE ALSO ifconfig Command ReferenceA 105 vol NAME vol commands for managing volumes displaying volume status and copying volumes SYNOPSIS vol command argument DESCRIPTION The vol commands manage a volume apply options to a volume or display the status of one or more volumes Also some vol commands copy volumes on the same filer or between two filers You can use the volume copy feature only if you have purchased the volcopy license and entered the license code for a filer that is involved in a vol copy command USAGE vol create volname r raidsize ndisks Q size I language code d diskname creates a new volume with the name vo name The volume name can contain letters numbers and the underscore character but the first character must be a letter or under Score You can create up to 23 volumes on each filer The r raidsize argument specifies the ma
185. ON download copies Data ONTAP 5 3 executable files from the etc boot directory to the filer s boot block on the disks from which the filer boots To install a new version of Data ONTAP 5 3 extract the files for the new release onto the filer from either a CIFS or an NFS client that has write access to the filer s root directory For more information about how to install files for the new release see the upgrade instructions that accompany each release After the filer reboots you can verify the version of the newly installed software with the version command FILES etc boot directory of Data ONTAP 5 3 executables etc boot netapp alpha symbolic link to current version of Data ONTAP 5 3 for filers with Alpha processors etc boot fc hard alpha boot FCode for filers with Alpha processors etc boot 1 alpha second stage boot code for filers with Alpha processors SEE ALSO version boot A 28 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide dump NAME dump file system backup SYNOPSIS dump options arguments subtree DESCRIPTION The dump command examines files in a subtree and writes to tape the files that need to be backed up The Data ONTAP 5 3 dump command differs slightly from the standard UNIX dump but the output format is compatible with SunOS 4 x Solaris 1 x and SunOS 5 x Solaris 2 x dump Data ONTAP 5 3 dump can write to its standard output most useful with rsh from a UNIX sy
186. On Creating a qtree in the Root Volume If pathname does not begin with a slash the qtree is created in the root volume For example qtree create news creates the qtree vol vol0 news where vol vol0 is the default name for the root vol ume For information about volumes see Volume Concepts in Chapter 3 Creating a qtree in a Volume Other Than the Root Volume If you want to create a qtree for example news in a particular volume for example users use the following command qtree create vol users news 10 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Modifying the Security Style of a qtree When to Change the Security Style of a qtree There are many circumstance under which you might want to change qtree style Two examples are e Because the default security style of a qtree is that of its root volume you might want to change the security style of a gtree after creating it to the style you want You might also want to change the security style to accommodate other users or files for example if you start with an NTFS qtree and subsequently want to include UNIX files and users you might want to change the qtree to a mixed qtree How to Change the Security Style of a qtree To change the security style of a qtree use the following commana qtree security pathname mixed ntfs unix Example With a qtree To change the security model of vol users docs to be
187. Option s 2 vee Set a ee Lt en cem el Mane s 19 13 Default Jv eae koe GES SER Ta Boe Ve eho da 19 13 DESCUPUON eR 19 13 xliv The timed max skew Option iisiisleise eee 19 13 BID CR 19 13 D6SerIDtlOn es oe tels eo e i d e C D uet 19 14 The timed proto Option sex ssuso a A OAS GAGS Be PRS A Ree IER 19 14 2 6Ta lt io REL dA p Ue EE RE nee eR Pita Rd 19 14 DESCPUON zs eden ote ad attt tet Reb A Ban eed wate Rn 19 14 The timedisched Option amar nd v RP Pee wey 19 14 Detaultazszdh id etu ea rs eor dol bol sf 19 14 DESCANSO O oe Pete tin pn 19 14 Rhe timed servers Options s li 19 15 Default dirias ie dace pot anal sese n wk a Nae wal n hand tle 19 15 26S CFI DtOFIvd S omes o eet dta Beart tur Sn ly deut dios auo Pian mess bos 19 15 Vol rne Options cud do ee b re de t te ed dd 19 15 What the volume Options Do n naasa anae e 19 15 The Mina OPON raes tete ha E edule we dee eed ad edd 19 15 Default ii iata wack aon scie uter tele enn LA e Wale al e dts 19 15 26SCTI DOTT Seo de D PR Ve yank ER FO E a 19 15 heno atimeupdate Options x i nc S Crete ke es 9 15 Detau lt 1 8s eos E octo gE 19 15 DESCHPUON s ha cita rena aaa ERU ER da 19 16 The noSnap Options uds puta a ac ha d pda T quu 9 16 Detalla et teat queda eh fiot ie con vs aer Pvt ats 19 16 Description 5t ber t rr REESE rs dE DL TM 9 16 Thie nosnapdir Options ue de e em dnce cecidere e Neid 9 16 Detaultes d seo cured
188. Options The filer recognizes two commands options and vol options to set options The options Command describes the syntax for the options command The vol options Command describes the syntax for the vol options command The options Command What the options Command Does When used interactively the options command displays option values or changes the filer s behavior temporarily the system returns to the state specified in the etc rc file when rebooted To make changes permanent you must include the options commands in the etc rc file Syntax of the options Command The syntax of the options command is as follows options option value If you omit a value for an option the command displays the current value of the option Table 2 17 describes the variables Table 2 17 Variables of the options Command Variable Description option the name of the option value the value of the option Example of the options Command The following command specifies the recipients of automatic email options autosupport to customer company com 2 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The vol options Command vol options Command Configures Volume Level Behavior You use the vol options command to configure volume level behavior You can use this command only with volume options which are listed in the section Volume Options in Chapter 19 Changes ma
189. Prerequisites To complete this procedure you need the language code of the language you want to use You can get the language code from the table in Languages Supported Caution Changing the language after the volume contains files can cause some of the NFS encodings to be invalid and is not recommended Step To set the language and character set that a volume uses to store file names enter the following command vol lang volume langcode volume is the name of the volume whose language you want to change langcode is the code for the language you want the volume to use Creating a Volume That Uses a Specified Language Description This procedure creates a volume with a specified language You use this procedure when you are creating a volume but want to use a language different from the 5 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide language of the root volume which is the default language You use this procedure any time you want to create a volume After you complete the procedure the filer stores file names in the volume you cre ated using a character set that best fits the language you selected Prerequisites To complete this procedure you need the language code of the language you want to use You can get the language code from Table 5 2 in Languages Supported Caution Changing the language of a volume after the volume contains files can cause some of the NFS
190. RAID fea ture enable the filer to continue to run without losing data although the filer s performance is affected Replace the failed disk as soon as possible because a sec ond disk failure in the same RAID group causes the entire file system to be lost When a disk fails the filer logs a warning message in the etc messages file and to the system console every hour notifying you of the number of hours before the sys tem shuts down The shutdown ensures that you notice the disk failure You can restart the filer with out fixing the disk but the filer continues to shut itself off at the specified intervals until you repair the problem By default the filer shuts down after 24 hours You can change this time interval using theoption raid timeout command the argument is the time in hours that the system runs before automatic shutdown The system shuts down after the specified period if it is running in degraded mode A filer is in degraded mode if either of the following conditions exist One disk in any RAID group has failed e The batteries on the NVRAM card are low if the filer is a PCl based system With a hot spare disk f you reserve one or more disks as hot spare disks when you configure your filer the filer also enters degraded mode after a disk failure However the filer immediately begins rebuilding the missing data in the background on the hot spare disk with minimal interruption to file service The filer logs
191. RAM battery triggers notification with BATTERY LOW This event also sends the short note mail A 160 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 10 autosupport If a disk shelf reports errors notification is sent with SHELF FAULT This event also sends the short note mail If one of the power supplies in the filer fails notification is sent with POWER SUPPLY DEGRADED This event also sends the short note mail If the system shuts down because it has detected that the temperature inside the filer is too high notification is sent with OVER TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN This event also sends the short note mail System reboot notification is sent with REBOOT This event also sends the short note mail The setup command does the following for the autosupport feature If an adminhost is specified it adds an entry for mailhost with the same address as the adminhost to the etc hosts file The following information is sent 1 n EE e 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Generation date and time stamp Software version System ID Hostname SNMP contact name if specified SNMP location if specified Output from sysconfig v The system serial number if the system has one Currently held license codes Output from options Output from ifconfig a Output from nfsstat c Output from cifs stat cifs sessions and cifs shares included if CIFS is l
192. RE 3 19 About the Style Option iliis 3 20 About the exprOpton 23 24 2045 Shee ata 3 20 Boolean Expressions to Use With the expr Option 3 21 Example of the expr Option daeu t reide gerk a aE ee ara a Ee iE 3 21 Volume Reversion Using SnapRestore nnana anaana aae 3 21 About SnapRestore e a e T n aa ce eee at 3 21 How SnapRestore Works llle 3 22 What Snaphest re Reverts us se bbs domas n Maa mad b a 3 22 Files That SnapRestore Cannot Recover 0 00 cece eee 3 22 How SnapRestore Affects Recent SnapShotS oooooooooooo 3 22 Typical Applications of SnapRestore 6 0 eel 3 22 Considerations Before Using SnapRestore 0 000000 3 23 How SnapRestore Works With SnapMirror 00000 eee 3 23 Effects of Reverting a Root Volume 00000 ce eee 3 24 Effects of SnapRestore on Filer Backup and Recovery 3 24 Reverting a Volume to a Selected SnapShot 0 02000000 3 25 Descrip ze esce ue ERRASSE ha NEA DE Ab ba RAS 3 25 Prerequisite Ssn ti LL Mh eS 3 25 Cautions s enaiga a t uA I UE ei utu tena ie 3 25 STO ii E TA ata ean Pe E RCA 3 25 Network Administration 4 1 Working With Large Files 2 odere back ele a aed 4 1 About Large Fllesc utd vil cid sts dE a ER e 4 1 Software Requirements 20 0000 eee 4 1 How toEnable NESw 3 t othe Shee teh i eden ot es id dus 4 1 Using SNMP cuestan t et de
193. Rules For Exporting Volumes And Directories Export Each Volume Separately If the filer has multiple volumes you must export each volume separately you cannot export all volumes by specifying vo1 as the exported directory Example The following lines show how to export the volumes on a filer that has three volumes vol vol0 root filer access mixer blender vol users root filer access mixer blender vol builds root filer access mixer blender Nonexample The following line shows an invalid entry for the etc exports directory for a filer that has three volumes vol cannot be used by itself as a path vol root filer access blender mixer Filer Must Resolve Host Names To export directories to hosts the filer must be able to resolve host names into IP addresses Host name resolution can take place through DNS name resolution e by using the etc hosts file on the filer root volume Refer to Host Name Resolution in Chapter 4 for more information about host name to IP address resolution Cannot Restrict Access By Host Neither the filer nor NFS provide a way to specify hosts that cannot mount the filer To restrict access to exports you must export volumes and directories in a manner that specifically includes those hosts that should be allowed to mount them Exclusion occurs when a host is not specifically included in the list of hosts authorized to mount exported volumes and directories Yo
194. S 18 19 console encoding ValueS o oooocoooooocoo sss 19 18 xlix CHAPTER 1 Introducing Dell Filers About Filers What a Filer Is A filer is a hardware and software system It acts on network requests from clients and processes them by writing data to or retrieving data from disks in PowerVault 700N Disk Array Enclosure DAE storage systems that are connected to it The soft ware that enables the filer to perform these tasks is the Data ONTAP 5 3 operating system Components of a Filer A filer consists of the following major components listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Major Components of a Filer Component Function Filer main unit The piece of hardware that receives and sends data PowerVault Hardware that holds disks and is connected to 700N storage the filer systems Data ONTAP Software that is the operating system for the 5 3 filer Filer and Filer Main Unit Often the filer main unit is referred to simply as a filer What a Filer Does A filer provides the features described in Table 1 2 Introducing Dell Filers 1 1 Table 1 2 Filer Features Feature Description Network file service Multiprotocol file sharing Data protection Autosupport The filer enables users on client workstations to create delete modify and access files stored on it Client workstations are connected to the filer through network connections Clients can use the following protocols to
195. S 1 Produce default file usage breakdowns for snapshot hourly 1 of volume volo filestats volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 2 Produce file usage breakdowns by monthly age values filestats volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 ages 30D 60D 90D 120D 150D 180D A 40 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide filestats 3 Produce file usage breakdowns for inodes whose size is less than 100000 bytes and whose access time is less than a day old filestats volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 expr size 100000 amp amp atimeage 86400 4 Produce a breakdown of the total number of files and their total size You can control the set of ages and sizes that get used for this breakdown with the ages and sizes arguments The output also contains a breakdown of file usage by userid and group id filestats snapshot hourly 1 volume volO NOTES Currently the expression evaluating code does not do any optimizations so although you can use arithmetic expressions it is most efficient if you do not Of course it s most efficient if you don t use any expression at all Command Reference A 41 halt NAME halt stop the filer SYNOPSIS halt d t mins DESCRIPTION halt flushes all cached data to disk and drops into the monitor NFS clients can maintain use of a file over a halt or reboot although experienc ing a failure to respond during that time but CIFS clients cannot do so safely
196. S df i pathname DESCRIPTION df displays statistics about the amount of free disk space in one or all volumes on the filer All sizes are reported in 1024 byte blocks The pathname parameter is the path name to a volume If it is specified df reports only on the corresponding volume otherwise it reports on every on line volume For each volume df displays statistics about snapshots on a separate line from statistics about the active file system The snapshot line reports the amount of space consumed by all the snapshots in the system Blocks that are referenced by both the active file system and by one or more snapshots are counted only in the active file system line not in the snapshot line If snapshots consume more space than has been reserved for them by the snap reserve command see snap then the excess space consumed by snapshots is reported as used by the active file system as well as by snapshots In this case it may appear that more blocks have been used in total than are actually present in the file system With the i option df displays statistics on the number of free inodes EXAMPLES The following example shows file system disk space usage filer df Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on vol volO 4339168 1777824 2561344 41 vol volO vol vol0 snapshot 1084788 956716 128072 88 vol vol0 snapshot If snapshots consume more than 10096 of the space reserved for them then either the snapshot
197. S client on the filer The DNS domain must be set and the etc resolv conf file must exist prior to enabling DNS ip path mtu discovery enable Enables disables path MTU discovery it is currently used only by TCP Path MTU discovery allows a host to discover the maximum transmission unit i e the largest link level packet that can be trans mitted over a path from that host to another host This means that the filer needn t choose a conservative packet size for a TCP con nection to a host not on the same net as the filer but can attempt to discover the largest packet size that can make it to the other host without fragmentation httpd enable Enables HTTP access to the filer httpd admin enable Enables HTTP access to the administration area of the filer via a pri vate URL any URL beginning with na admin is mapped to the directory etc http Thus a man page on the filer filer with the file A 64 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide options name etc http man name can be accessed with the URL http filerlna admin man name httpd log max file size Specifies the maximum size that the HTTP log file etc log httpd log can grow to The default is 2147483647 which is the larg est file size that many clients support httpd rootdir Specifies the complete pathname of the root directory that con tains files and subdirectories for HTTP access httpd timeout Specifies the minimum
198. SYNOPSIS ifstat z a Interface name DESCRIPTION The ifstat command displays statistics about packets received and sent on a specified network interface or on all network interfaces The statistics are cumu lative since the filer was booted The z argument clears the statistics The a argument displays statistics for all network interfaces including the virtual host and the loopback address If you don t use the a argument specify the name of a network interface EXAMPLES The following command displays network statistics for an Ethernet interface named e7 ifstat e7 The following command displays network statistics for the loopback address ifstat lo The following command displays network statistics for all network interfaces on the filer ifstat a SEE ALSO ifconfig Command Reference A 49 license NAME license license Data ONTAP 5 3 services SYNOPSIS license service code DESCRIPTION The license command enables you to enter license codes for specific Data ONTAP 5 3 services The license codes are provided by Dell With no arguments the license command prints the current list of licensed services and their codes It also shows the services that are not licensed for your filer The filer is shipped with license codes for all purchased services so you need to enter the license command only after you purchase a new service or after you reinstall the file system To disable a license enter the co
199. Specifies whether time changes initiated by timed should be logged to the console timed max skew timed proto timed sched Specifies the maximum amount of skew between the time reported by the time server and the filer s time that we will allow when synchronizing the time If the difference in the time reported by the server and the filer s time is greater than this value the filer will not synchronize to the time reported by the time server The maximum skew is specified in seconds suffix s minutes suffix m or hours suffix h Defaults to 30m Specifies the protocol used to synchronize time rdate specifies the rdate sntp specifies the Simple Network Time Protocol Specifies the timed synchronization schedule There are several pre defined schedules hourly synchronize every hour the default multihourly synchronize every 6 hours daily synchronize every day at midnight Custom schedules may also be specified by giving the number of minutes or hours between time synchronization Minutes are spec ified by digits followed by an m hours are specified by digits followed by an h For example options timed sched 2h will cause time to be synchronized every two hours To avoid overburdening the time server the filer randomly selects the exact time of the synchronization within a 20 minute window timed servers Specifies up to five time servers used by the time daemon Time servers are contacted in the order speci
200. T DOMAIN WINS Server 272 320 0 4 PC style Access Control is being used Using domain controller WNT DOMAIN PDC for authentication PC user shares iles SMITHPC qsmith 1 i PETERSPC zpeters 2 3 Displaying Information About One User To display the information for a particular user specify the user name in the com mand for example cifs sessions ghopper users shares files opened HALEY HOME1 ghopper ENG USERS Read denyW B GHOPPER SRC PROD COMMON HTTPD httpd_fast c 1j HALEY PC ghopper NG USERS Tj Displaying Connected User Security Information To display security information for each connected user use cifs sessions with the s option After the first two lines detailed information for each connected user is displayed The following example lists only one user cifs sessions s users Security Information HOLARD PC root KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK UNIX uid 0 user is a member of group daemon 1 user is a member of group www 204 user is a member of group well 0 user is a member of group http 500 7 36 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NT membership WNT DOMAIN root WNT DOMAIN Domain Users WNT DOMAIN Domain Admins WNT DOMAIN SU Users WNT DOMAIN Installers BUILTIN Users BUILTIN Administrators User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users KEK KKK KKK ck kc k
201. URL how filer translates 8 8 usable space on disks 3 4 user quotas creating 11 7 users CIFS adding to filer 7 4 v version command 17 1 version of Data ONTAP displaying 17 1 vif command 4 22 virtual firewall 8 5 virtual host addresses mapping 8 6 virtual hosting enabling 8 5 setting up 8 5 virtual interfaces defined 4 20 names 4 20 second level 4 21 4 24 trunking 4 21 vol 5 12 vol command add 3 12 create 3 9 3 11 5 13 destroy 3 14 lang 5 11 offline 3 13 online 3 13 options 3 12 options raidsize 3 9 rename 3 14 status 3 12 5 13 vol copy start command 15 5 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide vol copy throttle command 15 10 vol create command 5 13 vol status command 17 2 vol status d command 17 2 vol status command 5 13 vol status r command 17 3 vol status v command 17 3 vol copy throttle option 15 10 19 20 volume vo vo vo vo creating with specified language 5 12 setting language 5 12 ume copy operation numbers 15 9 ume copying checking status of 15 8 how to stop 15 10 possible errors during 15 8 recommendation for 15 4 requirements for 15 3 lume options minra 19 15 nosnap 19 16 nosnapdir 19 16 nvfail 4 29 raidsize 19 17 root 19 17 snapmirrored 3 13 vol copy throttle 19 20 lumes adding disks to 3 12 adding foreign 3 13 a
202. Users on a Filer in Chapter 7 NFS requests Only the user s UID GID and UNIX style permission bits of the file or directory determine user access mixed Both NTFS and UNIX style permissions None are permitted The security style of a file is the style most recently used to set per missions on that file See the NTFS information in Types of Security Styles CAUTION Changing NTFS permis sions on a file recomputes UNIX permissions on thot file Changing UNIX permissions or own ership on a file deletes any NTFS permissions on thot file 10 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide qtree File Access Models Kinds of File Access Models You can use the following four file access models in working with qtrees e CIFS user accessing a file with Windows NT security e CIFS user accessing a file with UNIX security e NFS user accessing a file with Windows NT security e NFS user accessing a file with UNIX security CIFS Access to Windows Files CIFS accesses to Windows files obey Windows security rules CIFS Access to UNIX Files The following principles apply to accessing UNIX files from CIFS e All CIFS users are mapped to UNIX UIDs and GIDs e File accesses use UNIX security or PC security as chosen during thecifs setup program UNIx style permissions are determined by the rights associated with the UNIX UID and GID PCestyle permissions are determined by
203. Windows or the filer that maps to the same path name as the CIFS HOMEDIR share 2 From either Windows or the filer assign each user the appropriate access per missions to other users home directories CIFS Administration 7 19 Example From the Filer The following example shows how to create an additional share assign user access rights to the share and display the share information from the filer command line If authentication is through the etc passwd file UNIX permissions are shown other wise Windows NT permissions appear cifs shares add enghomes vol vol1 homes Y comment Readable home directories Readable home directories cifs access enghomes g engineering r x cifs shares Name Mount Point Description enghome vol voll homes Readable home directories engineering g r x CS vol vol0 Remote Administration BUILTIN Administrators Full Control HOME vol vol0 home Default Share everyone Full Control CIFS HOMEDIR vol voll homes Home Directories everyone Full Control Result Users in the engineering group can read all home directories in HOMES on the root volume which corresponds to the share defined by theoptions cifs home dir command However they can only write to their own home directories which reside in the CIFS HOMEDIR share Assigning and Changing Access Rights When to Assign or Change Access Rights After you create a share you define the user or group access rig
204. You might want to do this to avoid the following problems e UNIX lowercase names might contain uppercase characters when converted to CIFS names e Some CIFS clients changing the case of NFS file names on the filer making them inaccessible from NFS To change back to having the filer preserve the case of CIFS file names follow the procedure in Preserving the Case of CIFS File Names Forcing CIFS File Names to Lowercase Description This procedure enables you to force all CIFS file names to be stored on the filer in lowercase You should do this if you have CIFS clients so that they do not change the case of NFS file names on the filer that were originally lowercase If you perform this procedure you should do so before Windows files appear on the filer After you complete this procedure the filer stores all CIFS names in lowercase and does not preserve case 5 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Step To force all CIFS file names created by CIFS to be lowercase enter the following command options cifs save case off Preserving the Case of CIFS File Names Description This procedure enables you to return from forcing all file names to be stored in lower case to the default behavior of preserving the case of CIFS file names You perform this procedure when you want to return to the default behavior Caution File names that were converted to lowercase are not
205. a 10 Mbps half or full duplex or 100 Mbps half or full duplex link and set the network interface accordingly when it is configured up If the other end does not support auto negotiation and full duplex operation is desired it must be explicitly set using the mediatype command On a 10 100 Mbps interface the system will auto detect a 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps link and set the link speed accordingly when the network inter face is configured up The hardware is not currently capable of autodetecting full duplex interfaces so if full duplex operation is desired it must be explic itly set using the mediatype command Only the 10 100 Mbps interfaces are capable of full duplex operation mtusize size Specifies the MTU maximum transmission unit to use for the network interface netmask mask up alias The mask includes the network part of the local address and the subnet part which is taken from the host field of the address The mask can be specified as a single hexadecimal number with a leading Ox with a dot notation Inter net address or with a pseudo network name listed in the network table etc networks The mask contains 1 s for the bit positions in the 32 bit address that are to be used for the network and subnet parts and O s for the host part The mask should contain at least the standard network portion and the subnet field should be contiguous with the network portion A default netmask is chosen according to the class of the
206. a Oan cc etr a 5 21 Prerequisites sm sean RUE WERE RE bid GRAY pire rueda qu 5 21 CAT OT s cadet O cs SN UR ATI 5 21 SIGDAh E LU d Re REE eM EO UEM HUM EEN A ptos spi UT 5 21 XX Displaying WAFL Credential Cache Statistics oiii usn 5 21 DSSGFIDLOD eee AE d ordei e cet reb TEE SUN E E SR h 5 21 O be s oae ROI CR EG RD pod ol ty 5 21 Sample Outpt xke A LAT EA A eS UU 5 22 Displaying a Mapping Result for a UNIX Name iilis elles 5 24 Description Aot poteit orta ster etse teet ceca o a hence aei Auris sata 5 24 SMA bbe beware eret ga bu di E d n ER 5 24 Sample Outpt 3 1 a d cct ata 5 24 Displaying a Mapping Result for a Windows Name ooo oooo ooo o o 5 25 DESCAPUI Nut id MSN 5 25 SUD X o pres adda wha dores al a donee te pia 5 25 Sample Outputs 4 ceno oe EH DOS emer pee 5 25 Teggling CIFS Login Tracing xs lace reete ed 5 26 DescriptiOr s rs tice e e e o Bott et eot oet e os Men 5 26 Catia or ence retenta A A ts ES 5 26 Step to Turn On CIFS Login Tracing tpe me re oa 5 26 Sample Outputs ice A A ES e a us qu 5 26 Step to Turn Off CIES LOGIN Tracing ior RR RAISES ERA 5 26 Chapter 6 NFS Administration oooooooooooooo 6 1 Managing NFS EXDOLIS 5 Mi ts Rd 6 1 Introducing the etc exports File 2 2 0 e 6 1 etc exports Controls Client Access to Directories o o o ooooo o 6 1 Format for ete exports Entries xs eA dent eA A Eden 6 1 Filer Directory Path Eormma
207. a remains unchanged from day to day For example a user with a 10 MB home directory might change only 100 KB to 500 KB on a typical day When files change slowly snapshots can be kept on line for days or even weeks before they begin to consume unacceptable amounts of disk space In other directo ries data changes quickly If a large percentage of data changes every day there might not be room to keep snapshots for even a few hours To accommodate the needs of different users create multiple volumes on the filer In this way you can apply different snapshot schedules to different volumes In summary when the filer creates a snapshot it doesn t use any disk space but as files in the active file system are changed or deleted the snapshot uses more and more disk space How often files are changed and deleted determines the number of snapshots the filer can create and the length of time the snapshots can be kept Snapshots 9 3 Snapshot Commands and Options Snapshot Commands The commands related to snapshots are listed in Table 9 1 If the volume name is omitted in any of these commands the command applies to the root volume Table 9 1 Snapshot Commands Command Meaning snap list volume name Lists all available snapshots snap create volume name Creates a snapshot with a spec snapshot name ified name snap delete volume name Deletes a specified snapshot snapshot name snap rename volume name from to Renames a snapsh
208. a single volume file system Network Problems Detect Network Problems Using ping at the Filer Console You can detect network problems by going to the filer console and using the ping command 18 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide What the ping Command Does The ping command checks whether the filer can communicate with other hosts on the network and that other hosts can communicate with the filer How to Troubleshoot Network Problems If the filer should be able to connect with a host but ping does not respond with a message indicating that the host is alive complete the following steps to trouble shoot the problem 1 Check that the network cable is tightly connected to the proper interface connector Use the ifconfig command to verify that the IP address and netmask are set correctly and that the up and running flags are displayed Use the arp a command to confirm that the filer has the correct P to Ethernet address map for the host you are trying to reach Use the netstat r command to examine the routing tables Use the netstat i command to check for excessive errors on the interfaces If you see excessive input errors ierrs or output errors oerrs check the network connections on both ends of the connection Bad transceivers or network hubs can sometimes introduce errors into the network Collisions reported by net stat are a concern only if the filer d
209. able 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 2 15 Table 2 16 Table 2 17 Table 2 18 Table 2 19 Table 2 20 Table 2 21 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 level Parameter Keywords llle 2 24 action Parameterss o ese e o P te de e E 2 24 Variables of the options Command 0000 00 ee 2 26 Variables of the vol options Command 00000 2 27 autosupport Email Trigger Events 000 00505 2 28 List ot timied OpDtOFHS argia mima o UR tS e s C 2 33 license Command Service or Feature o ooooooooocooo oo 2 37 Valid Values for timetype Option eise 3 19 Valid File Attributes for expr Option o ooooooooooooo o 3 20 expr Option Boolean Expressions l l lesse 3 21 MIB Group Contents ia as tdt tdeo tg teles t die ted 4 4 Parameter Descriptions 0 eee eee 4 5 Default Search Order for Maps 0000000 eee eee eee 4 7 Format Descriptions for a Search Order anaana 00 0000 000 ee 4 7 Media Types on an Ethernet Interface o o ooooo 4 16 Default M TU SIZ6S uina sen tere t ttd e i tet rats Rein 4 16 Using the ifconfig Command 00 0000 eee eee ee 4 17 Enabling the nvfail Option 0 0 00000 cee eee eee 4 30 Character Sets Supported 0 eee 5 8 Su
210. able generic user access use the opt ions described in the previous table with a as account name Displaying a Filer s Shares Ways to Share Folders If you want to create a folder to be shared by CIFS clients do one of the following From Windows NT use Server Manager as described in Using Server Manager to Display a Filer s Shares e From the filer command line use the cifs shares command to display share information as described in Using the cifs Shares Command to Display A Filer s Shares Using Server Manager to Display a Filer s Shares To display a filers s shares with Server Manager and get detailed information perform the following steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 7 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears 4 Choose Computer Shared Directories Result The Shared Directories window appears 5 To get additional details about a share double click a share name Result The Share Properties window appears Using the cifs shares Command to Display a Filer s Shares To display the filer s list of shares from the filer s comm
211. address are flushed from the arp table if they haven t been referenced in the past 20 minutes A permanent entry is not flushed If the words following s include the keyword pub the entry will be pub lished i e this system will act as an ARP server responding to requests for hostname even though the host address is not its own SEE ALSO ifconfig A 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME cifs cifs summary of cifs commands SYNOPSIS Command Summary This is a list of the subcommands of the cifs command cifs access cifs comment cifs lookup cifs restart cifs setup cifs sessions cifs shares cifs stat cifs terminate cifs testdc SEE ALSO Modifies share level Access Control List ACL entries Displays modifies the CIFS server description Translates user group names into SIDs and vice versa Restarts CIFS if it has been shut down with cifs terminate Configures CIFS service Displays current configuration and current connections Displays modifies the CIFS exports Displays operational statistics Shuts down CIFS or logs off a single station Tests the filer s connection to domain controllers cifs access cifs comment cifs lookup cifs restart cifs setup cifs sessions cifs shares cifs stat cifs testdc cifs terminate Command Reference A 5 cifs access NAME cifs access modify share level access control SYNOPSIS cifs acce
212. administrator but use of that directory is offered under the truncated share name administrator If there were users administrator and administrator they would see an offer for their own home directory but both would see it as an offer to share the name administrato Therefore each user gets the correct directory even though the share names appear the same Creating a Share Containing User Home Directories The following procedure creates a share that automatically contains home directories for CIFS users 1 Enable the home directory option by entering the following command options cifs home dir homedirpath Where homedirpath is the UNIX path name that will be mapped to the share CIFS HOMEDIR This share automatically contains CIFS user home directories If the directory containing the home directories is vol vol 1 homes enter the fol lowing command options cifs home dir vol voll homes 2 Within the directory specified by the cifs home_dir option create a directory for each user Make sure that the following conditions are met Each directory name matches the user s login name exactly Each user is the owner of the directory Creating Share Home Directories Using the cifs home dir option to create home directories is useful only if users do not need to read or write other users home directories If they must access other users home directories follow this procedure 1 Create an additional share from either
213. affic over the interface on which the traffic was received However there are exceptions For example if the filer experiences excessive queuing to a response or experiences a time out followed by a retransmit the filer routes the traffic by using conventional IP routing table lookups If the filer has multiple interfaces attached to networks with the same IP network number the filer uses the first interface it finds with that number to send the responses IP based traffic other than NFS and HTTP requests For other types of traffic for example traffic generated by telnet rsh and ping the filer uses IP routing table lookups and routing If the filer has multiple interfaces attached to networks with the same IP network number the filer uses the first interface it finds with that number to send the responses 4 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Using ifconfig to Configure an Interface About the ifconfig Command The etc rc file in the root volume contains ifconfig commands to configure net work interfaces including virtual interfaces at system boot You can also manually use the ifconfig command when the system is operating The ifconfig Command Syntax The ifconfig command syntax is as follows ifconfig interface alias alias address up down netmask mask broadcast address mtusize size mediatype type trusted untrus
214. age files and audio files follow the instructions in Specifying MIME Content Type Values in Chapter 7 to configure your filer so that the appropriate MIME Content Type header is sent with each file transferred Procedure for Testing HTTP Service To test the filer s HTTP service follow these steps 1 Create an HTML file in the root directory for HTTP For example create a file named myfile html in the HTTP root directory which is vol vol0 home users pages assuming that the HTML root directory is vol vol0 home users pages 2 Start a Web browser on a client and specify the URL of the HTML file in the browser For example if your filer is filer and the root directory for HTTP is vol vol0 home users pages enter this URL http filer myfile html The path component of the URL is a path name relative to the HTTP root Do not specify the complete path name to the file in the URL NOTE If the URL names a directory for example http filer home pages the filer X automatically tries to transfer the index html file within the directory If index html does not exist the filer returns Error 404 No such file or directory Protecting Web Pages With Passwords Configuration Files for Password Protection You can restrict access to a specified directory so that only specified users or groups have access to it Password protection involves three configuration files etc httpd access e etc httpd passwd e etc httpd gro
215. agels sesame unix enabled muffin ntfs enabled muffin bran unix enabled Explanation of Example qtree Display In the example Because bagels and muffin are volumes each has a security style and oplocks setting e Sesame is a qtree in the Bagels volume lts security style and oplocks setting happen to be the same as that of its parent volume bagels e Branis a qtree in the muffin volume lts security style is different from that of its parent volume muffin Files in bran have UNIX style permissions files in muffin but not in bran have NTFS style permissions gtree Administration 10 9 10 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 11 Quotas and Maximum Number of Files Restricting or Tracking Disk Usage by Using Disk Quotas About Disk Quotas Filer disk quotas restrict disk space and the number of files used by a user a group or a gtree For information about how to create a qtree refer to Chapter 10 qtree Administration This chapter discusses how to manage disk quotas by editing the etc quotas file Format of the Quotas File To set up disk quotas create a quotas file in the etc directory NOTE Keep a record of your quotas file in a safe place and update t as you change it in case you must do a restore without having access to the root volume Following is a sample quotas file Quota Target type disk files vol home user joe user 500M 1
216. aging function of the cifs terminate command How to Send the Message To send a message to all users on a filer follow these steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears CIFS Administration 7 25 4 Inthe Server Manager window from the Computer menu choose Send Message Result The Send Message window appears 5 Enter a message in the text box of the Send Message window 6 Click OK to send the message Event Auditing You Can Audit File Access Events Data ONTAP 5 3 enables you to monitor reads and writes of a specified file on the filer by a specified user The procedure for doing so is the same as for Windows NT NOTE The file on the filer must be in a mixed or ntfs volume or qtree You cannot X audit events on a file in a UNIX volume or qtree You can specify the logging of successes failures or both for each type of event as described in Setting a System ACL on a File You can view the events on the filer using the Windows Event Viewer as described in Viewing Events in a Security Log Why Use Event Auditing You use event auditing to troubleshoot access problems to check for suspicious activ
217. always date The time and date the request was is reported in the format Day Mon Year HH MM SS which is logged in universal time GMT rather than the local time zone request A quoted string is recorded for the method request type and file involved in the request result The status code for the request bytes The size of the file in bytes Possible values for result codes include 200 Success the requested file was transmitted 302 Redirected see etc httpd translations 304 Not modified client cache used 400 Bad request 403 Access to file prohibited 404 File not found 503 HTTP server disabled The size of the log file can be restricted by the option httpd log max file size SEE ALSO options httpd translations A 132 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide httpd mimetypes NAME httpd mimetypes map of file suffixes to MIME Content Type SYNOPSIS etc httpd mimetypes DESCRIPTION For HTTP 1 0 and higher protocols a MIME header is returned in the reply of every GET request This header includes a Content Type field whose contents is determined by examining the suffix of the file being transmitted The etc httpd mimetypes file contains the mapping of filename suffixes to MIME Content Type The format of each line is suffix Content Type Comments are introduced with a The filer is not shipped with the etc httpd mimetypes file Instead the filer s
218. amed nightly 1 on the vol0 volume on the local filer to the vol0 volume on a remote filer named filer Command ReferenceA 111 vol vol copy status displays the status of all the volume copy operations vol copy abort 1 terminates volume copy operation 1 vol copy throttle 1 10 changes volume copy operation 1 to one tenth of its full speed SEE ALSO sysconfig A 112 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide ypwhich NAME ypwhich display the NIS server if NIS is enabled SYNOPSIS ypwhich DESCRIPTION ypwhich prints the name of the current NIS server if NIS is enabled If there is no entry for the server itself in the hosts database then it prints the IP address of the server The NIS server is dynamically chosen by the filer Command ReferenceA 113 File Formats This section contains file formats A 114 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide tape NAME tape information on filer tape interface DESCRIPTION The filer supports up to four local tape drives tape drives connected directly to the system The tape drive interface follows a UNIX like device name allowing use of a rewind norewind or unload reload device The format of a filer tape device name is crstud where C usen to specify the norewind device use u to specify the unload reload device or no flag to specify the rewind device The norewind device wil
219. ames are not allowed in the list root hostname hostname Give root access only to the specified hosts By default no hosts are granted root access Netgroup names are not allowed in the list Command ReferenceA 123 exports In an export entry you can specify that a file or directory be exported to a subnet instead of individual hosts The export entry for exporting to subnets can use the ro rw or root option you cannot specify a subnet in the list for the access option Instead of specifying a host name or netgroup name in the entry specify the sub net in one of the following formats dotted lP num bits The dotted IP field is either an IP address or a subnet number The num bits field specifies the size of the sub net by the number of leading bits of the netmask network subnet netmask netmask The subnet field is the subnet number The netmask field is the netmask In UNIX it is illegal to export a directory that has an exported ancestor in the same file system Data ONTAP 5 3 does not have this restriction For example you can export both the directory and the home directory In determining per missions the filer uses the longest matching prefix EXAMPLES In the following example all network clients can mount the home directory but only the adminhost can mount the directory access adminhost root adminhost home The following examples show different ways of specifying an export entry
220. amount of time in seconds before an idle HTTP 15 connection will time out The default is 900 seconds which is fifteen minutes httpd timewait enable When enabled the filer will put HTTP connections that have been closed by the client into the TIME WAIT state for one minute which is twice the maximum segment lifetime 2 MSL By default TIME WAIT state is bypassed for HTTP connections ip match any ifaddr If the option is on the filer will accept any packet that is addressed to it even if that packet came in on the wrong interface If you are concerned about security you should turn this off nfs mount rootonly When enabled the mount server will deny the request if the client is not root user using privileged ports By default the feature is enabled for more secure access nfs per client stats enable Enables disables the collection and display of per client NFS statis tics as described in nfsstat nfs tcp enable When enabled the NFS server supports NFS over TCP By default the feature is enabled it can be disabled if there is a prob lem with some client when using NFS over TCP and that client cannot be configured to use NFS over UDP nfs v2 df 2gb lim Causes the filer to return replies to the file system statistics NFS version 2 request that show no more than 2 31 1 or 2 147483 647 total free or available bytes i e 2GB on the file system Some NFS clients require this option because if they get return val
221. amples of Displaying Share Information 05 7 16 Deleting arShale ssh dete Deed e bor eee e ef tudine ates 7 17 How to Delete a Shares isset bb Rex E RR gu 7 17 Using Server Manager to Delete a Share o o o ooooooooooo ooo 7 17 Using the cifs shares Command to Delete Shares 7 18 Command Syntax 25 o v este oder tere verd DENIM 7 18 Examples sesa o eser M cott debts qute ask d deleto a 7 18 Creating a Home Share for Each User ee 7 18 When to Create a Home Directory oi eR ER Ree ena 7 18 Accessing a Home Directory iliis 7 18 Share Name Length Limitations l i eile 7 19 Creating a Share Containing User Home Directories 7 19 Creating Share Home Directories liess 7 19 Example From te EIBgE 3 det IA 7 20 FRO SUI ite deo tare A A BIN cold on ce 7 20 Assigning and Changing Access Rights 0000 ccc eee eee 7 20 When to Assign or Change Access Rights 002000005 7 20 Methods of Assigning or Changing Access Rights to a Share 7 20 Assigning or Changing Access Rights With Server Manager 7 21 Giving Access With the cifs access Command 00 02s ee 7 22 Command Syntax iris eade Patada dens em Po RA ES 7 22 Example Sie ca as whieh ed oak Ra pee ei 7 22 Removing a User or Group With the cifs access delete Command 7 23 Displaying Access Rights to an NTFS File 0 00 eee 7 23 Access Ri
222. amples of the vol copy start Command Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Sef5 5 Where to Enter the vol copy start Command If the copying takes place between two filers you can enter the command on either the source or destination filer You cannot however enter the command on a third filer that does not contain the source or destination volume Examples of the vol copy start Command Table 15 3 shows several examples of the vol copy start command Table 15 3 Examples of the vol copy start Command If you want to Enter Copy all snapshots from the vol copy start S vol0 voll vol0 volume to the vol vol ume on the same filer Copy a nightly snapshot vol copy start s nightly 1 vol0 voll from the volO volume to the vol volume on the same filer Create a snapshot in the vol copy start vol0 voll vol0 volume to be copied to the vol volume on the same filer Copy all snapshots from the vol copy start S vol0 filerA voll vol0 volume to the vol vol ume on a different filer named filerA Results of the vol copy start Command The vol copy start command generates volume copy operations and produces Screen messages showing the progress of the operations Volume Copy Operations Each vol copy start command generates two volume copy operations as described in the following list One operation is for reading data from the source volume Screen messages dis played by a vol copy command refer to this ope
223. an NFS client turns off all write permission bits the filer turns on the read only bit for that file As Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide described in the preceding paragraph a file with the read only bit turned on appears to an NFS client not to have any write permission bits turned on e Ifafile has no write permission bits turned on and an NFS client turns on any write permission bit the filer turns off the read only bit for that file e Ifafile s read only bit is turned on and an NFS client attempts to find out the per mission bits for the file the actual permission bits for the file are not sent to the NFS client instead the filer sends the permission bits to the NFS client with the write permission bits masked off e Ifafile s read only bit is turned on and a CIFS client turns the read only bit off the filer turns on the owner s write permission bit for the file e Files with the read only bit turned on are writable only by the superuser How the Filer Tracks the NFS or CIFS Client Read Only Bit Whenever the read only bit is turned on by a client even if it was already on before the client did so the filer tracks whether the client that turned on the bit was an NFS or CIFS client as follows e fthe bit was turned on by a CIFS client renaming the file is not allowed This is because file systems on MS DOS and Windows systems do not allow renaming a file whose read onl
224. anaana naana 7 39 Terminating CIFS Service for All Users on the Filer 7 39 GoarisoleDIisplay s s s apa aaua a aisi veo to eta tad N 7 39 Terminating a CIFS Session for a Specific Client 7 40 Using the cifs restart Command to Restart CIFS Service 7 40 Reconfiguring the Filer for GIFS cui as a de AYERS 7 40 When to Reconfigure a Filer for CIFS liliis 7 40 How to Reconfigure a Filer for CIFS 0 liliis 7 40 Chapter 8 HTTP Administration eee ees 8 1 Starting PSSS ces ditta t dota Rene abu ott t lt re 8 1 Procedure for Starting HTTP Service 0 cee 8 1 Procedure for Testing HTTP Service o ooooooooooooooo eee 82 Protecting Web Pages With Passwords 0 0 00 cece eee 8 2 Configuration Files for Password Protection 00 000 cee eee 8 2 The ete Attpdiaccess File 4 ee ees sone pe as tagit ade kee 8 3 The Directory Directive llli 8 3 TheAuthiNamie DITectlV6s 2i epe e E Sees ER Re Rd 8 3 The Require User Directive liiis 8 3 The Require Group Directive liliis 8 3 Theetc httpd passwd File utbs t dag ma debat wae t eg 8 3 Theetc httpa group File zac IRIURE a Es Baden 8 4 Web Page Protection Examples 02000 0c eee e sers 8 4 XXVII Using the HTTP Virtual Firewall 2s 8 5 About the HTTP Virtual Firewall liliis 8 5 O bo e ed O 8 5 Using Virtual Flestinqus s sue Sag
225. and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs access The following example grants full access to the UNIX group wheel on the share sysadmins filer cifs access sysadmins g wheel Full Control The following example deletes the ACL entry for ENGINEERING Wnary on the share releases filer cifs access delete releases ENGINEERING Wmary SEE ALSO cifs shares Command Reference A 7 cifs comment NAME cifs comment display or change CIFS server description SYNOPSIS cifs comment newcomment DESCRIPTION The cifs comment command displays or changes the CIFS server description CIFS clients see the CIFS server description when browsing servers on the network If no command line arguments are given cifs comment displays the current CIFS server description If you enter a string for the newcomment parameter the current CIFS server description is changed to newcomment If newcomment contains spaces enclose it in double quotation marks A 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs lookup NAME cifs lookup translate name into SID or vice versa SYNOPSIS cifs lookup name textualsid DESCRIPTION The cifs lookup command translates a Windows NT user or group name into its corresponding textual Windows NT SID Security ID or a textual NT SID into its corresponding Windows NT user or group name EXAMPLES filer cifs lookup mday SID z S 1 5 21 39724
226. and line use the cifs shares command Command Syntax The syntax is as follows cifs shares Example of Displaying a filer s Shares The following example shows a filer s shares cifs shares Name Mount Point Description HOME vol muffin home Default Share everyone Full Control techpubs g Full Control C vol muffin Remote Administration everyone Full Control BUILTIN Administrators Full Control openhome vol muffin writers home readable home dirs user limit 1200 forcegroup techpubs everyone x techpubs g r x stock vol muffin Not half baked user limit 10 everyone Full Control flour vol muffin blueberry Flour power everyone Full Control sesame vol bagels everyone Full Control CIFS Administration 7 11 Creating and Changing a Share Ways to Share Folders If you want to create a folder to be shared by CIFS clients do one of the following From Windows NT use Server Manager as described in Creating a Share From Server Manager From the filer command line use the cifs shares command to define a new share as described in Creating a Share with the cifs Shares Command NOTE By default three shares are created during CIFS setup C IPC and HOME X In filer console displays the C share corresponds in UNIX to vol vol0 and the HOME share corresponds to vol vol0 home Creating a Share From Server Manager To create a share from the Windows NT desktop using Server Manager c
227. and system ID sysStat System level statistics such as CPU uptime idle time and aggregate kilo bytes received and transmitted on all network interfaces nfs Statistics like those displayed by the nfsstat command see nfsstat includ ing statistics for each client if perclient NFS statistics have been enabled using the nfs per client stats enable option see options The perclient NFS statistics are indexed by client IP addresses quota Information related to disk quotas including the output of the quota report command see quota To access quota information quotas must be turned on filesys Information related to the file system including the equivalent of the max files and df commands and some of the information from the snap list command see df maxfiles snap Command ReferenceA 171 snmpd raid Information on RAID equivalent to the output of the sysconfig r command see sysconfig SEE ALSO df maxfiles nfsstat options quota snap snmp sysconfig A 172 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide syslogd NAME syslogd log system messages DESCRIPTION The syslogd daemon logs system messages to the console log files and other remote systems as specified by its configuration file etc syslog conf The sys logd daemon reads its configuration file when it starts up during the boot procedure or within 30 seconds after the etc syslog conf file is modified For infor
228. another filer and that has never been brought online on the current filer Vol umes that are not foreign are considered native You can also use this command to cancel a vol offline command vol offline volname takes the volume named volname offline This command takes effect when Command ReferenceA 107 vol the filer is rebooted If you change your mind after entering this command you can enter vol online vo name before the reboot vol options vo name optname optval sets the option named optname of the volume named vol name to the value optval The command remains effective after the filer is rebooted so there is no need to add vol options commands to the etc rc file Some options have values that are numbers Some options have values that may be on which can also be expressed as yes true or 1 or off which can also be expressed as no false or 0 You can use a mixture of uppercase and lowercase charac ters when typing the value of an option The root option is special in that it does not have a value To set the root option use this syntax vol options vo name root The following describes the options and their possible values root The volume named volname will become the root volume for the filer on the next reboot This option can be used on one volume only at any given time The existing root volume will become a nonroot volume after the reboot The only way to remove the root status of a volume is to set the root o
229. apMirror offers additional advantages there are other situations where you want to replicate a volume as described in Table 16 1 Table 16 1 Replicating a Volume Situation Situation How data replication helps Remote access to data Users who You can replicate the source volume on need read access to a volume are other filers that are geographically distributed over a large geographical closer to the users Users accessing a area local filer can read the data faster than they could if they connected to a dis tant filer Load balancing A large number of Replicating a volume on multiple filers users need only read access to a enables you to distribute the load volume Data Replication Using SnapMirror16 1 Table 16 1 Replicating a Volume Situation continued Situation How data replication helps Backup You need to reserve all pro cessing and networking resources on a filer for serving NFS and CIFS requests Data migration You want to migrate data from one filer to another without interrupting net work service Disaster recovery You want to pro vide immediate access to data after some disaster has caused a volume or a filer to be unavailable After replicating data on the source filer you can back up the data in the mirror to tape This means the source filer does not have to allocate resources for performing backups After replicating the source filer you can export or share the sourc
230. ape drive on a UNIX system 12 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Example of an Incremental Backup to a Local Tape Drive dump luf nrst0a vol voll The command performs a level 1 backup of the vol vol volume to nrst Oa This means that only files that have changed since the most recent level 0 backup are written to tape After the command is finished it does not rewind the tape Examples of Backups to Multiple Tape Files dump 0f rstOa rstla vol voll The command backs up the vol vol1 volume to the tape on rst Oa If the vol ume exceeds the capacity of the tape on rst Oa the command writes the second tape file to the tape on rst 1a Otherwise it does not use the tape on rstla dump Of urst0a urst0a vol voll The command backs up the vol vol volume to the tape in urstOa After the command finishes writing to the first tape drive it does not rewind the tape If the volume exceeds the capacity of the tape on urst 0a the command writes the second tape file to the same tape drive on urstOa If the command needs to write the third tape file it prompts you to load a new tape NOTE In this example if you know in advance that the backup requires two tape files use rstOa as the second tape file name in the dump command so that the command automatically rewinds the tape after it is finished Example of Backing Up a Directory From a Snapshot dump Of rst0a vol voll snapshot
231. apshots delete all snapshots listed below nightly 1 in the snap list output that is nightly 2 nightly 3 and nightly 4 After deleting the snapshots nightly 1 and all the other more recent snapshots consume 5 of the used disk space Changing the Snapshot Reserve The snapshot reserve can be used only by snapshots not by the active file system The default snapshot reserve is 2096 of the available disk space To change the reserve enter the following command snap reserve volume name percent For example snap reserve vol0 25 With no arguments the snap reserve command displays the percentage of disk space reserved for snapshots in each volume A NOTE Snapshots can exceed the snapshot reserve space Adjusting Disk Space Used by Snapshots This section describes how to use the snap list output to determine which snap shot file to delete to free the most disk space In the sample snap list output in Displaying Snapshot Statistics the cumulative disk space used by snapshots gradually increases from top to bottom For example in the used column the cumulative space used by hourly 1 is 296 and the cumulative space used by hourly 2 is 3 This is not always the case Example Consider a filer with a 100 MB file system that has not changed since the first snap shot was taken The snap 1ist command on this filer displays the following output used total date name 0 0 0 May 05 16 00 hourly 0 0 0
232. aring Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 9 Table 5 2 Supported Languages continued Language Language Code Spanish es Swedish sv How to Choose a Language The flow chart in Figure 5 1 shows how to choose a language Filer used for NFS only Language does not matter Filer used for CIFS only Set the language of the volume to the language of its clients Use sjis for Japanese Set the language of each volume to the language used by NFS Figure 5 1 Flowchart to Choose a Language 5 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Language Procedures You can perform the following operations to query and specify the language that a vol ume uses e Show what languages the filer supports e Specify a language for the console Change the language and therefore the character set that a volume uses for file names Create a volume that uses a specified language other than the default e Show each volume with the language that it uses Displaying a List of Supported Languages Description This procedure displays a list of languages for which the filer supports character sets You can perform this procedure at any time to determine what language to specify for a volume if you do not already know what languages are supported Step To display a list of the languages for which the filer supports character sets enter the following command vol lang
233. at oplocks be turned Off Youare handling critical data that is you have a good network but you cannot afford even the slightest data loss Otherwise you can leave CIFS oplocks On CIFS Administration 7 33 Turning Oplocks On and Off Globally You can turn CIFS oplocks On or Off globally for the entire filer or for individual gtrees which are special directories that are described in detail in Chapter 10 Otree Administration Turning Oplocks Off You turn all CIFS oplocks Off with the following options command options cifs oplocks enable off Turning Oplocks On You turn CIFS oplocks On with the following options command options cifs oplocks enable on Turning Oplocks On or Off at Individual Clients You can turn CIFS oplocks On or Off at individual clients Turning CIFS oplocks On at the filer does not override any client specific settings Turning CIFS oplocks Off at the filer disables all oplocks to or from the filer For Additional Information For additional information about oplocks consult the Microsoft Knowledge Base at http www microsoft com kb Displaying CIFS Statistics How and Why to Display CIFS Statistics You use the cifs stat command to display statistics about CIFS operations that take place on your filer You use the cifs stat display for diagnostic purposes Statistics Displays With the cifs stat Command You can use the cifs stat command in two forms e f you specify a time interval
234. ata e Configuring RAID groups to maintain maximum data availability Configuring snapshots so that data is recoverable in case of accidental deletions e Setting quotas to make sure that users have enough resources for their work Monitoring and Maintaining Network Access You monitor network access by gathering network statistics so that you can verify and improve the performance of the filer and its network interfaces 1 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide You maintain network access by following general filer network administration proce dures and procedures specific to your protocol These procedures are described in later chapters in this guide Monitoring and Maintaining Filer Hardware You monitor hardware by gathering statistics about your hardware and analyzing them for performance You maintain the hardware as described in the appropriate hardware guides Periodic Administration Tasks Table 1 7 lists essential tasks that you should consider performing periodically sug gests how often to perform a task and lists the command or file to use for the task Table 1 7 Periodic Administration Tasks How Often Task Command or File Daily Review filer performance and CPU utilization Review filer disk usage on a per volume and per snapshot level Check for drive failures reboots and other logged events Review CIFS utilization if licensed for CIFS
235. ate name 0 0 0 0 Jan 19 08 01 hourly 0 1 1 1 1 Jan 19 00 01 nightly 0 2 2 2 2 Jan 18 20 01 hourly 1 3 2 2 2 Jan 18 16 01 hourly 2 3 2 3 2 Jan 18 12 01 hourly 3 32 4 3 Jan 18 00 01 nightly 1 4 6 4 Jan 17 00 00 nightly 2 4 7 4 Jan 16 00 01 nightly 3 10 5 9 4 Jan 15 00 01 nightly 4 The Used Column The used column shows space consumed by snapshots as a percentage of disk space being used in the volume The first number is cumulative for all snapshots listed so far and the second number is for the specified snapshot alone 9 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide e The first number is equal to cumulative snapshot space x 10096 cumulative snapshot space file system space The second number is equal to this snapshot x 10096 this snapshot file system space The 96 Total Column The total column shows space consumed as a percentage of total disk space in the volume e The first number is equal to cumulative snapshot space x 10096 total disk space in this volume e The second number is equal to this snapshot x 10096 total disk space in this volume Cumulative snapshot space is the total space used by this snapshot and all other more recent snapshots the ones preceding this snapshot in the snap list output Output Summary The 96 used number is more useful for plannin
236. backup Restrictions The restore command has the following restrictions e You can restart a restore command only if the backup consists of multiple tape files If the backup contains only one tape file simply reenter the restore command to start the recovery from the beginning of the backup Youcanrestart a restore command only if the command is for a full restore If the restore command is for extracting an individual file or subtree from a backup that is if you use the x function key you cannot restart the command Steps Enter the same restore command as the one that was interrupted with the follow ing changes Replace the r function key with the R function key to indicate that you want to restart the restore command e Use the appropriate tape file name for the function key The tape file should be the one used by the original restore command when it was interrupted Example In this example the following restore command was entered on the filer console for performing a full restore from three tape files in a tape stacker restore rfD urst0a urst0a rst0a vol vol0 When the restore command is recovering data from the second tape file it is interrupted by a Ctrl C entered on the filer console Because the second tape file is on an unload reload device the filer closes the file and ejects the tape when the restore command is interrupted To restart the restore command reload the second tape file and enter the f
237. be specified in the conventional dot notation or as a 32 bit integer Numbers may be specified in decimal default octal or hexadeci mal A number is interpreted as octal if it starts with the digit 0 A hexadecimal number must begin with Ox or OX Network names may contain any print able character other than a field delimiter newline or comment character FILES etc networks A 138 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide networks NAME nsswitch conf configuration file for name service switch SYNOPSIS etc nsswitch conf DESCRIPTION The name service switch configuration file contains the preferred order in which name services will be contacted for name resolution by the filer For each map the name services to be used and the lookup order is specified in this file Cur rently three name services are supported They are local files in the etc directory NIS and DNS The maps or databases that are supported are hosts passwd shadows group and netgroups Each line has the form map order of name services For example hosts files nis dns passwd files nis When trying to resolve a name the services are contacted one by one as per the order specified until the name is successfully resolved A name resolution failure occurs when no service can successfully resolve the name When enumerating a map enumeration happens over all the services specified for th
238. ber of tape blocks in a tape file The dump command writes the specified number of tape blocks to a tape file before starting a new tape file The argument must be equal to or larger than the argument to the b option If you do not specify this option the dump command writes data until it reaches the end of tape f It is mandatory It takes the tape file name as an argument You can specify a comma separated list of tape file names al It backs up only specific files and directories in the dump path It must be used with the n option n It takes a string as an argument which is the name of the backup to be recorded in the etc dumpdates file It is required if you use the 1 option 12 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 12 1 dump Command Descriptions continued Option Meaning Q It takes a volume name as argument The dump command backs up all data in the specified volume that does not reside in a qtree You cannot perform incremental backups on data that is backed up with the Q option However you can use both the Q option and u option to record the backup in the etc dumpdates file The entry in the etc dumpdates file enables you to keep a history of the backups u The dump command updates the etc dumpdates file which con tains the dump path the dump level and the creation time of the snapshot used by the dump command You must use this option if you plan
239. bk ad gales wel ela nd woh t d calet e aol ans 4 2 About SNMP site th dre eR EA wrap m ui 4 2 Data SNMB PIOVIdeS 3 1 co oe n ie oed 4 2 XV xvi Command to Configure the SNMP Agent aaae 4 2 SNMP Commands Supported by Dell anaana a 4 3 About the Dell Gustoarmr MIB aret eret edes ed 4 3 About MIB Group Contents iilii es 4 4 About Maps qo s DR be EAE 5 the odes Pace PAA RECEN 4 4 Howto Define Trapo rats ceca Sante ae edu tpe date RS 4 5 Host Name Resolution cu REPE ER pad Face ER Ft ele encata 4 6 How the Filer Resolves Host Name s 00 0000 e eee eee eee 4 6 Name Resolution Search 2 2 eee 4 7 Default Search Orders aotsa 4054 steer Sek ed a ES 4 7 Spe cifying a Search Order iuis nee bn bom bre ee ed 4 7 Example Search Orde tins v5 rots e bate s be ahd DRE RR ERR PAR 4 8 Using the etc hosts File for Host Name Resolution 4 8 Examples A A A s wie ME EMI i LOMA aen d 4 8 Using DNS to ta E iet a R EM 4 9 Disabling DNS x uu cns an a aba la Mack yp dled 4 10 Using NS iis dcc o E A pd UR M ID T 4 10 NIS M ps the Fler Uses 5 o at Lett e e ial Oe Mk Ba 4 10 AQUI s ruote s eoe ous ode este Te eo um e hut Ea 4 11 About Filer ROUTING sia up eR unb aU EUR ERR EE 4 11 Routing Fable Sn the Eilet americas pda mier eae sehen wack s 4 12 Specifying Default Routers ry es teuing raa ea aE O OA a A edi A Lia ak 4 12 Using the routed Daemon to Manage Multipl
240. blocking factor Y CAUTION If you plan to restore the backed up files on a computer other MM than the filer make sure that the blocking factor you choose does not exceed the maximum blocking factor supported by that computer If you use a filer to restore the backup data the blocking factor must not exceed 63 Meaning of Tape File A tape file is a dump output file on tape It can also be an entire tape You can back up a dump path to one tape file on a tape multiple tape files on a tape or multiple tape files on multiple tapes In the dump command you can specify the maximum size of the tape file in terms of tape blocks For example if you want the maximum tape file to be 2 GB specify 2 097 151 That is the largest tape file can contain 2 097 151 tape blocks which are 1 kilobyte each CAUTION If the backed up files are to be restored on a computer other M than the filer make sure that the tape file size you choose does not exceed the maximum tape file size supported by that computer If you use a filer to restore the backup data the tape file size can be as large as a single tape When the Dump Command Writes to Multiple Tape Files When the data being backed up exceeds the capacity of a tape the dump command automatically writes to the next tape file specified in the command If the current tape file is the last tape file listed on the dump command the filer prompts you to load another tape If you specify the maxim
241. blueberry Flour power everyone Full Control sesame vol bagels everyone Full Control Deleting a Share How to Delete a Share To delete shares do either of the following e From the Windows NT desktop use Server Manager as described Using Server Manager to Delete a Share From the filer use the cifs shares command as described in Using the cifs Shares Command to Delete Shares Using Server Manager to Delete a Share To delete a share from Server Manager follow these steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 Inthe Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears CIFS Administration 7 17 4 In the Server Manager window for the filer choose Computer gt Shared Directo ries then click the Properties button Result The Share Properties window appears 5 Click Stop Sharing then click OK Result The folder is no longer shared Using the cifs shares Command to Delete Shares To delete a share use the cifs shares delete command Command Syntax Thecifs shares delete command has the following syntax cifs shares delete sharename where sharename is the specific name of the share that you want to delete Example The following
242. can host several IP addresses Virtual hosting enables for example an Internet provider to host several Web sites but have only one physical interface An HTTP server can use the destination IP address of an incoming HTTP request to find the directory that contains the HTTP pages belonging to the virtual host To Set Up and Enable Virtual Hosting To enable virtual hosting you e direct HTTP requests by putting subdirectory and host or address entries in the etc httpd hostprefixes file HTTP Administration 8 5 map virtual host addresses to the virtual host interface with theifconfig command Directing HTTP Requests To direct HTTP requests use the following format in the etc httpd hostprefixes file as shown in Table 8 1 prefix host name or address Table 8 1 HTTP Request Variables Variable Description prefix Specifies a subdirectory in the HTTP root directory which is defined by the options httpd rootdir command host name or address Specifies an HTTP host name or an IP address You can have more than one of each For example the line customer www customer com 192 225 37 102 means that an HTTP request that comes for the interface with address 192 225 37 102 or with an HTTP 1 1 Host header specifying www customer com is directed to customer and the requestor cannot get a file outside the customer directory If the HTTP server receives an HTTP request that is destined for one of its v
243. can run up to four dump commands in parallel Steps Follow these steps to execute a dump command 1 Prepare the number of tapes required following the steps described in Deter mining the Number of Tapes for the Backup 2 Determine and note the blocking factor used in the backup For more information about blocking factors refer to Meaning of Tape Block 3 Determine and note the tape file size used in the backup For more information about tape file size refer to Meaning of Tape File 4 Enter the dump command in the appropriate format using the examples that fol low as a guide Examples of Level 0 Backups to a Local Tape File The following list provides examples of level O backups to a local tape file dump Of rst0a vol voll users tom specs The command performs a full backup of the vol vo 1 users tom specs directory After the dump command is finished the filer rewinds the tape dump Ouf rst0a vol voll users tom The command performs a full backup of the vol volT users tom directory and records the backup in the etc dumpaates file dump O0fQ rst0a vol voll The command performs a full backup of all data in the vol vol1 volume that does not belong in any qtrees Examples of Backups to a Remote Tape File dump Of filerl nrst0a vol voll The command performs a backup to a tape drive attached to a filer named filer1 dump Of unix machine dev rstO vol voll The command performs a backup to a t
244. cate gateway names or addresses are not allowed only the first one encountered in the file will be added by routed to the default gateway table and the additional ones will produce error messages EXAMPLE Here are typical lines from the etc dgateways file main router 1 backup router 2 SEE ALSO routed setup Command ReferenceA 121 dumpdates NAME dumpdates data base of file system dump times SYNOPSIS etc dumpdates DESCRIPTION The dump command see dump uses etc dumpdates to keep track of which subtrees have been dumped and when Each line in dumpdates contains the subtree dumped the dump level and the creation date of the snapshot used by dump There is only one entry per subtree at a given dump level dumpdates may be edited to change any of the fields if necessary EXAMPLE This shows the dumpdate file for a system on which home and export are backed up using dump home 0 Tue Nov 2 10 56 27 1993 export 0 Tue Nov 2 13 51 17 1993 export 1Tue Nov 5 18 31 17 1993 home 1 Tue Nov 5 18 45 27 1993 FILES etc dumpdates SEE ALSO dump A 122 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide exports NAME exports directories and files exported to NFS clients SYNOPSIS etc exports DESCRIPTION The etc exports file contains a list of directories and files that are exported by the filer Changes to this file do not take effect until the filer executes the expor
245. cause the output is written in different units for example 512 byte units or 1 024 units depending on the operating system If the Filer Is Shared by a CIFS Client Follow these steps to determine the amount of backup data from a CIFS client 1 Onthe CIFS client point to the shared file or directory that you want to back up 2 Right click to display the pull down menu 3 Click Properties to display the number of bytes used by the file or directory Determining the Number of Tapes for the Backup Description You must determine the number of tapes required for the backup before entering the dump command for these reasons Youcan ensure that the dump command will not run out of tapes and be incomplete e You can load all tapes required in the tape drives or stackers in advance for an unattended backup If you do not load enough tapes before entering the dump command and you start the dump command from the console the filer prompts 12 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide you to load additional tapes If you start the dump command through rsh you do not see the prompts from the filer and the dump command cannot be com pleted because of the lack of tapes Prerequisites You must meet these prerequisites before you can determine the number of tape files required The filer must be able to display tape drive information To learn how to display tape drive information refer
246. ccess to the filer provided that either the filer uses a Domain Controller for authentication and the user is not in a trusted domain or the filer uses the etc passwd file or the NIS password database for authentication and the user has no entry in the etc passwd or the NIS password database If this option is set to the name of an account in the password database a user log ging into the filer will be assigned to the guest account if their name is not listed in the password database when using etc passwd or NIS or if the user is not from a trusted domain when using a domain controller The configured user name will be used for the UNIX user ID group ID and group set of the specified account If the option is blank guest access is disabled cifs home dir When set to the pathname of a directory this defines the path to the homes directory The directories under this path should have the names of users as their names When a user connects to the filer using CIFS and there is a directory name that exactly matches Command Reference A 61 options the user s lowercased Windows login name they will see a share of that name truncated to 12 characters that is their home direc tory Only the user can access the home directory using this share All other users cannot see the share name since they are logged in under a different user cifs idle timeout Specifies the amount of idle time in seconds before the filer discon nects a
247. ce consumed by snapshots If snapshots were included in the quota calculations users could end up in a state where they could not create any new files until all snapshots containing their old files expired Managing Snapshot Disk Consumption About Snapshot Management This section describes how to schedule snapshots to suit your environment e how to determine a reasonable snapshot reserve e how to adjust the amount of space snapshots use The examples in this section are for a volume named home Scheduling Snapshots The best way to manage the amount of space consumed by snapshots in each vol ume is to use the snap sched command to adjust the schedule of snapshot creation Following are some suggested strategies for scheduling and retaining snapshots e f users rarely lose files or typically notice lost files right away use the default snapshot schedule For example this is the schedule that creates a snapshot every day and keeps two snap sched home 0 2 668 12 16 20 e f users commonly lose files and need to restore them Dell recommends that you delete the snapshots less often than you would in the preceding example On many systems only 596 or 1096 of the data changes each week so the snapshot schedule of six nightly and two weekly snapshots consumes 1096 to 2096 of disk space Considering the benefits of snapshots it is worthwhile to reserve this amount of disk space for snapshots Following is the recommended snapshot
248. ce name a is special and it does not take any optional param eters It displays the current configuration for all the network interfaces present The address is either a host name present in the host name data base etc hosts or an Internet address expressed in the Internet standard dot notation OPTIONS broadcast address Specifies the address to use to represent broadcasts to the network The default broadcast address is the address with a host part of all 1 s down Marks a network interface down When a network interface is marked down the system will not attempt to transmit messages through that net work interface If possible the network interface will be reset to disable reception as well This action does not automatically disable routes using the network interface mediatype type Specifies the Ethernet media type used Depending on the physical specifi cations of the Ethernet card the acceptable types are thick 10Baseb5 AUI thin 10Base2 BNC tp 10Base T RJ 45 twisted pair or tpfd Full A 46 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide ifconfig duplex 10Base T RJ 45 twistedpair or 100tx 100Base T RJ 45 twisted pair or 100tx fd Full duplex 100Base T RJ 45 twisted pair or auto Auto RJ 45 twisted pair The default media type is set to tp or to auto where applicable On a 10 100 Mbps auto negotiable interface the system will auto negotiate
249. ce the last display SEE ALSO netstat options sysstat Command Reference A 45 ifconfig NAME ifconfig configure network interface parameters SYNOPSIS ifconfig interface alias alias address netmask mask broadcast address mediatype type mtusize size up down trusted untrusted wins wins ifconfig a DESCRIPTION ifconfig assigns an address to a network interface and configures network inter face parameters ifconfig must be used at boot time to define the network address of each network interface present on a machine it may also be used at a later time to redefine a network interface s address or other operating parame ters When used without optional parameters ifconfig displays the current configuration for a network interface The interface parameter is the name of the network interface The name is of the form en for Ethernet interfaces possibly followed by a letter where n is 0 for on board network interfaces and the expansion slot number for network interfaces plugged into expansion slots If a card in an expansion slot has more than one network interface the network interface name will be followed by a letter indi cating which of the network interfaces on that card it is The network interface name vh is used to specify IP virtual host addresses associated with the filer Only alias addresses using the alias option may be assigned to the vh interface The network interfa
250. ce using the indicated mode device is a tape name of the form described in tape and mode is an ASCII representation of a deci mal number specifying how the tape is to be opened 0 read only 1 write only 2 read write If a device had already been opened it is closed before a new open is performed Cdevice n Close the currently open device The device specified is ignored Lwhencewoffsetn Performs no operation and returns the value of offset UNIX style Iseek operations are ignored on Dell filer tape devices just as they are on tape devices on many UNIX systems Wcountn Write data onto the open device If count exceeds the maximum data buffer size 64 kilobytes it is truncated to that size etc rmt then reads count bytes from the connection aborting if a premature end of file is encoun tered The response value is the number of bytes written if the write succeeds or 1 if the write fails Rcountn Read count bytes of data from the open device If count exceeds the maxi mum data buffer size 64 kilobytes it is truncated to that size etc rmt then attempts to read count bytes from the tape and responds with Acount readn if the read was successful otherwise an error in the standard format is returned If the read was successful the data read is then sent loperation ncount n Perform a special tape operation on the open device using the specified parameters The parameters are interpreted as ASCII representations of the de
251. chedule specified in the etc snapmirror conf file Data Replication Using SnapMirrof6 11 NOTE The vol snapmirror on command does not persist across filer X reboots Put the command in the etc rc file if you want the command to remain in effect after the filer is rebooted If the etc rc file does not contain a vo1 snapmirror command data replication is disabled 4 Ifthe source volume and the mirror reside on different filers and if the source volume has quotas enabled copy the etc quotas file from the source filer to a file on the destination filer Whenever you make a change to the etc quotas file on the source filer make the same change to the copy on the destination filer so that the destination filer always contains a record of all the quota entries used by the source filer Disabling Data Replication for the Entire Filer Description You can disable data replication for the entire filer if you decide that data replication is no longer necessary You can disable the feature at any time even when replication is underway The mirror remains unchanged after you disable replication Steps Follow these steps to disable volume replication for the entire filer 1 Enterthe vol snapmirror off command on the destination filer to disable SnapMirror Result If the filer is currently transferring data from one volume to another the transfer stops immediately The destination volume remains the same as before the transfer The
252. cimal values operation is one of 0 write end of file marker 1 forward space count files backward space count files forward space count tape blocks b U N backward space count tape blocks Command ReferenceA 167 rmt 5 rewind the tape 6 rewind and unload the tape The return value is the count parameter when the operation is successful Any other command causes etc rmt to close the connection DIAGNOSTICS All responses are of the form described above SEE ALSO tape rshd A 168 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide rquotad NAME rquotad remote quota server DESCRIPTION The filer supports the remote quota service that allows NFS clients to determine their quota allocation on the server SEE ALSO quota Command ReferenceA 169 rshd NAME rshd remote shell daemon DESCRIPTION The filer has UNIX compatible remote shell capability that enables you to execute certain filer commands from a UNIX command line or shell script It also enables you to use a remote shell application on a PC to enter filer commands The etc hosts equiv file controls which hosts have access to the filer remote shell The hosts listed in the etc hosts equiv file are called trusted hosts The filer accepts commands from the filer s administrative users only if the com mands are entered through a remote shell To see a list of filer commands that can be executed through rsh enter the rsh
253. copy the files from a snapshot or restore the files from tape than to use SnapRe store for these reasons You can preserve the data in other files in the same volume e The filer does not need to reboot If the amount of data to be recovered is large it takes a long time to copy the files from a snapshot or to restore from tape In this case SnapRestore is the preferred method for recovering from data corruption Free space required for data recovery If a file to be recovered needs more space than the amount of free space in the active file system you cannot copy the file from the snapshot to the active file system For example if a 10 GB file is corrupted and only 5 GB of free space exists in the active file system you cannot copy the file from a snapshot to recover the file In this case SnapRestore can quickly recover the file you do not have to spend time making the additional space available in the active file system How SnapRestore Works With SnapMirror The following list describes how SnapRestore and SnapMirror interact with each other e You can revert a volume that is the source volume for data replication You can not however revert a volume that is currently the mirror for data replication Youcan revert to any snapshot that is displayed by the snap 1ist command That is you can revert to a regular snapshot or a snapshot created by SnapMirror for data replication The snapshots created by SnapMirror have a diffe
254. counts and percentages of all CIFS operations EXAMPLE filer gt cifs stat 10 GetAttr Read Write Lock Open Cl Direct Other 175 142 3 70 115 642 50 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Command Reference A 17 cifs terminate NAME cifs terminate terminate CIFS service SYNOPSIS cifs terminate t minutes workstation DESCRIPTION The cifs terminate command is used to terminate CIFS service If the workstation operand is specified then all CIFS sessions open by that workstation will be termi nated If no workstation operand is specified then all CIFS sessions will be terminated and CIFS service will be shut down completely To restart CIFS service after it has been shut down use the cifs restart command see cifs restart If CIFS service is terminated for a workstation that has a file open then that workstation will not be able to save any changes that it may have cached for that file which could result in the loss of data Therefore it is very important to warn users before terminating CIFS service The t option described below can be used to warn users before terminating CIFS service If you run cifs terminate without the t option and the affected workstations have open files then you ll be prompted to enter the number of minutes that you d like to delay before terminating If you execute cifs terminate from rsh you will be required to supply the t option since comman
255. creates these every Sunday at midnight Weekly snapshots are called weekly n where n is an integer weekly 0 is the most recent weekly snapshot and weekly 1 is the next most recent weekly snapshot When the filer creates a weekly snapshot the value of n is adjusted for all weekly snapshots The higher the value of n the older the snapshot The filer creates these every midnight except when a weekly snapshot is scheduled to occur at the same time If the number of weekly snapshots is nonzero and it s the day of the week that weekly snapshots occur no nightly snapshot is created Nightly snapshots are called nightly n where n is an integer nightly 0 is the most recent nightly snapshot and nightly 1 is the next most recent nightly snapshot When the filer creates a nightly snapshot the value of n is adjusted for all nightly snapshots The higher the value of n the older the snapshot The filer creates these on the hour at specified hours except at midnight if a nightly or weekly snapshot is scheduled to occur at the same time This occurs either if the number of nightly snap shots in the schedule is nonzero or if the number of weekly snapshots in the schedule is nonzero and it s the day of the week that weekly snapshots occur Hourly snapshots are called hourly n where n is an integer hourly 0 is the most recent hourly snapshot and hourly 1 is the next most recent hourly snapshot When the filer creates an hourly snapsh
256. cremental changes from the source volume Recommendations Follow these recommendations to minimize confusion or to replicate data efficiently When specifying the mirror update schedule in the etc snapmirror conf file stag ger the update times instead of starting multiple mirror updates at the same 16 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide time If the filer does not have enough resources to perform all scheduled mirror updates it postpones some updates until it has enough resources to do so As a result the filer might need to perform subsequent updates at times that are dif ferent from those you specify in the etc snapmirror conf file During data replication the filer copies data from all snapshots from the source volume Therefore the filer must preserve all snapshots when data replication is in progress even though the snapshot schedule might call for the deletion of some snapshots If you want the filer to delete snapshots at the exact time spec ified by the snap sched command schedule the mirror updates to be different from the snapshot deletion times The filer transfers data faster if the source volume and the mirror have the follow ing characteristics They contain disks of the same size They contain RAID groups of the same size They contain the same number of RAID groups If the source volume has quotas enabled and you want to apply the same quota re
257. cript SEE ALSO date rc Command Reference A 77 reboot NAME reboot stop and then restart the filer SYNOPSIS reboot d t minutes DESCRIPTION reboot halts the filer and then restarts it reboot is commonly used to allow modified configuration files to take effect or to run a newly installed version of Data ONTAP 5 3 NFS clients can maintain use of a file over a halt or reboot although experienc ing a failure to respond during that time but CIFS clients cannot do so safely Therefore CIFS clients should if possible be warned to close their open files If you did not use the t option to specify a maximum delay and there are CIFS cli ents with open files the reboot command displays the number of CIFS users and the number of open CIFS files Then it prompts you for the number of min utes to delay CIFS files that are still open at the time the filer halts will lose writes that had been cached but not written reboot logs a message in the etc messages file see messages file to indicate that the filer was rebooted on purpose OPTIONS d Dump system core before rebooting t minutes Reboots after the indicated number of minutes or after all CIFS files that were open have been closed whichever is sooner SEE ALSO download halt savecore setup A 78 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME restore restore restore files or file systems from backups mad
258. d this function key restarts data recovery from the last tape file used successfully by the command Lists all the file names on a tape If you specify a path name only the files in the path name are listed Extracts an individual file or subtree from the backup The restore Command options Table 13 2 describes the options for the restore command Table 13 2 restore Command Options Option Argument Meaning b number Specifies the blocking factor Use the same argu ment for the b option in the dump command tape file Specifies the name of the tape file If you specify restore reads from standard input Data Hecovery 13 3 Table 13 2 restore Command Options continued Option Argument Meaning D pathname Specifies the absolute path name of a directory into which the files are restored Without the path name the files are restored to the directory from which they were backed up If you created a backup before you installed multi ple volumes on the filer specify the path name into which the backup is restored For example if you backed up the home directory when the filer con tained a single volume and you want to restore home to vol engineering home specify vol engineering home as the target path name in the restore command Otherwise the home backup is restored to the home directory of the root volume S number Specifies the number of the file if multiple tape files exist on a tape
259. d File System Management3 19 About the Style Option The style option controls the output style The three style option arguments are as follows readable This is the default and is what you see when you use the filestats command with no style option table Use the table argument when the filestats output will be used by processing programs html Use the html argument for output that will be read by a Web browser About the expr Option The expr option is an advanced option of the filestats command The expr option enables you to specify a Boolean expression that the ilestats command refers to for each file it encounters Table 3 2 lists valid file attributes that you can use with the expr option Table 3 2 Valid File Attributes for expr Option Attribute Definition tid Tree ID type File type perm Permissions flags Additional flags nlink Count of hard links uid Numeric user ID of file owner gid Numeric group ID of file owner size Size in bytes blkcnt Size in blocks gen Generation number atime Time of last read or write in seconds mtime Time of last write in seconds ctime Time of last size status change crtime Time of file creation atimeage Access time in seconds mtimeage Modification age 3 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 3 2 Valid File Attributes for expr Option continued Attribute Definition ctimeage Size sta
260. d again you can use thevol copy status command on a trusted host of the filer as shown in the following example rsh filer vol copy status 10 04 pm volcopy dump 0 99 done Estimate 1 minutes remaining 10 04 pm volcopy restore 1 99 done Estimate 1 minutes remaining No operation 2 in progress No operation 3 in progress In this example volume copy operation 0 shown as volcopy dump 0 in the dis play is for reading the data from the vo O volume volume copy operation 1 shown as volcopy restore 1 inthe display is for writing the data to the vol volume Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Sef5 9 Aborting a Volume Copy Operation To stop a volume copy operation use the following command syntax vol copy abort operation number The operation number parameter specifies the volume copy operation to be aborted You can obtain the operation number from the vol copy status output CAUTION If you do not specify an operation number in the command the JA filer aborts all volume copy operations It does not display a help string for the vol copy abort command If data is being copied between two filers you can execute this command on either filer If you start the volume copying operation from the filer console you can enter the vol copy abort command only through rsh because you do not have access to the filer prompt on the console during the copying CAUTION An incomplete volume copy operation leaves un
261. d them Explaining UNIX explanation of UNIX permissions Displaying SecureShare Access To display SecureShare Access follow these steps 1 Select the files and directories whose permissions you want to change The items are highlighted 2 Right click one of the items you selected A pop up menu appears 3 Choose Properties from the pop up menu The Properties dialog box appears 4 Click the SecureShare tab SecureShare Access appears Changing the Permissions of a Single Item If you select only one item SecureShare Access appears CAUTION SecureShare Access has no undo feature Use it very carefully qtree Security Style Effects The security style of the qtree from which you select an item has the following effects e In NTFS style qtrees all the edit fields and check boxes are disabled Use stan dard Windows NT tools to manipulate NTFS files e n NFS style qtrees the Has ACL check box is meaningless and is disabled e n mixed style qtrees if a file has an ACL the ACL is removed when you click the OK or Apply button A dialog box prompts you to confirm that this is what you want NOTE If you click OK or Apply on any page or tab of a Properties sheet it puts into X effect all changes that you made on all pages or tabs of the Properties sheet 7 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Recursive Application of Changes If one or more of the files is a director
262. d then re creating the hard links Trouble occurs because the inode number is assumed to be 16 bits If another file has a matching low order 16 bits an internal number collision occurs which cpio does not recognize The cpio utility then overwrites the first file and creates files that no longer contain the original data Ask UNIX Provider Whether cpio Version Supports 32 bit Inode Definition Numbers Check with your UNIX provider to see whether your version of cpio has this prob lem If you use SunOS 4 x ask for the Sun patch 100556 01 This patch works around the problem by requiring that the files have the same UID GID mode mod time inumber and device before concluding that they are the same file UNIX df Problems The df Version Must Support Large File Systems Some UNIX versions of the df command have file system limits considerably smaller than the file system size supported by the filer This can cause the UNIX d command to show an incorrect and useless amount of filer disk space in use or remaining How ever the disk space you installed in your filer is fully available and you can use it Enable NFS Option to Avoid Displaying Useless Data To avoid a useless display of disk space on a client system that uses NFS version 2 enable the nf s v2 df 2gb lim option as described in Configuring Filer Options DOS Windows and Macintosh Clients Might Have Display Problem Some DOS Windows or Macintosh clients might hav
263. dd library vol vol0 home lib New file library This example creates the library share and defines it as HOMALIB home lib in UNIX notation in the filer s root volume With the appropriate access rights CIFS users can gain access to the HOME LIB directory in the root volume which is displayed as the library share on their computers For more information about setting access rights refer to Assigning and Changing Access Rights 7 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Using the cifs shares Command to Change the Share To change the description forced file ownership and user limits of a share use the following command cifs shares change sharename comment description nocom ment forcegroup groupname noforcegroup maxusers n nomaxusers Table 7 5 describes the parameters Table 7 5 Changing a Share With cifs shares Command Parameter or variable Description description A string describing the purpose of the share It must contain only characters in the current code page It is displayed in the share list in Network Neighborhood on the client If the description contains spaces you must enclose it in single quotation marks groupname The name of the group you want all files in the share to get the group membership of n The maximum number of users that you specify can con nect to the share at the same time The limit on this number is de
264. ddress was found in the etc dgateways file Only the first one found is used routed unable to open socket a networking error has prevented routed from ini tializing properly A 86 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide savecore NAME savecore save a core dump SYNOPSIS savecore DESCRIPTION savecore is meant to be called near the end of the initialization file etc rc Its function is to save the core dump of the system assuming one was made and to write the panic string to etc messages savecore saves the core dump in two files etc crash core n and etc crash core n small where n is determined by the etc crash bounds file The small core file contains a subset of the memory image that Dell can use for initial troubleshooting Dell will only need to look at the large core file if the prob lem cannot be determined by examining the small one Before savecore writes out a core image it reads a number from the file etc crash minfree If the number of free kilobytes in the filesystem after saving the core would be less than the number obtained from minfree the core dump is not saved If minfree does not exist savecore always writes out the core file assuming that a core dump was taken FILES etc crash core saved core files etc crash core small saved small core files etc crash bounds suffix for next core file etc crash minfree free KB in FS to maintain after
265. de SnapRestore continued how it works 3 22 interaction with SnapMirror 3 23 procedure for reverting a volume 3 25 typical applications 3 22 when to use 3 23 snapshots accessing 9 16 automatic 9 5 commands for 9 4 created by SnapMirror 16 4 definition 9 1 deleting to free space 9 14 directory name displayed on CIFS clients 9 17 disk consumption by 9 8 effects of SnapRestore 3 22 effects on disk quotas 9 11 information in the custom MIB 4 4 Is command 9 18 magic directories 9 16 making snapshot directory invisible 9 4 operation of 9 2 9 3 options 19 13 reserving space for 9 9 9 12 9 14 reverting a volume 3 25 scheduling 9 11 snapshot for backup file 12 2 types 9 5 SNMP commands examples 4 2 configuring the agent 4 2 custom MIB 4 3 snmp command 4 2 snmp enable option 19 19 spare disks in RAID groups 3 1 subnets exporting to 6 11 swapping out disks 3 11 symbolic links CIFS 5 2 sysconfig command filer configuration 17 1 hot spare disk availability 3 6 sysconfig d command 17 1 sysconfig m command 14 2 sysconfig r command 17 1 sysconfig t command 17 2 sysconfig v command 18 1 sysstat command 17 3 for filer system load 3 6 system ACL SACL setting 7 30 System board filer main unit 1 4 system memory filer main unit 1 4 System panics 18 19 T tape block definition 12 6 specifying the size for dump 12 14 specifyi
266. de DISABLE All license codes are case insensitive Do not leave a space before or after the equal sign in the command The following list describes the services you can license Enter nfs to enable NFS Enter cifs to enable CIFS Enter http to enable HTTP Enter snapmirror to enable SnapMirror Enter snaprestore to enable SnapRestore EXAMPLES The following example enables NFS filer license nfs ABCDEFG nfs license enabled nfs enabled The following example disables CIFS filer license cifs DISABLE unlicense cifs cifs will be disabled upon reboot A 50 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide logout NAME logout use control D to logout DESCRIPTION The filer doesn t have a logout command Since the telnet connection and the console are multiplexed into the same session there would be no way for a logout command to tell which connection to drop To log out type control D Over telnet typing control D disconnects the session On the console typing control D returns the console to the password prompt If no password is set control D has no effect SEE ALSO passwd Command Reference A 51 maxfiles NAME maxfiles increase the number of files the volume can hold SYNOPSIS maxfiles vo name max DESCRIPTION maxfiles increases the number of files that a volume can hold to max Once increased the value of max can never be lowered so the new value
267. de over the Internet Enabling Services To enter a license code to enable a protocol on your filer use the 1icense command with the following syntax license protocol code The protocol field can be one of these values n s cifs http snapmirror and snaprestore Example If the license code for NFS is ABCDEFG enter license nfs ABCDEFG The events that take place after a 1icense command depend on the protocol speci fied Table 2 21 discusses the events for each service or feature 2 36 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 21 license Command Service or Feature Service or feature Messages NFS nfs license enabled nfs enabled The filer also automatically runs the nfs on command to start NFS service However the filer does not add the nfs on com mand to etc rc as a result of the 1icense command If you want the filer to run NFS service after each reboot add nfs on to etc rc CIFS CIFS license enabled Run cifs setup to enable CIFS To start CIFS service set up the filer s CIFS configuration by run ning cifs setup You don t need to run cifs setup after the license command if you already set up the CIFS configuration HTTP http license enabled Use options httpd enable to enable http To start HTTP service enter the following command options httpd enable on Results The options command takes effect immediately If you want the filer to au
268. de with the vol options command are persistent between reboots you do not need to add them to the etc rc file Syntax of the vol options Command The syntax of the vol options command is as follows vol options volname option value If you omit a value for an option the command displays the current value of the option Table 2 18 describes the variables Table 2 18 Variables of the vol options Command Variable Description volname the name of the volume that the option applies to option the name of the option value the value of the option Example of the vol options Command The following command sets the maximum size of a RAID group in the volume named myvol to 12 vol options myvol raidsize 12 Sending Automatic Email How Automatic Email Messages Are Controlled The filer uses the autosupport daemon to control how automatic email messages are sent from your filer to your administrator Filer Administration Basics 2 27 How the autosupport Daemon Works The autosupport daemon is enabled by default on the filer The daemon triggers automatic email messages to customer defined administrator accounts alerting them to potential filer problems Mail Host Requirement for autosupport Because the filer doesn t function as a mail host it relies on another host at your site that listens on the SMTP port 25 to send mail Therefore autosupport requires at least one host reachable by the filer that runs an SMTP
269. dedo a qd debet a e deat Ted 7 29 Enabling CIFS Access Logging iliis 7 29 DESCUPION c CLE 7 29 AS C Oe aM iow sa M dr ocu i ee oe M d i s eb boc Mu e ir MEL EU 7 29 Disabling CIFS Access logging pd ERES ys ots Bans eae 7 29 IDeserptiOnma x acum note et etes au pao male a ede lees Wa E ERO ated 7 29 SIDE ia Merced AN date Ga ER ENS M ES Sea 7 30 Specifying the Activ Event Logs 24 Lo S eV LETT 7 30 IESCRPTONG xd fee eor edes dee eic ted Des M dte 7 30 PrerequisIt S iau s ae EE ERUNT ceni Wan dae eA Ree d 7 30 STEP 4 cad tlm ot aen dest we ee aet que teg tell dom dot det do 7 30 Setting a System ACL ona File iilis 7 30 Descriptio Messe Exo t eT be a at AAN EA 7 30 Prerequisites ee cos e ere P ede lt eae reds ee a 7 30 SOPA wax d ae e GM S AR 6 Vand EM wae rm entes 7 31 Viewing Eventsun a Sec rity EO ui eroe dd S 7 32 Descrip tioN E ceo te tens tm Ren ete tiU eae obs umo eere eis aire cii 7 32 Prerequisites zie y cxtra C eR LINDE 7 32 O aur dehet enero etes xa ette dae e egeo brune dieto ol A yd 7 32 Usindc Oplo6KS us idu sess end atus ex eG Het Ee MOA T RECTA CER ita 7 33 What OplockS DOoi ta ia o o a abia 7 33 When to Use OplockS iris eee db ee ets 7 33 Data Loss Possibilities cue ai el pa eee As 7 33 Error Handling And Write Completion o o ooooooooooo o o o 7 33 When to Turn Oplocks Off 0 0 00 ooo 7 33 Turning Oplocks On and Off Globally ooooooooooooo oo 7 34 Turning Op
270. deleted or overwritten files Snapshots are read only copies of the entire file system Data ONTAP 5 3 enables you to perform the following actions Administer network connections Administer protocols Dump data to tape and restore it to the filer Introducing Dell Filers 1 7 e Copy volumes Mirror volumes Filer Administration With Data ONTAP 5 3 Filer Administration Activities Administering a filer involves the following activities e Configuring the filer Monitoring and maintaining client access to data e Monitoring and maintaining network access e Monitoring and maintaining filer hardware Performing periodic administration tasks Configuring the Filer You configure the filer by running either the Setup Wizard or the setup program or both if necessary then editing configuration files if necessary Monitoring and Maintaining Client Access You monitor client access to data on the filer by the following methods Gathering network statistics so that you can verify and improve the performance of the filer Gathering file statistics so that you can schedule snapshots Monitoring accesses to a file by CIFS clients so that you can monitor potential security problems You maintain client access by the following methods e Configuring volumes and qtrees to accommodate the needs of Microsoft Windows operating systems and UNIX clients Configuring volumes so that there is enough disk space for d
271. dependent Disks RAID group Data disks Parity disk Spare disks Volumes A feature that enables file access even if one disk in a RAID group is damaged A RAID group consists of a parity disk and up to 27 data disks and optional spare disks Hold the data that clients access Contains information that Data ONTAP 5 3 uses to recon struct data if a data disk fails Each RAID group has one par ity disk Replace failed data disks auto matically with reconstructed data Pools of storage composed of multiple disks that store client data A filer can support up to 23 volumes or can have only one volume You can control the size of a RAID group This enables you to customize backups and disk failure recovery You can control the number of data and spare disks that a filer can use This enables you to manage recovery if a disk fails You can specify the size of a volume add disks to it copy volumes and control the num ber of RAID groups in a volume This gives flexibility in managing data storage tasks such as backups and restores and enables you to customize volumes Data Organization Management Data is organized in files which are the smallest unit of data management Users organize files into directories and you organize directories into file systems which are known as volumes You can also organize directories into special directories called atrees Major data organization concepts tha
272. detailed information by appending v to the command line Sample Output The following example shows the mapping of a UNIX name wcc u fuser001 NT UNIX account name s NT DOMAIN fuser001 fuser001 kCckckck ck ck ckck ck ck KKK KK UNIX uid 1172 NT membership NT DOMAINNfuser001 NT DOMAIN Domain Users BUILTINNUsers TFILERNTest User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users kCckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck kk kk 5 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Displaying a Mapping Result for a Windows Name Description This procedure displays what the current mapping of the specified UNIX name of a Windows NT account would result in but does not change the WAFL credential cache itself You use this procedure if a Windows NT user cannot access a file that the user should be able to access and you suspect that mapping problems might be part of the problem Step To display what the current mapping of a Windows name would result in but not change the WAFL credential cache enter the following command wcc s uname uname is a Wndows NT account e You can further narrow the specification of the user by adding i followed by the IP address of the host that the user is on Youcan get more detailed information by appending v to the command line Sample Output The following example shows the mapping of a Windows name
273. dministrative actions 1 7 and management tasks 3 11 changing the speed of copying 15 10 concepts 3 6 configuration of 3 7 converting from mirror to regular 16 15 creating 3 11 defined 1 6 destroying 3 14 volumes continued differences between mirror and regular 16 3 displaying file statistics 3 15 displaying information about 17 2 displaying language use 5 13 displaying state information 17 2 error message about invalid names 18 5 handling failures 3 14 making inactive 3 13 monitoring status 3 12 mounting 3 7 naming conventions 3 6 problems with 18 4 removing 3 8 renaming 3 14 renaming and effect on shares 7 1 replicating 16 1 reverting 3 21 setting options 3 12 snapmirrored status 16 3 WwW WAFL credential cache entry adding 5 20 entry deleting 5 21 managing 5 17 setting how long entry is valid 5 19 statistics display 5 21 UNIX name mapping result 5 24 Windows name mapping result 5 25 wafl convert_ucode option 19 20 wafl create_ucode option 19 20 wafl default_nt_user option 19 20 wafl default unix user option 19 21 wafl maxdirsize option 17 8 19 21 wafl root only chown option 19 21 wafl wcc minutes valid option 5 17 5 20 19 21 Index 13 warnings for disk failures 3 5 Y wcc command 5 17 WebNFS 6 1 6 12 weekly snapshots 9 5 ypwhich command 4 11 Windows file access detail displays CIFS event 7 27 Windows NT
274. ds an email message describing the status of the filer A word entered as the value for the option is sent in the notification subject line and should describe the reason for the notification The autosupport enable Option Default On Description Enables the autosupport daemon which sends automatic email messages to report the status of the filer The autosupport from Option Default autosupport Description Specifies the sender of the automatic email message The autosupport mailhost Option Default administration host Description Specifies the mail hosts that receive automatic email messages Use a comma Separated list with no spaces 19 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The autosupport noteto Option Default None Description Specifies up to five recipients of an automatic short email message Use a comma Separated list with no spaces CIFS Options What the CIFS Options Do The CIFS options control CIFS features on the filer The cifs access logging enable Option Default Off Description When On enables the filer to process access logging or auditing information The default is Off The cifs access logging filename Option Default None Description Specifies the active event log file The file must be in an existing directory in a net work share The cifs bypass traverse checking Option Default On Detailed Options Info
275. ds executed with rsh are unable to prompt for user input OPTIONS t minutes Specifies the number of minutes to delay before terminating CIFS service During the delay the system will periodically send notices of the impending shutdown to the affected workstations Note workstations running Windows95 98 or Windows for Workgroups won t see the notification unless they re running WinPopup If the specified number of minutes is zero then CIFS service will be ter minated immediately SEE ALSO cifs restart halt reboot rsh A 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME cifs testdc cifs testdc test the filer s connection to Windows NT domain controllers SYNOPSIS cifs testdc DESCRIPTION The cifs testdc command tests the filer s ability to connect with Windows NT domain controllers The output of the cifs testdc command is useful in the diag nosis of CIFS related network problems EXAMPLE purple cifs testdc Using Established configuration Current Mode of NBT is H Mode NetBIOS scope Registered names U URPLE URPLE URPLE URPLE 1 URPLE 1 URPLE 1 URPLE 2 URPLE 2 URPLE 2 URPLE 3 URPLE 3 URPLE 3 URPLE 4 URPLE 4 URPLE 4 URPLE 5 URPLE 5 URPLE 5 URPLE 6 URPLE 6 URPLE 6 URPLE 7 URPLE 7 URPLE 7 URPLE 8 URPLE 8 URPLE 8 URPLE 9 URPLE 9 URPLE 9 UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUuuuuuiulv 0 WINS Broadcast 3 WINS Broadcast 20
276. e 12 3 e 13 1 e 132 e 15 1 e 15 2 e 15 3 e 15 4 e 16 1 e 162 e 17 1 e 17 2 e 17 3 e 17 4 e 17 5 e 17 6 e 17 7 e 18 1 e 182 e 183 e 184 e 18 5 e 19 1 Shared by Multiple Filers 0 0 eese 12 20 Sample of Backing Up the Entire Filer 12 22 restore Command Function Keys 002000005 13 3 restore Command Options o o ooooooooooo eee 13 3 vol copy Command Situations l l 15 2 Command Syntax for Copying One Volume to Another 15 5 Examples of the vol copy start Command o o o o o o ooo o 15 6 vol copy start Command Error MessageS o oooo 15 8 Replicating a Volume Situation llli 16 1 Differences in vol copy Command and SnapMirror 16 17 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface RECEIVE 17 5 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface TRANSMIT 17 6 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface DEVICE 17 7 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface LINK INFO 17 7 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface RECEIVE 17 7 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface TRANSMIT 17 8 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface DEVICE 17 8 Using WINS id ai 18 16 Not Using WINS 20 ees 18 16 ncorrect Password or Unknown Username o ooooo 18 17 Users Cannot Map a Drive ooooooooooooo ess 18 17 Panic Message COMPONENT
277. e 2 27 Example of the vol options Command 0 0 0 000000 eae 2 27 xii Chapter 3 Sending Automatic EMail 33 3 airs ptes ete UD OLDER e s 2 27 How Automatic Email Messages Are Controlled 2 27 How the autosupport Daemon WorkS o o ooooooooooooooooooooo 2 28 Mail Host Requirement for autosupport leise 2 28 About Configuring autosupport o ooooooocoooo eee 2 28 Events That Trigger autosupport Email 2 00000 0c aee 2 28 Contents of Automatic Email Messages 2000000 2 29 Use the options Command to Configure autosupport 2 29 Disabling or Enabling the autosupport Daemon 204 2 29 Specifying Addresses for autosupport Mall oooooooooo o o o 2 30 Specifying the Filer Administrator s AdUresS o ooooooooo o oo 2 30 Sending an Immediate Message i i iilii eee 2 30 Sending a Short Message aeina eiea i a a E ced p eb pos 2 31 Filer System Time Synchronization illie eee 2 31 Commands for Synchronizing Time ills 2 31 Time Synchronization with the rdate Command 0000000 00 2 31 When to Use the rdate Command 0000 cee 2 32 Filet Clock s ACGUFACVs dedic 2 32 Use of cron jobs to RUN rdate 0 eee 2 32 cronjobB Examples s uns rmt uev surdi a re dn PURIS SER tuns 2 32 Titre Synchronization With SNEP iua sime er oes teo thee daa 2 32 Wiemto Use SINT Ps uso tor
278. e Routers 4 12 Displaying Routing Status sos ca pds s ec cte ee RU 4 13 The ete dgateways File emet RR Ren AVR ella rate 4 13 How the Filer Replies to Requests lliiiiilllsiillllsslls 4 14 Using ifconfig to Configure an Interface l l eese 4 15 About the ifcontig Command i5 ses Mowe BLEU 4 15 The ifconfig Command Syntax 4 ere eT a bei eee cs 4 15 Reasons to Use the ifconfig Command n on a naasa aeaaaee 4 15 Changing the Interface s IP Address Network Mask or Broadcast Address 0 0 0 en en 4 15 Setting the Media Type on an Ethernet Interface o o o o 4 15 Setting the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 005 4 16 Configuring the Interface Up or Down 2 ee 4 16 Edit etc rc File to Make Changes Persistent After Reboot 4 17 Viewing Interface Configuration Information lille 4 17 EtherChanne l Trunking andeis aeia c ach A ERS SEY 4 17 Trunks Are a Logical Group of Interfaces o o o ooooooooooooo 4 17 Synonyms for Trunks i um da PER Pa wea AS 4 17 Int rf ces Beftore Tr nkingius duse ree id dt 4 17 Interfaces After Trunking 0 0 ee 4 18 Kinds of Trunks lt 2 25 A GRR RAG Reka Sew A IE 4 18 TWO Kinds OF TRUNKS sat na dent toc oc eet an a techs tot e ens seti deco ete d 4 18 Single Mode TirinkS 2a ce A CORR 4 19 Multiple Mode TT lks 20k si e ERR 4 19 Hardware Requirements for Trunks llle
279. e a display problem similar to UNIX systems in these cases enable thenf s v2 df 2gb lim option Filer df Command Always Shows Correct Disk Space At all times the d command entered on the filer correctly shows the amount of disk Space used and remaining 18 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide qtrees Affect Disk Space Displayed by df If a directory in a qtree is mounted and a client issues a d command on something under that mount point the command shows the smaller of the client s file system limit or the filer disk space This makes the qtree look fuller according to the client d command than it actually is Filer Quota Report Command Always Displays Correct Usage The filer quota report command shows the correct usage within that qtree Serious Error Messages Panic Messages Mean Serious Problems If your filer has a serious problem such as a problem with the hardware or a bug in the system software it issues a system panic message similar to the following one PANIC system hung NS0 Volume volname Version verno Table 18 5 shows panic message components Table 18 5 Panic Message Components Message Component Description system hung NSO Indicates the panic class of the message and is signifi cant The actual text of the message varies with circumstances volname Is the name of the volume verno Is the version number What to Do After a Pa
280. e being used by the volume vol copy start S s source destination copies all data including the snap shots from one volume to another If you use the S flag the command copies all snapshots in the source volume to the destination volume To specify a particular snapshot to copy use the s flag followed by the name of the snapshot If you use neither the S nor s flag in the command the filer creates a snapshot at the time when the vol copy start command is exe cuted and copies only that snapshot to the destination volume The source volume and destination volume can be on the same filer or differ ent filers If the source or destination volume is on a filer other than the one on which you enter the vol copy start command specify the volume name in the filer name volume name format The filers involved in a volume copy must meet the following requirements for the vol copy start command to be completed successfully The source volume must be on line and the destination volume must be off line If data is copied between two filers each filer must be defined as a trusted host of the other filer That is the filer s name must be in the etc hosts equiv file of the other filer If data is copied on the same filer localhost must be included in the filer s etc hosts equiv file Also the loopback address must be in Command ReferenceA 109 vol the filer s etc hosts file Otherwise the filer cannot send packets to its
281. e conversion upon CIFS access reverting to 5 14 Unicode format conversion upon any access 5 16 Directory directive 8 3 dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis does not exist message 18 7 fail command 3 11 in use message 18 7 information using sysconfig d 17 1 information using vol status 17 2 remove command 3 11 scrub command 3 3 shelves 1 5 S addressing use of 3 2 changing the size of RAID groups 3 9 concepts 3 1 data 1 6 degraded mode 3 5 3 11 different types in RAID group 3 1 failures effects of 3 6 failures handling 3 4 free space accessing information through SNMP 4 4 free space displaying 11 11 freeing space by deleting snapshots 9 14 hot swapping 3 4 information in the custom MIB 4 4 installing new 3 10 management tasks 3 9 maximum number of files 11 10 parity 1 6 3 1 problems 18 5 quotas 4 4 9 11 11 1 removing 3 10 restricting usage 11 1 SCSI ID number 3 2 setting size of RAID group 3 9 snapshots space used 9 3 disks continued spare 1 6 swapping 3 11 usable space 3 4 DNS disabling 4 10 enabling 4 9 options 19 7 querying the name server 4 9 resolving names with 4 7 dns enable option 19 7 DOS attributes changing from Windows NT 7 23 DOS file names forcing to lowercase 5 14 double disk failures 18 6 dump command data format 12 5 devices 12 3 different passes 12 5 effect on mirror upda
282. e detailed information about verifying whether the source and destination volumes meet these requirements e The source volume must be on line and the destination volume must exist and be off line e The destination volume must not be the root volume because the destination vol ume must be off line when the filer executes the vol copy command and a root volume must always be on line The capacity of the destination volume must be greater than or equal to the capacity of the source volume e The destination volume must not contain data that you want to preserve The source and destination filers must have a trusting relationship with each other e The localhost interface must be specified as a trusted host if data is copied on the same filer Verifying the Status of Each Volume The destination volume must exist before you enter thevol copy start com mand to start copying a volume If the volume does not exist the command does not create the volume and the command returns an error See Creating Volumes in Chapter 3 for information about how to create a volume After you verify that the destination volume exists check the status of the source vol ume and the destination volume Checking the Status of a Volume The source volume must be on line and the destination volume must be off line To verify whether a volume is on line or off line use the following command syntax vol status volume name Changing the Status of a V
283. e drives SCSI ID The number of a disk drive on the SCSI chain 0 6 serial adapter An expansion card for attaching a termi nal as the console on some filers serial console An ASCII or ANSI terminal attached to a filer s serial port Used to monitor and manage filer operations share A directory or directory structure on the filer that has been made available to net work users and can be mapped to a drive letter on a CIFS client SID Security identifier snapshot An on line read only copy of the entire file system that protects against acciden tal deletions or modifications of files without duplicating file contents Snap shots enable users to restore files and enable you to back up the filer to tape while the filer is in use Glossary 3 4 system board A printed circuit board that contains the filer s CPU expansion bus slots and sys tem memory tree quota A type of disk quota that restricts the disk usage of a directory created by the quota qtree command Different from user and group quotas that restrict disk usage by files with a given UID or GID UID User identification number Unicode A 16 bit character set standard It was designed and is maintained by the non profit consortium Unicode Inc VGA adapter Expansion card for attaching a VGA ter minal as the console WAFL Write Anywhere File Layout The WAFL M file system was designed for the Dell filer to optimize
284. e filer with read only permissions so that net work clients cannot make additional changes to the source filer Because the source and destination filers con tain identical data you can change the status of each mirror on the destination filer to a regular volume For more information about how to convert a mirror to a regular volume refer to Setting Volume Options in Chapter 3 You can change the status of the mirror to a regular volume Users can immedi ately have access to the same data as that on the source volume The snapmirrored volume option con trols whether a volume is a mirror or a regular volume For more information about volume options refer to Setting Volume Options in Chapter 3 How SnapMirror Works Command and Configuration File for Controlling SnapMirror To use SnapMirror for replicating a volume use the vol snapmirror command set and two configuration files etc snapmirror conf and etc snapmirror allow The command set is described in Replicating a Volume The configuration files are described in The etc snapmirror allow File and The etc snapmirror conf File How the Filer Creates a Baseline Version of the Mirror To use SnapMiirror you create an off line volume to be used as the destination for data replication The destination volume is referred to as the mirror The mirror can reside on the same filer as the source volume or on another filer 16 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and
285. e for HTTP Without the license you can use an HTTP client Web browser only to display the filer s man pages and to use FilerView As with UNIX based systems the URL is case sensitive Starting HTTP Service Procedure for Starting HTTP Service To start HTTP service on your filer follow these steps 1 Enable the ht t pd daemon by entering the following command options httpd enable on Use the following command syntax to specify the root directory that contains the files and directories to be read by HTTP clients options httpd rootdir directory For example if the root directory is vol vol0 home users pages enter the follow ing command options httpd rootdir vol vol0 home users pages If you want to limit the size of the etc log httpd log log file to other than the default of 2 147483 647 bytes 2 GB minus 1 byte use the following command options httpd log max file size bytes Make a copy of etc httpd mimetypes sample and name the copy etc httpd mimetypes If the etc httpd mimetypes file is missing the HTTP client uses the information in etc httpd mimetypes sample HTTP Administration 8 1 NOTE If you want these options to remain active after rebooting you must add them X to the etc rc file The procedure for starting HTTP service is now complete and clients can display text files under the root directory by using a Web browser If the filer will transfer files other than text files for example im
286. e from one set of disks to another on Example You can copy the volO volume to the voll the same filer volume and then delete duplicated files and directo ries in these volumes so that the original contents of vol0 are split into two volumes Benefits of the vol copy Command Set Although you can copy data on the filer using client programs such a following benefits e Whenavol copy command reads and writes data the filer d S cpio or using the filer s dump and restore commands the vol copy command set offers the oes not traverse directories on the filer Data is copied block for block directly from the disks which means that the filer can finish the copying faster than it could with other methods e Usinga vol copy command the filer preserves the snapshot source volume If in the future users might need to use snapshots that were xample if users accidentally delete files and need to recover them use avol copy command taken before data was copied from one volume to another for e for migrating data data of the 15 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Requirements and Recommendation For Copying a Volume Requirements for Copying a Volume The filers involved in a volume copy operation must meet several requirements for data to be copied successfully The following list is a brief description of these require ments The rest of this section provides mor
287. e level operations You use these options only with the vol options command For more information about volume options see The vol options Command in Chapter 2 The Minra Option Default Off Description Configures the filer to perform minimal read ahead By default the option is disabled and the filer does aggressive read ahead The no atime update Option Default Off Detailed Options Informatioril 9 15 Description Prevents the update of the access time atime on an inode when a file is read This option prevents inode updates from contending with reads from other files Use it only on a filer with extremely high read traffic for example on a news server used by an Internet access provider or on a filer used mainly as an HTTP server The nosnap Option Default Off Description Temporarily disables automatic snapshots The nosnapdir Option Default Off Description Makes invisible the snapshot directory that s usually present at the client mount point or at the root of the CIFS share It also turns off access to the snapshot directory and all snapshot directories under the mount point or the root of the CIFS share After you toggle this option you might not notice the effect immediately because the information about the snapshot directories might still be in the client s attribute cache To force the change to take effect immediately unmount and remount the file system The nvfail Option Default
288. e map FILES etc nsswitch conf SEE ALSO setup Command ReferenceA 139 passwd NAME passwd password file SYNOPSIS etc passwd DESCRIPTION The passwd file contains basic information about each user s account It contains a one line entry for each authorized user of the form username password uid gid gcosfield home directory login shell Required Fields username The user s login name not more than eight characters password The user s password in an encrypted form that is generated by the UNIX passwd function However if the encrypted password is stored in etc shadow see shadow the password field of etc passwd is empty uid A unique integer assigned by the UNIX administrator to represent the user s account its value is usually between 0 and 32767 gid An integer representing the group to which the user has been assigned Groups are created by the UNIX system administrator each is assigned a unique integer whose value is generally between 0 and 32767 gcos field The user s real name The name may be of any length it may include capital letters as well as lower case and may include blanks The name may be empty home directory The user s home directory The home directory field may be empty login shell The default shell launched at login This field may be empty EXAMPLE Here is a sample passwd file when the etc shadow does not exist root bDPu ys5PBoYU 0 1 Operator bin csh dave Os
289. e or telnet connection with the filer The password was specified during setup You can change the system password at any time with the passwd command When you enter the passwd command the filer prompts you to enter the old password if any and then requests the new password twice Where to Go to Learn More About Security For information about ways to increase filer security in addition to password protec tion use the options described in Using Options Command Options to Maintain Filer Security About Multiple Administrative Users What Is an Administrative User An administrative user is a named account that exists on a filer Administrative users have the same privileges as root but can have a different password than root 2 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Multiple Administrative Users Increase Filer Security Adding multiple administrative users to a filer means you no longer need to share the root password Instead administrative users access the filer either locally or remotely with a unique login name and password The filer records each user name at login with a syslog message in etc messages to enable auditing Command to Use to Create Administrative Users Use the useradd option of the useradmin command to create multiple administra tive users on a filer Ways to Access the Filer Using an Administrative Login Name Using an administrative login name you
290. e source volume Data Replication Using SnapMirrot6 15 Prerequisite You must meet this prerequisite if the source volume and the mirror reside on differ ent filers and you want the same quota restrictions to be applied after converting the mirror to a regular volume The destination filer must have a etc quotas file that includes all entries from the etc quotas file used by the source filer If SnapMirror is used for data migration you can copy the etc quotas entries from the source filer to the etc quotas file of the destina tion filer before you convert the mirror to a regular volume However if SnapMirror is used for disaster recovery on the destination filer keep a copy of all etc quotas entries used by the source filer at all times so that you can apply the entries to the destination volume when the source filer becomes unavailable Steps Follow these steps to convert a mirror to a regular volume 1 If you want to enable quotas after converting the mirror to a regular volume go to Step 2 Otherwise go to Step 4 2 Edit the etc quotas file on the destination filer so that after the conversion the former mirror has the same quota restrictions as the source volume If the source volume uses pervolume quotas replace the source volume name with the mirror name in the quota entries 3 Enter the following command to convert the mirror to a regular volume vol options volume name snapmirrored off If you want to enab
291. e specified on a per qtree basis or a per volume basis Disk and file size limits in the third and fourth columns of the etc quotas file ends in K M or G K indicates kilobytes or kilofiles That is it multiplies the limit by 1 024 Similarly M denotes megabytes or megafiles and G denotes gigabytes or gigafiles The default for the disk limit is kilobytes Command ReferenceA 143 quotas SEE ALSO qtree quota rquotad A 144 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide rc NAME rc system initialization command script SYNOPSIS etc rc DESCRIPTION The command script etc rc is invoked automatically during system initialization Since the filer has no local editor etc rc must be edited from an NFS client with root access to etc Alternately you can use the setup command to generate a new etc rc file without using NFS EXAMPLE This is a sample etc rc file as generated by setup Auto generated by setup Tue Jun 2 21 23 52 GMT 1994 hostname filer dell com ifconfig e0 hostname 0 ifconfig ela hostname 1 route add default MyRouterBox 1 routed on timezone US Central savecore exportfs a nfs on FILES etc rc SEE ALSO exportfs exports hostname hosts ifconfig nfs route routed savecore setup timezone autosupport Command ReferenceA 145 resolv conf NAME resolv conf configuration file for domain name system resolver SYNOPS
292. e status of data replication enter the vol snapmirror status command Result The filer displays a message showing whether a transfer is in progress or how much data replication has been completed Examples The following examples describe how the vol snapmirror status command dis plays the status of data replicating When No Data Replication Is in Progress The following display shows that currently no data is being copied from the volO vol ume to the vol volume on filerA Source Dest Status filerA vol0 filerA voll Idle When Data Replicating Is in Progress The following display shows that the filer has just begun transferring data from the vol0 volume to the vo f volume on filerA Source Dest Status filerA vol0 filerA voll Transferring The following display shows that the filer finished transferring 26 of the data from the vol0 volume to the vol volume on filerA Source Dest Status filerA vol0 filerA voll Transferring 26 complete Converting a Mirror to a Regular Volume Description If you use SnapMirror for data migration after you synchronize the data between the source volume and the mirror convert the mirror to a regular volume If you use Snap Mirror for disaster recovery convert the mirror to a regular volume after the source volume becomes unavailable After the conversion you can export the volume or cre ate a share for the volume so that network users can write to it in the same way as they did to th
293. e system has only one volume quota resize can be used only when quotas are already on Because it does not rescan the file system to compute usage quota resize is faster than turning quotas off and then on again quota resize will apply all updated entries in etc quotas however it will generally ignore newly added entries A newly added entry will only take effect if the corresponding user or group has an active quota as a result of updating a file subject to default quotas quota report prints the current file and space consumption for each user or group with a quota and for each qtree With a path argument quota report displays information about all quotas that apply to the file FILES etc quotas quota configuration file SEE ALSO rc rquotad qtree DIAGNOSTICS If etc quotas is incorrectly formatted or if a specified file doesn t exist then quota on prints a warning and does not turn quotas on A 76 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide rdate NAME rdate set system date from a remote host SYNOPSIS rdate hostname DESCRIPTION rdate sends a request to the time server on hostname and sets the local date and time to the value returned by the server rdate will time out if the server doesn t respond in 10 seconds rdate can be added to etc rc to automatically synchronize the system time with the time server on each reboot FILES etc rc system initialization command s
294. e tender SERE rere neg i 18 12 Detect Network Problems Using ping at the Filer Console 18 12 What the ping Command Does 0 0000 eee eee 18 13 How to Troubleshoot Network Problems 2002200005 18 13 Contact Technical Support About Other Network Problem 18 13 NES BrObIGmS s s a d a4 208 a ad Ait ae sack wen RO OR De fa 18 14 Client s Inability To Mount Directories Indicates NFS Problems 18 14 How to Troubleshoot NFS Problems liliis 18 14 Windows Access Problems iiiiiill eee 18 15 Kinds of Access Problems s iro ansi sanae dakina esee 18 15 Preliminary Troubleshooting Steps n naana anaana 18 15 Filer Can t Register With the Windows NT Domain 18 15 SIN WINS te ER He et eet DUREE Wei eror NES 18 15 Not Using WINS ee sac ete ote tuc ob oe Yep pod 18 16 Incorrect Password or Unknown Username 0000 2005 18 17 Users Cannot Mapa DIlVe ua s cp ER heben He di 18 17 UNDECPIO Problems nura d ac zn CEDERE ed be Reed 18 17 The cpio Version Should Support 32 bit Inode Definition Numbers 18 17 Why the Problem Occurs erie de Dy eR s eR ER CP eet 18 18 Ask UNIX Provider Whether cpio Version Supports 32 bit Inode D finition NUrmabers Du ast tt ee or enc ad d MEN RA a MUR 18 18 UNIX df Problems Seer RE EORR edge 18 18 The df Version Must Support Large File Systems 18 18 Enable NFS Option
295. e that has only UNIX file permissions to an NTFS qtree or volume the file has no Windows NT ACLs The filer uses only the UNIX file permissions on this file until you create Windows NT ACLs on it Scope of This Chapter This chapter describes how to use the filer s restore command for data recovery It does not describe how to use data recovery commands or programs on other sys tems Refer to the documentation accompanying the other systems for information about their data recovery commands or programs The restore Command Syntax The restore Command Syntax The syntax for the restore command is as follows restore function key options arguments subtree 13 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Rules for Using the restore Command Follow these rules when you enter the restore command Specify no more than one function key Specify multiple options without intervening spaces Enter the arguments for each option in the order that you specify the options Separate each argument from the next with a space Place the subtree parameter after the last argument The restore Command Function Keys Table 13 1 describes the function keys for the restore command Table 13 1 restore Command Function Keys Key Meaning E Rebuilds the file system or subtree If you are applying incrementals this must be the only option specified After the restore command is interrupte
296. e with the filer s dump command SYNOPSIS restore key args DESCRIPTION The restore restores files from backup tapes created with the dump see dump command A full backup of a file system may be restored and subsequent incre mental backups layered on top of it The actions of restore are controlled by the given key which is a string of characters containing at most one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers The function portion of the key is specified by one of the following letters r Restores rebuilds a file system or subtree The target subtree should be made pristine by removing it from a client of the server or if the entire file system or all subtrees of the file system are to be restored by booting from floppy disk and selecting the Install new file system option before start ing the restoration of the initial level O backup If the level O restores successfully the r key may be used to restore any necessary incremental backups on top of the level 0 Note that restore r will restore all files from the dump tape s An example restore rf rst0a Note that restore leaves a file restore symboltable in the directory that was dumped to pass information between incremental restore passes This file should be removed when the last incremental has been restored restore requests a particular tape of a multi volume set on which to restart a full restore see the r key above This is useful if the
297. e x argument of the filer restore command Incremental Only Restores If you want to restore all files in a backup using the restore r command you must begin the restoration from a level O backup You can however restore a specified file or directory from an incremental backup tape when you use the restore x command Parallel Restores The filer supports up to three simultaneous rest ore commands Prerequisites This section describes the requirements that you must meet for the restore com mand to be completed successfully The space required for the restore command to be completed is about 100 MB more than the amount of data to be restored The command terminates if it runs out of space If you want to perform a full restore the additional space should be in the directory that is the root of the backup If you want to restore only some data in a backup the additional space should be in the etc tmp direc tory of the volume where data is to be restored e The restore command does not restore qtree information Before you restore a volume containing qtrees create the qtrees Refer to Performing a Full Restore of a Volume Containing qtrees for the procedure for restoring qtrees Before you perform a full restore make sure that the directory into which you restore data does not contain the restore symboltable file The restore com mand uses the restore symboltable file for incremental restores and for resuming an interrupt
298. e0 EtherChannel Trunking Trunks Are a Logical Group of Interfaces To get the security of failover or the throughput that multiple interfaces working as one interface can provide you can group up to four Ethernet interfaces You group them into a logical interface unit known as a trunk A trunk is composed of links each of which is an interface Commands that work on physical interfaces also work on trunks except that the ifstat command returns limited trunk information Synonyms for Trunks Trunks are also referred to by the following terms Virtual aggregations e link aggregations e EtherChannel virtual interfaces This document uses the term trunk Interfaces Before Trunking Figure 4 1 shows four separate interfaces e3a e3b e3c and e3d before trunking Network Administration 4 17 Subnetwork A MM 4 Switch 1 2 3 4 e3a e3b e3c e3d Filer Figure 4 1 Interfaces Before Trunking Interfaces After Trunking Figure 4 2 shows the four interfaces after trunking into a multiple mode trunk called Trunkl Logical 1 1 2 3 4 e3a e3b e3c e3d Trunk 1 Subnetwork A M 4 Switch Filer Figure 4 2 Interfaces After Trunking Kinds of Trunks Two Kinds of Trunks There are two kinds of trunks e Single mode trunks enable one link to fail over to another link e Multiple mode trunks enable faster throughput by having links share n
299. each directory within the share a snapshot directory exists but is not visible to cli ents For example if the client operating system supports long file names the applications on that operating system can use the snapshot at each level of the share by using snapshot snapshot or SNAPSHT as the directory name You cannot however display the directory name in any listing Snapshots 9 17 Determining Snapshot Versions From an NFS client The best way to find all versions of a particular file preserved in snapshots is to use the 1s command The following example shows how to find all versions of foo ls 1 foo snapshot foo rw r r 1 smith 0 Jan 14 09 40 foo rw r r 1 smith 0 Jan 13 18 39 snapshot nightly 0 foo rw r r 1 smith 0 Jan 12 19 17 snapshot nightly 1 foo The version of foo in the active file system was last modified on January 14 but the old versions available in the snapshots were modified on January 13 and January 12 Although users can use standard UNIX commands to examine the saved versions of foo they cannot modify or remove these older versions because everything beneath snapshot is read only From a CIFS Client Use the Find command to search for the file in the snapshot directory For example if a user maps the home share to drive F and wants to find all versions offoo in snap shots the user can use the Find command to search for foo in the f snapshot folder Determining Access Times Wh
300. eb En 18 7 Error Message System Cannot Boot Because Disks Are Missing 18 8 Inconsistent File SYSTEM 2 124 245 eb aida 18 8 Inconsistencies Seldom OCU s aies a ta aee ees pot e eet en 18 8 Contact Technical Support if an Inconsistency Occurs 18 8 Disk Operations in Maintenance Mode 00 0000 cee eee 18 9 Maintenance Mode Operations 00 0000 cee eee eee 18 9 Displaying Detailed Disk Information 000000000 else 18 9 Checking Access toa Disk isses cum acne cna ra dee ee es 18 9 Erasing Disk Eab8l i s sirve ERE E i S bri Be 18 9 Gontig ration Problerris ose ee S au EVE iia 18 10 The etc rc etc exports and etc hosts Files Can Contain Errors 18 10 What to Do When the Filer Is Not Accessible From the Adminstration ElOSE e ALL ud dee ados abe bet t 18 10 Filer Runs Setup When etc rc Is Damaged or Missing 18 10 How to Recover From Configuration Errors if NFS Is the Only Lic nsed Protocol suse ran eek bees das 18 11 How to Reset the Filer Password o o oooooococoooo sls 18 11 Reset the Password if You Forget It else 18 11 Procedure for Resetting the Password llle 18 11 How to Initialize All Disks and Create a New File System 18 12 Initializing All Disks Erases All Data llle 18 12 Procedure for Initializing All DisKs ooooooooooo oooooooo o 18 12 Network Probl rns viii cda tese tendo tus
301. ecognizes a single client computer as the administration host The adminis trator who set up the filer specified the name of the administration host using the setup program Administration Host Privileges The filer granted root permissions to the administration host after the setup proce dure was completed Table 2 1 describes the administration host s privileges Table 2 1 Administration Host Privileges If the administration host is You can an NFS client e Mount the filer root directory and edit configuration files from the administration host e Enter filer commands by using a remote shell program such as rsh Filer Administration Basics 2 1 Table 2 1 Administration Host Privileges continued If the administration host is You can a CIFS client Edit configuration files from any CIFS client as long as you connect to the filer as root or Administrator Administration Host Entry in the etc hosts equiv file The setup procedure placed the administration host name in the etc hosts equiv file automatically Administration Host as the Mail Host For the administration host to send email it must provide a server for the SMTP pro tocol such as the sendmail program or the Microsoft Exchange server Designating a Different Mail Host You can designate another host at your site to be the mail host at any time Refer to Use the Options Command to Configure Autosupport for information ab
302. ecommended that all snmp commands be added to the end of the etc rc file The last samp command in the etc rc file should be snmp init 1 This will initialize the SNMP daemon with the values set using the snmp com mand and it will send out a coldStart trap as described below authtrap 0 1 Enable or disable SNMP agent authentication failure traps To enable authentication traps specify 1 To disable authentication traps specify 0 Traps are sent to all hosts specified with the traphost option A 94 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide snmp community add delete ro rw community Add or delete communities with the specified access control type Specify ro for a read only community and rw for a read write com munity For example to add the read only community private use the following command snmp community add ro private Currently the SNMP SetRequest PDU is not supported so all read write communities will default to read only The default community for the filer SNMP agent is public and its access mode is ro Up to a maximum of 8 communities are supported contact contact init 1 Used to set the contact name returned by the SNMP agent as the System sysContact 0 MIB II variable With an option of 1 this initializes the snmp daemon with values previously set by the snmp command It also sends a coldStart trap to any hosts previously specified by the traphost op
303. ed restore If the restore symboltable file exists in the directory because of an unsuccessful restore remove the file before starting the full restore or the full restore fails Where to Enter the restore Command You can enter the restore command through the console or through rsh Entering the restore command through rsh gives you these benefits e When the restore command is in progress you can still use the console to manage the filer e You can start multiple restore commands through rsh Data Recovery 13 5 e Itis less likely that someone inadvertently terminates the restore command If you enter a restore command on the console it could be terminated by a Ctrl C entered on a host connected to the filer using telnet However if you enter the restore command on the console you can read and respond to screen messages displayed by the command For example the command might prompt you for another tape to complete the recovery Steps Follow these steps to restore files to the filer 1 Place the tape containing the first tape file of the backup in the tape drive 2 Enterthe restore command as follows restore function key options arguments subtree 3 If prompted insert the next tape in the backup 4 Repeat Step 3 until the restore is complete Performing a Full Restore of a Volume Containing qtrees Description The restore command does not restore qtree information For example if you need to restore a vo
304. ed to ha 8b should have all LEDs ON Are these LEDs all ON now y filer Fri Aug 22 21 35 39 GMT rc Disk Configuration No Errors Identified A 90 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide shelfchk In the following example the shelfchk command finds an error filer shelfchk Only shelves attached to ha 9a should have all LEDs ON Are these LEDs all ON now n Your system may not be configured properly Check cable connections filer Mon Aug 25 11 44 34 GMT rc Disk Configuration Failure Identified by Operator Command Reference A 91 snap NAME snap manage snapshots SYNOPSIS snap list vo name snap create delete vo name name snap rename vo name from to snap sched vo name weeks days hours Qlist 1 snap reserve vol name percent DESCRIPTION The snap family of commands provides a means to create and manage snap shots in each volume A snapshot is a read only copy of the entire file system as of the time the snap shot was created The filer uses a copy on write technique to create snapshots very quickly without consuming any disk space Only as blocks in the active file system are modified and written to new locations on disk does the snapshot begin to consume extra space Snapshots are exported to all CIFS or NFS clients They can be accessed from each directory in the file system From any directory a user can access the set of snapsho
305. een loaded A 80 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide restore Tape read error while restoring filename Tape read error while skipping over inode number Tape read error while trying to resynchronize A tape or other media read error has occurred If a file name is specified then its contents are probably partially wrong If an inode is being skipped or the tape is trying to resynchronize then no extracted files have been cor rupted though files may not be found on the tape resync restore skipped num blocks After a dump read error restore may have to resynchronize itself This mes sage lists the number of blocks that were skipped over FILES tmp rstdir file containing directories on the tape tmp rstmode owner mode and time stamps for directories restore symboltable information passed between incremental restores SEE ALSO dump Command Reference A 81 route NAME route manually manipulate the routing table SYNOPSIS route fn add delete host net destination gateway metric DESCRIPTION route allows the system administrator to manually manipulate the network rout ing table for the specific host or network specified by destination The gateway argument is the nexthop gateway to which packets should be addressed for the corresponding destination The metric argument indicates the number of hops to the destination The metric argument is required
306. efault gate way selection and dynamic route timeouts The currently selected default gateway is not be deleted when routed is turned off Displays the status of the default gateway list This shows whether RIP snooping is active the current list of default gate ways their metrics the state of the gateways ALIVE or DEAD and the last time each gateway was heard from The output looks like maytag gt routed status RIP snooping is on Gateway Metric State Time Last Heard alantec1 Wed groucho Wed 192 9 200 66 192 9 200 77 tphub1 Wed 192 9 200 32 192 9 200 252 192 9 200 251 192 9 200 250 1 ALIVE Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 1 ALIVE Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 2 ALIVE Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 2 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 3 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 4 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 5 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 1994 119 free gateway entries 9 used OPTIONS n f this option precedes status the command displays numeric values for gateway names Command Reference A 85 routed FILES etc re for default initialization etc dgateways for the list of default gateways SEE ALSO netstat route setup dgateways rc DIAGNOSTICS routed unable to allocate free entry too many valid entries were found in the etc dgateways file Only the first 128 are used routed duplicate gateway entry not allowed a duplicate gateway name or a
307. el hostname 1 route add default MyRouterBox routed on options dns domainname company com options dns enable on options nis domainname company com options nis enable on timezone US Pacific savecore export s a nfs on Explanation of Default etc rc Contents Table 2 9 explains the commands in the sample etc rc file 2 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 9 Default etc rc Command Contents Command Explanation hostname filer Sets the filer s host name ifconfig e0 Sets the IP address for the filer s Ethernet and Gigabit hostname 0 Ethernet interfaces with a default network mask The ifconfig el arguments in single backquotes expand to filer if hostname 1 you specify filer as the host name during setup The actual IP addresses are obtained from the etc hosts file on the root volume you might prefer to enter IP addresses directly in etc rc on the root vol ume If the specified network interface is not present ifconfig issues an error message and has no other effect The actual interface names and numbers depend on the specific filer Refer to Naming Conventions for Network Interfaces for more information about inter face names If you change the filer s host name you must modify the etc hosts file on the root volume to substitute the new host name If you don t ifconfig fails To override the default network mask exp
308. elete library engineering he following command removes the user joed from the library share cifs access delete library domain joed Displaying Access Rights to an NTFS File Access Rights Display Methods You can display access rights to an NTFS file from Windows Displaying Access Rights From the Windows Desktop To display access rights to a file from the Windows desktop follow these steps 1 Right click a file and choose Properties from the pop up menu Result The Properties sheet appears 2 Click the Security tab Result f the file is a Windows file the Security sheet appears 3 Click Permissions Result Permissions are displayed Changing UNIX Permissions and DOS Attributes From Windows How to change UNIX permissions Some files and directories on the filer have both Windows and UNIX style permis sions You can change Windows style permissions from Windows by editing Windows permissions To change UNIX permissions in a UNIX file system from the Windows desktop or to change DOS attributes you use the SecureShare Access tool CIFS Administration 7 23 To use the SecureShare Access tool from a client you must install the tool on the cli ent For instructions about downloading the SecureShare Access tool see the Software and Firmware Upgrade Guide or Start Here permissions is outside the scope of this guide Consult literature about UNIX for an Y NOTE To change UNIX permissions you must understan
309. elf through the loopback address when trying to copy data The usable disk space of the destination volume must be greater than or equal to the usable disk space of the source volume Use the df pathname command to see the amount of usable disk space of a particular volume Each vol copy start command generates two volume copy operations one for reading data from the source volume and one for writing data to the des tination volume Each filer supports up to four simultaneous volume copy operations vol copy abort operation number terminates a volume copy operation The operation number parameter in the vol copy abort command specifies which operation to terminate If you don t specify an operation number all volume copy operations are terminated vol copy status operation number displays the progress of one or all volume copy operations The operations are numbered from 0 through 3 vol copy throttle operation number value controls the performance of the volume copy operation The value ranges from 10 full speed to 1 one tenth of full speed You can apply the perfor mance value to an operation specified by the operation number parameter If you do not specify an operation number in the vol copy throttle com mand the command applies to all volume copy operations Use this command to limit the speed of the volume copy operation if you suspect that the volume copy operation is causing performance problems on your fi
310. ell Computer Corporation Data ONTAP SnapMirror SnapRestore Snapshot WAFL FilerView and SecureShare are trademarks of Network Appliance Inc MS DOS Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks and Windows for Workgroups is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own April 1999 P N 4385P Rev A00 Preface About This Guide This guide describes how to configure operate and manage Dell PowerVault F720N F740N and F760N filers that run Data ONTAP 5 3 software The guide is organized in three parts e Chapters 1 through 19 describe how to configure operate and manage Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N filers Appendix A Command Reference provides the commands that you use to control a filer Glossary provides definitions of terms acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide Audience This guide is for system administrators who are familiar with operating systems that run on the filer s clients such as UNIX Microsoft Windows 9x and Microsoft Windows NT It also assumes that you are familiar with how the Network File System NFS
311. ement NetBIOS computer name This ele ment is case sensitive You use this option to isolate a group of computers on a network that communicate only with other computers with the identical NetBIOS Scope ID This option is not recommended if you are using DNS for name resolution because NetBIOS Scope IDs and DNS are incompatible The cifs search domains Option Default None Description Specifies a list of domains that trust each other to search for a mapped account The argument for the option is a comma separated list that is searched in order If no list is supplied all domains are searched You use this option to limit searches if you used an asterisk for a domain name in the usermap cfg file The cifs show snapshot Option Default FALSE Description Specifies whether to show the snapshot directories in folders To show the snap shot directories set this option to TRUE The cifs symlinks cycleguard Option Default On Description If an object being accessed by a CIFS client is a symbolic link the cifs symlinks cycleguard option when set to On eliminates the possibil ity of cyclic directories It does so by preventing the following of symbolic links that contain the dot or dot dot 7 component symbolic links that could refer to a directory higher in the same tree With the cifs symlinks cycleguard option set to Off if you are careful you can use symbolic links having dot or dot dot components
312. en the filer creates a snapshot the access time of each file in the snapshot is updated to the snapshot creation time From an NFS client You can use the 1s lu command which shows the access times of files to deter mine when snapshots were created Following is an example of the 1s lu command ls lu foo snapshot foo rw r r 1 smith 0 Jan 14 09 40 foo rw r r smith 0 Jan 14 00 00 snapshot nightly 0 foo rw r r 1 smith 0 Jan 13 00 00 snapshot nightly 1 foo From a CIFS client You can determine the access time of a file by checking its properties 9 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 10 qtree Administration About qtrees A qtree is a special subdirectory of the root directory of a volume qtree Parameters You can set the following parameters on a qtree security style NTFS Windows NT file system UNIX or mixed oplocks setting On or Off disk space and file limits as described in Chapter 11 Quotas and Maximum Number of Files Volumes and qtrees A volume has all the properties of a qtree except e It can have qtrees under it e thas different defaults than a qtree Unless expressly mentioned otherwise whatever applies to qtrees also applies to volumes NOTE You cannot create a qtree inside another qtree Uses of qtrees You use qtrees to group files that have similar characteristics much in the way that you use vo
313. encodings to be invalid and is not recommended Step To set the language and character set that a volume uses to store file names enter the following command vol create volume 1 langcode volume is the name of the volume whose language you want to change langcode is the code for the language you want the volume to use Displaying Which Volume Uses Which Language Description This procedure displays a list of volumes with the language each volume is configured to use You perform this procedure when you want to know which volume uses which language This is useful in matching clients with languages or deciding whether to create a volume to accommodate clients that use a language that you might not have a volume for Step To display a list of volumes with the language each volume is configured to use enter the following command vol status 1 File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Usersb 13 Sample Output Each row of the list displays the name of the volume the language code then the language Volume Language vol0 ja Japanese euc j CIFS File Name Case Case Preservation By default the filer preserves the case of CIFS file names Case Conversion Procedures You can force all PC created file names to be stored on the filer in lowercase or return to having the filer preserve case To force all CIFS file names to be stored on the filer in lowercase follow the proce dure in Forcing CIFS File Names to Lowercase
314. enter the name of the tape drive for example rst 1a Restoring a Volume to a Directory From Multiple Tapes Using One Tape Drive If the two tapes use the same tape device for example rst 0a remove the tape currently in the tape drive and load the next tape Then accept the default tape device name for example rst Oa when the filer prompts you for the name of the device for the second tape Example of Restoring a Named File From Multiple Tapes If you want to restore a specific file or directory from a subtree use the x option in the restore command Specify the path name of the file or directory relative to the subtree that was backed up Example If the vol0 volume was backed up as a subtree and you want to restore all contents of the vol vol0 test directory specify test as the path name in the restore command Data Hecovery 13 9 Example The subtree containing the directory to be restored was backed up to two tapes restore xf rst0a test In this command you must specify the tape device for the first tape it is rst Oa in this example This is necessary because restore needs to read information about the directory structure of the subtree from the first tape before restoring the data The filer then displays the following messages to let you specify the tape devices con taining the multiple tape volumes When the filer prompts you for the tape volume number start with the last tape volume as shown in this example
315. er device Tape Device Management 14 3 In this example a tape library with SCSI ID 6 is attached to slot 6 of the filer Example of the sysconfig v Command The following example shows a tape stacker with SCSI ID 6 and a tape drive with SCSI ID 4 attached to slot 6 of the filer slot 6 SCSI Host Adapter 6 QLogic ISP 1040B Firmware Version 2 26 Clock Rate 60MHz 6 BHTi Quad 7 1 41 4 QUANTUM DLT7000 1841 In Band Enclosure Services Using the mt Command to Control Tape Devices The mt Command Syntax You can control tape devices with the mt command The syntax of the mt command is as follows mt f t tapedevice command count This section discusses only the eom fsf rewind offline and status com mands Keep in mind the following information e The f and t options are interchangeable as far as the filer is concerned Only the option is shown here e For additional information about controlling tape devices and detailed information about the mt command consult the mt 1 man page Forinformation about the format of a filer tape device name consult the tape 4 man page Moving a Tape to the End of Data You can append material such as a dump on a tape device To do so use the eom command which moves the tape to the end of data end of media if the tape is full as in the following example mt f nrst a eom After this command you can write to the remainder of the tape Make sure that there i
316. erface to be the active link you make the new interface the preferred link Network Administration 4 23 After you complete this procedure the link you specify is the active link and the other links are not active Z NOTE If no links are preferred the active link is selected randomly Step To specify an interface you prefer to be the active link in a single mode trunk enter the following command or put it in the in the etc rc file vif favor interface where interface is the name of an interface Removing a Link From Preferred Status in a Single Mode Trunk Description Use this procedure to remove a link from preferred status in a single mode trunk A preferred link has priority for being the active link You might want to perform this pro cedure if you are replacing or upgrading a physical interface that is currently the preferred link and want to stop using it A NOTE There can only be one preferred link in a trunk After you complete this procedure the currently preferred link is not the preferred link and you can use the vif favor command to make another link the preferred link Step To remove a link from preferred status in a single mode trunk enter the following command vif nofavor interface where interface is the name of an interface Creating a Multiple Mode Trunk Description Use this procedure to create a trunk in which all interfaces are active at the same time thereby increasing throughput
317. ermine the average change in data per day e Divide the amount of disk space you want to reserve for snapshots by the daily change average For example if you find that the average daily change rate is 3 GB and you have a 200 GB volume 40 GB or 20 percent of which you want to reserve for snapshots divide 40 by 3 to determine the number of daily snapshots 3 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide you can have before exceeding your space limit In this example 13 daily snap shots is your limit Example to Determine Volume Capacity You can also use the ilestats command to determine when most activity occurs on a volume during a given day so that you can effectively schedule hourly snapshots The following example shows how you can use the filestats command to deter mine when most file changes occur in a volume within a 24 hour period filestats ages 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H 7H 8H 9H 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H 16H 17H 18H 19H 20H 21H 22H 23H 24H volume vol0 snapshot hourly 0 If hourly O was taken at 8 a m and most file changes took place between 7H and 9H which corresponds to 3 p m and 5 p m in this example you can schedule more snap shots during these hours and fewer throughout the rest of the day Scheduling more snapshots before or during increased file activity decreases the time between file changes and snapshots For information about managing snapshots re
318. es will time out if no server is available for one of the domains The search list is currently limited to six domains with a total of 256 characters The keyword and value must appear on a single line and the keyword e g nameserver must start the line The value follows the keyword separated by white space FILES etc resolv conf SEE ALSO setup rc A 146 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide rmtab NAME rmtab remote mounted file system table SYNOPSIS etc rmtab DESCRIPTION etc rmtab maintains the list of client mount points between server reboots The list of client mount points can be obtained by using the MOUNTPROC DUMP remote procedure call or by using the UNIX showmount command When the server successfully executes a mount request from a cli ent the server appends a new entry to the file When the client issues an unmount request the corresponding entry is marked as unused When the server reboots unused entries are deleted from the file Command ReferenceA 147 serialnum NAME serialnum system serial number file SYNOPSIS etc serialnum DESCRIPTION The file etc serialnum should contain the serial number of your machine The serial number is found on the back of the machine in the lower right hand corner If the file does not exist on your system create it and put the machine s serial number in it The file should contain a single line t
319. essage Data ONTAP 5 3 software version e system ID of the filer host name of the filer software licenses enabled for the filer e SNMP contact name and location if specified in etc rc output of the following commands some are applicable only to the licensed protocols Sysconfig v options ifconfig a nfsstat c cifs stat cifs sessions cifs shares httpstat df df i snap sched sysconfig r contents of etc messages contents of etc serialnum Use the options Command to Configure autosupport To change the default behavior of the autosupport daemon use the options com mand As with other filer commands you can add opt ions commands to the etc rc file if you want to execute them automatically when the filer reboots Disabling or Enabling the autosupport Daemon The autosupport daemon is enabled by default The syntax of the command to dis able or enable the daemon is as follows options autosupport enable on off Example autosupport enable off Filer Administration Basics 2 29 Specifying mail hosts The command to specify hosts that send autosupport email messages is as follows options autosupport mailhost hostname You can specify up to five mail host names Separate names by commas and do not include spaces in the list The default is the administration host Example options autosupport mailhost hostl host2 host3 Specifying Addresses for autosupport Mail The command for speci
320. et Setting the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU The following example shows setting the MTU for an Ethernet interface ifconfig e0 mtusize 1500 lable 4 6 lists the default MTU sizes Table 4 6 Default MTU Sizes Interface Default MTU size Ethernet 1500 Gigabit Ethernet 1500 Use a smaller MTU value for an interface if a bridge or router on the attached network cannot break large packets into fragments To view the current setting of the MTU value use the following command netstat i Configuring the Interface Up or Down The following example illustrates how to configure interfaces up and down ifconfig ela up ifconfig e0 down ifconfig virt interface up 4 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Edit etc rc File to Make Changes Persistent After Reboot If you want changes made with ifconfig to remain in effect after a reboot include the ifconfig commands in the etc rc file Viewing Interface Configuration Information Table 4 7 illustrates examples of how to use the ifconfig command to view inter face configuration information Table 4 7 Using the ifconfig Command Description Syntax Show the current configurations of all ifconfig a network interfaces Show the current configuration of a ifconfig interface specific network interface Example Enter the following com mand to show the current configuration of interface eO ifconfig
321. et ric value to be used as the preferred default route If there are multiple gateways available with the same metric value it uses the one named first in the etc dgateways file routed then listens on udp port 520 for routing information packets When a RIP request or reply packet is received routed marks the gateway that sent the packet ALIVE If the gateway has a better metric than the current default gate way or has the same metric but is listed earlier in etc dgateways the current default gateway is changed to the new gateway When a gateway is not heard from for 90 seconds routed marks the gateway as DEAD and if it was the current default gateway selects a new default gateway if one is available A 84 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide routed In addition when routed is running it deletes dynamic routes created by ICMP redirects every 3 minutes USAGE routed on routed off routed status The route daemon may be turned on at any time with the routed on command This causes routed to read the etc dgateways file and turn on RIP snooping dynamic route time outs and default gateway selection If routed is already running this option causes it to reread the etc dgateways file and reinitialize By default routed is invoked at boot time in etc rc The route daemon may be turned off at any time with the routed off command This stops all RIP snooping d
322. et to the value specified and the timeout restarted raid reconstruct speed Specifies the speed at which the RAID reconstruction should occur ranging from the slowest speed 1 to the fastest speed possible 10 The RAID reconstruction process is given more cpu time as the speed is increased so increasing the speed of the reconstruction will take away cpu time for network operations The default speed is 4 which is roughly 4096 of the cpu time though more time may be used if there is idle time available raid scrub enable Enables disables the RAID scrub feature see disk By default it is enabled This option only affects the scrubbing process that gets started from cron For user requested scrubs this option is ignored rsh enable Enables the RSH server on the filer snmp enable Enables the SNMP server on the filer A 66 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide options telnet enable telnet hosts Enables the Telnet server on the filer Specifies up to 5 clients that will be allowed telnet access to the server The host names should be entered as a commaseparated list with no spaces in between Enter a to allow access to all cli ents this is the default Enter a to disable telnet access to the server timed enable timed log Determines whether a time daemon timed runs on the filer If timed enable is on the filer synchronizes its time with a time server
323. etc directory Note that some of the configuration files might not exist on your filer if you use the filer for CIFS or NFS only Table 2 7 Contents of the etc Directory File sharing File name Contents protocol cifs cat Domain information only if the filer is a CIFS only member of a domain Filer Administration Basics 2 13 Table 2 7 Contents of the etc Directory continued File name cifsconfig txt exports hosts hosts equiv group netgroup nsswitch conf passwd rc serialnum shadow Contents CIFS commands that the filer used for configuration The filer maintains this file automatically whenever you enter a ci s command which can cause changes you make man ually to be lost To edit this file terminate CIFS service by using the cifs terminate command edit and save the file then reboot the filer NFS export points Known hosts and their IP addresses Trusted hosts and users for rsh CIFS group names GIDs group identifica tion numbers and members names Not used if you use NIS to authenticate groups Network groups The order in which the filer contacts name services Users names UIDs user identification numbers and primary GIDs Not used if you use NIS to authenticate users Script of commands to be executed when the filer is initializing Filer serial number and license codes Encrypted password strings and pass word aging information Not used if
324. etects a substan tial percentage of collisions as compared to the total packet throughput NOTE The goal is to keep collisions below 5 percent but a network can operate properly but slowly with collision rates as high as 30 percent Use the routed status command to determine the status of the default router NOTE An improperly set up network router can also cause network problems If a router is not working correctly or is not configured with the filer s address cli ents or hosts on the other side of the router cannot access the filer through that router If you are using the filer on a CIFS network and you are experiencing difficulty accessing the filer using name based IP operations for example ping filer create static mappings on your WINS servers for each of the filer s interfaces Contact Technical Support About Other Network Problem If you encounter other problems contact Dell technical support for assistance as described in Getting Technical Assistance Troubleshooting 18 13 NFS Problem S Client s Inability To Mount Directories Indicates NFS Problems NFS problems are indicated when the filer and the client can communicate with each other using the ping command and the client can connect to the filer using telnet but the client cannot mount volumes or directories from the filer How to Troubleshoot NFS Problems Complete the following steps to troubleshoot NFS problems 1 Make sure that the fi at the
325. etwork loads 4 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Single Mode Trunks In a single mode trunk only one of the interfaces is active The other interfaces are on standby ready to take over if the active interface fails In Figure 4 3 e0 and el are part of the SingleTrunk1 single mode trunk The active interface eO fails Failure means that the link status of the interface is down which signals that the interface has lost connection with the switch The e1 interface takes over and maintains the connection The interface e1 also takes over the MAC address of the e2 interface Switch Switch e0 fails e0 el el Single Trunk1 SingleTrunk1 Figure 4 3 Single Mode Trunks With single mode trunks the filer performs takeover based on the absence of a link Multiple Mode Trunks In a multiple mode trunk all the interfaces are active This provides greater speed than a single interface A multiple mode trunk requires a switch that supports manually configurable trunking The switch determines how the load is balanced among the interfaces In Figure 4 4 e0 el e2 and e3 are part of the MultiTrunk1multiple mode trunk All four interfaces in the MultiTrunk1multiple mode trunk are active Network Administration 4 19 Switch e0 el e2 e3 MultiTrunk1 Figure 4 4 Multiple Mode Trunks Hardware Requireme
326. exports Using Netgroups 2 000000 6 10 Copy etc netgroup When Filer Doesn t Use NIS o oo o o o o 6 10 Must copy NIS netgroup file ollis 6 10 Automating copying with a Makefile o o o o ooooooo 6 10 Example Makefile 2 0 0 0 0 00 es 6 10 Exportingto Subnetsiz z uc RR de MANS NS AGE Dake REESE LE 6 11 About Exporting t SuUDNEtS nii suus dossier Seid Veen bt he Rs 6 11 Valid Export Options for Subnets 0 0 0 0 ooo 6 11 XXII Chapter 7 Export to a Subnet as You Do to a Client o o oooooooooo oo 6 11 Examiple to0Ea8666s5S 15b cb ee E Ee eto tt ee air acte 6 11 Example 2 read write access llle 6 12 Example 3 equivalent methods for exporting o o o oo o 6 12 Configuring a Eillemfor WebNES vu dine eet re MESES 6 12 About Configuring a Filer for WebNFS 0 000 000 cee 6 12 The Filer Can Respond to NFS Requests From Browsers 6 12 Web Browser Requirements llle 6 12 Advantages of WebNFS odia a etre a DUROS 6 12 How WebNFS Restricts File Access oo ooooooooooooooo ooo 6 12 Setting Up VebN ES risa fie atum tu ERE er raw Es 6 13 Procedure for Setting Up WebNES sieur bs RE UR DES E Le ERA 6 13 Example of Specifying WebNFS Root Directory o o oo oooooo o 6 13 Managing WebNEFESs e a A cata eee ees 6 14 Tasks You Can POr s uai e dte aem e teer etos ala 6 14 Changing the Root Directory 0 0
327. f etc httpd translations contains the following entry fail usr forbidden the filer does not provide access to the usr forbidden directory How the Filer Processes Rules The filer processes the rules defined in etc httpd translations in the order they are listed and applies the rule if the URL matches the template However the filer stops processing other rules after it applies a pass or fail rule In the template or result field of an etc httpd translations entry you can use asterisks as wildcard characters as follows e Inthe template field the wildcard character matches zero or more characters including the slash character HTTP Administration 8 9 nthe result field the wildcard character represents the text expanded from the match in the template field Include the wildcard character in the result field only if you used a wildcard character in the template field e f you use multiple wildcard characters the first one in the result field corre sponds to the first one in the template field the second one in the result field corresponds to the second one in the template field and so on Following is an example showing how a wildcard character is used Redirect all cgi requests to my cgi server redirect cgi bin http cgi host cgi bin This redirect rule specifies that all CGI requests are redirected to another host named cgi host For example if the filer receives the following requests http
328. f a filer from Server Manager perform the following steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK 4 Double click a filer name Result The Filer Properties window appears 5 Type a new description of the filer in the Description field 6 Click OK Result The new description goes into effect Viewing a Filer s Description From the Filer Command Line To view the description of a filer enter the following command cifs comment Changing a Filer s Description From the Filer Command Line To change the description of a filer enter the following command cifs comment description where description is its description which must be enclosed in quotation marks The description must be no longer than 48 characters Adding CIFS Users to the Filer When You Add CIFS Users By default Windows NT users who have an account map to a UNIX account of the same name If they do not have a Windows NT account the user becomes a generic user and uses the generic account which is described in Generic User Accounts In CIFS Administration 7 3 74 the rare case that you must add a user explicitly you can do so with the methods described in this section You can add
329. fault with the following command options cifs symlinks cycleguard on If you use symbolic links having dot or dot dot components and want the filer to fol low the links set the cifs symlinks cycleguard option to Off with the following command options cifs symlinks cycleguard off When you list the contents of a directory symbolic links that are valid references to files or directories are listed as if the target of the symbolic link existed in the direc tory If the symbolic link cannot be expanded it still looks like a file in a directory listing however any attempt by an application to open the link results in an access error NFS and CIFS Use of the Read Only Bit About Read only Bits The filer along with the MS DOS9 operating system and Windows supports a perfile read only bit that reflects whether a file is writable or read only This bit applies only to files and not to directories NFS has no protocol operations that know about the per file read only bit However some software when used both by NFS clients on UNIX systems and by CIFS clients on Windows systems requires that the read only bit reflects whether the file is writable How NFS Treats the Read Only Bit The following list describes how NFS treats the read only bit e Any file with the read only bit turned on is treated for all NFS operations as if it had no write permission bits turned on e Ifafile has atleast one write permission bit turned on and
330. fault is an empty list short note will not be sent Enter the list of recipients separated by 7 and no spaces Up to 5 email addresses may be listed with a command such as options autosupport noteto sysadm1 pager net sysadm2 pager net A 162 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide autosupport autosupport from Default is autosupport Enter a user name designated as the sender of the autosupport mail This allows replies to the mail to be received by a responsible representative at the site options autosupport from sysadm autosupport doit This is a trigger to send the email out The text word argument to this option is sent in the email subject line This is used to identify the reason for the notification To send system information at any time on a running system you can type a command such as options autosupport doit SYSTEM INFO Error conditions are logged through syslog at level LOG ERR SEE ALSO options setup hosts rc NOTES The autosupport mechanism is enabled by default When the system boots it will enable the feature If for security or other reasons you wish to disable this fea ture you should add a line in etc rc to disable it options autosupport enable off If you do keep autosupport enabled remember to add the following lines in etc rc with your name phone number and site name For example snmp contact John 555 555 1212 snmp location Computer
331. fer to the section Assigning and Changing Access Rights in Chapter 7 The etc rc File How the Filer Uses the etc rc File The filer executes the commands in the etc rc file on the root volume at boot time to configure the filer If your filer is licensed to run the CIFS protocol the etc rc file must be present at boot time for the CIFS protocol to be enabled No CIFS specific information is entered in etc rc as a result of the setup procedure All the commands in the etc rc file are executable from the command line there are no commands that are restricted to being executed from within the etc rc file Procedure for Editing the etc rc File To make changes in the filer configuration that take effect every time the filer is booted perform the following steps 1 Make a backup copy of the etc rc file 2 Edit the etc rc file NOTE Do not add CIFS commands in etc rc Filer Administration Basics 2 15 See Editing Configuration Files for instructions about editing files from NFS and CIFS clients 3 Save the edited file 4 Reboot the filer to test the new configuration If the new configuration does not work as desired repeat steps 2 through 4 Default etc rc File Contents The best way to understand the commands used in etc rc on the root volume is to examine the following sample etc rc file Auto generated etc rc Fri May 30 14 51 36 PST 1997 hostname filer ifconfig e0 hostname 0 ifconfig
332. fer to the section Managing Snapshot Disk Consumption in Chapter 9 Getting a File Statistics Summary Description Use the output from the filestats command for a summary of the following infor mation about files in a volume Size e Creation time Modification time e Owner Restrictions The following two arguments are required when using the filestats command volume snapshot Disk and File System Management3 17 Step To use the filestats command enter the following command filestats volume volume name snapshot snapshot name where volume name is the name of the volume and snapshot name is the name of the snapshot filestats Command Options Options to Use With the filestats Command You can use the following options with the ilestats command ages timetype e sizes style expr About the Ages Option The ages option of the filestats command enables you to see when files have been accessed You can specify file ages in seconds hours and days using a comma to separate each value By default file ages are broken down by days in 30 day increments Example of the Ages Option For example to display files with ages under 900 seconds 15 minutes 4 hours and seven days respectively enter the following command filestats ages 900 4H 7D volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 The output looks like the following AGE ATIME CUMULATIVE COUNT CUMULATIVE TOTAL KB 900
333. fferent data blocks Cumu latively they consume 40 MB which is about 33 of the disk space used 120 MB which is 40 MB used by snapshots plus 80 MB in the file system Before trying to conserve space by deleting a large snapshot file examine the cumu lative values in the snap list output If two adjacent snapshot files show little difference in the cumulative values most of the data referenced by the snapshots is the same In this case removing one of the snapshots doesn t free much disk space If you find snapshots confusing and hard to manage use the default snapshot sched ule and the default snapshot reserve because these settings are appropriate for most environments When you create a new volume on a filer remember that the new vol ume inherits the snapshot schedule from the root volume After you use the volume for a while check how much disk space the snapshots consume in the volume If the disk space seems high decrease the amount of time that snapshots are kept or increase the snapshot reserve As you use snapshots continue to watch the statistics change over time The statis tics help you gain a better understanding of how snapshots work Snapshots 9 15 Accessing Snapshots From Clients About Client Access to Snapshots Snapshots can be accessed by any user with the appropriate permissions Every directory in the filer s active file system contains a directory named snapshot through which users can access old versio
334. fied if a server can t be contacted the time daemon tries the next one in the list Command Reference A 67 options wafl convert ucode Setting this option to ON forces conversion of all directories to Uni code format when accessed from both NFS and CIFS By default OFF access from CIFS causes conversion of pre 4 0 and 4 0 for mat directories access from NFS causes conversion of 4 0 format directories vol copy throttle Specifies the default speed of all volume copy operations The speed can be a number in the range from 1 to 10 10 being the high est speed and the default wafl create ucode Setting this option to ON forces Unicode format directories to be created by default both from NFS and CIFS By default OFF all directories are created in pre 4 0 format and the first CIFS access will convert it to Unicode format wafl default nt user Specifies the NT user account to use when a UNIX user accesses a file with NT security has an ACL and that UNIX user would not otherwise be mapped If this option is set blank such accesses will be denied wafl default UNIX user Specifies the UNIX user account to use when an NT user attempts to log in and that NT user would not otherwise be mapped If this option is set blank such accesses will be denied wafl maxdirsize Sets the maximum size in K Bytes that a directory can grow to This is set to 10240 by default it limits directory size to 10MBytes and can hold over 300 000 f
335. fies the Windows NT user account to use when a UNIX user accesses a file with Windows NT security has an ACL and that UNIX user would not otherwise be mapped If this option is set blank such accesses are denied 19 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The wafl default unix user Option Default None Description Specifies the UNIX user account to use when a Windows NT user attempts to log in and that Windows NT user would not otherwise be mapped If this option is set blank such accesses are denied The wafl maxdirsize Option Default 10240 Description Sets the maximum size in kilobytes of a directory file A directory file with a size of 10 240 kilobytes can hold about 300 000 files or subdirectories The wafl root only chown Option Default On Description Enables only the root user to change the owner of a file When you disable the option the owner of a file can change its ownership without being root By default this option is enabled When a non root user changes the owner of a file the set userid and set group id bits are cleared If a non root user tries to change the owner of a file but the change would cause the file s recipient to exceed his or her quota the attempt fails The wafl wcc minutes valid Option Default 20 Description Specifies the number of minutes a WAFL credential cache entry is valid The value can range from 1 through 20160
336. file owner gid Group id numeric of file owner size Size in bytes blkcnt Size in blocks gen Generation number Command Reference A 39 filestats atime Time of last read or write in seconds mtime Time of last write in seconds ctime Time of last size status change in seconds crtime Time file was created in seconds atimeage Age of last read or write Now atime mtimeage Age of last write Now mtime ctimeage Age of last size status change Now ctime crtimeage Age of file creation Now crtime timetype timetype This lets you specify the type of time that will be used in the age compari son Valid values for time type are a Access time m Modification time C Change time last size status change er Creation time sizes sizes Specifies the breakdown of sizes as a comma separated set of size values The values are in bytes but as a convenience you can add a K M or G suffix to a number to get kilobytes megabytes and gigabytes For example 500K 2M 1G would produce a breakdown with 4 categories files less than 500K files less than 2 megabytes files less than 1 gigabyte and all other files To produce a breakdown that includes all unique file sizes specify for the sizes value style style Controls the style of output the possible value for countare readable the default table colonseparated values suitable for processing by pro grams and html EXAMPLE
337. filer can resolve that name to an IP address which is used for an IP level host alias see the alias option in ifconfig the filer uses that IP address in the same way as it would if you specified the IP address in the httpd hostprefixes file If the etc httpd hostprefixes file is edited it is read again by the HTTP server after the changes are saved EXAMPLE This example maps requests sent to www customer1 com to the customer1 subdirectory of httpd rootdir and requests directed at a host with IP address 20768 156 58 to the subdirectory customer2 customer1 www customer1 com customer2 207 68 156 58 If the command filer gt ifconfig vh alias www customer1 com had been issued before the configuration file was read requests destined for the IP address of www customer1 com would also be mapped to the customer1 subdirectory regardless any the Host header they included SEE ALSO ifconfig options Command ReferenceA 131 httpd log NAME httpd log Log of HTTP SYNOPSIS etc log httpd log DESCRIPTION The HTTP server logs an entry for every file retrieved via HTTP This log written to etc log httpd log is stored in the Common Log Format which is used by many World Wide Web servers Each entry in etc log httpd log consists of one line with seven fields The fields are in order address The IP address of the HTTP client requesting the file rfc931 This field is always authuser This field is
338. following steps 1 Connect from a CIFS client to the filer as Administrator After setup finished the default etc passwd and etc group files on the root vol ume were set up to enable you to share files on the filer as Adm 2 Display the contents of the filer s C share and select a file to ed After setup finished the filer root directory was shared automat Administrator has read write and execute rights to the share The C share is a hidden share you can get to it only by speci inistrator it ically as C The ying the path manually for example as filer C rather than accessing it through the Network Neighborhood icon 2 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Obtaining Access to the Filer Shell Ways to Access the Command Line The filer supports a command line interface You can access the command line directly from the system console remotely using telnet remotely using a remote shell such as rsh Sharing a Single telnet and Console Session The console and telnet share a single session Everything entered through telnet is echoed at the console everything entered at the console is echoed to thetelnet Session telnet Session Restriction Only one telnet session can be open at a time Closing a telnet Session To close a telnet session press Ctrl to log out of the filer then press Ctrl D to log out of telnet telnet and Conso
339. for the add command it must be zero if the destination is on a directly attached network and non zero if the route is via one or more gateways The add command adds the specified route for the given destination to the rout ing table The delete command deletes the specified route from the routing table Routes to a particular host are distinguished from those to a network by interpret ing the Internet address associated with destination The optional keywords net and host force the destination to be interpreted as a network or a host respec tively Otherwise if the destination has a local address part of INADDR ANY i e 0 or if the destination is the symbolic name of a network then the route is assumed to be to a network otherwise it is presumed to be a route to a host If the route is to a destination via a gateway the metric parameter should be greater than 0 If metric is set to 0 the gateway given is the address of this host on the common network indicating the interface to be used for transmission All symbolic names specified for a destination or gateway are looked up first as a host name in the etc hosts database If this lookup fails then the name is looked up as a network name in the etc networks database default is also a valid destination which is used if there is no specific host or network route The netmask for a route to a network is implicitly derived from the class of the network to override that the de
340. fying the recipients of automatic email messages sent by the autosupport daemon is as follows options autosupport to addresses You can specify up to five email addresses Separate email addresses by commas and do not include spaces in the list Example options autosupport to customer company com Be sure to enter the command on a single line Specifying the Filer Administrator s Address The options command for specifying the filer administrator is as follows options autosupport from address Example options autosupport from jdoe abc com Sending an Immediate Message Immediate messages contain the same filer data as automatic messages How to send immediate messages The command to send an automatic email mes sage immediately is as follows options autosupport doit string The string is used in the subject line of the email message to explain why the email was sent Example options autosupport doit TESTING 2 30 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Sending a Short Message The options autosupport noteto command specifies the recipients of short email messages sent by autosupport The short email messages are for urgent events such as disk failures or filer reboots The following example shows a short message Return Path autosupport Received from filer by company com 4 1 SMI 4 1 id AA14370 Thu 26 Sep 96 07 51 31 PDT essage Id lt 9609261451 AA143
341. g Windows NT domain authentication a generic user account is mapped by default with the name pcuser The generic user account enables users who meet the criteria described in this section to connect to NTFS or mixed qtrees on the filer For information about gtrees see Chapter 10 Otree Administration or FilerView on line help NOTE For generic user accounts to be active pcuser must be an account in the etc passwd file Who Can Use the Generic User Account To use the generic user account a user must e beauthenticated bein a trusted domain nothave an entry in the UNIX password database All users of the generic user account have the same UNIX rights and the Windows NT rights granted by their Windows NT group membership because they appear as one account to the system CIFS Administration 7 9 Setting Up a Generic User Account To set up a generic user account use one of the following options commands with an account name to use as an argument as shown in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Generic User Account options Commands User type Option Description NT wafl default unix user Specifies the UNIX user account to use when an NT user attempts to log in and that NT user would not otherwise be mapped UNIX wafl default nt user Specifies the NT user account to use when a UNIX user accesses a file with NT security has an ACL and that UNIX user would not otherwise be mapped Disabling generic user access To dis
342. g an Off line Volume liliis esee 3 13 Adding a Foreign Volume 0 0 eee eee eens 3 13 Destroying a Vol uEme or at el e er ee Co a tidie ate des 3 14 Renaming a VolUME o ooococ en 3 14 Handling Volume Failures o o oooococcooooo ees 3 14 File Statistics fer Vol rnes s iue eon dure bas ee d Rd go Sastre wd 3 15 How Data ONTAP 5 3 Provides File StatiStiCS 0o o oo o 3 15 Information Obtained by the Filestats Command o ooo ooo o 3 15 The filestats Command Syntax liliis esses 3 15 Example With No Options Specified liliis sn 3 15 Use File Statistics for Snapshot Management o oooooooooooo o 3 16 Chapter 4 Example With Ages Option Specified o o oo oooooooooooooo 3 16 Example to Determine Volume Capacity liliis sls 3 17 Getting a File Statistics SUMMA i suse rub e eR CREW e BS 3 17 DDescriptioma zs ee cei AA E A E ES Ms 3 17 RESTICUONS hig odes Kind Fatih a ee Pewee ew che ae Face Pace 3 17 Nj UU GI Seti AR LO 3 18 filestats Command Options 0 0 0 0 0 000 3 18 Options to Use With the filestats Command illl elles 3 18 About the Ages Option ooooooooooooo ees 3 18 Example of the Ages Option 0 0 0 00 a e a les 3 18 About the tirnetype Option t sss gasses simhallar dwa tet dee uos Sonde ura 3 19 About the sizes Option iliis 3 19 Example 0f the Sizes OptlOhi csias eles EE SUE wq pi ee
343. g the snapshot reserve because it is more likely to remain constant as the file system fills The example shows a volume that keeps five nightly snapshots and four hourly snap shots That is the volume uses the following command for creating snapshots regularly snap sched vol0 0 5 4 8 12 16 20 The snap list output shows that the overhead for snapshots is only 1096 so the default snapshot reserve of 2096 seems to be a waste of disk space Assuming that this pattern of change holds up a reserve of 1296 to 1596 provides a safe margin to ensure that removing files frees disk space when the active file system is full The values in parentheses that is the values that show the space used by an individ ual snapshot are useful in identifying a particular snapshot to remove when the file system is full However deleting a particular snapshot doesn t necessarily release the total amount of disk space indicated because other snapshots might be referring to the same blocks Refer to Adjusting Disk Space Used by Snapshots for further infor mation about how to select a snapshot file for deletion to reclaim disk space Snapshots 9 13 If you do not want the total amount of disk space consumed by all snapshots to exceed a certain percentage of the used disk space use the cumulative values in the snap list output to determine which snapshots to delete In the preceding exam ple if you don t want more than 596 of used disk space to be spent by sn
344. ghts Display Methods llle 7 23 Displaying Access Rights From the Windows Desktop 7 23 Changing UNIX Permissions and DOS Attributes From Windows 7 23 How to change UNIX permissions 0 0000 cece eee eee 7 23 Displaying SecureShare ACC SS 2 eee 7 24 Changing the Permissions of a Single Item 0 0 0 0 0c 7 24 qtree Security Style Effects 0 0 7 24 Recursive Application of Changes 0 0 0 00000 7 25 Changing the Permissions of Multiple ltemS o o o o oooo o o 7 25 Sending a Message to All Users ona Filer 0 0 000 elles 7 25 When to Senda Message seire ede dee te sto ER ER 7 25 How to Send the Message 0 2 0 0 llle 7 25 Event Auditinigus s cec coe eee AERE See eae A 7 26 You Can Audit File Access Events llle 7 26 Why Use Event Auditing liiis 7 26 XXV Active Event Log Naming 00 000 ees 7 26 LOG ACCESS ria de e er pO e USt es rec e PAPE Aa de ies 7 26 Event Eog Detail DisplaySu is re ex t de ae 7 27 How to Examine an Event in Detail liiis 7 27 Windows File Access Detail Displays 0oooocoocoooocccc o 7 27 UNIX File Access Detail Displays liiis ess 7 28 Unsuccessful File Access Detail Display lilii isis 7 28 Lost Record Event Detail Displays gc rt dec e E Rs 7 28 Event Auditing Overview ssis sese 7 29 DeSs6rIptlonm s e DRAIN ege 7 29 STEPS s naci ete eng dt esten
345. ha a Gaon itus 5 11 Slepi O M Ban Pers t ceat electi Dr pce ues e 5 11 Setting the Language of a Volume o oooooooooooooo eA 5 12 DESCAPUON ee ECCE D EXT 5 12 Prerequisttes a vus tasto taa ERREUR RE AM ERIS aed 5 12 Catia Tre tate anea Pose ER iet s 5 12 SPA a LP 5 12 Creating a Volume That Uses a Specified Language oo oooooooo o 5 12 Description its A A ia a 5 12 Prerequisites na ud e tae a RR 5 13 Catia Blak tata SEDE pde d pis eese qua 5 13 Stepe usa natn dr Sp cake punks a dad a d dete a s 5 13 Displaying Which Volume Uses Which Language iilis iiilssss 5 13 Deseriptiom ase Tc 5 13 A M e s ee ati e d a 5 13 Sample Output x seus Wak SESS A CY XGA EC RAE USA EARS 5 14 XIX GIFS File Name Casu rus et et ie de onse to e s ale dete tech Sod Aet eta e 5 14 Case Preservation cus inodo AA eho RI e p ERE USA 5 14 Case Conversion Procedures s tec e OE e YE REM 5 14 Forcing CIFS File Names to Lowercase o o o oooooooooooo eee 5 14 Deseriptlon I acke ee EN eS he pe Pd 5 14 iS gt once rer 5 15 Preserving the Case of CIFS File Names 0 0 000000 ccc eee 5 15 DESCHIDIION pP CET 5 15 Caution auod hu tes atur A iu es RS SEN 5 15 SID 083 satt ts MEE ptas te eot 5 15 Directory Conversion TMe cua dorada bos sa to qud sdb qus 5 15 Directory Conversion Can Take a Considerable Amount of Time 5 15 When There Is no Need to Convert eee 5 15 How to Speed Up Directory Conversion
346. hat only has the serial number FILES etc serialnum A 148 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide shadow NAME shadow shadow password file SYNOPSIS etc shadow DESCRIPTION The shadow file provides more secure storage for the user s password which would otherwise be in etc passwd When the password field of an entry in etc passwd is empty etc shadow must contain a corresponding entry with the same user name but a non empty encrypted password username password The following list explains the required fields username The user s login name not more than eight characters password The user s password in an encrypted form that is generated by the UNIX passwd function There can be other fields in the etc shadow file following the after the password EXAMPLE Here is a sample shadow password file entry dave Os5l6pBb2rJDA SEE ALSO passwd options nis nsswitch conf Command ReferenceA 149 sm NAME sm network status monitor directory SYNOPSIS etc sm DESCRIPTION The network status monitor provides information about the status of network hosts to clients such as the network lock manager The network status monitor keeps its information in the etc sm directory The etc sm state file contains an integer that is incremented each time the filer is booted The etc sm monitor file contains a list of network hosts the filer is monitoring
347. he MIME Content Type value of a file by mapping the file name suffix or example gif html or mpg according to information in the etc httpd mimetypes file NOTE On a Windows 9x or Windows NT 4 0 client the etc httpd mimetypes sample file name is not displayed in its entirety By default the Explorer displays the file name as etc httpd mimetypes If you are using Windows from the Explorer View menu select Options then the View tab and in the dialog box make sure that there is no check mark in the check box next to Hide MS DOS file extensions for file types that are registered Modifying MIME Content Type Mappings To modify MIME Content Type mappings or to add MIME Content Types edit the entries in etc httpd mimetypes Entries are in the following format An optional comment suffix Content Type Lines preceded by the sign are comments The file name suffix is case insensitive Following are sample entries My clients browsers can now use PICT graphics files pct image pict pict image pict In the sample entries files whose names ended with pact or pact are mapped to the MIME Content Type value of image pict The first field in the Content Type value describes the general type of data contained in the file the second field is the data subtype which shows the specific format in which the data is stored If the browser HTTP Administration 8 7 on the client is configured to start a graphics program a
348. he client the filer returns an out of disk space error to the NFS write request or a disk full error to the CIFS write request The following sections describe how the clients notify the users about quotas being exceeded Messages Displayed on NFS Clients If a write from an NFS client to a filer causes a quota to be exceeded the user experi ence depends on the operating system version and the application If a UNIX client mounts a filer without the noquota option the Login program on the client checks to see whether the user has reached the disk quota and file quota each time the user tries to log in to the client The client displays a message to alert the user before displaying the system prompt if a quota was reached In the following example a user reached the disk quota on the filer mounted as f filer on a client named client2 rlogin client2 You have mail Block limit reached on t filer client2 Not all versions of UNIX perform the quota check as described in this section Also the exact message printed varies from one version to another If a write causes a quota to be exceeded the error message seen by the user depends on the application For example on a SunOS 4 x client if a user tries to save a file using vi when his or her disk quota is reached the error message is Disc quota exceeded Warning t filer home jdoe filel is incomplete Quotas and Maximum Number of Files11 9 Messages Displayed on CIFS Clients
349. he filer can perform subsequent incremental backups correctly Also if you need to restore data from tape to this vol ume use only the backups created after the volume reversion 3 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Reverting a Volume to a Selected SnapShot Description Use SnapRestore to revert a volume to a snapshot You can use this feature at any time After you enter the command for reverting a volume the filer reboots with the volume containing the same data as it did when the snapshot was taken Prerequisites You must meet these prerequisites before using SnapRestore SnapRestore is a licensed feature You must enter the snaprestore license code before you can revert a volume to a snapshot e Snapshots must exist on the filer so that you can select one snapshot for the reversion The volume to be reverted must be on line The volume to be reverted must not be a mirror used for data replication Cautions Be sure that you understand the following rules before reverting a volume SnapRestore overwrites all data in the volume After you use SnapRestore to revert to a selected snapshot you cannot undo the reversion When you revert a source volume for data replication try not to select a snapshot taken before the SnapMirror snapshot If you must revert to a snapshot taken before the SnapMirror snapshot the filer can no longer perform an incremental upda
350. he interval is the number of seconds between evaluation of the trap A trap can only send data as often as it is evaluated Network Administration 4 5 Table 4 2 Parameter Descriptions continued Parameter Description interval offset The interval offset is the amount of time in seconds until the first trap evaluation and is zero by default You can set it to a non zero value to prevent too many traps from being evaluated at once at sys tem startup for example backoff After a trap sends data you might not want it to be calculator evaluated so often anymore For instance you might want to know within a minute of when a file system is full but only want to be notified every hour that it is still full There are two kinds of back off calculators stepwise and exponential backoff step The number of seconds to increase the evaluation interval if you are using a step backoff If a trap s interval is 10 and its backoff step is 3590 the trap is evaluated every 10 seconds until it sends data and once an hour thereafter backoff The value by which to multiply a trap s evaluation multiplier interval each time it fires If you set the backoff cal culator to exponential backoff and the backoff multiplier to 2 the interval doubles each time the trap fires It is important to distinguish between the kind of userspecified traps you can set using the snmp traps command and the built in support for traps such as cold
351. he new permissions Command syntax The cifs access command has the following syntax cifs access share g user group rights The g flag specifies that the access rights are defined for a group rights can be UNIX style permissions or Windows N Estyle rights e UNIX style permissions are defined as r w and x which mean read write and delete and execute and browse respectively To deny a right to a user use a hyphen e Windows NFstyle rights are No Access Read Change and Full Control Examples Here are some examples of assigning access rights from the filer cifs access library g engineering rwx cifs access library domain joed Change NOTE The group everyone is reserved When you use it in an ACL the group X everyone means every CIFS user For example to give every CIFS user read write and execute rights to the library share you enter the following command cifs access library everyone rwx 7 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Removing a User or Group With the cifs access delete Command If a user or group no longer exists you can remove the corresponding entry from an ACL Use the following command syntax to remove an entry in an ACL cifs access delete share user group Fo owing are some examples of removing entries from the ibrary share The following command removes the engineering group from the library share cifs access d
352. he rdate command or SNTP The value can be one of the following date for the protocol used by the rdate command ntpfor SNTP The timed sched Option Default hourly Description Schedules when to synchronize the time with a time server The value can be one of the following e hourly to synchronize hourly e multihourly to synchronize every six hours daily to synchronize every day at midnight e anumber followed by m to specify an interval of minutes or h to specify an inter val of hours To avoid overburdening the time server the filer randomly selects the exact time of the synchronization within a 20 minute window of the specified schedule 19 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The timed servers Option Default None Description Specifies up to five servers in order of contact priority The value can be a list of the host names or IP addresses of up to five time servers separated by commas The filer goes down the list until it finds a server that responds then uses the time from that server It starts with the first server in the list each time An example list of three time servers is as follows sundial sundial dell com 10 152 8 12 You can get a list of NTP Network Time Protocol time servers which SNTP can use from http www eecis udel edu mills ntp servers htm volume Options What the volume Options Do The volume options control volum
353. he statistics associated with this client are displayed Displays a list of the clients whose statistics have been collected on a per client basis along with the total NFS calls for that client since last reboot or last zeroed with the z option the count being displayed both as the actual count and as a percentage of calls from all clients z Zeroes reinitializes the current statistics However statistics since boot are also retained c Includes reply cache statistics in the data displayed t Displays the statistics since boot time rather than since the last time they were zeroed Command Reference A 59 nfsstat DISPLAYS The server RPC display includes the following fields with separate values for TCP and UDP calls The total number of RPC calls received badcalls The total number of calls rejected by the RPC layer the sum of badlen and xdrcall as defined below nullrecv The number of times an RPC call was not available when it was thought to be received badlen The number of RPC calls with a length shorter than a minimum sized RPC call xdrcall The number of RPC calls whose header could not be XDR decoded The server NFS display shows the number of NFS calls received calls and rejected badcalls and the counts and percentages for the various calls that were made SEE ALSO netstat options sysstat A 60 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide opti
354. hip with each other That is you must specify each filer as a trusted host in the etc hosts equiv file of the other filer The etc hosts equiv file contains a list of host names each of which is on a separate line Verifying Localhost as a Trusted Host If you want to copy data between volumes on the same filer you must specify local host on the filer as a trusted host in the filer s etc hosts equiv file Localhost is the interface through which the filer sends packets to itself If you have not already listed localhost as a trusted host follow these steps to include localhost in etc hosts equiv 1 Enter the loopback address which is 127 0 0 1 in the etc hosts file 2 Type localhost on a separate line in the etc hosts equiv file Recommendation for Copying a Volume To avoid performance problems when copying to a different filer you might want to set up a private network for copying between the source and destination filers This is because when a filer copies data between two volumes it floods the network with 15 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide packets Users of the filers involved in a volume copy operation might notice a degra dation in response time during the copy Details About Copying One Volume to Another Command Syntax for Copying One Volume to Another To copy one volume to another use the following command syntax vol copy start S s snapsho
355. his com mand executes In the etc disk fw directory the firmware file name is in the form of product ID revision LOD For example if the firmware file is for Seagate disks with product ID ST118202FC and the firmware revision is FD9E the file name is ST118202FC FD9E LOD The revision in the file name is the number against which the filer compares each disk s existing firmware revision In this example if the filer has disks with firmware revision F307 the file etc disk fw ST118202FC FD9E LOD assuming it exists will be downloaded to all the disks when you execute this command To download the firmware to all disks enter disk fw update without any argu ments To download the firmware to a particular disk specify the disk name in the command which is in the form of adapter number disk ID For example if the disk ID is 1 and the disk is on adapter 8 enter the following command disk fw update 8 1 To determine disk firmware revisions enter the sysconfig v command The fol lowing example is partial output from the sysconfig v command In this example the firmware revision for the disk is FD9E slot 8 FC adapter isp2100 chip rev 3 Firmware rev 1 14 19 Host Loop ld 119 FC Node Name 2 000 00e08b 00a002 Cacheline size 8 FC Packet size 34000000 0 SEAGATE ST118202FC FD90 Size 17GB 17783112 blocks Command Reference A 27 download NAME download install new version of Data ONTAP 5 3 SYNOPSIS download DESCRIPTI
356. host root adminhost Only the administration host adminhost can mount the root directory and mod ify files in the directory NOTE On filers with a single volume you can refer to the root directory without the vol prefix e fvol vol0 home root adminhost The administration host adminhost can mount the home directory as root All other clients can access the home directory to read and write files Restricting Access to Volumes and Directories Use Export Options to Restrict Directory Access You can use the export options to restrict access to directories in various ways NFS Administration 6 5 Restricting Access to home You can restrict access to the home directory to particular groups by e using the chmod command to change access modes for the directory e using the rw or access options in the etc exports file to limit write privilege to specific hosts The access Option The access option lists the hosts that can mount exported directories When you use the access option only the hosts listed can mount the associated directory Syntax The syntax for the access option is as follows access hostname hostname Limits There is no limit to the number of host names you can specify with the access option However the length of a line in the etc exports file cannot exceed 1 024 characters NOTE If you cannot fit all the host names in a 1 024 character line you can use net X groups in place of
357. host names The root Option The root option lists the hosts that can mount exported directories as root Hosts that mount exported directories as root have full control over the directories and can perform the following operations Create and delete directories and files Change ownership and group associations of directories and files e Set access permissions for directories and files Syntax The syntax for the root option is as follows root hostname hostname Limits You can specify 1 to 256 host names with the root option Restrictions You cannot use netgroup names with the root option 6 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The rw Option The rw option lists the hosts that can modify the exported directories hosts not listed by the rw option have read privilege only Syntax The syntax for the rw option is as follows rw hostname hostname Limits You can specify 1 to 256 host names with the rw option Restrictions You cannot use netgroup names with the rw option The ro Option The ro option lists the clients that cannot modify the exported directories Syntax The syntax for the ro option is as follows The exportfs Command Using the exportfs Command You use the export fs command to export and unexport volumes and directories Depending on which options you use the command exports the volumes and directo ries listed
358. hrough the useradd option have the same privilege level as root Optionally any comment about the user being added could be provided Com ments about the user should be no longer than 128 characters and should not contain the character colon When users are added they are prompted for the password twice The password is case sensitive and it has the following restrictions it should be at least 6 characters long it should contain at least two alphabets it should contain at least one digit or special character The userdel option can be used to delete any non root administrative user The userlist option lists all non root users if no user name is provided The user list option can also be invoked with a list of users to list information about only those users SEE ALSO passwd A 102 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide version NAME version display Data ONTAP 5 3 version SYNOPSIS version DESCRIPTION version displays the version of Data ONTAP 5 3 running on the server and the date when the version was created SEE ALSO download sysconfig Command ReferenceA 103 vif NAME vif create and destroy virtual interfaces SYNOPSIS vif create vif name interface name vif destroy vif name vif stat vif name interval DESCRIPTION The vif command creates and eliminates virtual interfaces It also displays statis tics for a specified vi
359. hts to the share If a group or a user no longer exists you can remove the corresponding entry from an ACL Methods of Assigning or Changing Access Rights to a Share To assign access rights use either of the following methods e From Windows follow the instructions in Assigning or Changing Access Rights with Server Manager 7 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide From the filer command line do one of the following a Add access with the cifs access command as described in Giving Access With the Cifs Access Command b Remove a user or group with the cifs access delete command as described in Removing a User or Group With the cifs Access delete Command Assigning or Changing Access Rights With Server Manager To assign or change access rights with Server Manager use the Access Through Share Permissions window by following these steps 1 2 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example NFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears In the Server Manager window click Computer Shared Directories then click the Properties button Result The Share Properties window appears Click Permissions
360. i cate 1 024 files For example 75K means 76 800 files Use M to mean 2 20 and G to mean 2 30 You can omit the K M or G For example if you enter 100 it means the maximum number of files is 100 A blank in this field means there is no restriction on the number of files that the quota target can use If you want to track the number of files but do not want to impose a limit on the num ber of files that can be used by the quota target enter a dash in the files field Quotas and Maximum Number of Files11 3 Sample Quotas File Following is a sample quotas file that includes different kinds of quotas Quota Target type vol home user jdoe user 108 user jsmith user vol rls publications group vol home eng group vol cad vol cad projl tree writers group vol cad projl i user k user vol cad proj1 X group groupl vol cad proj1 mhoward user mhoward user vol cad projl mfisher user disk 500 500 500 750 750 750 150 50 50 750 100 150 75 Any operation that creates files or writes to them must sa The fo files 10K 10K 10K 75 75 HA A 15 10 85 75 100 T5 NNNNNN isfy all applicable quotas lowing list describes the effects of the sample quotas file The owner of vol home user jdoe and the user whose UID is 108 can each use 500 MB of disk space and 10 240 files in the root volume The user whose user name is jsmith can use 500 MB of disk space and 10 240 file
361. ial port and is used to monitor and manage filer operation copy on write The technique for creating snapshots without consuming excess disk space degraded mode The operating mode of a filer when a disk is missing from the RAID array or the batteries on the NVRAM card are low Glossary 1 disk ID number A number assigned by the filer to each disk when it probes the disks at boot time Ethernet adapter An Ethernet interface card expansion card A SCSI card NVRAM card network card hot swap card or console card that plugs into a filer expansion slot expansion slot The slots on the system board in which you insert expansion cards filer A filer is a dedicated special purpose network data server that provides fast and reliable file service to network cli ents connected to Ethernet networks GID Group identification number group A group of users defined in the filer s etc group file HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol An object oriented protocol that can be used for many tasks such as name servers and distributed object management systems through extension of its request meth ods commands hot spare disk A disk installed in the filer that can be used to substitute for a failed disk Before the disk failure the hot spare disk is not part of the RAID disk array hot swap The process of adding removing or replacing a disk while the filer is running hot swap adapter An ex
362. iases Items are separated by any number of blanks and or tab characters A indi cates the beginning of a comment characters up to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file This file may be created from the official host data base maintained at the Net work Information Control Center NIC though local changes may be required to bring it up to date regarding unofficial aliases and or unknown hosts Network addresses are specified in the conventional dot notation Host names may contain any alphanumeric character but not field delimiters newline or comment characters FILES etc hosts SEE ALSO hostname dns nis A 126 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide hosts equiv NAME hosts equiv list of hosts and users with rsh permission SYNOPSIS etc hosts equiv DESCRIPTION The hosts equiv file contains a list of hosts on which you can enter a filer com mand through the remote shell protocol rsh Hosts specified in this file are considered the trusted hosts of the filer Each line in hosts equiv has the following format hostname username f the host on which you enter the filer command is a UNIX host the user name is optional If the host on which you enter the filer command is a PC you must enter the user name for that PC in the etc hosts equiv file f you do not specify a user name for a UNIX host you must be ro
363. ibes the snapshots created by the example weekly snapshots and keeps the two most recent daily snapshots and keeps the six most recent hourly snapshots at 8 00 a m noon 4 00 p m and 8 00 p m and keeps the eight most recent 9 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The following list shows the snapshots that are created by this snapshot schedule in 1998 when January 11 is a Sunday ls lu snapshot total 64 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 14 12 00 hourly 0 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 14 08 00 hourly 1 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 13 20 00 hourly 2 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 13 16 00 hourly 3 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 13 12 00 hourly 4 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 13 08 00 hourly 5 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 12 20 00 hourly 6 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 12 16 00 hourly 7 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 14 00 00 nightly 0 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 13 00 00 nightly 1 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 12 00 00 nightly 2 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 10 00 00 nightly 3 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 09 00 00 nightly 4 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 08 00 00 nightly 5 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 11 00 00 weekly 0 drwxrwsrwx 2 root 4096 Jan 04 00 00 weekly 1 Result This schedule keeps the eight most recent hourly snapshots created at 8 a m noon 4 p m and 8 p m every day the six most recent daily snapshots and the two most recent weekly snapshots Whenever the filer c
364. icensed Output from httpstat Output from df Output from df i Output from snap sched Command ReferenceA 161 autosupport 18 Output from sysconfig r 19 The etc messages file The autosupport feature is manipulated through the options command see options The options choices are autosupport enable on off autosupport mailhost Comma separated list no spaces autosupport to Comma separated list no spaces autosupport noteto Comma separated list no spaces autosupport from Local user name autosupport doit text word describing reason autosupport enable Default is on This option is a switch to enable disable the auto support email feature Customers who wish to disable autosupport permanently will need to set the option in etc rc with the command options autosupport enable off autosupport mailhost Default is mailhost Enter the list of mailhosts separated by and no spaces Up to 5 hosts will be accepted The autosupport mechanism will try to contact each listed host in turn until it gets a successful SMTP connection The default mailhost address is set to the adminhost address in etc hosts with a com mand such as options autosupport mailhost mercury venus mars autosupport to Enter the list of recipients separated by 7 and no spaces Up to 5 email addresses may be listed with a command such as options autosupport to sysadm autosupport company com autosupport noteto De
365. ield in a snapmirror conf entry blank If you do not want to specify the maximum speed for data transfer specify a dash as the argument 16 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Rules for Specifying the Update Schedule The schedule in each etc snapmirror conf entry contains four fields minute e hour day of month day of week The fields are separated from each other by a space If a field contains more than one value the values are separated from each other by a comma A field containing an asterisk means that the field is irrelevant If you specify an asterisk in each field of the schedule the filer updates the mirror every minute The update schedule is mandatory The filer generates an error message if a etc snapmirror conf entry does not contain a schedule Example filerA voll filerB vol2 kbs 2000 45 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 In this example vol vol1 on filerA is replicated to vol vol2 on filerB Data is replicated at a maximum rate up to 2 000 kilobytes per second FilerB updates vol vol2 at 10 45 a m 11 45 a m 12 45 p m 1 45 p m 2 45 p m 3 45 p m and 4 45 p m Monday through Friday The asterisk in this example means that the mirror update schedule is not affected by the day of month When Changes to snapmirror conf Take Effect If SnapMirror is enabled the changes take effect within two minutes If SnapMirror is disabled the changes ta
366. ield to define the quota type e user f a user quota applies just to a tree and not to the entire volume specify user tree where tree is the name of a qtree If a user quota applies to a vol ume other than the root volume append vo1 volume to the quota type For example user vol marketing means that the user quota applies to the marketing volume e group If a group quota applies just to a tree and not to the entire volume specify group tree where tree is the name of a qtree If a group quota applies to a volume other than the root volume append volume to the quota type For example group vol marketing means that the group quota applies to the marketing volume tree A tree quota is similar to a disk partition but you can increase or decrease the size of a tree quota at any time Disk Field Specifies the maximum amount of disk space that the quota target can use In this field K is equivalent to 1 024 bytes M means 2 20 bytes and G means 2 30 bytes If you omit the K M or G the default is K If you want to track the disk usage but do not want to impose a disk usage limit on the quota target enter a dash in the disk field NOTE Do not put a blank in the Disk field it acts as white space The filer regards the following entries as equivalent Quota Target type disk files export tree 75K export tree 75K Files Field Specifies the maximum number of files that the quota target can use Use K to ind
367. ies new ones from the source This process causes the snapshot being backed up to disap pear and the dump command to terminate The etc snapmirror allow File Purpose of the snapmirror allow File The etc snapmirror allow file on the source filer specifies the host names of filers that are allowed to replicate data from the source filer The filer is not shipped with a default etc snapmirror allow file You must use a text editor to create the file if you want to use SnapMirror When You Can Modify the snapmirror allow File You can modify the etc snapmirror allow file at any time Format of the snapmirror allow File Each entry in the etc snapmirror allow file contains the host name of the filer that can replicate data from the source filer Type each entry on a separate line Example If you want to replicate volumes locally on filerA enter this line in the etc snapmirror allow file on filerA filerA Example If you want to replicate volumes from filerA to filerB enter this line in the etc snapmirror allow file on filerA filerB Data Replication Using SnapMirror16 7 The etc snapmirror conf File Purpose of the snapmirror conf File The etc snapmirror conf file resides on the destination filer It controls where data is copied and how often a mirror is updated The filer is not shipped with a default etc snapmirror conf file You must use a text editor to create the file if you want to use SnapMirror
368. ign volume off line If the foreign volume has the same name as an existing volume on the filer the filer renames it volume name 1 where volume name is the original name of the volume CAUTION If the foreign volume is incomplete repeat Steps 1 and 2 to add the missing disks Do not try to add missing disks while online doing so will cause them to become hot spare disks Disk and File System Management3 13 4 Ifthe filer renamed the foreign volume because of a name conflict type the fol lowing command to rename the volume vol rename oldname newname Example The following command renames the volume vo 0 1 to vol1 vol rename volO 1 voll 5 Type the following command to bring the volume on line in the new filer replac ing volume name with the name of the volume vol online volume name 6 Enter the following command to confirm that the added volume came on line vol status Destroying a Volume To destroy a volume turning its disks back into spare disks perform the following steps 1 To deactivate the volume enter vol offline volume 2 Enter the reboot command to reboot the filer 3 To destroy the volume enter vol destroy volume Renaming a Volume To rename a volume perform the following steps 1 Enter vol rename oldvolume newvol 2 Update the etc exports file and run export s 3 Update any CIFS shares that refer to the volume Handling Volume Failures A volume might fail because of an inconsi
369. ii 19 2 wafl root only chown Option 0 0 0 000 000 ccc ees 19 2 Default 22 5202 0 ek wi ea pity E uuu 19 21 DescrIptlOma cu ia oT ee es Hob Suan aera ee dura ERIS 19 2 wafl wcc minutes valid Option 0 000000 a 19 2 Default 225 eg meri A A e LEURS DEN EERXA 19 21 DESCMPUON MERE PL 19 2 Appendix A Glossary Index Figures Tables Command Reference ooooooooo ooo A 1 User Commands s s sas redu a ad med tw ir RV A 3 FIGJEORMAtS s od LER DS AM Riad e euet A 114 Headers Tasks and MacrosS 00000 elles A 118 System Services and Daemons l l ilie A 159 Figure 4 1 Interfaces Before Trunking 0 000 002 cece eee eee 4 18 Figure 4 2 Interfaces After Trunking isses 4 18 Figure 4 3 Single Mode Trunks llle 4 19 Figure 4 4 Multiple Mode Trunks isssssse eae 4 20 Figure 4 5 Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer 4 22 Figure 5 1 Flowchart to Choose a Language 0000 0c eee 5 10 Figure 9 1 Diagram of a Snapshot 0 0 0 0 E eee 9 3 Figure 9 2 snap sched Command Sample 00 000000 e eee eee 9 6 Figure 9 3 Directory Structure of NFS Client Access to Snapshots 9 16 Table 1 1 Major Components of a Filer o oooooooooooooooo 1 1 Table 12 Filer Features cs s Mec oc A Ro e eile bien d Gee edens 1 2 Table 1 3 Filer Internal Components elles 1 4 Table 1 4 Slots and P
370. il Unicast packets e bility of buffers umber of unicast packets received Table 17 6 describes the statistics in the TRANSMIT section of theifstat com mand output when you use the command on a GB Ethernet interface System Information and Performance17 7 Table 17 6 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface TRANSMIT Statistic Meaning Packets umber of packets attempted to be transmitted Bytes umber of bytes attempted to be transmitted Errors umber of hardware errors encountered while attempt ing to transmit Collisions umber of collisions that occurred while transmitting frames Unicast umber of unicast packets transmitted packets Table 17 7 describes the statistics in the DEVICE section of the ifstat command output when you use the command on a GB Ethernet interface Table 17 7 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface DEVICE Statistic Meaning Received errors Number of errors encountered during reception by the interface Transmit errors Number of errors encountered during transmission by the interface Collisions Number of collisions encountered during transmission by the interface Improving Filer Performance About This Section This section describes configuration procedures that might improve your filer s performance Limiting Directory File Size An extremely large directory file can use up most of the filer s CPU cycles when a user enters a 1s command
371. ilable in the entire file system 11 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 12 Data Backup Introduction to Data Backup Meaning of Data Backup Data backup means copying data from disk to tape While the filer dump command enables you to copy data to standard output this chapter mainly discusses how to copy data to tape Why You Want to Back Up Data From Disk to Tape The following list describes the reasons for backing up data from disk to tape e You can restore data from tape if an application or a user inadvertently corrupts or deletes files that cannot be recovered from snapshots Youcan store the backup tapes at an off site archive to protect the data against natural disasters After you reinstall the file system on the filer for example for migrating to larger disks or for converting a single volume filer to a multivolume filer you can restore data from tape Different Methods for Backing Up the Filer The filer supports the dump command backup method CAUTION If you use the tar or cpio command on an NFS client to back up the filer be aware that some versions of these commands fail with file sys tems that contain long path names unusual file names or hard links Data Backup 12 1 How the dump Command Works Purpose of the dump Command The dump command writes file system data from disk to tape in a format that enables you to restore the data
372. ilable on the mirror As with any volume you can export the mirror for NFS mounting or add a share corresponding to this volume for CIFS sharing SnapMirror makes all changes to the mirror at the same time If you have an open file in the mirror while the filer is updating the mirror you do not see the changes immedi ately After the mirror update is finished if you open the file you see the changes This is similar to the situation where another user changes a file in a regular volume when you are reading the file You can see the changes the next time you open the file Differences Between a Mirror and a Regular Volume The following list describes the differences between a mirror and a regular volume e A mirror has snapmirrored status which means that it contains read only data and network clients cannot write data to the mirror e The filer does not create automatic snapshots on the mirror based on the snap shot schedule You cannot use the qtree create command to create qtrees on a mirror How ever if qtrees exist in the source volume the filer mirrors the qtrees to the mirror You cannot enable quotas on a mirror Data Replication Using SnapMirror16 3 Snapshots Created During Data Replication Naming Conventions for Snapshots Used by SnapMirror SnapMirror creates snapshots on the source volume which are copied to the mirror The snapshot name is in the following format filer volume number filer is the host na
373. ile etc zoneinfo America Los Angeles These files are in standard Arthur Olson timezone file format as used on many flavors of UNIX SunOS 4 x and later 4 4BSD System V Release 4 and later and others GMT 13 is to allow DST for timezone GMT 12 FILES etc zoneinfo directory of time zone information files SEE ALSO zoneinfo A 100 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide uptime NAME uptime show how long system has been up SYNOPSIS uptime DESCRIPTION uptime prints the current time the length of time the system has been up and the total number of NFS operations the system has performed since it was last booted The filer runs uptime automatically once an hour and automatically logs its out put to etc messages EXAMPLE filer uptime 8 54am up 2 days 22 23 3122520 NFS ops SEE ALSO netstat nfsstat sysstat messages Command ReferenceA 101 useradmin NAME useradmin add delete or list administrative users SYNOPSIS useradmin useradd c comments login name useradmin userdel ogin name useradmin userlist user name J ist DESCRIPTION The useradmin command can be used to add delete or list administrative users The useradd option is used to add administrative users The user name can be up to 32 characters long The user name can contain any printable ASCII charac ters except the following characters space 2 IM All users added t
374. iler Tape Drive In the commands for dumping and restoring specify the filer tape drive in the follow ing format filer device name 13 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 14 Tape Device Management Introduction to Tape Device Management Why You Want to Manage a Tape Device You need to manage a tape device when you back up data from the filer to tape or when you recover data from tape to the filer Scope of This Chapter This chapter discusses the following topics e Displaying information about tape devices attached to the filer Positioning tapes How the Filer Displays Information About Various Tape Drives Introduction This section describes how the filer displays tape drive information about different types of tape drives You need the tape information for planning your backup This section does not describe how to display information about tape drives on remote hosts The filer can only display information about local tape drives Qualified Tape Drives Qualified tape drives are the tape drives that Dell tests with the filer These tape drives are on the Dell price list Tape Device Management 14 1 Displaying Tape Device Information Description Before you use the dump command to back up to a tape device attached to the filer verify that the filer detects the device Also verify the device name to be included in the dump command Ste
375. ilerB could not accept a complete transfer These messages mean that filerB tries to create a baseline version of the mirror but doing so requires that the mirror on filerB be taken off line To proceed use the vol offline command to take the mirror off line and reboot the filer At the next scheduled mirror update the filer creates a baseline version of the mirror Data Replication Using SnapMirror16 5 How SnapMirror Works With Quotas Quotas on the Mirror Quotas are always disabled on a mirror regardless of whether quotas are enabled on the source volume If you try to enable quotas on a mirror the filer generates an error message How to Apply the Same Quota Restrictions on the Former Mirror After you convert a mirror to a regular volume you can enable quotas on it However if the former mirror and the source volume reside on different filers they might be under the effect of different quota restrictions because there is one etc quotas file for each filer If you want the same quota restrictions to be applied on both volumes make sure that the filer on which the former mirror resides has a etc quotas file containing all entries from the etc quotas file used by the source volume Refer to Converting a Mirror to a Regular Volume for information about changing the status of a mirror How SnapMirror Works With the Dump Command How to Back Up Data in the Mirror If you want to back up data from a mirror the data mu
376. ilerC to rep licate volumes from filerA filerB filerC A 152 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide snapmirror conf NAME snapmirror conf configuration file specifying how filers replicate volumes using SnapMirror SYNOPSIS etc snapmirror conf DESCRIPTION The etc snapmirror conf file exists on the filer containing the mirror used for SnapMirror Each entry of the file specifies the volume to be replicated an argu ment for the replication and the schedule for updating the mirror Each entry of the etc snapmirror conf file is in this format source filer source vol destination filer destination vol argument schedule The following list describes the fields in each entry source filer he name of the filer containing the source volume source vol he name of the source volume destination filer the name of the filer containing the mirror destination vol the name of the mirror argument he maximum speed at which data is transferred which is specified in kbs kilobytes per second Enter a value greater han or equal to 11 By default the filer transfers the data as ast as it can To accept the default specify a dash schedule he schedule used by the destination filer for updating the mir ror The schedule contains four fields minute hour day of month and day of week The fields are separated from each other by a space If a field contains more than one value the value
377. iles Most users should not need to change this setting This option is useful for environments where System users may grow a directory to a size that starts impacting system performance When a user tries to create a file in a direc tory that is at the limit the system returns a ENOSPC error and fails the create wafl nt admin priv map to root When on the default an NT administrator is mapped to UNIX root wafl root only chown When enabled only the root user can change the owner of a file When disabled non root users can change the owner of files that they own When a non root user changes the owner of a file they own both the set UID and set GID bits of that file are cleared for security reasons A non root user is not allowed to give away a file if it would make the recipient overrun its user quota wafl root only chown is enabled by default A 68 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide options wafl wcc minutes valid Specifies the number of minutes a WAFL credential cache entry is valid The value can range from 1 through 20160 The default is 20 Multiple options can be set at once in an options command For example options nfs tcp enable on nfs v2 df 2gb lim on raid timeout 48 sets nfs tcp enable to on sets nfs v2 df 2gb lim to on and sets raid timeout to 48 SEE ALSO disk nfsstat snap autosupport Command Reference A 69 passwd NAME passwd modify the
378. illers loa dx mak A SURE ERA 1 1 Components ofa Elet 4 bus ba a teen aut doi ted nt 1 1 Fil r and Filer Mal Ult aot ert eo eet edipi ttes 1 1 Whata Fler DOES ier Lei o eC RE te EC TN 1 1 How Yow Administra FIIer uoa ttr tet Rb ee eked 1 2 Command Execution Through the Filer s Command Line 1 3 Command Execution Through Windows NT o o oooocooooooooo o 1 3 Configuratien Eile Editing Jta net sta AERE 1 3 Command Execution Through FilerView liliis eee 1 3 About Filer Main Unit Components 0 00 0 00000 cee eee ee 1 3 Two Kinds of Components o 1 3 Internal Filer Cornporients 5e Peek Gebr e edenda 1 3 Slots and POortSa 24 dr macte tane taber ten dle Sei Tipus vols 1 4 About PowerVault 700N Storage Systems n nananana 0 00000 eee eee 1 5 PowerVault 700N Storage Systems Contain Disks o o o o ooooo o 1 5 PowerVault 700N Storage System Environmental Information 1 5 About Data ONTAP B 3 2 cn RID EY cC eR eU onto lo 1 5 Data ONTAP 5 3 OV6tVIeW ui cas sri at eer berto dee Tar Wed tn a ed 1 5 Data Storage Management 1 6 Data Organization Management 000 00 ccc a 1 6 Data Access Management 1 7 Filer Administration With Data ONTAP 5 3 0 0 00000 cece eee eee 1 8 Filer Administration Activities 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 1 8 Contiguringthie Filet eacus aco teen ttr e eaters Ce date it 1 8 Monitoring and Maintaining Client Access
379. in usr local http images Command ReferenceA 135 messages NAME messages record of recent console messages SYNOPSIS etc messages DESCRIPTION The default behavior of the filer syslogd daemon see syslogd is to print all log ging messages of priority info or higher to the console and to the messages file Every Saturday at 24 00 etc messages is moved to etc messages 0 etc messages 0 is moved to etc messages 1 and so on Message files are saved for a total of six weeks FILES etc messages messages file for current week etc messages 0 5 messages file for previous weeks SEE ALSO syslogd syslog conf A 136 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide netgroup NAME netgroup network groups data base SYNOPSIS etc netgroup DESCRIPTION netgroup defines network wide groups used for access permission checking during remote mount request processing Each line defines a group and has the format groupname memberlist Each element in memberlist is either another group name or a triple of the form hostname username domainname The hostname entry must be fully qualified if the specified host is not in the local domain The filer can also use the netgroup NIS map Since the filer uses netgroups only in etc exports see exports the username entry is ignored The domain name field refers to the domain in which the net group entry is valid It must either be e
380. in the etc exports file or a specific volume or directory Syntax The syntax for the export fs command is as follows exportfs aiuv o options filer directory path Table 6 1 describes the options NFS Administration 6 7 Table 6 1 exportfs Command Options Syntax Option Description a Exports all the entries listed in the etc exports file u Unexports all the entries listed in the etc exports file NOTE When you use the u option with the a option all exports are unexported regardless of whether they were created from the etc exports file or with the o option i Exports all the export entries listed in the etc exports file but ignores the options specified for the entries v Prints each path name as it is exported or unexported 0 Specifies the options for a volume or directory that you include in the command line Example To export the vol vol home terry directory to the host mixer with read write access you enter the following command exportfs o rw mixer vol vol0 home terry NOTE Volumes and directories that are exported directly rather than through the etc exports file remain exported until canceled using the au option or until the filer is rebooted Canceling All Exports To cancel all exports enter the following command exportfs au Updating Exports Through etc exports When you make changes to the etc exports file take one of the following actions to ma
381. in the directory The limit on directory file size is set by the options wafl maxdirsize command The default limit 10 MB should prevent the system from hanging A directory of this size accommodates approxi mately 300 000 files with short file names The wafl maxdirsize option takes the maximum number of kilobytes as its argument When you reset the maximum directory size the argument that you supply 17 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide is rounded up to the next highest 4K boundary If a user tries to create a file that would cause the directory to grow larger than the specified size limit the user s com mand fails Balancing NFS Traffic on Network Interfaces To balance network traffic among different interfaces attach multiple interfaces on the filer to the same physical network For example if two Ethernet interfaces on the filer named filer are attached to the same network where four clients reside specify in etc fstab on client1 and client2 that these clients mount from filer 0 home Specify in etc fstab on client3 and client4 that these clients mount from filer 1 home This scheme can balance the traffic among interfaces if all clients generate about the same amount of traffic The filer always responds to an NFS request by sending its reply on the interface on which the request was received Avoiding Access Time Update for Inodes If your applications do not depend o
382. ing Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 5 that has access from a CIFS client the filer creates and maintains two names the original long name and an additional short name in 8 3 format How the Filer Generates Short 8 3 File Names The filer generates an 8 3 file name as follows 1 It truncates the file name to six characters 2 ltappends a tilde and a number or letter to the name If it runs out of letters and numbers because there are too many similar names it creates a unique file name that bears no relation to the original file name 3 It truncates the file name extension to three characters NOTE The number or letter appended to the short name ensures that the file XK name is unique It is not for showing the order of file creation For example if an NFS client creates a file named specifications html the short name created by the filer is specif 0 htm If this short name already exists the filer uses a different number at the end of the file name For example if the UNIX client creates another file named specifications new html the short version of specifications new htmlis specif 1 htm Which Clients Support Short File Names The short names appear on clients that support only the 8 3 format The short names are not visible to NFS clients On Windows 9x and Windows NT clients you can choose to display the short name or the long name by using File Properties NOTE Under some circumstances an application running on a c
383. ing it Multiple facilities may be specified for a single evel by separating them with comma 5 characters An asterisk can be used to specify all facilities or all levels The special level none disables a particular facility The action field of each line specifies the action to be taken when the selector field selects a message There are four forms e Apathname beginning with a leading slash Selected messages are appended to the specified file e A hostname preceded by an at Q sign Selected messages are for warded to the syslogd daemon on the named host e dev console Selected messages are written to the console e Anasterisk Selected messages are written to the console Blank lines and lines whose first non blank character is a pound character are ignored It is recommended that all etc syslog conf files include the line info etc messages so that all messages are logged to the etc messages file EXAMPLES A configuration file might appear as follows Log all kernel messages and anything of level err or higher to the console err kern dev console Log anything of level info or higher to etc messages info etc messages Also log the messages that go to the console to a remote 3t loghost system called adminhost err kern adminhost The etc secure message file has restricted access auth notice etc secure message Command ReferenceA 155 syslog conf Also
384. ing systems CIFS provides an open cross platform mechanism for client systems including Windows systems to request file and print services from server systems over a network This chapter describes how to manage the CIFS file protocol and users What You Can Do Only From the Filer Command Line or FilerView You can do some operations that affect CIFS administration only from the filer com mand line or FilerView These are e Viewing volumes and examining their status For additional information about vol ume operations see Chapter 3 Disk and File System Management e Setting or changing volume and qtree security style and oplocks status For infor mation about administering qtrees from the filer command line see Chapter 12 Qtree Administration For information about how to administer qtrees in Filer View see FilerView on line help Effects of Renaming a Volume on Shares If you change the name of a volume that contains at least one share whether through Windows NT or the vol rename command the filer automatically offers the share to users in the renamed volume at the next reboot The new volume name is reflected in thecifs shares command Scope of This Chapter This chapter does not discuss procedures that take place on the clients and it does not describe how a machine joins a workgroup or domain For information about these topics refer to the manuals for your client operating systems or books about PC networking
385. instructions in the hardware guide for your filer model File service resumes 15 seconds after you remove the disk Removing an Active File System Disk If you want to remove a disk because it is logging excessive errors perform the fol lowing steps 1 Type the following command and use the output to determine the disk number sysconfig r 2 Type the following command to fail the disk using the disk name from the output in Step 1 in place of disk name disk fail disk name The disk fail command permanently marks a disk as failed You cannot reuse the disk you must replace it After the disk fail command the system operates in degraded mode which means that a disk is missing from the RAID group 3 Remove the disk from the filer following the instructions in the hardware guide for your specific filer File service resumes 15 seconds after you remove the disk Volume Management Tasks Introduction This section contains procedures for configuring and managing volumes NOTE Although you can expand volume sizes and the RAID groups assigned to them after you create an initial multiple volume configuration you cannot split or shrink vol umes after you create them Creating Volumes You can create up to 23 volumes on a filer Each volume must contain at least two disks To create a new volume at the system prompt enter vol create newvol n Disk and File System Management3 11 where newvol is the name for the new vo
386. io et eL LERNEN eni ut Ms us Mate 2 22 Core File Storage in etc crash lees 2 22 What the savecore Command Does 0000 000 lille 2 22 Core Dump Space Needed us nc od GER ER a a E aA 2 22 Message Logging tii a ERR HR ENIM 2 23 About Message Logging ooooccococcc eee 2 23 About the syslogd Daemon and the etc syslog conf File 2 23 The etc syslog conf File Format 0 0 0 eee 2 23 The faeility Parameter ss ond se cee cit aca yo Bea nestle iz is 2 23 TheevelPatrarieter a ere te A IEEE 2 24 The action Parameters u eis oasis ede ed ie hs ets 2 24 Example Line From etc syslog conf 0 00 eee 2 25 The etc messages File Restart Schedule 0 20 0 0 0000 c eae 2 25 Checking the etc messages File Daily 2 000 0000 oo 2 25 Samipl ete syslog Conit File ns Vy et e s 2 25 Eor More Information 4 d se dett ee eter e PEOR em id 2 26 Configuring Filer Options ss sre pa Lx ub Y xc RE ER Reed ue e Re REA 2 26 Commands to Use to Set Options llle sn 2 26 Theroptions Cornmand Sesasi e t pat uie tee ORG s 2 26 What the options Command Does 0 0 00 eee 2 26 Syntax of the options Command lilii eee 2 26 Example of the options Command isl eee 2 26 The vol options Commands sera Sine hohe eee Eh 2 27 vol options Command Configures Volume Level Behavior 2 27 Syntax of the vol options Command 0 0 ee
387. ion 17 9 no atime update vo lume option 19 15 nonexistent disks 18 7 nonqualified tape dri ves 12 10 14 2 nonvolatile RAM NVRAM batteries 3 5 failures in 18 1 inconsistent contents 18 3 nosnap volume option 19 16 nosnapdir option 9 4 nosnapdir volume option 19 16 nvfail bootup process 4 29 database file protection 4 29 enabling and disabling 4 31 error message 4 30 volume option 4 29 nvfail option 19 16 nvfail rename file creation of 4 31 NVRAM 1 4 O operation 15 10 oplocks 7 33 options autosupport doit 19 2 autosupport enab autosupport from autosupport mailh autosupport notet ifs access_loggin e 19 2 19 2 ost 19 2 o 19 3 ifs access_logging enable 7 29 g filername 7 30 C C cifs guest_accoun cifs home_dir 7 1 C c ifs oplocks enabl ifs save_case 5 t 19 4 9 19 4 ifs netbios_aliases 19 5 e 7 34 19 4 15 options cifs scopeid 19 5 cifs show_snapshot 19 6 cifs symlinks cycleguard 5 4 19 6 cifs symlinks enable 5 3 19 7 console encoding 5 11 dns domainname 19 7 dns enable 19 7 httpd admin enable 19 8 httpd enable 8 1 19 8 httpd log max file size 8 1 19 8 httpd rootdir 8 1 8 6 19 8 httpd timeout 19 9 httpd timewait enable 19 9 ip path_mtu_discovery 19 18 minra 17 9 nfs big_endianize_fileid 17 9 nfs mount_rootonly 19 9 nfs per_client_stats enable 19 10 nfs tcp enable 19 10 nf
388. ions dns domainname domainname Using NIS The filer includes NIS client capabilities to query NIS servers for host name to IP address and IP address to host name translation services Because the nsswitch conf file already enables you to specify the order in which the filer finds password information you do not need to use or entries in the filer s etc passwd file in the root volume Any existing or entries are ignored NIS Maps the Filer Uses The filer uses the following NIS maps hosts byname hosts byaddr passwd byname passwd byuid passwd adjunct group byname group bygid netgroup byhost Shadow password information is obtained from the passwd byname map 4 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Enabling NIS during setup During setup the following prompt appears Do you want to run NIS Client n If you enter y setup prompts you for an NIS domain name as follows Please enter NIS domain name Enter an NIS domain name Enabling NIS without using setup If you didn t start NIS during setup you can start NIS by performing the following steps 1 Edit the etc rc file in the root volume to make sure that the option specifying the NIS domain name is set and the option to enable NIS is On Insert lines similar to the following options nis domainname company com options nis enable on 2 Enter the options commands from the command line or reboot the file
389. ire specified volume or the root volume if no volume name is specified This is true even if the quota target in the quotas file is specified in the form of a path name For example if the quota target for the user named jdoe is vol home user jdoe the filer imposes the quotas on all files written by jdoe not just the ones written to vol home user jdoe The Quota Command The quotas file specifies what the restrictions are on users groups and trees Whether these restrictions take effect depends on the quot a command The quota command enables you to do the following tasks enable and disable quotas on a pervolume basis resize quotas on a pervolume basis display information about all active quotas or about quotas that apply to a speci fied path Some of the information from quota commands is available through SNMP using the Dell custom MIB For more information about the MIB refer to About the Dell Custom MIB in Chapter 4 Enabling or Disabling Quotas The quota on off command enables or disables quotas for all volumes or a spe cific volume Use the following syntax when using the command quotas on off volume Use the following command to enable quotas for a volume quota on volume This command computes the disk usage of each quota target The computation can take a few minutes to complete for a large number of quotas To find out how much quota initialization the filer has completed use the quota command withou
390. irectly above the sym link s parent directory it is disallowed With this option set to off many standard Windows apps such as Find in Win95 NT4 0 will not operate correctly when a symlink points to a parent directory This is because they do not understand Command Reference A 63 options symbolic links and will repeatedly loop on them Users should use caution when changing this option cifs symlinks enable When cifs symlinks enable is on the default if the object being accessed by a CIFS client is a symbolic link whether absolute or relative the filer follows the link with the proviso that the ultimate target turns out to reside within the originating share thus ensuring that the client has access permission to the target cifs trace login When cifs trace login is on the default is off the filer logs all login related activities This can be used to diagnose access prob lems on the filer console encoding Specifies how non ASCII character information is presented The value can be nfs NFS character set You can use both NFS extended Ox7F and SGML characters for input sgml SGML character format You can use both NFS extended greater than Ox7F and SGML characters for input utf8 UTF 8 character sets For input any character greater than Ox7F is the beginning of a UTF 8 encoding The default is nfs dns domainname Sets the DNS domainname to the specified domainname dns enable Enables DN
391. irtual host IP addresses in this example 192 225 37 102 the destination IP address is used to select the virtual host root directory from the etc httpd hostprefixes file Mapping Virtual Host Addresses To map virtual host addresses to the virtual host interface use theifconfig com mand as follows e Adda new IP virtual host address mapping with the following command ifconfig vh alias address where address is an IP address The use of the vh interface indicates to the system that you are adding a virtual host address rather than adding an IP alias address to a network interface Delete virtual host addresses with the following command ifconfig vh alias address 8 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NOTE If you need to create a virtual subnet with many contiguous addresses the IP address can be a subnet address Specifying MIME Content Type Values About MIME Content Type Values You can configure the filer to send the appropriate MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Content Type header in each response to a get request The header shows the MIME Content Type value of the file which tells the browser on the client how to interpret the file For example if the MIME Content Type value shows that the file being transferred is an image file and the client is configured properly the browser can render the image by using a graphics program The filer determines t
392. is exported You can specify the option in one of the following formats access hostnamel hostnamel Give mount access to each host listed Alternatively you can specify a net group instead of a host in the list The netgroup must be defined in the etc netgroup file Whether the hosts can mount pathname with root access read and write access or read only access depends on how you use the root rw and ro options as described below anonzuid ro If a request comes from user ID of O root user ID on the client use uid as the effective user ID unless the client host is included in the root option The default value of uid is 65534 To disable root access set uid to 65535 To grant root access to all clients set uid to O Export the pathname read only If you do not specify this option the path name is exported read write rwzhostname hostnamel Export the pathname read only to all hosts not specified in the list and read write to the hosts in the list Netgroup names are not allowed in the list Command Reference A 35 exportfs rootzhostname hostname Give root access only to the specified hosts By default no hosts are granted root access Netgroup names are not allowed in the list When you export a file or directory using the ro rw or root option you can spec ify that the file or directory be exported to a subnet instead of individual hosts You cannot export to a subnet when using the access option
393. is section describes preliminary troubleshooting steps then describes how to trou bleshoot the following problems Filer can t register with the Windows NT domain e Incorrect password or unknown username e Users can t map a drive Preliminary Troubleshooting Steps Complete the following steps to begin to troubleshoot Windows problems 1 Make sure that the filer is licensed for CIFS by entering the 1icense command at the filer prompt If the following message appears CIFS not licensed or if a message with protocols other than CIFS appears but CIFS is absent you must get a license for CIFS NOTE For information about how to get a license contact Dell technical support as described in Getting Technical Assistance 2 Ifyou are authenticating through a Windows NT domain make sure that the filer has an account in the domain NOTE You can verify that the filer is registered with a domain controller by using thecifs testdc command 3 Make sure that CIFS service has been properly configured with the ci fs setup command Filer Can t Register With the Windows NT Domain If you are using WINS use the table Using Wins to troubleshoot the problem If you are not using WINS use the table Not Using WINS Using WINS Use Table 18 1 if you are using WINS Troubleshooting 18 15 Table 18 1 Using WINS Is the WINS server working Yes No Is the domain controller runni
394. it sends is described below The autosupport mechanism is triggered automatically once a week by the kernel to send information before backing up the messages file It can also be invoked to send the information through the options command Autosupport mail will also be sent on events that require corrective action from the system administra tor And finally the autosupport mechanism will send notification upon system reboot from disk The subject line of the mail sent by the autosupport mechanism contains a text string to identify the reason for the notification The messages and other informa tion in the notification should be used to check on the problem being reported The following are the cases where mail is sent automatically by the system and the subject line text that identifies the reason for the notification The events that trigger the short note emails if a recipient list is configured are noted below and will contain the subject line reason text string and the time of failure in the email data 1 Weekly notification is marked WEEKLY LOG 2 Data disk failure notification is marked DISK FAIL This event also sends the short note mail 3 Spare disk failure notification is marked SPARE FAIL This event also sends the short note mail 4 Disk scrubbing fixing disk errors is marked DISK SCRUB 5 Failure of a fan in the system is notified with FAN FAIL This event also sends the short note mail 6 Low NV
395. k command Erase a disk label with the disk erase label command NOTE For information about Maintenance mode see Booting From System Boot Diskette Displaying Detailed Disk Information The disk list command displays detailed device information for each disk on the System such as drive type and firmware revision level Checking Access to a Disk The disk check command checks access to a particular disk issuing read requests to the disk The disk is active for approximately 15 seconds During this time you can watch the disk s activity LED to verify that the disk is accessed Erasing a Disk Label The disk erase label command erases a disk label on the specified disk drive CAUTION Use the disk erase label command carefully because after a disk label is erased RAID treats the disk as uninitialized and no longer recognizes it as a member of a RAID array Typically use this command to remove an old RAID label on a previously used disk that you are adding to an existing RAID group For example use this command to erase the disk label when you move a disk from one filer to another Troubleshooting 18 9 Configuration Problems The etc rc etc exports and etc hosts Files Can Contain Errors Configuration problems usually occur in one of the three configuration files on the root volume etc rc e etc exports etc hosts This section describes common configuration problems What to Do When the Filer Is N
396. k line DUMP creating snapshot for backup 0 snapshot SECANO ES aod d aho ae a a ane o dude tede DUMP Date of this level 0 dump Tue Jun 3 12 47 14 1997 DUMP Date of last level 0 dump the epoch DUMP Dumping vol vol0 home to nrst0a DUMP mapping Pass I regular files DUMP Reading file names from standard input userl user3 user5 Example of Backing Up Data Without ACLs dump OuAf rst0a vol voll The command performs a level 0 backup of the vol vol1 volume The A option means that the backup does not include any Windows NT ACL information Use this option if the files in the volume are for NFS only Example of Specifying a Blocking Factor e dump Oufb rst0a 32 vol voll The command performs a level 0 backup of the vol vol7 volume The command writes 32 KB of data at a time enabling you to restore the data from systems that limit each write to 32 KB Example of Specifying a Tape File Size e dump OufB nrst0a nrst0a 2000000 vol voll The command performs a level 0 backup of the vol vol1 volume to the tape in nrstOa using a tape file size of 2 000 000 tape blocks After writing 2 000 000 tape blocks to the first tape file the command does not rewind the tape it con tinues writing the second tape file on the same tape If there is more data to be backed up after the command reaches the end of the second tape file the com mand prompts you for a new tape 12 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administra
397. ke effect immediately after you enter the vol snapmirror on command to enable the feature Recommendation You can create a single etc snapmirror conf file for your site and copy it to all the filers that use SnapMirror The etc snapmirror conf file can contain entries pertaining to other filers For example the etc snapmirror conf file on filerB can contain an entry for replicating a volume from filerC to filerD When filerB reads the etc snapmirror conf file it simply ignores this entry Replicating a Volume Description Replicate a volume if you are in any situation described in Purposes of SnapMirror You can replicate a volume at any time After you replicate a volume you have a mirror that contains the same data as the source volume Data Replication Using SnapMirror16 9 Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be met before you can replicate a volume e You must purchase the SnapMirror license If the source volume and the mirror are on different filers you must purchase a license and enter the SnapMirror license code for each filer Refer to Enabling Services in Chapter 2 for informa tion about how to enter a license code You must create an off line volume to be used as the mirror SnapMirror does not automatically create a volume Refer to Creating Volumes in Chapter 3 for information about how to create a volume refer to Making a Volume Inactive in Chapter 3 for information about how to take a volu
398. ke the changes take effect e Runthe exportfs a command Or Reboot the filer If you delete entries from the etc exports file when you make changes take one of the following actions to activate the changes and ensure that deleted exports are deactivated e Run the following commands exportfs au exportfs a 6 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Or e Reboot the filer The etc netgroup File The etc netgroup File Defines Groups of Clients The filer etc netgroup file defines groups of clients that the filer uses for checking access permission while processing a mount request Syntax The following line shows the syntax for each line in the etc netgroup file groupname member list Limits Each line in the etc netgroup file is limited to 4 096 characters Member list syntax Each element in member 1list is another group name e an entry in the following form hostname username domainname An element in an entry can be blank but the commas must be present When group names are used in the etc exports file the username and domainname fields are ignored When domain names are used they must be DNS names NIS names can not be used Restrictions You cannot use netgroup names with the rw and root options Changes Take Effect Immediately Changes made to the netgroup file take effect immediately NFS Administration 6 9 Exa
399. ked with the w option and an interval argument it displays a running count of statistics related to network interfaces An obsolescent ver sion of this option used a numeric parameter with no option and is currently supported for backward compatibility This display consists of a column for the primary interface and a column summarizing information for all interfaces The default primary interface is the first interface configured into the system The pri mary interface may be replaced with another interface with the 4 option The first line of each screen of information contains a summary since the system was last rebooted Subsequent lines of output show values accumulated over the preced ing interval FILES etc hosts host name database etc networks network name database SEE ALSO ifconfig nfsstat sysstat hosts networks Command Reference A 57 nfs NAME nfs turn NFS service off and on SYNOPSIS nfs on off DESCRIPTION nfs turns NFS service off or on With no arguments nfs shows the current state of NFS service nfs is normally used in the initialization command script etc rc FILES etc rc System initialization command script SEE ALSO rc A 58 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide nfsstat NAME nfsstat display NFS statistics SYNOPSIS nfsstat interval nfsstat c t h jp adaress host name nfsstat l t nfsstat z DESCRIPTION
400. kup process e Schedule the dump command on each filer so that it starts only when no other filers are using the tape drive 12 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The dump Command Syntax Command Syntax The dump command syntax is as follows dump option argument path Rules for Entering the dump Command The following list describes the rules for entering the dump command e optioncan be a list You must list all options together do not separate the options by commas or spaces e argument can be a list of arguments each of which is associated with an option The arguments are separated by spaces e fanoption takes a list of arguments the arguments in the list are separated by commas ist the arguments in the same order as you list the options e The dump level must be the first option You can type other options in any order e pathis the complete path name of the file or directory to be backed up by the dump command e Always precede the volume name by vo1 even though the volume is a root volume This is because between different levels of backups you might have changed the root volume NOTE Some options do not have any arguments Example of a Simple dump Command The following example illustrates how you use the dump command syntax dump Oufb rst0a 63 vol vol0 Options The following list describes the options e 0 is the dump level e u upda
401. l not rewind when the tape device is closed The unload reload device is used with sequential tape loaders and will unload the current tape volume and attempt to load the next tape volume note that the server will wait up to one minute for the next volume to become ready before aborting the reload of the next volume The rewind device will rewind the tape volume to beginning of tape on close rst the rst portion of the device name is always present and specifies that you are requesting a SCSI tape device u the logical unit number of the tape drive to use d the density or format to use for tape write operations The density specifications for an Exabyte 8505 8mm drive are l Exabyte 8200 format no compression m Exabyte 8200 format with compression h Exabyte 8500 format no compression a Exabyte 8500 format with compression EXAMPLES The sysconfig t command will display the supported tape drives on your system and the device names associated with each tape device along with the device s density or format The following is an example of the output from a sysconfig command on a filer with one tape device attached filer sysconfig t Tape drive 0 6 Exabyte 8505 8mm rstol rewind device format is EXB 8200 2 5GB nrstOl no rewind device format is EXB 8200 2 5GB urst0l unload reload device format is EXB 8200 2 5GB rstOm rewind device format is EXB 8200C w compression Command ReferenceA 115 tape nrst m
402. l volO directory vol volO vol vol0 hom access red blue green Edit etc exports After Changing Volume Names If you rename a volume using the vol rename command Entries in the etc exports file that refer to the volume become incorrect e The in memory information about active exports gets updated automatically and clients continue to access the exports without problems The filer displays an error message when the exportfs a command is entered or when the filer is rebooted Clients display the error message Stale NFS file handle after the filer is rebooted Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide A CAUTION To ensure that the entries in the etc exports file remain valid always edit the entries in the file to reflect volume name changes immedi ately after renaming volumes Default etc exports Entries vol vol0 and vol vol0 home Are Exported by Default By default the root volume vol vol0 and the vol vol0 home directory are exported to the administration host when you run setup Example of Default exportfs File The default etc exports file contains the following lines in this example the name of the administration host is silver Auto generated by setup Mon Oct 27 14 15 36 PST 1997 vol vol0 access silver root silver vol vol0 home root silver The contents of the default etc exports file is shown below e vol vol0 access admin
403. l of hours The default is hourly 2 34 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Specify up to five time servers by entering the following command options timed servers servers servers is a list of the host names or IP addresses of up to five time servers separated by commas Using options Command Options to Main tain Filer Security What the Options to the options Command Do The following options to the options command help maintain filer security The telnet hosts option restricts telnet access to a limited number of hosts Use this option to specify a comma separated list of up to five hosts that can log in to the filer using telnet Alternatively you can disable telnet for all hosts by specifying a hyphen By default the option argument consists of an asterisk which means all hosts have telnet access A record of all telnet and console logins is maintained in the etc messages file on the root volume The mount rootonly option restricts the mount privilege to root using privi leged ports ports 1 through 1 024 By default the option is enabled This option accepts the arguments of f and on to disable and enable it This option is applica ble only if your filer runs NFS NOTE Some PC clients and some older implementations of NFS on UNIX worksta tions use non privileged ports to send requests If you have these clients at your site disable the mount rootonly option
404. l user map file SEE ALSO cifs access group passwd Command Reference A 13 cifs shares NAME cifs shares configure and display CIFS shares information SYNOPSIS cifs shares cifs shares sharename cifs shares add sharename path comment description maxusers userlimit forcegroup groupname cifs shares change sharename comment description nocomment maxusers userlimit nomaxusers forcegroup groupname noforcegroup cifs shares delete sharename DESCRIPTION cifs shares displays one or more shares edits a specified share creates a share or deletes a share Listing shares To list all shares and their access control lists use the command cifs shares with no arguments To list a single share and its access control list use the command cifs shares sharename where sharename name of the share filer cifs shares Name Mount Point Description HOME vol volO home Default Share everyone Full Control C vol vol0 Remote Administration BUILTIN Administrators Full Control ENGR vol volO engr Engineering DOMAIN Engineering Full Control NEWS vol volO news News DOMAIN Guests No Access everyone Read A 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs shares filer cifs shares news Name Mount Point Description NEWS vol vol0 news News DOMAIN Guests No Access everyone Read Creating new shares To create a new share use
405. lODk e ttes tts RERO VECRE ENS pis ipis taco dort The cifs symlinks cycleguard Option llle Default DESCnpPlOMavaschsc A De AA ENS SANUS The cifs symlinks enable Option n naana annaa 19 7 DEl CH E e HT ee DERE ER ROMS 19 7 DESCRIPTION 44 a ce A ee RC S o aed vo ate 19 7 DNS OPTIONS sou gv A AER hee OS Sd A ias 19 7 What the DNS Options Do 19 7 Thezdris domalnname Option a oerte e b NOR olde Res 19 7 Detalla EAR SE ice pr CHEESE rte ge es 19 7 DESCIIDTION s iir ere red t y d ee c oe e e ie vd 19 7 The dns enable Option nonna anaana aaaea a 19 7 Default ca mehr e Ba Oe A miis 19 7 DESCIPTON a saneta elp eng ente on doped plaut eed d derit qiios 19 7 EETTPSODUORS Soren e a co tenet allen LT a vus se SU SOR 19 8 Whatthe ATIP Optigns DO tirada ne e EON 19 8 The httpd admin enable Option o oooooooooooooo ess 19 8 Detault ica xp eub eR ER Mena edes 19 8 BRA qut teg t tado aab ae la e del a agonia 19 8 The httpd enable Optionics voca di ERR Ebo ue ma 19 8 Detaili ere rate mo I EET BE s 19 8 Des ription oe MR eR Rue Pu agas Bette ages 19 8 The httpd log max file size Option liliis sss 19 8 Default is magicos aa ite tb tedesca Wh me bra wake t Acta told 19 8 Description std pots taka da bias eel bcd e ae en a 19 8 ithe hittpd reotdit Option vna ee OE e ARDET ASTE 19 8 Detaultita oS oto x dere e dud retenir deor zii de t dest duro pou D ns 19 8 riego PTT 9 9 The hittpd tirme
406. lative Absolute symbolic links begin with a slash and are treated as a path relative to the root of the file system Relative symbolic links begin with a character other than a slash and are treated as a path relative to the parent directory of the symbolic link Controlling Access to Symbolic Links You can control CIFS access to symbolic links in three ways Enabling or disabling symbolic links Redirecting absolute symbolic links Preventing or allowing the following of symbolic links that can refer to a directory higher in the same tree Enabling Symbolic Links When the symbolic links for CIFS feature is enabled which is the default setting if the object being accessed by a CIFS client is an absolute or relative symbolic link the filer follows the link under the following conditions The ultimate target is in the same share as the symbolic link e A symbolic link encountered in any path component other than the final one is always followed The final component of a symbolic link is followed only if the operation is to open an existing file Other operations such as deleting and renaming result in deleting or renaming the symbolic link itself rather than the target of the symbolic link 5 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CIFS client applications often perform operations such as writing to a temporary file renaming the original file to a backup
407. le Password Requirement Although telnet and the console share the same shell session telnet and the console each prompt you for a password Both the console and telnet connections use the same password rsh Support The filer supports rsh with trusted remote hosts those remote hosts listed in etc hosts equiv on the root volume In addition to entering rsh commands manually you can use a shell script or crontab file to enter some commands NOTE You can use rsh only to enter filer commands You cannot use rsh to remotely log in to the filer To log in to a filer remotely from a host usetelnet Commands Accepted From rsh Table 2 3 lists the filer commands that you can execute Filer Administration Basics 2 5 Table 2 3 Commands Accepted From rsh cifs httpstat rdate timezone date mt reboot uptime df netstat restore version disk nfsstat route vif download options snap vol dump qtree snmp ypwhich exportfs quota sysconfig halt raid sysstat Use Ctrl C to Terminate the Command That Is Running Ctrl C terminates whatever command is being run from the console or atelnet Session Because the console and telnet share a single session a command entered at the console or through telnet can be terminated inadvertently from either location To ensure that a command is not terminated by Ctrl C start the command from a trusted host through rsh Changing the System Password A system password is required to establish a consol
408. le quotas on the former mirror go to Step 4 Otherwise the procedure is complete 4 Enter the following command to enable quotas on the former mirror quota on volume name Differences Between the vol copy Com mand and SnapMirror Differences Table 16 2 describes the differences between the vol copy command and SnapMirror 16 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 16 2 Differences in vol copy Command and SnapMirror The vol copy command SnapMirror It is a standard Data ONTAP 5 3 fea ture that requires no license codes The result of copying a volume is an off line volume It does not copy incremental changes rom the source volume It requires that you enter the destina ion filer name in the etc hosts equiv ile It does not involve a configuration file hat controls how a volume is copied It requires a license code The result of replicating a volume is a mirror which is an on line read only volume It periodically copies incremental changes from the source volume It requires that you enter the destina tion filer name in the etc snapmirror allow file It requires that you specify an entry in the etc snapmirror conf file to control the volume to be replicated the data transfer rate and the mirror update schedule Data Replication Using SnapMirrot6 17 16 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and
409. ler The vol copy throttle command enables you to set the volume copy speed for a volume copy operation that is in progress To set the default volume copy speed to be used by future volume copy operations use the options command to set the vol copy throttle option vol snaprestore vo name s snapshot volname s snapshot reverts a vol ume to a specified snapshot If you do not specify a snapshot the filer prompts you for the snapshot You can use one command to revert multiple volumes The volume to be reverted must be on line and must not be a mirror After the reversion the volume is in the same state as it was when the snap shot was taken vol snapmirror on off enables and disables SnapMirror If SnapMirror is enabled you can replicate one volume to another according to the specifications in the etc snapmirror conf file A 110 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide vol vol snapmirror status displays whether SnapMirror is enabled If so the command displays whether the filer is copying data between the source volume and the mirror and the percentage of data that has been copied EXAMPLES vol create vol1 r 10 20 creates a volume named vol1 with 20 disks The RAID groups in this volume can contain up to 10 disks so this volume has two RAID groups The filer adds the current spare disks to the new volume starting with the smallest disk vol create vol1 200
410. ler administration 1 3 files copying with cpio 18 17 large 4 1 maximum size 4 1 same file criteria 9 2 setting maximum number of 11 10 working with large 4 1 filestats command 3 15 firewall virtual 8 5 G generic account creation by default 7 9 users 7 9 group quotas creating 11 8 guest access 7 8 guest account CIFS 7 8 H home directory shares CIFS creating 7 18 host name resolution 4 6 hot spare disk 3 10 availability sysconfig command 3 6 overview 3 4 removing 3 10 replacement activity etc messages 3 6 hot swapping a disk 3 4 hourly snapshots 9 5 9 7 HTTP displaying connection information 8 10 displaying statistics 8 11 options 19 8 root directory 8 2 Index 5 HTTP continued starting service 8 1 virtual hosting enabling 8 5 httpd admin enable option 19 8 httpd enable option 19 8 httpd log max file size option 19 8 httpd rootdir option 19 8 httpd timeout option 19 9 httpd timewait enable option 19 9 I ICMP redirect messages 4 12 identifying disks SCSI ID 3 2 IERRS input errors displayed by netstat 18 13 ifconfig 4 8 ifconfig command 4 15 18 13 ifstat command 4 20 17 4 illegal volume name message 18 5 inconsistent file system 18 8 inodes effects of maximum number of files on 11 10 installing new disks 3 10 interfaces errors on 18 13 how packets are sent and received 4 14 using ifconfig to configure
411. ler enables you to redirect absolute symbolic links on the filer For example you might want to redirect symbolic links pointing at the u users charlie directory to the home charlie directory on the filer You do so by specifying symbolic link redirection mappings in a text file named etc symlink translations The format of the etc symlink translations file is Map link target where both link and target are absolute symbolic link path names For example the entry Map u users charlie home charlie makes symbolic links pointing at the u users charlie directory point to the home charlie directory File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 3 54 How to Prevent Symbolic Link Cycling You can create directory structures that are cyclic by creating a symbolic link that refers to a directory higher in the same tree through use of a symbolic link having a dot or dot dot component Therefore a simple recursive descent of the tree goes deeper and deeper until the maximum path length is reached At that point an error is returned For example if you used Windows Explorer to search for files in such a cyclic directory the same files show up repeatedly The cifs symlinks cycleguard option controls whether symbolic links that might include a directory higher in the same tree are followed To eliminate the possibility of cyclic directory structures make sure that the cifs symlinks cycleguard option is On which is the de
412. leted it How SnapRestore Affects Recent SnapShots After you revert a volume to a particular snapshot you lose the snapshots that are more recent than the snapshot used for the volume reversion For example after you revert the volume to the hourly 1 snapshot you no longer have access to more recent snapshots such as the hourly 0 snapshot This is because at the creation time of the hourly 1 snapshot the hourly 0 snapshot did not exist Typical Applications of SnapRestore If a client application corrupts data files in a volume you can revert the volume to a snapshot taken before the data corruption The following examples illustrate some sit uations in which you can apply SnapRestore to recover from corrupted data 3 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Example A messaging application or a database application stores user data in one or two files that can grow to several hundred GB in a volume If for some reason this application corrupts the files you can revert the volume to a snapshot taken before the data corruption Example You can revert a volume used as a test environment to its original state after each test Considerations Before Using SnapRestore This section describes two considerations you must make before deciding whether you should use SnapRestore to revert a volume Time required for data recovery f the amount of corrupted data is small it is easier to
413. licitly spec ify the network mask in the ifconfig command after the host name for example ifconfig el hostname 1 netmask 20942000030 route add default LocalRouter 1 The preceding command specifies the default router You can add route commands to etc rc on the root volume to set static routes for the filer The network address for LocalRouter must be in etc hosts on the root volume routed on Starts the routing daemon See the section Routing in Chapter 4 for more information about routing options These options set the DNS domain dns domainname dell com options dns enable on Filer Administration Basics 2 17 Table 2 9 Default etc rc Command Contents continued Command Explanation options These options set the NIS domain name and enable nis domainname NIS dell com options nis enable on timezone US Sets the time zone The argument to the timezone Pacific command specifies which file in the etc zoneinfo directory on the root volume describes the time zone you want savecore Saves the core file from a system panic if any in the etc crash directory on the root volume Core files are created only during the first boot after a system panic exportfs a Exports all directories specified in the etc exports file on the root volume This command is included only if the filer runs NFS nfs on Turns on NFS file service This command is included even if NFS is not licensed for
414. lient that uses names X in 8 3 format can lose the file s original long format name This can occur as a con sequence of the way an application saves a file that it has edited Some applications rename the original file then save the edited file as if it were newly created The filer thus receives instructions to delete the original file and create a new one When the client supports only 8 3 names this new name no longer has an equivalent in long format Legal Characters Used in File Names The characters that you can use in file names depend on the client operating systems Because restrictions on legal characters vary from one operating system to another refer to the documentation for your client s operating system for more information about prohibited characters When you name a file to be shared by users on different operating systems it helps to use only characters that are common to both For example if you use UNIX to cre ate a file and use a colon as its file name an MS DOS user sees the name displayed as 0 because the colon is an illegal character in an MS DOS file name 56 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Case Sensitivity in File Names Uppercase and lowercase characters are significant to NFS clients but not to CIFS cli ents For example if a file named specifications already exists an NFS user can still save another file under the name Specifications but a CIFS
415. list access list ro list rw list One keyword is required The keywords root access ro and rw are all optional however you must include at least one keyword in an export entry What the list variable represents The ist variable represents a list that includes one or more host names netgroup names subnets You can combine elements in an entry You can combine host names netgroup names and subnets in an entry as shown in the following example root adminhost administrators rw blender pcusers 123 45 67 0 24 Example 1 exporting default filer volume to administration host The following line exports the root directory of the default filer volume to the adminis tration host with root privileges The administration host can mount the directory change permissions and ownerships and create and delete directories and files vol vol0 root adminhost Example 2 exporting home directory to administration host and clients The following line exports the home directory from the default filer volume to the administration host and two clients The administration host has root privileges and can mount the directory change permissions and ownerships and create and delete directories and files The clients can mount the directory and create and delete directories vol vol0 home root adminhost rw blender mixer 6 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide
416. lockS Oi s pi rl rd be teg es 7 34 Turning OplockKs Obi vo west a a a ib 7 34 Turning Oplocks On or Off at Individual ClientS o o o 7 34 For Additional Information ooooooooooooo ooo 7 34 xxvi Displaying GIES StatistlGs x eL tor ex e e OR ee e p Reds 7 34 How and Why to Display CIFS StatiStiCS oo oooooooooooooo o 7 34 Statistics Displays With the cifs stat Command 7 34 Example Of cifs stat Output 7 35 Displaying CIFS Session Information liliis 7 35 CIFS Session Information You Can Display llli isses 7 35 Displaying Information With the cifs sessions Command 7 35 Displaying Information About All Connected Users 7 35 Displaying Information About One User 000005 7 36 Displaying Connected User Security Information 7 36 Stopping and Restarting CIFS Sessions liliis 7 37 Ways to Stop CIFS Sessions opii een een 7 37 Disconnecting Users With Server Manager oooooooooooooo iss 7 37 Using the cifs terminate Command nananana aaa 7 38 The cifs terminate Command Not Persistent o oooo ooo o ooo o 7 38 Time Delay uiu ode do dotato gos ob su tot o eek aA alae to eee kd 7 38 Default Time Delay i iux a UNE pe 7 38 Ghanging the Time Delay sus ei bI iS 7 39 Canceling the cifs terminate Command naaa a nananana raaa 7 39 Examples of the cifs terminate Command
417. lowing steps to reset the filer password 1 Reboot from diskette as described in Booting From System Boot Diskette 2 When the boot menu appears enter 3 to choose Change Password Troubleshooting 18 11 3 When the filer prompts you for a new password enter it at the prompt Results The system prints the following message Password Changed Hit Return to reboot 4 Remove the diskette from the filer s diskette drive and reboot the filer by pressing the Enter key How to Initialize All Disks and Create a New File System Initializing All Disks Erases All Data You might need to initialize all disks and create a single new file system in the follow ing circumstances You decide to redeploy an existing filer and need to completely reconfigure it e Dell technical support advises you that the only way to recover from an error is to initialize all disks CAUTION Initializing all disks causes all existing data to be lost Procedure for Initializing All Disks Complete the following steps to initialize all disks 1 If the console is Then e Displaying the filer prompt for example iler Place the system boot diskette into the diskette drive of the filer and enter reboot e Not displaying the filer prompt Reboot from diskette as described in Booting From System Diskette 2 When the boot menu appears enter 4 to choose Initialize all disks Results The filer initializes all the disks and creates
418. lume Names You might get an error message that contains one of the following phrases e invalid volume name unrecognized volume name illegal volume name If you get one of these messages take one of the following actions Type correctly the name of an existing volume Type a valid volume name Disk Problems Types of Disk Problems Described The next two sections describe how the filer reacts to a Disk failure without a hot spare disk e Disk failure with a hot spare disk Troubleshooting 18 5 Disk Failure Without a Hot Spare Disk About This Section This section describes how the filer reacts to a disk failure when a hot spare disk is available Filer Runs in Degraded Mode If a disk fails the filer continues to run without losing any data but has a somewhat degraded performance CAUTION Replace the disk as soon as possible because a second disk fail ure could cause the filer to lose the entire file system Filer Logs Warning Messages in etc messages The filer logs a warning message in the etc messages file on the root volume every hour after a disk fails Filer Shuts Down Automatically After 24 Hours To ensure that you notice the failure the filer automatically shuts itself off in 24 hours by default or in a period you set with the raid timeout option to the options command You can restart the filer without fixing the disk but it continues to shut itself off periodically until you repair
419. lume and n is the number of disks to use You must have at least n spare disks available After Creating a New Volume After you create a new volume on a CIFS filer you must create shares that refer to the new volume to enable clients to access it After you create a new volume on an NFS filer you must 1 Update the system etc exports file 2 Runexportfs 3 Add the appropriate mount point information to the etc fstab or etc vfstab file on clients that mount volumes from the filer Adding Disks to a Volume To add more disks to an existing volume enter vol add vol n where vol is the name of the volume and n is the number of disks to be added Monitoring Volume Status To determine volume status such as size options disk assignments and so on enter vol status volume To view the RAID group and individual disk information for a particular volume enter vol status r volume To view the RAID group and individual disk information for all volumes enter vol status r Setting Volume Options To set various volume options enter vol options volume option value Converting a Mirror Into a Regular Volume After you use the SnapMirror M feature to mirror data to a mirror you can convert the mirror into a regular volume so that clients can write data to the volume Enter the fol lowing command syntax to convert a mirror to a regular volume vol options volume snapmirrored off 3 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and
420. lume or a part of a volume that contains gtrees you must first create the qtrees into which data is to be restored Steps Follow these steps to fully restore a volume containing atrees 1 Obtain the record of the qtree information as of the last volume backup 2 Create all qtrees according to the record 3 Setthe security style of each qtree to the value that is the same as when the vol ume was backed up 4 f you want to recover the entire volume with one restore command go to Step 5 Using one restore command requires less time for recovering the entire volume than using multiple restore commands If you want to use multiple restore command to recover all qtrees in the vol ume go to Step 6 Using multiple restore commands enables you to quickly recover those qtrees that are needed the most 13 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Enter the restore command to recover the entire volume Example restore rfD rst0a vol vol0 Enter the restore command to restore each qtree in the volume Examples restore xfD rst0a vol vol0 NTusers NTusers restore xfD rst0a vol vol0 UNIXusers UNIXusers Examples of the restore Command Example of Restoring a Subtree Perform the following steps to restore a subtree named vol volO home from a local tape drive The subtree was backed up as a subtree not as a directory within a subtree 1 Enter the sysconfig t command on the filer t
421. lumes However gtrees are much more flexible than volumes gtree Administration 10 1 Using qtrees What You Can Do With qtrees You can use qtrees in the following two ways Group files that have the same security style and oplocks setting such as files related to a particular activity for example a project without having to create a separate volume for them Perform quick and easy backups Using a qtree for a Project One way to group files is to set up a qtree for a project such as one maintaining a database Setting up a atree for a project enables you to do the following actions e Set the security style of the project without affecting the security style of other projects For example you use NTFS style security if the members of the project use Win dows files and applications Another project in another qtree can use UNIX files and applications while yet another project can use both Windows and UNIX files Set oplocks if the project uses Windows as appropriate to the project without affecting other projects For example if one project uses a database that requires no oplocks you can turn oplocks Off on that project s qtree If another project uses oplocks it can be in another qtree that has oplocks set to On e Limitthe disk space and number of files available to a project so that it does not use up resources that other projects and users need As the needs of the projects and available resources change yo
422. ly e You must have enough tape space for the backup Refer to Determining the Number of Tapes for the Backup to determine the number of tapes required for the backup The tape drive is available That is it is not currently used for data backup or recovery Prerequisites for Backing Up to a Nonqualified Tape Drive The tape drive must be included in the etc cloned tapes file Prerequisites for Backing Up to a Remote Tape Drive These are the prerequisites for backing up data to a tape drive attached to a remote host e You must know the maximum blocking factor supported by the remote host to which data is backed up Some computers allow a blocking factor greater than the default used by the dump command 63 Make sure that the blocking factor you specify in the dump command does not exceed the maximum blocking fac tor supported by the remote host e f you use a blocking factor greater than 63 you must know the maximum block ing factor supported by the system that you plan to use for restoring the data If the maximum blocking factor is 63 on the system for restoring data that system cannot restore data from a tape file created with a blocking factor greater than 63 e You must know the maximum tape file size supported by the remote host to which data is backed up For example some UNIX systems do not support tape files larger than 2 GB In the dump command you need to specify the tape file size appropriate to your remote
423. m etc syslog conf The following example causes all kernel messages of levels emerg alert crit and err to be sent to the etc messages file rr kern etc messages The etc messages File Restart Schedule Every Sunday at midnight the etc messages file is copied to etc messages 0 the etc messages 0 file is copied to etc messages 1 and so on The system saves mes sages for up to six weeks Checking the etc messages File Daily Check the etc messages file once a day for important messages You can automate checking this file by creating a script on the administration host that periodically searches etc messages and then alerts you Sample etc syslog conf File The following example shows a customized etc syslog conf file Log anything of level info or higher to etc messages info etc messages Log all kernel messages and anything of level err or higher to the console err kern dev console E Log all kernel messages and anything of level err or higher to a remote loghost system called adminhost err kern adminhost Log messages from the authentication system of level notice or higher to the etc secure message file This file has restricted access auth notice etc secure messag Filer Administration Basics 2 25 For More Information For more information about the syslog conf file see the syslog conf b man page Configuring Filer Options Commands to Use to Set
424. m Configuration Errors if NFS Is the Only Licensed Protocol If you are running NFS only complete the following steps to recover from configura tion errors in the etc rc file 1 Display the boot menu from diskette as described in Booting From System Boot Diskette 2 Enter 2 to choose Boot without etc rc NOTE Booting the filer without the etc rc file on the root volume automatically disables CIFS service You cannot do this procedure using CIFS 3 Atthe filer prompt enter the following two commands replacing the variables shown in italics with values appropriate for your filer ifconfig if mediatype type IP address netmask netmask exportfs i o access adminhost IP addr root adminhost IP addr nfs on 4 Mount the root file system from the administration host 5 Edit the configuration files 6 Remove the system boot diskette from the disk drive and reboot the filer to test the new configuration files NOTE Although you can correct network problems using various keyboard commands correct the etc rc file on the root volume so that it initializes the system correctly if there is a power outage or system software failure How to Reset the Filer Password Reset the Password if You Forget It If you forget your filer password reset the password by using the system boot dis kette To avoid security problems take care to limit access to the system boot diskette Procedure for Resetting the Password Complete the fol
425. m all facilities The level Parameter The level parameter describes the severity of the message Table 2 15 describes the level parameter keywords arranged in order from highest to lowest severity Table 2 15 level Parameter Keywords Keyword Description emerg panic condition that causes a disruption of normal service alert condition that you should correct immediately such as a failed disk crit critical conditions such as disk errors err errors such as those caused by a bad configuration file warning conditions that might become errors if not corrected notice conditions that are not errors but might require special handling info information such as the hourly uptime message debug used for diagnostic purposes suppressed by default specifies all levels The action Parameter The action parameter specifies where messages should be sent Messages for the specified level or higher are sent to the message destination Table 2 16 describes the possible actions and gives examples of each action Table 2 16 action Parameters Action Example Send messages to a file specified by etc messages a path Send messages to a host name pre Qadminhost ceded by an Q sign 2 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 2 16 action Parameters continued Action Example Send messages to the console dev console or Example Line Fro
426. mand dumps the CIFS attributes and 8 3 name data for each file that is backed up This data will not be backed up by a dump run on an NFS client machine This data will not be restored by a restore run on an NFS client machine This data will only be restored if a local restore is done of a backup created by the Data ONTAP 5 3 dump command A 34 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME exportfs exportfs export and unexport files or directories SYNOPSIS exportfs aiuv o options pathname DESCRIPTION If no pathname is specified exportfs lists all currently exported directories and files If pathname is specified exportfs makes the specified file or directory avail able or unavailable for mounting by NFS clients OPTIONS Takes the list of path names to be exported or unexported from the etc exports file If you specify pathname in the command when using the a option the command ignores pathname Ignores the options in the etc exports file Without the 4 option the exportfs command uses the options associated with the pathname speci fied in etc exports Unexports the specified path name If you also include the a option the command unexports the path names in the etc exports file and ignores pathname Prints each path name as it is exported or unexported option Specifies a list of comma separated options that describe how a file or direc tory
427. many entries have been removed The v option increases the level of detail of information The kind of information var ies with each command You can have up to three instances of the v option vvv per command Each repetition of the option increases the level of detail three instances provide statistics that are only of interest to Dell technical support Setting How Long Each WAFL Credential Cache Entry Is Valid Description This procedure enables you to change how long each WAFL credential cache entry is valid If you need to see security updates as they occur you might want to use a smaller value than the default However access verifications are more frequent than with a greater value This means that with a smaller value users might experience slower performance File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Usersb 19 Step To change how long each WAFL credential cache entry is valid enter the following command options wafl wcc minutes valid n nis the number of minutes you want each entry to be valid It can range from 1 through 20160 The default value is 20 Adding An Entry to the WAFL Credential Cache Description This procedure adds an entry to the WAFL credential cache You can use this proce dure in a script to load the WAFL credential cache at boot time with entries rather than wait for those entries to be created in the course of accessing a file You can per form this procedure at any time Prerequisites
428. mat dump date There may be only one entry per subtree at each level The dump date is defined as the creation date of the snapshot being dumped The file A 30 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide b factor EXAMPLES dump etc dumpdates may be edited to change any of the fields if neces sary See dumpdates for details Set the tape blocking factor in k bytes The default is 63 KB If the den sity is set to greater than 6250 BPI then the default blocking factor is 32 KB NOTE Some systems support blocking factors greater than 63 KB by breaking requests into 63 KB chunks or smaller using variable sized records other systems do not support blocking factors greater than 63 KB at all When using large blocking factors always check the system s where the potential restore might occur to ensure that block ing factor specified in dump is supported Local tape devices restrict the blocking factor to less than or equal to 63 KB Specifies that this is a multi subtree dump The directory that is the common root of all the subtrees to be dumped must be specified as the last argument The subtrees are specified by path names relative to this common root The list of subtrees is provided from standard in one item on each line with a blank line to terminate the list If you use this option you must also use option n Specifies the dumpname for a multi subtree dump Mandatory for multi s
429. mation on the format of the configuration file see syslog conf If etc syslog conf does not exist the syslogd daemon will output all log mes sages of priority info or higher to the console and to the file etc messages To prevent etc messages from getting too large the syslogd daemon will rotate the contents of etc messages through the files etc messages 0 through etc messages 5 This rotation is done once a week So the log messages of the current week will be saved in the file etc messages and the message logs of the six weeks prior to that are saved in the files etc messages 0 through etc messages 5 To prevent large numbers of repeated messages being logged the syslogd dae mon will follow the first instance of a repeated message with the number of times the message was repeated If a message is repeated over a long time period the syslogd daemon will wait for increasingly longer intervals before log ging the number of repeats The repeat notification interval starts at 30 seconds and moves quickly to 20 minutes FILES etc syslog conf The configuration file etc syslog conf sample A sample configuration file etc messages Message log file for current week etc messages 0 5 Message log for prior weeks SEE ALSO messages syslog conf Command ReferenceA 173 A 174 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Glossary ACL Access control list A list that contains the
430. me of the destination filer volume is the name of the destination volume the mirror number is the number for the snapshot starting at 1 SnapMirror automatically deletes old snapshots that are no longer necessary for data replication Example The following example describes the snapshots that are created on the source vol ume and copied to the mirror In this example data is replicated from vol voltof filerA to vol vol2 of filerB To create a baseline version of a mirror filerA creates a snapshot file named vol vol 1 filerB vol2 1 on filerA All snapshots in vol vol1 of filerA including vol vol 1 filerB vol2 1 are transferred to vol vol2 of filerB For example the snap list command on filerB generates the following display after vol vol1 filerB vol2 1 is transferred from filerA to filerB Volume vol2 working used total date name 0 0 0 0 ov 17 10 50 filerB_vol2 1 1 0 0 0 ov 17 10 00 hourly 0 1 0 0 0 ov 17 00 00 nightly 0 1 0 0 0 ov 15 16 00 hourly 1 1 0 1 0 ov 15 15 00 hourly 2 2 0 1 0 ov 15 14 00 hourly 3 2 0 1 0 ov 15 13 00 hourly 4 2 0 1 0 ov 15 12 00 hourly 5 16 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide When it is time to update the mirror another snapshot is created on filerA The snap list command on filerA generates the following display after vol volT filerB
431. me off line e The source volume must be on line Refer to Reactivating an Off line Volume in Chapter 3 for information about how to put a volume on line The source volume must not be a mirror The capacity of the mirror must be greater than or equal to the capacity of the source volume The configuration of the volumes however can be different For example the RAID group size can be different for the two volumes Refer to Adding Disks to a Volume in Chapter 3 for information about how to add disks to a volume e The mirror must not be the root volume Restrictions Each filer supports up to four simultaneous volume copy operations For information about volume copy operations refer to Number of Volume Copy Operations Snap Mirror Generates Cautions e SnapMirror creates snapshots in the source volume which are copied to the mir ror Do not delete these snapshots because incremental changes to the mirror depend on the snapshots If the filer cannot find the required snapshot it cannot perform incremental changes to the mirror Refer to Snapshots Created During Data Replication for an example about how snapshots are created on both the source volume and the mirror e The mirror must have snapmirrored status Do not disable the snapmirrored sta tus using the volume options command Otherwise the mirror becomes a regular writable volume Disable the snapmirrored status only when you no longer need to mirror in
432. mentation CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS AS IS CONDITION CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE Software derived from copyrighted material of The Regents of the University of California Carnegie Mellon University and Network Appliance are subject to the following license and disclaimer Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived rom this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
433. ministrative com mands from the command line with the exception of some Windows NT administrative commands You can access the filer s command line from e A serial terminal connected to the Console port of the filer e Atelnet session to the filer You can also access some commands through a remote shell program such as the UNIX rsh utility Command Execution Through Windows NT You use Windows NT commands to perform filer administrative tasks related to Windows NT You can execute Windows NT commands that affect the filer using native Windows NT administration tools such as Server Manager and User Manager Configuration File Editing You edit configuration files to supply information that Data ONTAP 5 3 needs to per form certain tasks You can access configuration files by mounting the root directory of the filer on a UNIX client or by mapping the administrative share C to a drive on a Windows cli ent then editing the file from the client Command Execution Through FilerView You use FilerView to perform most administrative tasks from a Web based interface You can use FilerView even if you did not purchase a license for the HTTP protocol About Filer Main Unit Components Two Kinds of Components The filer main unit has two kinds of components internal components that enable it to function and slots and ports that connect it to networks and PowerVault 700N storage systems Internal Filer Components The internal c
434. mote shell functionality X works properly Enabling Guest and Generic Access Two Ways to Give Access to Unauthenticated or Occasional Users You can enable unauthenticated or occasional users to have access to the filer through CIFS in one of two ways e For users who are not in a trusted domain use a guest account e For users who are authenticated but do not have an entry in the etc passwd file on the filer use a generic user account Guest Accounts If you are using Windows NT domain authentication guests are users who are not in trusted domains If you use a UNIX password database for authentication guests are users who do not have an entry in the database 7 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Setting Up a Guest Account To set up a guest account use the following options command options cifs guest account account name where account name is the name of the guest account usually guest or nobody which is a preconfigured account in the etc passwd file If you are using UNIX style authentication set the guest account to the name of an account in the UNIX password database typically guest which is mapped to the UNIX account nobody with the same access rights as the user everyone Disabling Guest Access To disable guest access use the following option command options cifs guest account ww with a as account_name Generic User Accounts If you are usin
435. mp dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol4 urstla vol vol2 vol vol6 Saturday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol5 urstla vol vol3 vol vol7 12 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 13 Data Recovery Introduction to Data Recovery Why You Want to Restore Data From Tape This section describes why you want to restore data to the filer from tape Files Were Deleted From Disk but Backed Up to Tape For example if you inadvertently delete a file and want to restore the file you can recover the file from tape Files Are Corrupted If some files are corrupted you can restore the subtree containing the files No Disk Slots Are Available for Expansion If the filer runs out of storage space you can do the following tasks e Back up the entire filer Replace the current disks with disks of greater capacity e Set up volumes on new disks Restore the filer from tapes The Entire Filer Is Damaged and Unusable If the entire filer is damaged and unusable call Dell technical support to determine whether you can repair the filer If you can repair the filer but some files are deleted during the repair process you need only restore the missing files Otherwise you need to reinitialize the disks and restore all files from tape CAUTION Before initializing disks on your filer call
436. mple of etc netgroups The following lines show an example of a etc netgroups file trusted hosts adminhost untrusted hosts red blue green all hosts trusted hosts untrusted hosts Example of etc exports Using Netgroups The following lines show an example of an etc exports file that uses netgroup group names vol vol0 access trusted hosts root adminhost vol vol0 hom access all hosts root adminhost Copy etc netgroup When Filer Doesn t Use NIS If your filer is not configured as an NIS client the network groups on the filer are not linked with NIS Must copy NIS netgroup file You must copy an existing NIS network group over to vol vol0 etc netgroup on the filer before the exportfs command can use it Automating copying with a Makefile You can modify the Makefile of the NIS master to copy the NIS master s etc netgroup file to the filer when it is changed Example Makefile The following lines of code in the NIS Makefile section for netgroup time copy the etc netgroup file to filers named filer1 filer2 and filer3 substitute the name of your filers in the for list in place of filer filer2 and filer3 and add any other filer names to which you want the file copied Gmntdir tmp nac etc mnt N if d mntdir then rm f mntdir mkdir Smntdir f1i for filer in filerl filer2 filer3 do mount Sfiler vol vol0 etc mntdir N mv mntdir netgroup mntdir netgroup bak N
437. mple of Backing Up to Tape Stacker Shared by Multiple Filers Day of week dump commands on each filer Sunday filer1 dump Ouf dump luf dump 2uf Monday filer1 dump Ouf dump luf dump 2uf Tuesday filer1 dump Ouf dump luf dump 2uf Wednesday filer2 dump Ouf dump luf dump 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a vol voll filerl nrstla vol vol6 filerl urstla vol vol4 urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol2 filerl nrstla vol vol7 filerl urstla vol vol5 urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol3 nrstla vol voll filerl urstla vol vol6 filerl urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol4 nrstla vol vol2 filerl urstla vol vol7 12 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 12 2 Sample of Backing Up to Tape Stacker Shared by Multiple Filers continued Day of week dump commands on each filer Thursday iler2 dump dump Friday iler3 Saturday iler3 iler iler Ouf luf 2uf Ouf luf 2uf Ouf luf 2uf filerl nrstla urstla filerl filerl urstla filerl filerl urstla urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol5 vol vol3 vol voll urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol6 nrstla vol vol4 vol vol2 urst0a urst0a urst0a vol vol7 nrstla vol vol5 vol vol3 Example of Backing Up the Entire Filer This section provides a sample backup schedule for backing up a filer with seven vol
438. mpty or be the local domain otherwise the netgroup entry is ignored This allows a single etc netgroup file to be used for filers in multiple domains EXAMPLE This is a typical netgroup file trusted hosts adminhost group1 group2 group3 untrusted hosts group4 group5 group6 all_hosts trusted_hosts untrusted_hosts With this netgroup file it might make sense to modify etc exports to export on the filer only to trusted hosts but to export home to a hosts FILES etc netgroup etc exports directories and files exported to NFS clients etc hosts host name data base SEE ALSO exportfs hosts exports nis Command ReferenceA 137 networks NAME networks network name data base SYNOPSIS etc networks DESCRIPTION The networks file contains information regarding the known networks which comprise the Internet For each network a single line should be present with the following information officia network name network number aliases Items are separated by any number of blanks and or tab characters A indi cates the beginning of a comment characters up to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines which search the file This file is normally created from the official network data base maintained at the Network Information Control Center NIC though local changes may be required to bring it up to date regard ing unofficial aliases and or unknown networks Network number may
439. n adding a hot spare and disk failure You can obtain the information displayed by sysconfig r from SNMP using the Dell custom MIB For information about SNMP see Using SNMP in Chapter 4 Displaying Tape Drive Information Using sysconfig t The sysconfig t command displays device and configuration information for each tape drive on the system Use this command to determine the capacity of the tape drive and the device name before you use the dump and restore commands Displaying Overall Filer Information Using sysconfig v The sysconfig v command displays the system s RAM size NVRAM size and information about devices in all expansion slots This information varies according to the devices on the filer You can specify a slot number to display information about a particular slot Slot numbers start at O where slot 0 is the system board Displaying Overall Filer Information Using sysconfig If you enter sysconfig without any options information similar to what you get with sysconfig v is displayed but the information is abbreviated When you report a problem to Dell provide the information displayed by sysconfig v This information is useful for diagnosing system problems Displaying Volume Information Use the Vol status Command The vol status command displays information about a volumes s configuration The types of information displayed depend on the command options When you spec ify a volume the information for that v
440. n from the time specified Canceling the cifs terminate Command If you want to cancel the cifs terminate command press Ctrl C before the end of the countdown NOTE The halt command automatically invokes the cifs terminate command CAUTION The reboot command also stops CIFS service however it does not provide a time delay during which users can save their open files before the disconnect Changes that have not been saved to disk are lost if the CIFS client has an open file when it is disconnected from the filer Examples of the cifs terminate Command Here are some examples of the cifs terminate command Terminating CIFS Service for All Users on the Filer To terminate CIFS service for all users on the filer after 10 minutes enter the follow ing command cifs terminate t 10 The cifs terminate command displays an alert message on CIFS clients that warns them of the pending shutdown of CIFS service NOTE Windows 9x and Windows for Workgroup clients must have the WinPopup program configured before they can display the alert message Console Display Here is the display for cifs terminate when you do not specify a time cifs terminate There are currently 35 CIFS users that have 37 open files Disconnecting while files are open may cause data loss How many minutes should I wait 5 minutes left 4 minutes left 3 minutes left 2 minutes left 1 CIFS shutting down CIFS Administration 7 39 Terminating a CIFS Se
441. n having the correct access time for files you can disable the update of access time at ime on an inode when a file is read To prevent updates turn the no atime update option On Consider turning this option On if your filer has extremely high read traffic for example on a news server used by an Internet provider because it prevents inode updates from contending with reads from other files CAUTION If you are not sure whether your filer should maintain an accu rate access time on inodes leave this option at its default Off so that the access time is updated Improving Performance on Directory Lookups Turning the nfs big endianize fileid option On improves performance on directory lookups for clients that use the file ID in the file handle as a hash key in cer tain ways Enable this option if your NFS clients are mainly running HP UX or IRIX NOTE If you turn thebig endianize fileid option On all NFS clients that have mounted directories from the filer must unmount and remount them otherwise they get stale file handle errors on all references to files already opened on the filer until they unmount and remount all directories Improving Read Ahead Performance If the file access patterns of your clients are random nonsequential turning minimal read ahead On might improve performance By default the filer uses aggressive read ahead which enhances sequential access which is more commonly used by UNIX clients and a
442. n the active file system moved into snapshots along with the 500 MB that were in snapshots before making a total of 3 5 GB of snapshot data This is 2 5 GB more than the space reserved for snapshots Because the active file System cannot use that space the space shows up as used by the active file system even though no files are there Recovering Disk Space for File System Use Whenever snapshots consume more than 10096 of the snapshot reserve the system is in danger of becoming full In this case you can create files only after you remove enough snapshots Example For example if 500 MB of data were added to the active file system in the preceding example a d command generates the following information Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity vol vol0 3000000 3000000 0 100 vol vol0 snapshot 1000000 3500000 0 350 As soon as the filer creates a new snapshot every block in the system is referenced by some snapshot Therefore no matter how many files you remove from the active file system there is still not room to add any more The only way to recover from this situation is to remove enough snapshots to free more disk space Refer to Display ing Snapshot Statistics in Chapter 9 for information about how to use the snap list command to determine which snapshot to delete 9 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Effects of Snapshots on Quotas Quotas do not count disk spa
443. n the filer can have up to 20 dif ferent snapshots at one time Snapshots 9 1 Snapshots Maintain Original File Permissions Snapshot files carry the same permissions and inode numbers as the original files keeping the integrity of the security system intact Inodes are data structures that hold information about files on the filer There is an inode for each file and a file is uniquely identified by the file system on which it resides and its inode number on that system the corresponding file in the active file system As a result some programs on UNIX clients consider the two files to be the same For example if you use the GNUdiff program to compare the two files it does not find any differences between them To make sure that the two files have different inode numbers before the comparison copy one of the files to another name A NOTE The inode number for a file in a snapshot is the same as the inode number for How Snapshots Work When the filer creates a snapshot it doesn t copy disk blocks instead it identifies all blocks in the file system as belonging to the snapshot as well as to the active file System Example Consider a particular file named foo in a newly created snapshot Because the snap shot was just created the snapshot version of foo has the same contents as the version in the active file system The same blocks on disk store both versions so the snapshot version of foo consumes no disk space Later if f
444. nagement 3 3 e fthe filer finds a media error on a data disk it prints the following message Rewriting bad block from parity on disk n block n e If the filer finds more than one bad block it prints the following message Multiple bad blocks found on volume volume name RAID group n Stripe 4n The following sample messages appear after disk scrubbing is complete Scrub found n parity inconsistencies Scrub found n media errors Disk scrubbing finished Understanding Hot Spare Disks In addition to data disks and parity disks the filer supports zero or more hot spare disks A hot spare disk is not part of any RAID group and does not contain file system data After a disk failure the filer automatically rebuilds data or parity onto a hot spare disk which then replaces the failed disk in the RAID group This procedure avoids a system shutdown and returns the system to full performance A hot spare disk cannot replace a failed disk that is larger than itself If you use only one hot spare disk in a filer the hot spare disk must be as large as the largest file sys tem disk If you have multiple hot spare disks installed the system uses the smallest hot spare disk needed to replace the failed disk Understanding Hot Swap The filer enables you to hot swap disk drives Hot swapping a disk drive means install ing or removing it from the PowerVault 700N storage system while the filer is running with minimal interruption to a
445. names for all of the configured network interfaces Ethernet interfaces are given names host name 0 hostname 1 and so on FILES etc directory of filer configuration and administration files etc rc system initialization command script etc exports directories exported by the server etc hosts host name data base etc hosts equiv list of hosts and users with rsh permission etc resolv conf list of DNS name servers etc dgateways list of preferred default gateways for routed etc nsswitch conf list of preferred name services A 88 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide setup SEE ALSO ifconfig reboot dgateways exports hosts hosts equiv resolv conf rc autosupport Command Reference A 89 shelfchk NAME shelfchk verify the communication of environmental information between disk shelves and the filer SYNOPSIS shelfchk DESCRIPTION The shelfchk command verifies that the disk shelves and the filer can exchange environmental information If the environmental information is being exchanged you can hotswap disks in the disk shelves The shelfchk command is interactive It requires that you type in your responses after observing the LEDs on the disks Therefore enter this command from a console that is near the disk shelves The shelfchk command steps through all the disk host adapters that the filer dis covered when it booted For each host adapter the shelfchk comma
446. nasa cese data Sud Dad 2 3 Editinig Eiles Erom a IFS CIIent s x i te eet C RR GR edens 2 4 Obtaining Access to the Filer Shell llle 2 5 Ways to Access the Command Line cios iaa 2 5 Sharing a Single telnet and Console Session 00 0000 cee eee eee 2 5 telnet Session Restriction iis sse kar Ree de Le Rd ae 2 5 EGl sing a telnet Sessions tb Mete me RG es 2 5 telnet and Console Password Requirement 00000000005 2 5 PSA SUDDOR ta ee bos oie A e RR RU 2 5 Commands Accepted Fromrsh 000 eee 2 5 Use Ctrl C to Terminate the Command That Is Running 2 6 Changing the System Password asana assau aaan eee 2 6 Where to Go to Learn More About Security 0000000000 ee 2 6 About Multiple Administrative Users 0 0 0 0 0 0 aaan aaau 2 6 What Is an Administrative User2 ee 2 6 Multiple Administrative Users Increase Filer Security 2 7 Command to Use to Create Administrative USerS o o 2 7 Ways to Access the Filer Using an Administrative Login Name 2 7 Creating Administrative Users cm det iiun e nia traes da rai a 2 7 DeSGrIptODt io se ere E D ti ace TI DON gr o RE feed 2 7 PEreredilsit s a us tbe s tede eti bee dee etas s ed 2 7 HeStEHCUOLDS 20 2 24S oues SEEN A A AA a IA 2 7 Steps to Create a New Administrative User Using a Console or Telnet 2 8 Step to Create a New Administrative User Usingrsh
447. nd tries to turn on the disk LEDs on the attached disk shelves The command waits for con firmation that you have observed the LEDs If you see that all the LEDs are on respond yes when prompted If one or more LEDs are off you respond no to the prompt In this case a problem exists that might prevent hot swapping on the affected shelves The shelfchk command terminates as soon as you respond no to the prompt It does not continue to test the other disk shelves A possi ble cause of disk shelf problems is that the cables for the shelves are not connected properly Enter the shelfchk command immediately after you install one or more disk shelves This way if there are any cabling problems you can fix them as soon as possible Also this command enables you to quickly correlate the disk shelves with their corresponding host adapter For example if you intend to have all disk shelves connected to a particular host adapter to be installed in one rack the shelfchk command enables you to see at a glance whether any disk shelves were installed inadvertently in a different rack EXAMPLE In the following example the shelfchk command tests the disk shelves of a filer with three host adapters 8a 8b and 7a and finds no problems filer shelfchk Only shelves attached to ha 7a should have all LEDs ON Are these LEDs all ON now y Only shelves attached to ha 8a should have all LEDs ON Are these LEDs all ON now y Only shelves attach
448. ndicate the root volume e vol volO verd In the vol vol0 convention e fol Indicates that the next part of the path such as vo 0 in this example is a volume name e vol Indicates the default name of the root volume for a filer You can change this name using the vol rename command Mounting volumes On filers configured with multiple volumes mounting is equiv alent to mounting vol volO where vo 0 is the root directory of the root volume Paths that begin with for example etc refer to directories on the root volume NOTE vol is not a directory it is a special virtual root path under which the filer mounts other directories You cannot mount vol to view all the volumes on the filer you must mount each filer volume separately In mount requests and server commands prefix the path names of the volumes and directories you want to mount using the convention vol volume namey directory Example For example vol users home cheryl is a directory called home cheryl in a volume named users Determining the Number of Volumes to Use Whether you should use the default single volume configuration or create additional volumes depends mainly on the storage capacity of the filer Use of a single volume If you want the filer to be configured with a single volume you do not need to do any further volume configuration after you complete the initial setup If your filer doesn t have a large number of disks a single
449. ndow shows information for the specified filer 4 From the New User menu choose New Local Group Result The New Local Group window appears 5 Type the name of the new group in the Group Name text box 6 Type a description for the new group in the Description text box 7 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 7 To add a member type a user or group name in the Members list box or use the Add Users and Groups window as described in Step 8 Adding a name with the Add Users and Groups window 8 Click Add Result The Add Users and Groups window appears Click the arrow next to the List Names From text box to choose a domain that contains names that you want to add Result A list of names in the selected domain appears in the Names list box To add a name type one or more user names in the Add Names list box or select one or more names and click Add Specify one or more names in either of these ways Click one or more names in the Names list box e Type valid user or group names in the Add Names list box Click Add in the window where you specified the names Result The names are added to the Add Names field of the Add Users and Groups window If you want display the full name of a user associated with an account name by clicking Show Full Name Click OK Result The names appear in the Members field of the New Local Group window Final steps
450. ndows NT ACLs 13 4 restore symboltable file removing 13 7 reverting a volume 3 21 role of parity disks 3 2 root volume 3 6 option 19 17 route command 4 12 routed command 4 13 routed daemon etc dgateways file 4 13 purpose of 4 12 router default 4 12 problems with 18 13 Routing Information Protocol RIP 4 12 routing table filer 4 12 rsh enable option 19 19 S SCSI ID identifying disks 3 2 second level virtual interfaces creating 4 25 serial ports filer main unit 1 5 shares creating and changing 7 12 deleting 7 17 displaying 7 10 displaying information about 7 15 renaming volume effect on 7 1 single mode trunk creating 4 23 single mode trunks 4 19 preferred links 4 23 slots filer main unit 1 5 snap command 9 4 SnapMirror checking status 16 14 converting a mirror to a regular volume 16 15 disabling data replication for entire filer 16 12 disabling data replication for one volume 16 13 how it works 16 2 overview 16 1 procedure for mirroring a volume 16 9 purposes of 16 1 resuming 16 13 when used with quotas 16 6 16 16 when used with the dump command 16 6 snapmirror allow file format 16 7 snapmirror conf file format 16 8 snapmirrored option 19 17 SnapRestore effects of reverting a root volume 3 24 effects on backup and recovery 3 24 effects on snapshots 3 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Gui
451. ng Get the gt m WINS is d server Can you ping the domain controller Start the working domain Mis Ne controller Can you ping the filer Check gt Fe network sS 9 connec Contact Dell technical Check net tivity support as described in work Getting Technical Assis tance ee ity Not Using WINS Table 18 2 if you are not using WINS Table 18 2 Not Using WINS Is the PDC or BDC on the same subnet as the filer and is the subnet connected to the first configured network interface card on the filer Yes No Is there a computer account created for the filer in the Windows NT domain Yes No Contact Dell technical Create a support as described in computer Getting Technical account for Assistance the filer in the domain Put the domain controller on the same subnet as the filer and con nect the subnet to the first configured network interface card on the filer Without a WINS server the filer can talk only to the domain con troller by broadcast The filer broadcasts only from the first con figured network interface The domain controller must be on this subnet 18 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Incorrect Password or Unknown Username Use Table 18 3 to troubleshoot the problem Table 18 3 Incorrect Password or Unknown Username Are users in the same domain as the filer Yes No Are you u
452. ng the size when restoring files 13 3 tape drives backing up to remote 12 10 controlling 14 4 displaying information about 17 2 tape file definition 12 6 size used by remote host 12 10 specifying name 12 14 specifying size for dump 12 14 specifying when restoring data 13 3 types of 12 7 tape stackers displaying information about 14 2 tapes estimating number needed 12 8 TCP IP how interfaces respond to packets 4 14 Index 11 Technical Support how to contact 18 1 telnet connection to the filer limiting host access 19 19 telnet enable option 19 19 telnet hosts option 19 19 timed enable option 19 13 ti ti ti ti med log option 19 13 med max_skew option 19 13 med proto option 19 14 m ed sched option 19 14 timed servers option 19 15 troubleshooting configuration problems 18 10 cpio problems 18 17 df problems 18 18 disk problems 18 5 network problems 18 12 NFS problems 18 14 NVRAM problem 18 3 UNIX cpio problems 18 17 UNIX df problems 18 18 volume problems 18 4 trunks defined 4 17 destroying 4 29 hardware requirements 4 20 physical interfaces adding 4 26 single mode 4 19 statistics displaying 4 28 status displaying 4 27 trusted host 15 4 U UNIX access to NTFS files 5 16 UNIX file access detail displays CIFS 7 28 unrecognized volume name message 18 5 unsuccessful file access detail display CIFS 7 28 uptime command 17 4
453. nic Message Complete the following steps when your system issues a panic message 1 Write down the panic message 2 Call Dell technical support immediately as described in Getting Technical Assistance 3 Provide the panic message to Dell technical support Troubleshooting 18 19 18 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 19 Detailed Options Information About options About Setting Detailed Information Options are also described in other sections of this guide and in the man pages The vol 1 man page contains information about the vol options command options Option Values The default value of an option is listed below the option name The following conventions apply to default values listed e None means that there is no default value e fthe default is On the other possible value is Off e fthe default is Off the other possible value is On The values for On and Off are not case sensitive If you do not supply a parameter in the options command the command prints the current values of all available options Autosupport Options What the Autosupport Options Do The autosupport options control whether and how the filer sends automatic status messages For more information about autosupport see Sending Automatic Email Detailed Options Information 19 1 The autosupport doit Option Default None Description Immediately sen
454. ns of files in that directory How users gain access to snapshots depends on the file sharing protocol used NFS or CIFS NFS Client Access to Snapshots Figure 9 3 shows the directory structure on a client with the vol0 volume of a filer named filer mounted on n filer n etc usr var toaster files in the vo O snapshot directory volume on the filer nightly O directory nightly 1 directory files in the vo 0 volume files in the vo 0 volume on the filer as of the on the filer as of the previous midnight midnight before last Figure 9 3 Directory Structure of NFS Client Access to Snapshots Explanation In this example the client can obtain access to snapshots by way of N filer snap shot This might seem to contradict the explanation of snapshot access in the preceding section because it shows a snapshot directory only at the mount point instead of in every directory in the tree Actually the snapshot directory in the mount point is real to make the pwd com mand work whereas the snapshot directories in all other directories are magic that is can be accessed when they are referenced by name but do not show up in a directory listing 9 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide For example at the mount point of a filer file system a directory listing looks like this ls a snapshot dirl dir2 The same command entered in a directory below the mount point d
455. ns of these commands snmp contact jdoe abc com 555 555 1212 Sets the email address and telephone number of the person responsible for the filer You can include the person s full name but an email address and a tele phone number enable the administrator to contact the right person after receiving an automatic email message snmp location ABC corporation engineering lab Sets the physical location of the filer This value is returned by the SNMP agent snmp community add ro private Creates a read only community called private The SNMP manager uses the community name as a password to communicate with the filer s SNMP agent snmp traphost add snmp mgrl Makes the system snmp mgr1 the recipient of all SNMP traps from the filer snmp init 1 Initializes the SNMP daemon with the values specified with snmp commands This command also sends the SNMP cold start and links up or down traps as appropriate to any trap hosts that were previously registered using the snmp traphost command This command should be the last SNMP command in the filer s etc rc file snmp traps Generates asynchronous notification of events called traps About the Dell Custom MIB The Dell custom MIB provides detailed information about many aspects of filer opera tion You must use Dell custom MIB 1 1 2 or higher It contains objects that help you manage multivolume features Where to get the MIB You can obtain the custom MIB from the Data ONTAP 5 3
456. nsmit threshold was decreased Current threshold level Table 17 3 describes the statistics in the DEVICE section of the ifstat command output when you use the command on an Ethernet interface 17 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 17 3 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface DEVICE Statistic Meaning Interrupts Number of times the Ethernet device interrupted the host Resets Number of times the Ethernet device was reset Table 17 4 describes the statistics in the LINK INFO section of thei fst at command output when you use the command on an Ethernet interface Table 17 4 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface LINK INFO Statistic Meaning Auto Auto Negotiation state Mediatype Media type such as twisted pair Link Partner Link State GB Ethernet The Auto Negotiation capability of the remote end It is unknown if Auto Negotiation is disabled Link status Table 17 5 describes the statistics in the RECEIVE section of the ifstat command output when you use the command on a GB Ethernet interface Table 17 5 ifstat Command on GB Ethernet Interface RECEIVE Statistic Meaning Packets umber of packets received on the interface Bytes umber of bytes received on the interface Errors umber of errors during Ethernet frame reception including all kinds of receive errors Queue full umber of received packets dropped due to the unava
457. nterface for which you want statistics Explanation of Interface Statistics Ethernet Table 17 1 describes the statistics in the RECEIVE section of the i stat command output when you use the command on an Ethernet interface Table 17 1 ifstat Command on Ethernet Interface RECEIVE Statistic Meaning Packets umber of packets received on the interface Bytes umber of bytes received on the interface Errors umber of errors during Ethernet frame reception including all kinds of receive errors o buffers umber of received packets dropped due to the unavail ability of buffers Length err umber of frames truncated due to the shortage of receive descriptors Runt frames umber of runt frames Long frames umber of frames received that exceeded the maximum Ethernet specified size of 1 518 bytes CRC error umber of CRC errors that occurred on the received rames H w overflow umber of frames discarded because of receive FIFO overflow Process stop umber of times the receive process stopped List overflow umber of frames dropped due to the unavailability of descriptors Process reset umber of times the receive process was reset Rst frame drops umber of frames discarded due to the resetting of the receive process Table 17 2 describes the statistics in the TRANSMIT section of theifstat com mand output when you use the command on an Ethernet interface System Information and Performance17 5
458. nterpret screen messages for example command output or error messages that you see on your display quickly locate the disk that the message is referring to Fibre channel disk addresses With fibre channel disks the disk address is a combi nation of the disk s adapter number and the disk s fibre channel loop ID To create the fibre channel loop ID multiply the shelf ID switch value by eight and add it to the bay number For example ha 8 shelf 1 disk 2 has disk ID 8 10 For more information For more information about locating specific drives on Power Vault 700N storage systems refer to the Installation and Troubleshooting Guide 3 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Use Disk Scrubbing to Protect Data From Media Errors The filer uses the RAID disk scrubbing procedure to increase data availability The filer scans each disk in the RAID group for media errors If the filer finds media errors it fixes them by reconstructing the data from parity and rewriting the data Disk scrubbing reduces the chance of a multiple disk failure caused by a disk media error encountered while the system was running in degraded mode The filer only scans a RAID group when all the group s disks are operational Although disk scrubbing slows the filer somewhat network clients might not notice the change in the filer s performance because disk scrubbing starts automatically at 1 00 A M on Sunday when
459. nts for Trunks To use a multiple mode trunk you need a switch that supports manually configurable trunking over multiple port connections The switch determines how to forward incoming packets to the filer so you configure the switch so that all the port connec tions are part of a single logical port For information about configuring the switch see the switch documentation Filer network interfaces that are part of the same trunk do not have to be on the same network card but some Ethernet switches and routers require that all members of the trunk be either half duplex or full duplex Virtual Interfaces Trunking Supported by Virtual Interface Feature The feature that supports trunking is known as a virtual network interface or virtual interface The filer treats a virtual interface in the same way as a physical interface except for the i stat command which does not show virtual interface information The vif command is customized for virtual interfaces and can provide information that ifconfig can t For example to get status information about a virtual interface use the vif status command rather than ifstat Naming Virtual Interfaces The name of a virtual interface is a string that is no longer than 15 characters that meets the following criteria e t must begin with a letter e t must not contain a space t must not already be in use for a virtual interface Virtual interface names are case sensitive 4 20 Dell
460. o Enter the vol copy start Command o o ooocooocoooooo o 15 6 Examples of the vol copy start CoMMand o oooooooooocoococo oo 15 6 Results of the vol copy start Command 000000 5 eae 15 6 Volume Copy Operations ic cues c Ree bee E ec dedu pesa 15 6 When to Use the Volume Copy Operation Number 15 7 Screen Messages From the vol copy Command 15 7 Maximum Number of Simultaneous Volume Copy Operations 15 7 Exatmple z xc eeu x WI Be eI Eu x UE PLE 15 7 Exatmplec i Sae P Wer tue Rees diris TON 15 7 Possible Error Sao ox e aL e da 15 8 Management of a Volume Copy Operation When it Is in Progress 15 8 Checking the Status of a Volume Copy Operation o o o ooo o oo o 15 8 Where to Enter the vol copy status Command 15 9 Example of a vol copy status Command 00 00000 e eee 15 9 Aborting a Volume Copy Operation 0 0000 cee eee 15 10 Controlling the Speed of a Volume Copy Operation 15 10 Displaying the Default Speed for Copying a Volume 15 11 Example of Controlling the Speed of Copying a Volume 15 11 Data Replication Using SnapMirror 16 1 About GhIS Ghaptel secs ater eet mind dene ea paste aes ms 16 1 Overview of SnapMirror 0 ses 16 1 Purposes OF SnapMiInror mre sedes repe ete Rec qe te 16 1 Why You Want to Replicate a Volume liiis ellen 16 1
461. o confirm or cancel your command Using the cifs terminate Command You can stop CIFS service for a specific client or shut down CIFS service from the filer by using the cifs terminate command Always terminate all CIFS sessions before you reboot or turn Off the filer You can specify a single client or all clients and the time delay in minutes before the CIFS sessions are terminated as shown in the following command syntax cifs terminat client t time Table 7 8 describes the variables Table 7 8 cifs terminate Command Variables Variable Description client Name of the client for which you are ending a CIFS session time Number of minutes before the termi nation happens The cifs terminate Command Not Persistent The cifs terminate command disables CIFS sessions only between the time you enter the command and the next reboot After each reboot if your filer is licensed and configured to run CIFS the filer automatically starts CIFS service If you want to pre vent CIFS from restarting after a reboot remove the etc cifsconfig cfg file from the filer or rename the file Time Delay You can delay the termination of CIFS service after you enter thecifs terminate command Default Time Delay The default time delay is five minutes 7 88 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide S Changing the Time Delay When you use the t option the command counts dow
462. o determine the name of the tape device Delete all files in the subtree before the restore Install the tape that contains the level O backup for the home subtree in a local tape drive Enter the following command if the subtree is backed up to only one tape restore rfD rst0a vol vol0 home You do not have to specify the D option and vol vol0 home if the destination directory for the restore is the same as the directory that was backed up This command restores the backup in rst Oa to the vol vol0 home directory using the same block size as when the subtree was backed up to the tape If the backup of the subtree is contained in multiple tape files restore prompts you for the next tape file when appropriate After the restore is finished remove the tape from the drive Install another tape that contains the next lowest level of incremental backup Example If you have tapes containing level 1 level 2 and level 3 backups of vol vol0 home load the tape with the level 1 backup in the drive and repeat the restore command After the last incremental backup is restored from a client remove the restore symboltable file in the directory that you just restored Data Recovery 13 7 Example of Restoring the Entire Filer To restore the entire filer repeat the procedure described in this section for each vol ume This section assumes that you already initialized the disks on your filer If There Is One Backup for Each Volume
463. o do a subtree restore you must restore from all incremental backups to restore the most recent data Having all the incremental backups in the same tape minimizes tape management during the restore process Write Down Qtree Information Before Backing Up qtrees Record the information about gtrees if your backup contains gtrees This is because when you restore data from tape the filer does not automatically re create the qtrees You must re create the qtrees into which data is to be restored Having a record of all qtrees enables you to re create the qtrees quickly Recommendations for Minimizing Backup Time and Data Loss The recommendations in this section enable you to minimize both the time required to perform a backup and the possibility of data loss This is because the shorter the time for the dump command to finish the more incremental backups you can perform A large number of incremental backups minimize the amount of unrecover able data NOTE There is a disadvantage to having a large number of incremental backups When you restore data you must restore from all the incremental backup tapes which might take a long time Data Backup 12 11 Use Multiple Local Tape Drives Attach the maximum number of tape drives to the filer The filer can write faster to a local tape drive than to a tape drive attached to another system Organize Data to be Backed Up The first two passes of the dump command run faster if the dump path is
464. ode before you can use it How SnapRestore Works After you select a snapshot for reversion the filer reboots with the volume containing the same data and timestamps as it did when the snapshot was taken All data that exists before you initiate the reversion is overwritten CAUTION You cannot undo the reversion to change the volume back to the Jt state it was in before the reversion What SnapRestore Reverts SnapRestore reverts only the file contents It does not revert attributes of a volume For example the snapshot schedule volume option settings RAID group size and maximum number of files remain unchanged after the reversion Option settings applicable to the entire filer however might be reverted This is because the option settings are stored in a registry in the etc directory If you revert the root directory the registry is reverted to the version that was in use at the snap shot creation time For more information about how reverting a root volume works refer to Effects of Reverting a Root Volume Files That SnapRestore Cannot Recover You cannot revert a volume to recover a deleted snapshot For example if you delete the hourly 2 snapshot and revert the volume to the hourly 1 snapshot you cannot find the hourly 2 snapshot after the reversion Although the hourly 2 snapshot existed at the creation time of the hourly 1 snapshot SnapRestore cannot revert the contents of the hourly 2 snapshot because you already de
465. oes not show the snapshot directory for example cd dirl ls a filel file2 If you enter the 1s command with the directory name snapshot you can see a listing of the snapshots for the dir directory ls snapshot hourly 0 hourly 4 nightly 0 nightly 4 hourly 1 hourly 5 nightly 1 nightly 5 hourly 2 hourly 6 nightly 2 weekly 0 hourly 3 hourly 7 nightly 3 weekly 1 If snapshot were to show up in every directory it would cause many commands to work improperly For instance all recursive commands for removing files would fail because everything below snapshot is read only Recursive copies would copy every thing in the snapshots as well as files in the active file system and a find command would generate a list much longer than expected CIFS Client Access to Snapshots To CIFS clients the snapshot directory appears only at the root of a share For exam ple if a user s home directory is a share named bill that corresponds to the vol vol0 home bill directory only the vol vol0 home bill snapshot directory is visible When this user displays the contents of the home directory the snapshot directory is dis played as snapshot if the operating system supports long file names and as snapsht if the operating system supports only short file names NOTE The snapshot directory is visible in that it is displayed in a directory listing or File Manager display if the client operating system is configured to show hidden files In
466. of disks to the system with minimal interruption to file system activity Before you physically remove or add a SCSI disk use the disk swap command to stall I O activity After you removed or added the disk file system activity automatically continues If you should type the disk swap command accidentally or you choose not to swap a disk at this time use disk unswap to cancel the swap operation and continue service If you want to remove or add a fibre channel disk there is no need to enter the disk swap command Before you swap or remove a disk it s a good idea to run syconfig r to verify which disks are where USAGE disk swap and disk unswap applies to SCSI disks only and does not apply to PV filers disk fail disk name removes the specified file system disk from the RAID configuration spinning the disk down when removal is complete disk fail is used to remove a file system disk that may be logging excessive errors and requires replacement Note that when a file system disk has been removed in this manner the RAID group to which the disk belongs will enter degraded mode meaning a disk is missing from the RAID group If a spare disk at least as large as the Command Reference A 25 disk disk being removed is available the contents of the disk being removed will be reconstructed onto that spare disk The disk being removed is marked as broken so that if it remains in the disk shelf it will not be used by the filer as a
467. ollow ing command restore RfD urst0a rst0a vol vol0 The restore command restarts data recovery from the beginning of the second tape file of the backup Data Recovery 13 11 How to Use a Filer Tape Drive to Restore Files to Another System About This Section This section describes the requirements for using commands such asufsrestore on another system to restore data from a tape drive attached to the filer It also describes how to specify the tape drive in the command for restoring data This section does not discuss the exact commands that you need to enter on the other system Refer to the documentation for the other system to learn about its commands for restoring data Requirements The filer with the tape drive must allow access from the other system That is the host or filer from which a dump or u sdump or restore or ufsrestore com mand is issued must be listed in the following configuration files The etc hosts equiv file on the filer with the tape drive Alternatively you can specify both the host and user in etc hosts equiv The filer etc hosts equiv file contains entries in this format hostname username For more information about etc hosts equiv see the hosts equiv b man page e The etc hosts file on the filer with the tape drive or in the DNS database if the filer is using DNS Also the filer with the tape drive must be added to the other system s etc hosts file Format for Specifying F
468. ollowing snmp traps command traps trapname parameter value trapname is the name of the trap value is the value that you assign to the definition parameter must be a parameter listed in the Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Var trigger edge 1 edge 2 edge 1 direction edge 2 direction interval A trap s variable is the MIB variable that is queried to determine the trap s value All MIB variables must be specified in the form snmp oid where oid is an OID Object Identifier A list of OIDs in the Dell MIB is in the traps dat file in the same directory as the MIB A trap s trigger is a piece of code that determines whether the trap should send data The following triggers are available singl dge trigger sends data when the trap s target MIB variable s value crosses an edge a value that you specify doubl dge trigger enables you to have the trap send data when an edge is crossed in either direction the edges can be different for each direction level trigger sends data whenever the trap s value exceeds a certain level A trap s edges are the threshold values that are compared against during evaluation to determine whether to send data Edge triggered traps only send data when the edges are crossed in one direction By default this is UP for the first edge and DOWN for the second edge The direction arguments let you change this default T
469. olume If you need to change the status of a volume use one of the following command syntaxes vol offline destination volume vol online source volume Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Sef 5 3 X NOTE The vol offline command takes effect only after you reboot the filer Verifying the Size of Each Volume The capacity of the destination volume must be greater than or equal to the capacity of the source volume regardless of how many snapshots you try to copy To verify the capacity of a volume follow these steps 1 Enter the following command syntax df vol volume name The command displays information about disk space in the active file system and in the snapshot for the specified volume 2 Add the numbers in the kbytes column in the df output The result is the number of kilobytes of data that the volume can hold Verifying the Contents of the Destination Volume If the destination volume is not a new volume make sure that the destination volume does not contain data that you might need in the future This is because after the filer starts copying the source volume it overwrites the entire destination volume That is all data in the active file system and in the snapshot of the destination volume is lost after the filer starts copying the data Verifying the Relationship Between Filers If the source and destination volumes in a volume copy operation reside on two filers the filers must have a trusting relations
470. olume is displayed when you do not specify a volume the status of all volumes in the filer is displayed Displaying Volume State Information With Vol Status With no options the vol status command displays a one line synopsis of volume states This includes the volume name whether it is on line or off line and other states for example partial degraded and so on Displaying Disk Information Using Vol status d The vol status d command displays information about disks The disk informa tion is the same as the information from the sysconfig d command 17 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Displaying RAID Information Using Vol status r The vol status r command displays a list of the RAID information The display is the same as the sysconfig r display Displaying RAID Information for Each Group Using Vol status v The vol status v command displays information about each RAID group Displaying Filer Statistics Use the sysstat and uptime Commands You use the sysstat and upt ime commands to display filer statistics About the sysstat Command The sysstat command displays information about CPU utilization file operations read and write operations on disks and tapes and the age of data in the cache buffer By default the filer displays statistics every 15 seconds you can specify the interval in seconds at which statistics are displayed The sysstat output is pa
471. ommand Reference A 83 routed NAME routed network routing daemon SYNOPSIS routed on routed off routed n status DESCRIPTION routed pronounced route D uses a variant of the Xerox NS Routing Informa tion Protocol RIP to manage selection of the default gateway used for IP network routing The filer s routed is different from the standard UNIX routed as it never sends RIP packets or builds route tables from RIP information but only snoops for RIP exchanges to determine gateway status it builds the routing table based on ICMP redirects When routed is started with the routed on command it reads the etc dgateways file to create a list of potential default gateways The etc dgate ways file consists of a series of lines each in the following format gateway metric where gateway is the name or address of a gateway to be used as a potential default gateway metric is a metric indicating the preference weighting of the gateway 1 is the value to use for highest preference 15 for the least If no value is speci fied metric defaults to the value 1 There can be a maximum of 128 valid entries in the etc dgateways file addi tional ones are ignored but cause an error message Duplicate gateway names or addresses are not allowed only the first one encountered in the file is added to the table and duplicates produce error messages After the list of gateways is created routed selects the one with the lowest m
472. omponents described in Table 1 3 enable the filer to function Introducing Dell Filers 1 3 Table 1 3 Filer Internal Components Component Description System board The system board is the main board of the filer It has upgradable firm ware All components are connected to the system board System memory System memory stores information temporarily NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Data ONTAP 5 3 uses NVRAM to log Memory network transactions as a data integ rity measure In case of a system or power failure Data ONTAP 5 3 uses the contents of NVRAM to restore network data to disk Diskette drive In an emergency and for major upgrades Data ONTAP 5 3 uses the diskette drive to boot from diskettes LCD and LEDs The filer displays status information on the LCD and LEDs Environmental adapter The environmental adapter performs the following functions Monitors the filer s temperature and fans e Sends critical information to the filer s LCD e logs information Shuts down the filer if its tem perature is beyond a critical range or the fans cease operating Slots and Ports The filer has slots for external connections and ports for a console and diagnostic hardware as shown in Table 1 4 1 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 1 4 Slots and Ports Component Description Slots The filer contains expansion slots for network interface
473. onal inter faces to fall back on e Foramultiple mode trunk you get improved throughput You can perform this procedure any time after the trunk you are adding interfaces to has been created You must also configure the switch for the additional ports and physical interfaces available for the additions to take effect 4 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Step To add one or more physical interfaces to a trunk enter the following command or put itin the in the etc rc file vif add trunk interfaces where trunk is the name of a previously configured virtual interface and interfaces is a list of the physical interfaces you want to add to the trunk Displaying the Status of a Trunk Description Use this procedure to display the status of a specified trunk After you complete this procedure you get information that for example is useful in troubleshooting trunk problems You can use this procedure any time Step To display the status of a trunk enter the following command vif status trunk where trunk is the name of the trunk If you don t specify a trunk the status of all trunks is displayed Sample Output vif status default transmit multi fail log vif0 2 links transmit multi fail default up e3a state up since 28Jan1999 23 57 26 00 00 07 mediatype 100tx fd flags enabled next link input packets 52 input bytes 3178 output packets 6 output bytes
474. one of these e Avolume e Aatree e Data not belonging to any gtrees Limit the Amount of Data in Each Backup Limit the amount of data in a volume or qtree to be backed up to 200 GB Schedule the Backups Appropriately Schedule backups when the load on the filer is light Refer to Example of Backing up the Entire Filer for an example of executing one full backup and several incremental backups a night Avoid Using an Exclude List If you exclude certain files from the backup the dump command takes longer because it must compare each file name to the strings in the exclude list to determine whether it should back up the file Recommendations for Minimizing Downtime During Data Recovery The method used for restoring data has a greater effect on downtime than does the dump command However it helps to keep the data in the dump path to 100 GB or less because a full restore is more efficient than a partial restore For example it takes less time to restore an entire 100 GB qtree than to extract 100 GB of data from a 500 GB backup Recommendations for Minimizing the Number of Tape Drives Required Because the filer supports the rmt protocol several filers can share the same tape drive Attach the tape drive to the filer with the most data to back up Follow these guidelines if multiple filers back up to the same tape drive e Use a private network for the backup so that the traffic load on the network does not slow down the bac
475. ons NAME options display or set filer options SYNOPSIS options option value DESCRIPTION options is used to change configurable filer software options If no options are specified then options prints the current value of all available options The default value for most options is off which means that the option is not set Changing the value to on enables the option for most options the only valid val ues are on which can also be expressed as yes true or 1 in any mixture of upper and lower case and off which can also be expressed as no false or 0 in any mixture of upper and lower case The description of the option will indicate the default if it is not off and will indicate what values are allowed if it isn t an on off option If it is desired to make an option setting permanent the necessary options command must be placed in the etc rc file as options settings are not preserved across system reboots The legal options are as follows cifs access logging enable When on enables the filer to process access logging or auditing information The default is off cifs access logging filename Specifies the active event log file The file must be in an existing directory in a network share cifs bypass traverse checking When on the default directories in the path to a file are not required to have the X traverse permission This option does not apply in UNIX qtrees cifs guest account Enables a user to get a
476. ons or object files produced during program compilation When the dump command traverses the dump path it compares file and directory names to each exclude string specified in the dump command If the name exactly matches the string the file is excluded from the backup NOTE You can reduce the amount of backup data by using an exclude list in the dump command However an exclude list increases the amount of time needed to finish a dump command because the filer must compare each file name to the exclude list to determine whether the file should be backed up Devices Used by the Dump Command The dump command can back up data to these devices Tape drives or tape stackers attached to the filer Tape drives or tape stackers attached to another computer provided that the fol lowing requirements are met e The computer supports the rmt protocol e The filer has a trusting relationship with the remote computer to which the tape drive is attached This relationship enables the filer to write to the tape drive For example if you want to back up the filer to a tape drive attached to another filer include the filer in the etc hosts equiv file of the destination Data Backup 12 3 filer If you want to back up the filer to a tape drive attached to a SunOS or Solaris computer include the filer in the rhosts file on the computer The filer can resolve the name of the computer to which the tape drive is attached using the information
477. oo is deleted the blocks holding the data for foo are no longer part of the active file system but they are still part of the snapshot Therefore deleting foo from the active file system does not free any disk space Diagram of a Snapshot Figure 9 1 illustrates how disk space is used before and after foo is removed 9 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Before any snapshot After a snapshot is After the foo file is is taken disk space taken the active file deleted the space is consumed by the system and snapshot previously used by foo active file system point to the same disk is referenced by the only blocks The snapshot snapshot That s why doesn t use extra disk deleting active file space system data doesn t free disk space Space used by the active file system Space used by the snapshot only Unused disk space Figure 9 1 Diagram of a Snapshot Changing the contents of foo creates a similar situation New data written to foo can not be stored in the same disk blocks as the current contents because the snapshot is using those blocks to store the old version of foo Instead the new data is written to new disk blocks so there are two separate copies of foo on disk a new copy in the active file system and an old one in the snapshot This technique of duplicating disk blocks only as they are modified is called copy on write In some directories most dat
478. oooo ee 17 8 About TMIS SECON A es uot n aite tee ste ap ete a Oen ostia 17 8 Limiting Directory File Size catia nti Det dto e DORT RO e Dos 17 8 Balancing NFS Traffic on Network Interfaces o oooooooo o oo 17 9 Avoiding Access Time Update for Inodes o o ooooooooooo o 17 9 Improving Performance on Directory Lookups oooooooooo o 17 9 Improving Read Ahead Performance 00 0000 ce nn 17 9 Troubleshooting 18 1 Getting Techrical AsSIStance utero hdd es 18 1 Information to Note Before Calling for Support s saaa aana anaran 18 1 How to Contact Della ai a SR EA tee ES 18 1 Booting From System Boot Diskette llle 18 1 Boot From Diskette To Correct Some Types of Problems 18 1 Procedure for Booting From Diskette llle 18 2 Restarting a Shut Down Filet 4a e ha Een e ad dev dis 18 3 Procedure for Restarting Filer After Unexpected Shutdown 18 3 NVRAM Problem triada oe HUE Bee deb ape EN TERT 18 3 How the Filer Handles Inconsistent NVRAM Contents 18 3 Inconsistency Due to Improperly Updated Volume 18 3 Inconsistency Due to Log Updates for Off line Volume 18 4 Inconsistency Due to Other Reasons 0000000 18 4 Mol rmeProblems esi cite A et any PERS leans aed as E ROS 18 4 Types of Volume Problems Described ooooooooooooooo oo 18 4 Failed M
479. or more 14 Message Logging About Message Logging The filer maintains messages in the etc messages file on the root volume The level of information that the filer records in the etc messages file is configurable About the syslogd Daemon and the etc syslog conf File The message logging daemon syslogd uses the etc syslog conf configuration file on the filer root volume to determine how to log system messages You can configure syslogd to direct system messages to the console to a file or to a remote system based on their severity and origin By default all system messages except for those of severity level debug are written to the console and to the etc messages file on the root volume The etc syslog conf File Format The etc syslog conf file consists of lines with two tab separated not space separated fields of the following form facility level action The facility Parameter The facility parameter specifies the subsystem from which the message origi nated Table 2 14 describes the facility parameter keywords Table 2 14 facility Parameter Keywords Keyword Description auth messages from the authentication system such as login cron messages from the internal cron facility daemon messages from filer daemons such as rshd Filer Administration Basics 2 23 Table 2 14 facility Parameter Keywords continued Keyword Description kern messages from the filer kernel messages fro
480. or quota qtree command User and group quotas can be created inside a qtree so that the user s or group s use of space or files within that qtree is restricted This is done by specifying the type as user tree or group 9 tree where tree is the name of the qtree In the example above we first limit overall usage in the qtree vol vol0 export and then we restrict the user mhoward to 50 MB and 5 120 files under the vol vol0 export tree Similarly the group stooges has been limited to 100 MB of disk space and 10 240 files under the vol vol0 export tree In any operation that creates files or writes to them all applicable quotas must be satisfied For example the user mhoward can write to a file in the vol volO export tree if all of these requirements are met his total disk usage in the root volume does not exceed 500 MB his total number of files in the root volume does not exceed 51 200 his usage within the vol vol0 export tree does not exceed 50 MB his number of files within the vol volO export tree does not exceed 5 120 the space already in use in the vol vol0 export tree does not exceed 750 MB the number of files in the vol vol0 export tree does not exceed 768 000 The asterisk in the etc quotas file specifies a default user or a group quota depending on the type Any user or group that is not specifically mentioned in the etc quotas file is subject to the limits of the default user or group Default user or group quotas can b
481. or upgrade the client software The wafl root only chown option enables only root to change the owner of a file When the option is disabled the owner of a file can change its ownership without being root By default this option is enabled Use the arguments of f and on to disable and enable the option When a non root user changes the owner of a file the set user id and set group id bits are cleared If a non root user tries to change the owner of a file but the change causes the file s recipient to exceed his or her quota the attempt fails This option is applicable only if your filer runs NFS Filer Administration Basics 2 35 Software Licenses About Software Licenses The filer requires software licenses to enable these services and features NFS e CIFS HTP e SnapMirror SnapRestore Licenses are installed on the filer at the factory per your order so the initial setup of your filer does not involve entering license codes You need to enter license codes only if any of the following conditions applies You purchased a filer with a release earlier than Release 4 0 and you are upgrad ing it to Release 4 0 or later e You want to enable a service not previously licensed for your filer e The filer s file system becomes corrupt and must be rebuilt Dell provides you with the appropriate license codes when shipping you the software upgrade kit or when giving you instructions for obtaining the software upgra
482. orts llle 1 5 Table 1 5 Data Storage Management Concepts 00000000 eee 1 6 Table 1 6 Data Organization Management Concepts 1 7 Table 1 7 Periodic Administration Tasks 0 0 0000 cece eee eee eee ee 1 9 Table 2 1 Administration Host Privileges 0000000000 eee ae 2 1 Table 2 2 Editing Configuration Files From a NIFS Client 2 4 Table 2 3 Commands Accepted From rsh anaa aaau aaaea 2 6 Table 2 4 Character Restrictions for User Name iliis iliius 2 8 Table 2 5 Permissions for the Default Directories 2 12 Table 2 6 Accessing the Directories o o ooooooooooooooooooooo 2 13 Table 2 7 Contents of the etc Directory liiis lisse 2 13 Table 2 8 Using the home Directory llle 2 15 Table 2 9 Default etc rc Command Contents o oooooooocooooo o 2 17 Table 2 10 Relationship of Port Numbers to LetterS 2 19 Table 2 11 How Interfaces Are Named 0 00000 cee 2 20 Table 2 12 Host Name Examples 2 it nete s 2 21 Table 2 13 Core Dump Space ooo oooooco lees 2 22 Table 2 14 facility Parameter Keywords 00 0000 ce eee iss 2 23 xlvii xlviii able 4 1 able 4 2 able 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 T
483. ory becomes the root or public directory for WebNFS When a request specifies a relative path lookups for files are done with respect to this directory The nfs webnfs rootdir set Option Default FALSE Description When set to TRUE sets the directory specified in thenfs webnfs rootdir option to be the WebNFS root or public directory NIS Options What the NIS Options Do The NIS options control how the filer works with NIS For more information about NIS see Chapter 4 Network Administration The nis domainname Option Default None Detailed Options Informatio 9 11 Description Sets the NIS domain to the specified domain name The nis enable Option Default Off Description Enables the NIS client on the filer You must set the NIS domain before you enable NIS RAID Options What the RAID Options Do The RAID options control how the filer uses RAID For more information about RAID on the filer see Chapter 3 Disk and File System Management The raid reconstruct speed Option Default 4 Description Specifies the speed of RAID reconstruction The speed ranges from 1 slowest to 10 fastest The filer uses the number to determine the percentage of CPU time used for RAID reconstruction The raid scrub enable Option Default On Description Specifies whether the filer performs RAID scrubbing 19 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide
484. ot snap reserve volume name Reserves a percentage of the disk space for snapshots snap sched volume name Schedules automatic snapshots a Some of the information generated by this command is available through SNMP using the Dell custom MIB as described in Using SNMP in Chapter 4 Snapshot Options The following options for the vol options command affect snapshots in the speci fied volume The options remain in effect after the filer reboots The options are shown in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Snapshot Options Options Descriptions nosnap Disables automatic snapshots By default this option is disabled nosnapdir Makes the snapshot directory that is present at client mount points or the root of the CIFS share invisible It also turns off access to the snapshot directory and all snapshot directories under the mount point or the root of the CIFS share By default this option is disabled X NOTE The dump command does not work if the nosnapdir Or nosnap option is on 9 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Automatic Snapshot Creation The filer uses the snap sched command to create snapshots automatically and to keep them on line for a predetermined amount of time Types of Automatic Snapshots Table 9 3 describes the three types of automatic snapshots Table 9 3 Automatic Snapshot Types Type Description Weekly Nightly Hourly The filer
485. ot the value of n is adjusted for all hourly snapshots The higher the value of n the older the snapshot Snapshots Example 1 of snap sched Command Figure 9 2 shows a sample snap sched command snap sched voll 2 6 8 8 12 16 20 Volume name Create a snapshot every week and keep a maximum of two Create a snapshot every day and keep a maximum of six Create a snapshot every hour Optional list of times or at the times listed in the in 24 hour format at optional time list and keep a which an hourly snapshot maximum of eight is created Figure 9 2 snap sched Command Sample Inthe snap sched command the first argument after the volume name in the exam ple indicates how many weekly snapshots to keep 2 the second argument indicates how many nightly snapshots to keep 6 and the third argument indicates how many hourly snapshots to keep 8 A zero in any of the three positions disables snapshots for that interval The argument for hourly snapshots can include an optional list of numbers indicating the hours at which the filer creates the snapshots in 24 hour time 8 12 17 20 If the argument is omitted the filer creates an hourly snapshot The default snapshot schedule is snap sched volume name 0 2 6 8 12 16 20 Example 2 of snap sched Command Following is an example of the snap sched command snap sched volume name 2 6 8 8 12 16 20 Snapshots Created by This Schedule The following list descr
486. ot Accessible From the Administration Host If you can access the filer from the console but not from the administration host the filer s etc hosts file on the root volume might have an IP address that is unreachable Complete the following steps to fix this problem 1 Login to the filer from the system console 2 Atthe filer prompt enter the following commands replacing the information shown in italics with values appropriate for your filer ifconfig if mediatype type IP address netmask netmask exportfs i o root adminhost IP addr nfs on 3 Mount the root file system from the administration host 4 Edit the configuration files as described in Chapter 2 Filer Administration Basics Filer Runs Setup When etc rc Is Damaged or Missing If the etc rc file on the root volume is accidentally deleted the filer automatically runs setup the next time it is booted If the system does not respond to network requests after a boot check the console to make sure that the system is not waiting for your input If the filer cannot boot from the hard disk because of damaged configuration files you can boot it from the system boot diskette In this case you must manually initialize the filer and correct the configuration See Booting From System Boot Diskette for information about booting from the system boot diskette 18 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide How to Recover Fro
487. ot on that host to execute a filer command through rsh When you use an rsh application on your PC to issue a filer command specify that you are entering the command as root If multiple users on the same host should have access to the filer through rsh enter each user name on a separate line EXAMPLE The following hosts equiv file allows both root and joe smith to enter filer com mands through rsh on a UNIX host named adminhost adminhost adminhost joe smith SEE ALSO rshd Command ReferenceA 127 httpd access NAME httpd access authentication controls for HTTP access SYNOPSIS etc httpd access DESCRIPTION The HTTP daemon can apply authentication controls to individual users or groups on a per directory basis The file etc httpd access specifies the following items for each access controlled tree the path to the tree the authority required to authenticate access to the tree the lists of users or groups to who are permitted access when authenticated The syntax is the same as the access control syntax used by NCSA and Apache However the httpd access file only supports a subset of directives supported by NCSA and Apache You can copy an existing NCSA or Apache access to the filer without editing or reformatting SYNTAX The supported directives are Directory directory name Directory AuthName Title phrase require user user_id user id require group group id group id where Title
488. ots Use Deleted Active File Disk Space o o 9 9 Administering Snapshot Disk Space 0 0 0 ee 9 10 Explanatlorie d sos utt ee ista ades oe o do dq o a oe tnn 9 10 Recovering Disk Space for File System Use o o ooooo o 9 10 Example ia xu sh eb pu A tert alada tule Wendie don d 9 10 Effects of Snapshots on Quotas 0 0 0 0 0 cc eee 9 11 Managing Snapshot Disk Consumption 0 0000 lille 9 11 About Snapshot Management 0 0 00000 lesen 9 11 Scheduling Snapshots oessa spasi d e d Hae dae RR eae OR 9 11 Displaying Snapshot Statistics 2 0 0000 eee 9 12 Command Output s s oer e tore AS RON AME patente Rass 9 12 3hie 9o Used CUN LR Se Rav EP VIR 9 12 The 9o Total COlBns x eb eod e s eh Yo OUR ts 9 13 Output Summary os eas icy erdt Rd n Ra o6 s TS 9 13 Changing the Snapshot Reserve o ooooooocco eee eee 9 14 Adjusting Disk Space Used by Snapshots 0 0 00 cee eee 9 14 EXQMPIG 3 t rut ies Ar eked tases ous Seals leh Wat ot ud 9 14 Accessing Snapshots From Clients aasa aaan eee 9 16 About Client Access to Snapshots 0 000000 llle 9 16 NFS Client Access to Snapshots 0 00 0 0000 eee eee 9 16 Explanatio rt trt sien foenore roo eum SORT eta 9 16 CIFS Client Access to Snapshots liiis 9 17 Determining Snapshot Versions lilii esses 9 18 Eromiah NES Client dt S EM s 9 18 Froma CIES CENT sis ee et e a PREND EIER TS 9 18 De
489. ould be kept on line and that they should be created at 8 am 12 am 4 pm and 8 pm Hours must be specified in 24 hour notation With no argument snap sched prints the current snapshot schedule for all volumes in the system With just the vo name argument it prints the schedule for the specified volume A 150 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide sm snap reserve vol name vol name percent Sets the size of the indicated volume s snapshot reserve to percent With no percent argument prints the percentage of disk space that is reserved for snapshots in the indicated vol ume With no argument the snap reserve command prints the percentage of disk space reserved for snapshots for each of the volumes in the system Reserve space can be used only by snapshots and not by the active file system SEE ALSO df Command ReferenceA 151 snapmirror allow NAME snapmirror allow list of filers to which you can replicate volumes from this filer SYNOPSIS etc snapmirror allow DESCRIPTION The etc snapmirror allow file exists on the source filer used for SnapMirror It contains a list of filers to which you can replicate volumes from the source filer If the source volume and the mirror exist on the same filer you still must enter the filer name in this file In this file type one filer name per line EXAMPLE The following snapmirror allow file on filerA allows both filerB and f
490. ounterpart to the rdate X command If you want to use the rdate command you must have a UNIX worksta tion that supports rdate on your filer s network When to Use the rdate Command You use the rdate command when you need time accuracy only to the second or when you want to keep your current method of synchronizing time Filer Clock Accuracy To keep the filer s clock accurate regularly run the xdate command on the filer with the target machine a computer that maintains accurate time and that supports the port 37 UDP time service For example if the name of the target computer is time node enter rdate time node Use of cron jobs to Run rdate A typical scheme is to have a UNIX computer run a periodic cron job that executes the appropriate rdate command on your filer through rsh The computer and the user if not root running the cron job must be in the filer s etc hosts equiv file on the root volume cron job Example For example on the UNIX computer named adminhost the user named adminuser sets up a cron job to run every day at 3 a m It directs the filer named filer to request a time update from the computer named time node which maintains an accurate time and supports the UDP time service crontab entry The crontab entry on the UNIX system is as follows 03 rsh filer l root rdate time node Entry in hosts equiv file The etc hosts equiv file on filer must contain the follow ing line adminhost adminuser
491. ounts and Stale File Handles 0 00 0 0 c eee eee eee 18 4 Changing Volume Names Can Cause Mount and File Handle Problems 18 4 Procedure for Fixing the etc exports Problem 05 18 4 Volurme Name Problerns sue ES ti E ER aos Fee 18 5 Volume Naming RUES tc car cede bebe eb ads 18 5 Examples of Volume Names 0 00 0000 eese 18 5 Error Messages About Volume Names iliis sells 18 5 DiskiProbl MS ias cbe ba tese s ea pee deve bed Sus es 18 5 Types of Disk Problems Described 00 000000 cece eee 18 5 Disk Failure Without a Hot Spare Disk nananana 0 000 18 6 About This Sectio oes s e ec re e ceo Re 18 6 Filer Runs in Degraded Mode 00 0000 e eects 18 6 Filer Logs Warning Messages in etc messageS 22055 18 6 Filer Shuts Down Automatically After 24 Hours 0000 18 6 Filer Reconstructs Data After Disk Is Replaced 05 18 6 XXXIX xl Disk Failure With a Hot Spare DiSkK o ooooooooooooooooo eee 18 6 About TOS SECO is ete eei ie see expo teur eese T 18 6 Filer Replaces Disk With Spare and Reconstructs Data 18 7 Related Information s stus sexo RD ERES AES Rie See A NEC 18 7 DISK ETOS T 7 4 rue rer Rus TS eS vetas dd d a e d VE 18 7 Types of Disk Errors Described liliis 18 7 Error Message Nonexistent Disks ooooooooooo ooo 18 7 Error Message Diskin USE i eidi o ce ie E R
492. out Options 2123 eee a a 19 9 Detaulf es enero e a Dd iu E sud tes 19 9 DDeseriptiOnos oda RE eR doa SC ed dc Aa 19 9 The httpd timewait enable Option 2 2 00 0 eee 19 9 STA tse etd tere Gite ya tene SO dea ARE iod d es 19 9 Descriptions 21h n o E a Dehesa dde 19 9 NES ODtIGITS oi eerie tos Cte cd Po oed EVE E ch a idit p ER 19 9 What the NFS Option D08eS oooooooocooooo ees 19 9 The nfs mount rootonly Option 0 0 e en it aa e eee 19 9 DEEN ner E Nu EE ee tu 19 9 Description 2i kha sti eit a Riad WR a 19 9 The nfs per_client_stats enable Option 0 00020000 19 10 Detalla vn CEN bI D Rob EB nee nats DE 19 10 DDeserptiOnss s bere td e e ee e peret RD 19 10 The nfs tcp enable Option ooooooooooooooo ess 19 10 Detala ext ERU S E A ASA ESSERE ELS 19 10 DESCTIPUON s 24 4 cat dott RA dete E s ep x Ub pd eel pg dud 19 10 xliii The infs v2 df 29gb lim Options veraces Rade aed suas Rae 19 10 Default ee aoc Misia M gy Redes torn e eren er VON odo ats 19 10 Descriptio sss acr ede eco o al e eo os b dct 19 10 The nfs v3 enable Options s eraran aeae AABE eee 19 10 Default its to aen Rr Se ak eles a SS 19 10 DescriptIQtis cus autre ta ac ts al ota potis de aac tes mt 19 10 The nfs webnfs enable Option o o o oooooooo ooooooo eee 19 11 Default astra ta ace a ee ged e iced e sc 19 1 Descriptions ot eoe tee d eee o ry See 19 1 The nfs webnfs rootdir Option 2 0 2 0 00 sees 1
493. out how to specify a different mail host Requirements for Using an NFS Client as the Administration Host If you plan to use an NFS client to manage the filer the client must support a text editor that can display and edit text files containing lines ending with the newline character support the telnet and rsh commands e be able to mount directories using the NFS protocol Requirements for Using a CIFS Client as the Administration Host If you plan to use a CIFS client to manage the filer the client must support the telnet and rsh commands The Root Volume About the Root Volume Every filer has a root volume It is the volume from which the filer reads configuration files During setup the filer creates a default volume named vo 0 and designates it as the root volume 2 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Designating the Root Volume If you add volumes to your filer you choose a volume to be the root volume during the multivolume configuration process For more information about designating the multiple volume configuration process read Chapter 3 Disk and File System Management About the Volume Name Prefix Volume names begin with the following prefix vol Syntax to Refer to the Root Volume From NFS Clients To refer to the root volume when mounting the root volume to an NFS client use the following syntax vol volO Editing Configuration File
494. output Benefits of Entering the dump Command on the Console If you enter the dump command on the console you can read and respond to screen messages displayed by the command For example the command might prompt you for another tape to complete the backup A dump command entered through rsh terminates and does not generate any messages when the command needs user intervention 12 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Format of the Backup Data About This Section When the filer executes the dump command it displays messages showing the dif ferent passes of the dump command This section discusses the format of the backup data and what data is written to tape in each pass of the dump command Backup Data Format The backup data format is organized based on inodes An inode for a file or a directory contains information for tracking the file s or the directory s type time stamps bad blocks and so on On each tape the dump command creates two maps e The first map shows which inodes are used in the directory to be dumped The filer uses this map to determine which files have been deleted or moved between incremental dumps The second map shows which inodes have been written to the tape The filer uses this map to verify the accuracy of the restore operation when the backup data is restored The dump command writes files and directories to tape by inode numbers Five Passe
495. owerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide vol storing database files If the filer finds any problems database instances hang or shut down and the filer sends error messages to the console to alert you to check the state of the database snapmirrored off If SnapMirror is enabled the filer automatically sets this option to on Set this option to off if you no longer want to use SnapMirror to update the mir ror After you set this option to off the mirror becomes a regular writable volume You can set this option only to off only the filer can change the value of this option from off to on vol status r v d 1 volname displays the status of one or all volumes If volname is used the status of the specified volume is printed otherwise the status of all volumes in the filer are printed By default it prints a one line synopsis of the volume which includes the volume name whether it is online or offline other states for example partial degraded and so on and pervolume options The v flag displays information about each RAID group within the volume The r flag displays a listing of the RAID information for that volume The d flag displays information about the disks in the specified volume The types of disk information are the same as those from the sysconfig d com mand The 4 flag displays for each volume on a filer the name of the volume the language code and languag
496. p addr Adds the name to the WAFL credential v cache The v option displays Windows NT groups wcc d v Displays the following statistics about the WCC S ntname i ip adar Ev WCC U uname i ip addr Ev WAFL credential cache Number of entries in the cache Age of the oldest entry e Number of Administratorprivileged entries The v option adds mappings for every user Displays what the current mapping of the specified name would result in but does not change the WAFL credential cache The v option displays numeric SIDs 5 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 5 3 wcc Command Options continued Type Other options Function WCC X f EVI Removes all entries from the WAFL cre dential cache The v option displays how many entries have been removed i ip adar v Removes all entries from the WAFL cre dential cache with the same IP address The v option displays how many entries have been removed s ntname i ip addr Removes the entries with the given Win v dows NT name and optional qualifying IP address If the Windows NT name is the name of a group removes all members of that group from the WAFL credential cache The v option displays how many entries have been removed u uname i ip addr Removes the entries with the given UNIX v name and optional qualifying IP address The v option displays how
497. p for Displaying Information About Qualified Tape Devices To display information about qualified tape devices enter the following command sysconfig t Steps for Displaying Nonqualified Tape Devices To display information about nonqualified tape devices perform the following steps 1 Ifthe filer has accessed the tape drive through the dump or mt command go to Step 3 Otherwise go to Step 2 2 Enter the following command to access the tape device mt f device status 3 Enter the following command sysconfig t Steps for Displaying Information About Tape Stackers To display information about tape stackers perform the following steps 1 If the tape stacker s autoload setting is On go to Step 2 If the tape stacker s autoload setting is Off go to Step 4 2 Turn off the autoload setting of the tape stacker 3 Reboot the filer 4 Enter the following command sysconfig m 14 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Displaying Tape Device Information Along With Other Filer Information Youcan usethe sysconfig v command to display the filer hardware information Look for the information about the SCSI adapter to which the tape devices are attached Example of the sysconfig t Command for a Qualified Tape Drive The following example of the sysconfig t command displays information about a qualified tape drive sysconfig t Tape drive 6 4 Digital D
498. pansion card that makes it possible to add or remove a hard disk with mini mal interruption to file system activity inode A data structure containing information about files on a filer and in a UNIX file system interrupt switch A switch on some filer front panels used for debugging purposes magic directory A directory that can be accessed by name but does not show up in a direc tory listing The snapshot directories except for the one at the mount point or at the root of the share are magic directories mail host The client host responsible for sending automatic email when certain filer events occur Maintenance mode An option when booting a filer from a system boot disk Maintenance mode provides special commands for trouble shooting hardware and configuration MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions A specification that defines the mecha nisms for specifying and describing the format of Internet message bodies An HTTP response containing the MIME Content Type header allows the HTTP cli ent to invoke the application that is appropriate for the data received network adapter An Ethernet adapter NFS Network File System A protocol for networking PCs Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NVRAM cache Nonvolatile RAM in the filer used for logging incoming write data and NFS requests Improves system performance and prevents loss of da
499. pare disk available contact Dell technical support as described in Getting Technical Assistance Related Information In addition to disk failure and hot spare disk replacement activity the etc messages file on the root volume logs any failure in a periodic check of the hot spare disk For more information refer to the sysconfig 1 and messages 5 man pages Disk Errors Types of Disk Errors Described The filer displays error messages when the following disk problems occur e Adgisk does not exist e Agdgiskis in use Disks are missing Error Message Nonexistent Disks If you get a message indicating that a disk does not exist especially if you are adding a disk to a volume or a RAID group make sure that The disk is specified correctly e The specified disk is a spare Error Message Disk in Use If you are adding a disk to a volume and you get a message indicating that a disk is in use the disk you specified might already be a system disk Make sure that Troubleshooting 18 7 The disk is specified correctly e The specified disk is a spare Error Message System Cannot Boot Because Disks Are Missing You might get a message similar to the following The system cannot boot with more than one disk missing from a RAID group This message indicates that a volume might be missing some disks because either not all the disks in a volume were transferred to a new filer or disks were damaged Make sure
500. password on a filer at any time Changing your password at regular intervals can provide you with better filer security Restrictions When you use telnet or a console the passwd command prompts you for the user name if administrative users other than root exist The passwd command only accepts arguments when you use rsh Filer Administration Basics 2 9 Steps to Change an Administrative Password Using a Console or telnet To change an administrative user password using a console or telnet perform the following steps 1 Enterthe passwd command 2 When prompted enter the administrative user name of the user whose pass word you want to change 3 Enter the old password 4 Enter the new password Step to Change an Administrative Password Using rsh To change an administrative user password using rsh enter the following command passwd old password new password username NOTE If you do not use the third argument thepasswd command works as before and expects you to enter the old and new password for root Halting and Rebooting the Filer Data Storage in NVRAM The filer stores requests it receives in nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM The use of NVRAM improves system performance prevents loss of data in case of a system or power failure NVRAM Event During Orderly Shutdown The halt and reboot commands perform an orderly shutdown During an orderly shutdown the contents of NVRAM are flushed to
501. pe Drive Off Line 0 0 2 nee 14 5 Displaying Status Information lilii cc eee 14 5 Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Set 15 1 About phis Chapter accord A 15 1 Overniew of Vol me CODy sites da a td baba doh etn Gage oid 15 1 Introduction to the Filer s Commands for Copying Volumes 15 1 Purposes of the vol copy Command Set 15 1 When to Copy Volumes 0 00 0 000 e 15 1 Benefits of the vol copy Command Set auauua aana ccc 15 2 Requirements and Recommendation For Copying a VoluMe 15 3 Requirements for Copying a Volume saasaa saasaa liess 15 3 Verifying the Status of Each Volume 0 2 0 0 0 00000 15 3 Checking the Status of aVolume 1 2 0 00 2 00000 15 3 Changing the Status of a Volume illis 15 3 XXXV Chapter 16 XXXVI Verifying the Size of Each Volume 0 0 0000 000 elles 15 4 Verifying the Contents of the Destination Volume 15 4 Verifying the Relationship Between Filers 000000 15 4 Verifying Localhost as a Trusted Host illii eee 15 4 Recommendation for Copying a Volume 2 0 0002 eee eee 15 4 Details About Copying One Volume to Another 00200005 15 5 Command Syntax for Copying One Volume to Another 15 5 Specifying the Snapshots to Copy iiiils illie sisssn 15 5 Specifying the Volumes Involved in the Copy 15 5 Where t
502. pe in that device The Data ONTAP 5 3 dump command handling of end of tape is slightly different than that of the standard UNIX dump Instead of aborting the entire dump if EOT is reached the Data ONTAP5 3 dump starts a new volume and continues the dump on the next tape Specifying a large value for the B option will cause dump to utilize the entire tape You can enter the dump command on a trusted host through rsh It is preferable to enter the dump command through rsh if the backup takes a significant amount of time This is because if you enter the dump command on the console the filer does not display the console prompt until the backup is finished During the time when the filer is backing up data you do not have console access to the filer Command Reference A 29 dump Another advantage of running the dump command through rsh is that you can control backups from UNIX shell scripts or crontab entries OPTIONS 0 9 f files Dump levels A level 0 full backup guarantees the entire file system is copied A level number above 0 incremental backup tells dump to copy all files new or modified since the last dump of a lower level The default level is O Write the backup to the specified files files may be a list of the names of local tape devices in the form specified in tape a list of the names of tape devices on a remote host in the form host devices the standard output of the dump command specified as The li
503. peed for Copying a Volume Before starting the vol copy start command you can verify the default speed for all volume copy operations using the following command options vol copy throttle It displays the value 1 through 10 to be used by all volume copy operations The value of the vol copy throttle option was set at 10 at the factory Example of Controlling the Speed of Copying a Volume The following example illustrates changing the speed of all volume copy operations in progress to one tenth of full speed through rsh rsh filer vol copy throttle 1 volcopy operation 0 Throttle adjusted from 100 to 10 volcopy operation 1 Throttle adjusted from 100 to 10 Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command S b 11 15 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 16 Data Replication Using SnapMirror About This Chapter Overview of SnapMirror The SnapMirror feature replicates data from one volume the source to another vol ume the mirror and periodically updates the mirror to reflect incremental changes on the source The result of this process is an on line read only volume that contains the same data as the source volume at the time of the most recent update SnapMirror requires a license code Purposes of SnapMirror Why You Want to Replicate a Volume You want to replicate a volume if you are in any of the situations described in When to Copy Volumes Because Sn
504. pendent on filer memory and is shown in Limits on CIFS Open Files Sessions and Shares nocomment Specifies no description Specifies no particular group to own the files that are cre noforce ated in the share group nomaxusers Specifies no maximum number of users that can connect to the share at the same time sharename The name of the share which is used by CIFS users to obtain access to the directory on the filer It must contain only characters in the current code page Displaying Information About Shares Methods of Displaying Information About Shares You can display information about a specific share or all shares on the filer CIFS Administration 7 15 To display information about shares do either of the following e From the Windows NT desktop use Server Manager as described in Using Server Manager to View Information about Shares e From the filer use the cifs shares command as described in Using the cifs Shares Command to View Information about Shares Using Server Manager to View Information About Shares To display information about shares from Server Manager perform the following steps 1 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 2 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 3 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example FILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK
505. phrase is a word or phrase that is passed to the authentication dialog as a title for the dialog that prompts the user for a password EXAMPLES The following example restricts access to the file home htdocs private bob so that only user dole can access it after supplying the required password The authentication dialog is titled My private stuff Directory home htdocs private bob AuthName My private stuff Limit GET require user dole lt Limit gt lt Directory gt The lt Limit GET gt and lt Limit gt directives are not supported but are retained for format consistency with NCSA and Apache The filer just ignores them A 128 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide httpd access The following example restricts access to the directory tree home htdocs private storage to the group group1 which consists of the users whose IDs are user1 user2 user3 and user4 The authentication dialog is titled Dell Directory home htdocs private storage gt AuthName Dell Limit GET require group group1 lt Limit GET lt Directory gt In this example group1 is defined by the following entry in etc httpd group group1 userl user2 user3 user4 SEE ALSO httpd passwd httpd group Command ReferenceA 129 httpd group NAME httpd group names of HTTP access groups and their members SYNOPSIS etc httpd group DESCRIPTION The file declares the name
506. pmirror conf file Result If the filer is currently transferring data from that volume the transfer stops immediately Steps to Disable Data Replication While Data Transfer Is in Progress Follow these steps to disable data replication while data transfer is in progress These steps stop the replication temporarily at the time of the next scheduled update data replication starts up again 1 Enterthe vol copy status command to display the operation numbers of the volume copy Result Because SnapMirror uses the vol copy command to transfer data the vol copy status command displays all volume copy operations including the one for replicating a volume 2 Enterthe vol copy abort command to terminate the volume copy operation Result The filer stops copying data and displays messages similar to these image operation 0 is now being aborted image operation 1 is now being aborted Checking Data Replication Status Description If you want to know how much data has been copied to the mirror or whether a filer is using resources for replicating data you can use the vol snapmirror status command at any time to check the status of data replication Prerequisite SnapMirror must be enabled before you can check the status of data replication Otherwise the following error message is displayed Snapmirror is turned off 16 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Step To check th
507. pplications To specify minimal read ahead turn theminra option On By default the option is Off and the filer does very aggressive read ahead System Information and Performance17 9 17 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 18 Troubleshooting Getting Technical Assistance Information to Note Before Calling for Support If you encounter problems with the filer that you cannot solve you might need to con tact your service provider or Dell technical support for assistance If you do have the following information available the system service tag and your Express Service code e the system configuration as reported by the sysconfig v command if the filer still responds to the command any diagnostic messages that were reported diagnostic messages are in the etc messages file on the root volume For additional information you may need see Getting Help in your nstallation and Troubleshooting Guide How to Contact Dell For numbers that you can use to contact Dell technical support see Getting Help in your nstallation and Troubleshooting Guide Booting From System Boot Diskette Boot From Diskette To Correct Some Types of Problems You might need to reboot the filer from the system boot diskette to correct configura tion problems recover from a lost password or correct certain disk configuration problems Troubleshooting 18 1 Procedure for Boo
508. pported Languages uud ux BARR Rahs nA X Es ewes WN 5 9 we Command Options y xaxd uentum te etel tetto 5 18 exportfs Command Options Syntax llli iliius 6 8 nfsstat Command Options 0 00000 sies 6 15 CIFS Files Access LS oe er b e RH ciet 7 2 etc usermap cfg Format Variables llle eese 7 b Generic User Account options COMMAndS o o o o ooo 7 10 Creating a Share With cifs shares Command 7 14 Changing a Share With cifs shares Command 7 15 Windows File Access Detail DisplayS o oooo o 7 27 cifs stat Command Output Fields o ooo ooooooo oooo 7 35 cifs terminate Command Variables liliis 7 38 HTTP Request Variables s ini tre t Re Ret tne E e esee 8 6 URL Response Fields o oooooooooooooooooooooooooo 8 8 hittpstat Statistic Types e cs nme bebe hake deu 8 11 Snapshot Commands saaa aaea aeaa 9 4 SnapshOtVOpPtlonS 24 2 6 6 4 sdk la lada PE E 9 4 Automatic Snapshot Types ee 9 5 qtree and Volume Defaults 0 0 20 000000 10 3 gtree Security Sill Srey a CR T dte us ces 10 3 atree Security Styles in Detail 2 2 0 0 2000000000000 cae ee 10 4 qtree Command Display 000000 eee eee 10 9 dump Command Descriptions 0 0000 eee 12 14 Sample of Backing Up to Tape Stacker Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab
509. pports a maximum of 255 host names in each rw and root option There is no limit on the number of host names in the list following the access option but the maximum size of the etc exports file is about 64 KB A 36 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide fctest NAME fctest test Fibre Channel environment SYNOPSIS fctest adapter DESCRIPTION Use the fctest command to test Fibre Channel adapters and disks on an appli ance This command provides a report of the integrity of your Fibre Channel environment It is only available in maintenance mode and takes about b minutes to complete If the adapter argument is missing all Fibre Channel adapters and disks in the system are tested otherwise only the specified adapter and disks attached to it are tested When finished fctest prints out a report of the following values for each Fibre Channel adapter tested 1 Number of times loss of synchronization was detected in that adapter s Fibre Channel loop 2 Number of CRC errors found in Fibre Channel packets 3 The total number of inbound and outbound frames seen by the adapter 4 A confidence factor on a scale from 0 to 1 that indicates the health of your Fibre Channel system as computed by the test A value of 1 indicates that no significant errors were found Any value less than 1 indicates there are prob lems in the Fibre Channel loop that are likely to interfere with the no
510. ption Configures the filer to give NFS access only to root by requiring that mount requests come from privileged ports ports 0 through 1023 Detailed Options Information 19 9 The nfs per client stats enable Option Default Off Description Specifies whether the filer collects and displays NFS statistics from individual clients The nfs tcp enable Option Default Off Description Specifies whether the filer supports NFS over TCP Enable this option if a client has problems using NFS over UDP The nfs v2 df 2gb lim Option Default Off Description Limits to 2 GB the response the filer gives to requests from NFS v2 clients regarding total space free space or available space This option is necessary for some NFS cli ents to calculate the amount of free space accurately Without this option a file system with more than 2 GB of free disk space might appear to be full to the client that initiates the file system statistics request The nfs v3 enable Option Default On Description Specifies whether the filer supports NFS Version 3 Disable this option if a client has problems using NFS Version 3 and that client cannot be configured to use NFS Ver sion 2 19 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The nfs webnfs enable Option Default Off Description Turns WebNFS On and Off The nfs webnfs rootdir Option Default None Description The specified direct
511. ption on another volume raidsize number The value of this option is the maximum size of a RAID group within the vol ume Changing the value of this option will not cause existing RAID groups to grow or shrink it will only affect whether more disks will be added to the last existing RAID group and how large new RAID groups will be minra on off If this option is on the filer performs minimal read ahead on the volume By default this option is off causing the filer to perform very aggressive read ahead on the volume no atime update on off If this option is on it prevents the update of the access time on an inode when a file is read This option is useful for volumes with extremely high read traffic since it prevents writes to the inode file for the volume rom con tending with reads from other files It should be used carefully That is use this option when you know in advance that the correct access time for inodes will not be needed for files on that volume nosnap on off If this option is on it disables automatic snapshots on the volume nosnapdir on off If this option is on it disables the visible snapshot directory that is normally present at client mount points and turns off access to all other snapshot directories in the volume nvfail on off If this option is on the filer performs additional status checking at boot time to verify that the NVRAM is in a valid state This option is useful when A 108 Dell P
512. r Result Options entered only on the command line are not saved if you reboot NIS is now enabled You no longer have to update the filer s etc Rosts file in the root volume every time you add a new host to the network unless you specify files first in the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume Disabling NIS To disable NIS on a running system enter the following command or put the command in the etc rc file in the root volume to make the change permanent options nis enable off Changing your NIS domain name To change the domain name on a running sys tem enter the following command or put the command in the etc rc file in the root volume to make the change permanent options nis domainname new domain Displaying the NIS server name To display the NIS server name enter the following command ypwhich The ypwhich command has no options Routing About Filer Routing Even though the filer can have multiple network interfaces it does not function as a router that is the filer does not route packets between its interfaces on behalf of other network hosts It can however route its own packets Network Administration 4 11 Routing Table on the Filer For routing its own packets the filer relies on the default route and explicit routes Typically the filer learns explicit routes through icmp redirect messages received from the default router you do not need to enter explicit routes in the filer s routing table
513. r when controlling access via share level ACLs In that case the requestor s desired access is checked against the file s group permissions and the other permissions are ignored In effect the group perms are used as if the Windows client were always a member of the file s owning group and the other perms are never used The default setting is on for new installations For existing installa tions this has the opposite effect of the old PC mode installation setting A 62 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide options If you do not plan to use share level ACLs to control access to UNIX security style files e g in a UNIX qtree you might wish to change this setting to on cifs save case cifs scopeid By default the filer preserves the case of CIFS names even though a case insensitive hash and search is done Setting this option to OFF forces names to be saved in lower case avoiding some of the case conversion problems with non ASCII characters and prevent ing PC applications from changing the names of files that were created with lower case names from UNIX NetBIOS scope IDs allow the system administrator to create small workgroups out of a network by partitioning the NetBIOS name space only clients with the same NetBIOS scope ID as the filer will be able to use the filer as a CIFS server Normally the scope ID is a null string but if the filer is to run in a Ne
514. rates one or more error messages Table 15 4 explains the meanings of the possible error messages Table 15 4 vol copy start Command Error Messages Error message Meaning Permission denied The source filer does not have per mission to copy to the destination VOLCOPY Could not connect to filer filer 127 0 0 1 Action Make sure that the filers have a trusting relationship with each other If both the source volume and destination volume are on the same filer remember to include localhost in the etc hosts equiv file VOLCOPY volcopy restore The destination volume is on line volume is online aborting MT Action Take the destination volume off line and reboot the filer that con tains the destination volume VOLCOPY volcopy restore The destination volume is smaller volume is too small aborting than the source volume Action Add more disk space to the destination volume or choose another destination volume of sufficient capacity Management of a Volume Copy Operation When it Is in Progress Checking the Status of a Volume Copy Operation You can use the following command syntax to check the status of one or more vol ume copy operations vol copy status operation number 15 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide This command displays the status for a specified volume copy operation If you do not specify the operation number the command
515. ration as the volcopy dump operation One operation is for writing data to the destination volume Screen messages displayed by a vol copy command refer to this operation as the volcopy restore operation The filer assigns a volume copy operation number to each operation 15 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide When to Use the Volume Copy Operation Number You need the volume copy operation number if you want to stop a volume copy oper ation or change the volume copy operation speed For more information about obtaining the volume copy operation number see Checking the Status of a Volume Copy Operation Screen Messages From the vol copy Command When the filer is copying a volume the filer displays messages indicating the percent age of the volume copy operation completed and the number of minutes remaining When the filer finishes copying all data it displays the filer prompt Maximum Number of Simultaneous Volume Copy Operations Each filer supports up to four simultaneous volume copy operations Whether a filer can execute a vol copy start command depends on how many volume copy operations are already in progress on the filer or filers specified in the vol copy start command as illustrated in the following examples Example You can enter the following two vol copy start commands on a filer to copy volumes locally vol copy start vol0 voll vol copy start vol2 vol3
516. rcentages and displays statistics that include clients that have generated RPC calls but no NFS calls to the client 1 Displays statistics that have been collected for all NFS clients z Resets the statistics counters Example no options The following lines show the output of the nfsstat command when you specify no options nfsstat Server rpc TCP calls badcalls nullrecv badlen xdrcall 0 0 0 0 0 UDP calls badcalls nullrecv badlen xdrcall 24 0 0 0 0 Server nfs calls badcalls 24 0 Server nfs V2 24 calls null getattr setattr root lookup readlink read 6 16 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 0 0 5 21 0 0 0 0 16 67 0 0 0 0 wrcach writ creat remov renam link symlink 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mkdir rmdir readdir statfs 0 0 0 0 3 13 0 0 Server nfs V3 0 calls null getattr setattr root lookup readlink read 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 write create mkdir symlink mknod remove rmdir 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rename link readdir readdir fsstat fsinfo pathconf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 commit 0 0 Example using the I option The following lines show the output of the nfsstat command when you specify the 1 option nfsstat 1 172 17 25 13 sherlock NFSOPS 2943506 90 172 17 25 16 watson FSOPS 3553686 2 172 17 25 18 hudson FSOPS 2738083 1 L72 47 29Q0 7 conan FSOPS 6732
517. re mandatory CIFS applications depend on locking to behave properly Because NFS locks are only advisory file manipulation operations such as rm rmdir and mv by a UNIX based NFS client on a file opened by a PC NFS application can cause the application to crash Reads by UNIX based NFS clients always succeed A deny write operation causes a file manipulation operation such as rm rmdir and mv on a CIFS accessed file by a UNIX based NFS client to fail File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 5 1 Byte range locks work on portions of a file Byte range operations other than reads by a UNIX based NFS client fail if the attempted operation is forbidden by the lock As is appropriate for NFS a UNIX based NFS application might be forbidden to access a byte range that is locked by CIFS NOTE There is one exception to the enforcement of locks set by CIFS clients on the X filer When the filer runs the dump command it ignores the file lock set by a CIFS cli ent that prevents read access to parts of a file or the entire file Ignoring the read file lock allows the filer to back up all files Managing Symbolic Links for CIFS Access About Symbolic Links CIFS clients can follow symbolic links which are created by NFS clients A symbolic link is a special file that points to another file or directory A symbolic link is in some respects like a shortcut in the Windows environment There are two kinds of symbolic links absolute and re
518. re version string and the system ID quota Information related to disk quotas including the output of the quota report command To access quota information quotas must be turned On For more information about quotas see Restricting or Track ing Disk Usage by Using Disk Quotas in Chapter 11 raid Information about RAID equivalents to the sysconfig r output For more information about sysconfig see Chapter 17 System Information and Performance sysstat System level statistics such as CPU uptime idle time and the number of kilobytes transmitted and received on all net work interfaces About Traps You use the snmp traps command to inspect the value of MIB variables periodically and send an SNMP trap to the machines on the traphost list whenever that value meets the conditions you specify The traphost list specifies network management stations that receive trap information You use the SNMP third party applications on your network management station to process the trap information For example you can set a trap to monitor the fans on a filer and have the SNMP application on your network management station put a flash ing message on your console that tells you that a fan has ceased operating You can set traps on any numeric variable in the filer s MIB 4 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide How to Define Traps You define or change a userspecified trap using the f
519. reate a folder then share it by performing the following steps 1 Create a folder on the filer 2 Open Server Manager by choosing it from the Start menu 3 From the Server Manager Computer menu choose Select Domain Result The Select Domain window opens 4 In the Select Domain window select the filer you want by typing its UNC name for example WFILERNAME in the Domain field then clicking OK Result A Server Manager window for the filer appears 5 Choose Computer Shared Directories then click the New Share button Result The New Share window appears 6 Type a name for the new share in the Share Name field The share name is case sensitive 7 Type the local path here of the folder you created in Step 1 This is usually CAVONVOLNAMAFOLDER 8 Type a description of the share in the Comments field if you want 9 f you do not want to limit the number of users that can connect to the share at the same time select Maximum Allowed under User Limit 10 To limit the number of users that can connect to the share at the same time click the arrows next to Users until the desired number appears 11 If the share has Windows NT security click Permissions to set permissions 7 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 12 Click OK Result The New Share window disappears and the share is created Changing the Share Description and User Limit With Server Manager To
520. reates a new snapshot of a particular type it deletes the oldest one and renames the existing ones On the hour for exam ple the filer deletes hourly 7 renames hourly 0 to hourly 1 and so on The nightly snapshot schedule jumps from January 12 to January 10 because there is a weekly snapshot on January 11 NOTE On a UNIX client if you use 1s 1 instead of 1s lu to list the snapshot creation times the times are not necessarily all different The times listed by1s 1 reflect the modification times of the directory at the time of each snapshot and are not related to the times at which the snapshots are created The snap sched command is persistent across reboots There is no need to put the command in the etc rc file User Defined Automatic Snapshots You can create snapshots at predefined times instead of using the hourly daily and weekly schedules Snapshots 9 7 Example For example if you want to create two snapshots for the volume named vol1 each week you can set up a cron job on the administration host to run twice each week at an appropriate time to execute the following snap create command rsh filer snap create voll filename X NOTE The snap create command does not accept a snapshot name containing a slash Understanding Snapshot Disk Consumption About Snapshot Disk Consumption It is important to understand the amount of disk space snapshots consume and the amount of disk space they are likely to consume
521. red for multiple port connections and four or more interfaces After you complete this procedure all interfaces are active at once until there is a switch failure in which case connectivity is maintained by the links to one switch even if the other switch fails Network Administration 4 25 Steps To create a second level virtual interface on a single filer complete the following steps 1 Enter the following commands to create two multiple mode interfaces vif create multi trunk1 ifl if2 vif create multi trunk2 if3 if4 trunkl and trunk2 are the names of the trunks ifl if2 if3 and if4 are interfaces 2 Enter the following command to create a single mode interface from the multi ple mode interfaces vif create single secondlev trunkl trunk2 secondlev is the name of a second level virtual interface trunkland trunk2 are the names of the trunks Example The following commands create the second level virtual interface shown in Example of a Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer vif create multi Firstlevl e0 el vif create multi Firstlev2 e2 e3 vif create single Secondlev Firstlevl Firstlev2 Adding Physical Interfaces to a Trunk Description Use this procedure to add one or more physical interfaces to a trunk After you com plete this procedure you get the following results depending on the type of trunk you are configuring Fora single mode trunk you get improved reliability by providing additi
522. rence Guide NFS CIFS HTTP Net kB s Disk kB s Tape kB s Cache age SEE ALSO sysstat the number of NFS operations per second during that time the number of CIFS operations per second during that time the number of HTTP operations per second during that time the number of kilobytes per second of network traffic into and out of the server the kilobytes per second of disk traffic being read and written the number of kilobytes per second of tape traffic being read and written the age in minutes of the oldest read only blocks in the buffer cache Data in this column indicates how fast read operations are cycling through system memory when the filer is reading very large files larger than the machine s memory size buffer cache age will be very low netstat nfsstat Command Reference A 99 timezone NAME timezone set the local timezone SYNOPSIS timezone name DESCRIPTION timezone sets the system timezone and saves the setting for use on subsequent boots The argument name specifies the timezone to use See the system docu mentation for a complete list of time zone names If no argument is supplied the current time zone name is printed Each timezone is described by a file that is kept in the etc zoneinfo directory on the filer The name argument is actually the name of the file under etc zoneinfo that describes the timezone to use For instance the name America Los Angeles refers to the timezone f
523. rent naming convention than the regular snapshots as explained in the section Snapshots Created During Data Replication in Chapter 16 e f you have both regular and SnapMirror snapshots in the volume avoid reverting to a snapshot taken before the SnapMirror snapshot If you must revert to a snap shot taken before the SnapMirror snapshot after the reversion the volume contains no SnapMirror snapshot that is essential for the incremental update of the mirror The filer must re create the base line version of the mirror Disk and File System Management3 23 e For example vo 7 is the source volume for data replication and it contains two snapshots hourly 0 and filerA vol1 2 f hourly O was taken earlier than filerA vol1 2 and you revert vol1 to hourly O you cannot find filerA vol1 2 after the reversion As a result the filer cannot start an incremental update of the mirror It must re create the baseline version of the mirror Effects of Reverting a Root Volume Because the etc directory of the root volume contains configuration information about the filer reverting the root volume might change the filer configuration The fol lowing list describes the effects of reverting the root volume e The volume loses the changes that were made to the etc directory after the snapshot creation time Suppose you change the IP address of an interface on the filer after the hourly 0 snapshot was taken If you revert the root volume to the hourl
524. reserve should be increased using snap reserve or else some of the snapshots should be deleted using snap delete After deleting some snapshots it may make sense to alter the volume s snapshot schedule using snap schedule to reduce the number of snapshots that are kept on line The following example shows file system inode usage for a specified volume filer df i vol volO Filesystem iused free iused Mounted on vol volO 164591 14313 92 vol volO You can increase the number of inodes in a file system at any time using the maxfiles command see maxfiles Command Reference A 23 df SEE ALSO maxfiles rc snap A 24 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide disk NAME disk RAID disk configuration control commands SYNOPSIS disk fail disk name disk remove disk name disk scrub start disk scrub stop disk swap disk unswap DESCRIPTION The disk fail command forces a file system disk to fail the disk remove com mand unloads a spare disk so that you can physically remove the disk from the filer The disk scrub command causes the filer to scan disks for media errors If a media error is found the filer tries to fix it by reconstructing the data from parity and rewriting the data Both commands report status messages when the opera tion is initiated and return completion status when an operation has completed The filer s hot swap capability allows removal or addition
525. restricts the user Ifine to 500 MB of disk space in the home volume but places no restriction on the number of files he can have You can leave the file limit blank to indicate that no limit is imposed but you cannot omit the value for disk space The third line places no restriction on either disk usage or file usage by using a limit field of This may be useful for tracking usage on a peruser or pergroup basis without imposing any usage limits The next two lines restrict the stooges group and the vol vol0 export atree to 750 MB and 76 800 files each in the root volume A 142 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide quotas A user or group is specified by one of the following values a user or group name which must appear in the password or group database either in the etc passwd or etc group file on the filer or in the password or group NIS map if NIS is enabled on the filer and is being used for the pass word or group database a numerical user or group ID the pathname of a file owned by that user or group The user or group identifier for a user or group quota can be followed by an vol volume string which specifies the volume to which the quota applies If the string is omitted the quota applies to the root volume A quota of type tree can only be applied to a qtree which is a directory in the root directory of a specified volume A qtree is created with the qtree create
526. rict Directory Access 0 ooooooooocooo o 6 5 Restricting Access to home 2 2 2 000 cee 6 6 The access Optlon 2 2 d Goering Oe as 6 6 SYNTAX os cs etes oup gun dope iket oath nls Asad clase t ede Mae fuga tolg 6 6 LIS mos artus ete E E RESI ama Mee ete teet afit ta ranae aos ar dd 6 6 Ms s e ede cte e Gl e eer eio eee dee ce 6 6 VILA attire ss ese asinum LU Me tH Le Eo AN tM LIE EA M a d 6 6 MATS oet A tese often Sn ed A 6 6 RESUIGHONS ersi scusa mete taa zat aed acus ata ole ait des Y d 6 6 The cm Optoma ensi er we bas aes oe Rid Wao hee PRS Ede 6 7 SVItaX c Xd bt nutre seeds Sy Le moet ed sas 6 7 A A REED 6 7 RESTICUON Ses sess anta e SY A Mag E bine eee eee 6 7 The sto OPTION Hss ou tnis tet a ee do Tela dl daa ala e ut hos 6 7 SVN LAX ae a Duro rase ttd da DT Eas t eti totem 6 7 The exportts Command uc EC SEEPESTR RAE DEG aS 6 7 Usirig the exportfs Comnamndr ecu on X ear teeth utile med s 6 7 Syntax anug TTT 6 7 Canceling AlMEXPpOrtS obra Asche dans 6 8 Updating Exports Through etc exportS oooooooooccooo 6 8 The etc netgro p File ei orc ERR AREE DER 6 9 The etc netgroup File Defines Groups of Clients 6 9 SM eene a une ed a Ae ne usw Y c URS Sort Ls sud 6 9 El cde EPIIT 6 9 Member listSyntaxr aes cena o dae 6 9 RESTRICTIONS treu MERE CERE idee eR Seah as 6 9 Changes Take Effect Immediately liiis iss 6 9 Example of etc netgroups liiis 6 10 Example of etc
527. rictions to apply to a volume other than the root volume for example the home volume enter the following line vol home user jdoe user vol home 300M 20K Substitute the values you want for 300M and 20K 3 Use the quota on command including the volume name For example if quo tas are already on for the home volume enter the following commands quota off home quota on home Quotas and Maximum Number of Files11 7 Alternatively if jdoe is already under quota restriction for example if his files were restricted by a default user quota enter the following command so that the user quota you just created can take effect quota resize home Creating a Group Quota Follow these steps to limit disk space used by a group named service 1 Decide which group should be limited by a disk quota In this example the group is the owner of vol home user service That is the filer restricts disk usage of files with the same GID as vol home sroup service 2 Add the following line to the quotas file vol home group service group 700M 100K Substitute the values you want for 700M and 100K You can also use the GID of the group or the name of the group If you want the restrictions to apply to a vol ume other than the root volume for example the home volume enter the following line vol home group service group vol home 700M 100K Substitute the values you want for 700M and 100K 3 Use the quota on command If quotas are alread
528. rivileges Your privileges UNIX File Access Detail Displays UNIX file access detail displays show the same kind of information as the Windows file access event detail screens but instead of an object name NFS access appears because the file is being accessed through NFS In addition UNIX file access detail displays show the following information about the file that you are monitoring e The ID of the volume in which the file is located e The ID of the latest snapshot in which the file is located The inode of the file This information enables you to find the file using the 1s i command Unsuccessful File Access Detail Display An unsuccessful file access detail display appears when a user could not access a file For example an unsuccessful file access occurs when a user tries to access a file but does not have permission to access it The display shows the ID of the user who tried to access the file and an indication that the access attempt was unsuccessful Lost Record Event Detail Display If the system could not create an audit record the Lost record event detail display gives a reason such as the following reason Internal resources allocated for the queueing of audit messages have been exhausted leading to the loss of some audits Number of audit records discarded 1 7 28 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Event Auditing Overview Description This ove
529. rmal operation of your appliance There is a troubleshooting checklist for Fibre Channel problems in your System Administrator and Command Reference Guide that may help identify and correct the problem If the confidence factor is reported as less than 1 go through the troubleshooting checklist for Fibre Channel loop problems in the System Administrator and Command Reference Guide and re run the fctest command after making any suggested modifications to your Fibre Channel setup The actual arithmetic that is used to compute the confidence factor is as follows The number of Fibre Channel frame errors is obtained by adding the number of CRC and Synchronization errors with each sync error weighted ten times as much as a CRC error The number of errors is then divided by the total number of Fibre Channel frames inbound outbound The quotient is subtracted from 1 to get the final answer C 1 Cre 10Sync F where C the confidence factor representing the integrity of your FC system Command Reference A 37 fctest Crc 2 number of CRC errors observed in the Fibre Channel frames Sync number of Fibre Channel synchronization errors F the total number of inbound and outbound frames seen by the adapter A 38 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide filestats NAME filestats collect file usage statistics SYNOPSIS filestats ages ages timetype a m c cn sizes sizes
530. rmation 19 3 Description When On directories in the path to a file are not required to have the X traverse permission Y NOTE This option does not apply in UNIX qtrees or volumes The cifs guest_account Option Default None Description When you leave cifs guest account blank a CIFS user can log in to the filer without an account in the password database provided that a domain controller authenticates the user When you set cifs guest account to the name of an account in the NIS passwd map or etc passwd typically guest guest access to the filer is enabled and the user has the UNIX user ID and the group ID of the guest account For more infor mation see Enabling Guest and Generic Access in Chapter 7 The cifs home dir Option Default None Description Specifies the complete path name of the homes directory The directories under this path should have the names of users as their names When a CIFS user connects to the filer and there is a directory name that exactly matches the user s name the user sees a share of that name truncated to 12 characters that is the user s home directory Only the user can access the home directory using this share All other users are denied access The cifs idle timeout Option Default 18000 Description Specifies the number of seconds that elapse before the filer disconnects an idle ses sion The value can range from 600 through 4 000 000 effectively infinite 19
531. roup and etc hosts equiv root volume files If you do not use any host names you do not need etc hosts By default the filer reads the etc hosts file in the root volume whenever it needs to resolve host names so changes to the file take effect immediately If you change the IP address for an interface the new IP address doesn t take effect until you reboot the filer and execute the appropriate ifconfig command from etc rc It is safest to reboot the filer after changing any etc file to make sure that the new configuration works correctly If you use DNS and you put files first in the etc nsswitch conf file in the root volume The filer looks up host addresses in etc hosts in the root volume before sending queries to the DNS server Therefore it is important that each entry in etc hosts contains accurate information To reduce the need for updating information in etc hosts in the root volume when using DNS keep only a minimum number of entries in etc hosts If you use NIS You can do one of the following actions Modify the Makefile of the NIS master to copy the NIS master s etc hosts file from the root volume to the filer when it is changed Have the filer use NIS directly Example You can put the following line at the end of the NIS Makefile section for hosts time QGmntdir tmp dell etc mnt if d mntdir then rm f S mntdir mkdir mntdir f1i for filer in filerl filer2 filer3 do
532. rs NT DOMAIN Installers BUILTIN Users BUILTIN Administrators User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users Ckckckckckck KKK KKK KKK UID 1129 from 10 100 4 41 gt NT DOMAIN hawleyr kCkckckckckck ck ck ck KKK KK UNIX uid 1129 NT membership NT DOMAINMhawleyr NT DOMAIN Domain Users NT DOMAIN Installers NT DOMAINNSU Users BUILTIN Users User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users CkCkckckckck ck ck ck ck KKK KK Total WCC entries 3 oldest is 156 sec Total Administrator privileged entries 1 indicates members of BUILTIN Administrators group File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Users 23 Displaying a Mapping Result for a UNIX Name Description This procedure displays what the current mapping of the specified UNIX name of a UNIX user would result in but does not change the WAFL credential cache itself You use this procedure if a UNIX user cannot access a file that the user should be able to access and you suspect that mapping problems might be part of the problem Step To display what the current mapping of a UNIX name would result in but not change the WAFL credential cache enter the following command wcc u uname uname is the UNIX name of a user You can further narrow the specification of the user by adding i followed by the IP address of the host that the user is on You can get more
533. rs to Letters Port number Letter 1 a 2 b 3 C 4 d How Interfaces Are Named Table 2 11 shows how interfaces other than virtual interfaces are named and how interface names are combined with card slot numbers and port letters to make their names unique Filer Administration Basics 2 19 Table 2 11 How Interfaces Are Named Interface type Letter used in name Examples of names Ethernet single e e0 el Ethernet quad port e e0a e0b e0c e0d ela elb Virtual Interface Names The name of a virtual interface is a string that is no longer than 15 characters that meets the following criteria e t must begin with a letter e t must not contain a space e t must not already be in use for a virtual interface Virtual interface names are case sensitive About Using Interface Names in Scripts When you write or modify shell scripts that involve interface names remember the interface naming conventions that the filer uses Because the slot in which an inter face card is installed is a part of the interface name different filers might have different interface names Filer Host Names The first time the setup program runs the filer creates a host name for each installed interface by appending the interface name to the host name Host Name Example A filer named filer with a single Ethernet interface in slot O and a quad port Ethernet interface in slot 1 has the host names shown in Table 2 12 2 20
534. rser function at the traphost application or a management script to interpret the TRAP name OID value fields and so on EXAMPLES A typical set of snmp commands in the etc rc file will look like the following snmp contact Network Manager snmp location Bldg 2 Lab 3a snmp community add ro private snmp traphost add snmp mgr1 snmp traphost add snmp mgr2 snmp init 1 FILES etc rc startup command script where snmp commands must be added etc hosts hosts name database SEE ALSO autosupport snmpd rc A 96 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME sysconfig sysconfig display filer configuration information SYNOPSIS sysconfig d m r t v s ot DESCRIPTION sysconfig displays the configuration information about the filer Without any arguments the output includes the Data ONTAP 5 3 version number and a sep arate line for each I O device on the filer If the slot argument is specified sysconfig displays detail information for the specified physical slot slot O is the system b OPTIONS d Disp m Disp thet r Disp t Disp v Disp nel h desc SEE ALSO version oard and slot n is the nth expansion slot on the filer ays vital product information for each disk ays tape library information To use this option the autoload setting of ape library must be off when the filer boots ays RAID configuration information
535. rticularly useful for revealing file access patterns on your filer from which you can determine whether you should install more NVRAM system memory or disks Depending on the applications that access the filer the computers on the network and the network configuration the following suggested actions might improve your filer s performance e The data in the Cache age column indicates how fast read operations are cycling through system memory If the values in the Cache age column are consistently below 5 the filer might benefit from more system memory Cache age shows the age of the oldest read only blocks in memory A low cache age means that the filer is retrieving information from disk instead of from memory For informa tion about adding memory see About the Uptime Command If the CPU utilization percentage in the CPU column is low but you are not getting the expected performance you might need to add disks to the system e f CPU utilization is high you might need to add another filer e fthe network traffic shown in the Net Kb s column is at or near the capacity of the network interface 1 MB per Ethernet adapter you might need to add another network adapter card to the system System Information and Performance17 3 About the uptime Command The upt ime command prints the current time the length of time the system has been up and the total number of NFS operations the system has performed since it was last booted E
536. rtual interface The vif create command creates a virtual interface The name of the virtual inter face to be created is specified as vifn where n is a number Make sure that the specified virtual interface name is not already in use Use theifconfig command to check and see what virtual interface names are being used You can specify up to four Ethernet interfaces in the command The interfaces do not have to be on the same network card However some Ethernet switches or routers require that all Ethernet interfaces forming a virtual interface be either half duplex or full duplex Check the documentation that comes with your Ether net switch or router to see whether you need to configure the filer Ethernet interfaces to be half duplex or full duplex The vif destroy command eliminates an existing virtual interface You must con figure the virtual interface down using the ifconfig command before entering the vif destroy command The vif stat command displays the number of packets received and transmitted on each Ethernet interface that makes up the virtual interface You can specify the time interval in seconds at which the statistics are displayed By default the statistics are displayed at one second intervals EXAMPLES The following example creates a virtual interface filer vif vif1 create e0 e7a e6b e8 The following example eliminates virtual interface 1 filer vif destroy vif1 A 104 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760
537. rview of how to audit events contains steps that are described in detail in later sections Steps To audit events complete the following steps 1 Enable CIFS access logging as described in Enabling CIFS Access Logging 2 Seta system ACL on the files you want to audit as described in Setting a Sys tem ACL on a File This involves specifying the users or groups whose access to the file you want to audit 3 Use the Event Viewer as described in Viewing Events in a Security Log to view the security log Enabling CIFS Access Logging Description Use this procedure to enable CIFS access logging You follow this procedure when you want to start logging file access events by a specified user on a particular file After you complete this procedure the filer is ready to process access logging information Step To enable CIFS access logging enter the following command options cifs access logging enable on Disabling CIFS Access Logging Description Use this procedure to disable CIFS access logging You follow this procedure when you want to stop logging file access events and free the resources that are used by access logging After you complete this procedure access logging stops CIFS Administration 7 29 Step To disable CIFS access logging enter the following command options cifs access logging enable off Specifying the Active Event Log Description Use this procedure to specify the active event log
538. s What Editor to Use The filer does not include a local editor You must use an editor from a client to change filer configuration files Where Configuration Files Reside Configuration files reside in the etc directory in the filer s root volume Choosing an NFS or a CIFS Client The procedure for modifying configuration files is different depending on whether you edit the files from an NFS client or a CIFS client If you use an NFS client edit the files from the administration host If you use a CIFS client connect to the filer as Administrator Editing Files From an NFS Client Table 2 2 describes how to edit configuration files from an NFS client Filer Administration Basics 2 3 Table 2 2 Editing Configuration Files From a NIFS Client Step Action 1 If the NFS client is Then the administration host Mount the filer root volume to the host not the administration host 1 Mount the filer root volume to the administration host 2 From the administration host edit the etc exports file on the root volume to grant root permission to the client 3 Use the filer console a telnet client or the rsh command to issue the fol lowing command to the filer exportfs 4 Mount the filer root volume to the client 2 From the client use a text editor to edit the files in the etc directory Editing Files From a CIFS Client To edit configuration files from a CIFS client perform the
539. s e Understanding usable space on each disk e Handling disk failures e Effects of disk failure on filer operation Understanding RAID Groups The filer uses RAID Level 4 to ensure data integrity even when one of the disks fails The file system design together with the support for RAID optimizes filer perfor mance and enables you to incrementally expand the filer s disk storage capacity In a RAID group different disks have different functions Most of the disks in the RAID group are data disks One disk is the parity disk which enables the filer to recover the data on a data disk if one fails Multiple RAID groups The filer supports multiple RAID groups The factory default filer configuration contains one RAID group The filer supports up to 32 RAID groups Each RAID group belongs to only one volume you cannot assign more than one vol ume to the same RAID group Spare disks are used by RAID groups as needed They do not have to be in the same PowerVault 700N storage system to be available to a RAID group The filer Disk and File System Management 3 1 automatically assigns disks to RAID groups and creates new RAID groups as each RAID group is filled with its maximum number of disks RAID group size The following characteristics apply to RAID group size The default number of disks in a RAID group including the parity disk is 14 e ARAID group must contain at least two disks e The largest RAID group size yo
540. s they might require 25 40 seconds to come up to speed as the system checks the device addresses on each adapter and returns to normal operation 2 Type the following command sysconfig r 3 Checkthe sysconfig r output to verify that the new disk has been added Adding Disks to Volumes To add new disks to a volume perform the following steps 1 Enter the command sysconfig r to verify that there are spare disks available for you to add 2 Add the disks to a volume by entering the command vol add volume ndisks where volume is the name of the volume and ndisks is the number of disks you want to add to the volume Refer to the vol 1 man page for details about adding disks to volumes Removing a Failed Disk When a RAID disk has failed you need not enter any commands just remove the failed disk from the PowerVault 700N storage system Removing a Hot Spare Disk If you want to swap disks because you want to use a hot spare disk in another filer perform the following steps 1 Type the following command and use the output to determine the disk number sysconfig r 3 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide 2 Type the following command to spin down the disk replacing disk name with the name of the disk from the output in Step 1 disk remove disk name After the disk stops spinning the disk is ready to be removed 3 Remove the disk from the filer following the
541. s You Can Perform You can perform the following tasks to manage WebNFS service e Change the root directory Disable the root directory e Turn off WebNFS service Changing the Root Directory To change the WebNFS root directory perform the following steps NOTE If you use the vol rename command to change the name of the volume in X which the WebNFS root directory resides remember to use this procedure to specify the new name of the root directory 1 Enter the following command replacing newdir with the path of the new root directory options nfs webnfs rootdir newdir Example To change the root directory to vol volO corpwebfiles you the follow ing command options web webnfs rootdir vol vol0 corpwebfiles 2 Enter the following command to enable the root directory options nfs webnfs rootdir set TRUE Disabling the Root Directory To disable the root directory enter the following command options nfs webnfs rootdir set FALSE Turning Off WebNFS Service To turn off WebNFS service enter the following command options nfs webnfs enable off 6 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Displaying NFS Statistics About Displaying NFS Statistics The nfsstat Command Displays NFS and RPC Statistics The n sstat command displays statistics about NFS and Remote Procedure Calls RPCs for the filer You can use the output of this command to find performance bot
542. s a helper application the user can view a file named file pict as a graphics file on the client Translating URLs How the Filer Responds to URLs You can specify that the filer s response to an HTTP request be dependent on the URL For example you can configure the filer to redirect a particular request to a spe cific directory or to prevent access to a particular directory that is specified in the URL How the filer maps its responses to URLs is defined in a configuration file named etc httpd translations Each entry in the configuration file contains up to three fields in the following format as shown in Table 8 2 rule template result Table 8 2 URL Response Fields Field Description rule Defines the response of the filer to a request template Specifies a component of a URL result Depends on the rule as described in the following section Translation Rules Supported by the Filer This section explains the meanings of the rules It also describes the format required for each type of entry in etc httpd translations The Map Rule The map rule specifies that if a component of a URL matches the template the request is mapped to another directory within the HTTP root directory on the same host as defined in the result field For example the following etc httpd translations entry causes any requests to a URL containing the image bin directory to be mapped to the usr local http images directory map
543. s are separated from each other by a comma A field con taining an asterisk means that the field is irrelevant EXAMPLE The following snapmirror conf entry copies vol vol1 on filerA to vol vol2 on filerB at a maximum rate of 2 000 kilobytes per second FilerB updates the mirror at 10 45 a m 11 45 a m 12 45 p m 1 45 p m 2 45 p m 3 45 p m and 4 45p m Monday through Friday The asterisk means that the data replication schedule is not affected by the day of month filerA vol1 filerB vol2 kbs 2000 45 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 Command ReferenceA 153 syslog conf NAME syslog conf syslogd configuration file DESCRIPTION The syslog conf file is the configuration file for the syslogd daemon see syslogd lt consists of lines with two TAB separated fields selector action The selector field specifies the types of messages and priorities to which the line applies The action field specifies the action to be taken if a message the syslogd daemon receives matches the selection criteria The selector field is encoded as a facility a period and a level with no inter vening white space Both the facility and the level are case insensitive The facility describes the part of the system generating the message and is one of the following keywords auth cron daemon and kern Here s a short descrip tion of each facil ity keyword kern Messages generated by the filer kernel daemon System daemons such as the r
544. s enough tape for your additional data 14 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Appending a Dump To skip over a previously created dump file and append a dump on a tape device use the sf command as in the following example mt f nrst0a fsf 1 Rewinding a Tape To rewind a tape use the rewind command as in the following example mt f nrst0a rewind Taking a Tape Drive Off Line To rewind the tape and if appropriate take the tape drive off line by unloading the tape use the offline command as in the following example mt f nrst0a offline Displaying Status Information To display status information about the tape unit use the status command as in the following example mt f nrst0a status Tape drive Quantum DLT7000 Status ready write enabled Format 85937 bpi 70 GB w comp fileno 0 blockno 95603 resid 0 Tape Device Management 14 5 14 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 15 Volume Copy Using the vol copy Command Set About This Chapter Overview of Volume Copy The filer can copy data from one volume to another volume at a given time The result of copying a volume is an off line volume containing the same data as the source filer at the time you initiated the copy operation Introduction to the Filer s Commands for Copying Volumes Purposes of the vol copy Command Set The
545. s in the rls volume The group publications can use 750 MB of disk space with no restrictions on the number of files in the root volume The group that owns vol home eng can use 750 MB of disk space and 76 800 files in the cad volume The atree proj1 in the cad volume can use 750 MB of disk space and 76 800 files The writers group can use 150 MB of disk space and an unlimited number of files in the proj1 qtree provided that the quotas on the proj1 qtree are not exceeded Any user not otherwise mentioned in this file can use 50 MB of disk space and 15 360 files in the root volume In the proj1 qtree any user not otherwise mentioned in this file can use 50 MB of disk space and 10 240 files Any group not otherwise mentioned in this file can use 750 MB of disk space and 87040 files in the root volume In the proj1 qtree any group not otherwise mentioned in this file can use 100 MB of disk space and 76 800 files The user mhoward can use 150 MB of disk space and 102 400 files in the root volume In the proj1 qtree mhoward can use 75 MB of disk space and 76 800 files 11 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide There is no limit as to how much disk space or how many files the user mfisher can use You can however use the quota report command to display the amount of disk space and the number of files used by this user Both user and group quotas apply to the ent
546. s is also present show routing sta tistics instead w wait Show network interface statistics at intervals of wait seconds DISPLAYS The default display for TCP sockets shows the local and remote addresses send window and send queue size in bytes receive window and receive queue sizes in bytes and the state of the connection For UDP sockets it shows the local and remote addresses and the send and receive queue size in bytes Address formats are of the form host port or network port if a socket s address spec ifies a network but no specific host address If known the host and network addresses are displayed symbolically according to the databases etc hosts and etc networks respectively If a symbolic name for an address is not known or if the n option is specified the address is printed numerically according to the address family Unspecified or wildcard addresses and ports appear as The interface display specified by the 4 or l options provides a table of cumula tive statistics regarding packets transferred errors and collisions The network addresses of the interface and the maximum transmission unit mtu are also displayed If the interface is currently down then a is appended to the inter face name When an interval is specified a summary of the interface information consisting of packets transferred errors and collisions is displayed The routing table display indicates the available rou
547. s not found in the local file it will then try the NIS service If the host name is still not found then it will attempt a DNS lookup The NIS client can be enabled on the filer by running the setup command see setup or by manually editing the configuration files as described below If NIS is enabled by running the setup command then the NIS domain name needs to be entered Enabling NIS without the setup command 1 Edit the etc rc file see rc to make sure that the option specifying the NIS domain name is set and the option to enable NIS is on For example options nis domainname dell com options nis enable on 2 Reboot the filer for these changes to take effect If the above options com mands are also entered from the console the reboot can be avoided If the options are entered via the console only they are not saved across a reboot Enabling NIS with the setup command At setup time one can choose to enable NIS when prompted to do so setup then queries for the NIS domain name SEE ALSO setup rc resolv conf nsswitch conf Command ReferenceA 165 rmt NAME rmt remote magtape protocol module SYNOPSIS etc rmt DESCRIPTION etc rmt is a special command that can be used by remote computers to manip ulate a magnetic tape drive over a network connection for example the UNIX dump and restore commands often can either use etc rmt to access a remote tape or have rdump and rrestore variants that can do so e
548. s of groups and the user IDs of the members of each group for use by the HTTP daemon in executing the access controls declared in etc httpd access SYNTAX group_id1 user_id1 user ia2 SEE ALSO httpd access A 130 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide httpd hostprefixes NAME httpd hostprefixes configuration of HTTP root directories for virtual hosts SYNOPSIS etc httpd hostprefixes DESCRIPTION The httpd hostprefixes file maps virtual hosts used in HTTP to corresponding root directories The same configuration file is used for both IP virtual hosts dis criminated by the IP address used for connecting to the server and HTTP virtual hosts discriminated by the Host header used in HTTP requests Each virtual host has a corresponding subdirectory within the directory specified by the option httpd rootdir This subdirectory is called the virtual host root direc tory Clients connected to a virtual host can only access files within the virtual host root directory In the httpd hostprefixes file each line consists of a virtual host root directory followed by the names and IP addresses of a virtual host If you specify an IP address the virtual host root directory is associated with the given virtual host for IP level virtual hosting If you specify a name the virtual host root directory is associated with the virtual host with that name using HTTP level virtual hosting If the
549. s of the dump Command The dump command consists of five passes After you enter the dump command the filer displays messages showing which pass is in progress In passes 1 and 2 the filer traverses directories to search for files to be backed up The filer backs up a file if the file meets these requirements e The file is included in the dump path The file has changed since the previous backup at a lower dump level e The file is not excluded by the exclude list specified in the dump command Example If you initiate a level 1 dump command to back up vol volO the filer searches for files in vol volO that have changed since the previous level 0 backup In passes 1 and 2 the filer also creates the maps described in Format of the Backup Data In passes 3 and 4 the filer writes the data to tape in ascending inode order In pass 5 the filer writes the ACL information to tape Data Backup 12 5 How the dump Command Writes and Stores Data on Tape About This Section The dump command transfers a number of blocks of data at a time to an output file on tape This section provides information about how the command writes and stores these blocks of data which helps you decide the dump command format appropriate for your backup Meaning of Tape Block A tape block is 1 kilobyte of data In the dump command you can specify the number of tape blocks that are transferred in each write operation This number is called the
550. s on the filer are displayed The qtree oplocks command enables or disables oplocks for files and directories in a gtree or in a volume If name is the path name to a qtree the attribute applies to files and directories in the specified qtree The path name to a quota tree does not need to end with a slash If name is the path name to a volume the attribute applies to those files and directories in qtree O The path name to a volume must end with a slash Command Reference A 73 qtree If the cifs oplocks enable option is off oplocks are not sent even if you enable the oplocks on a perquota tree basis with the qtree oplocks command The cifs oplocks enable option is enabled by default If you do not specify enable or disable in the qtree oplocks command the oplock attribute for name is displayed If you omit name the oplock attributes for all quota trees on the filer are displayed EXAMPLES The following example sets the security style of a qtree named marketing in the root volume to ntfs filer qtree security marketing ntfs The following example sets the security style of a qtree named engineering in the vol1 volume to ntfs filer qtree security vol vol1 engr ntfs The following example sets the security style of the root volume to UNIX filer qtree security UNIX The following example sets the security style of the vol1 volume to UNIX filer qtree security vol vol1 UNIX The following example disables oplocks
551. s performed on line that is the filer conducts the test in the background while continuing otherwise normal operation This kind of data error can happen only when you boot a system after a failure or after you turn off a filer without using the halt command Volume Problems Types of Volume Problems Described This section describes the following types of volume problems Failed mounts and stale file handles e Volume name problems Failed Mounts and Stale File Handles Changing Volume Names Can Cause Mount and File Handle Problems If mounts fail and clients see stale file handles it might be because you renamed a volume and it is not exported anymore This is because the new volume name was not in the etc exports file on the root volume Procedure for Fixing the etc exports Problem To fix the problem edit the etc exports file on the filer default volume to change the old volume name to the new volume name Results The problem is resolved 18 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Volume Name Problems Volume Naming Rules A valid volume name has the following characteristics e The prefix is followed by either a letter or an underscore It contains only letters digits and underscores tis not longer than 255 characters Examples of Volume Names Examples of valid volume names are e tech pubs e SW Engineering e Dept 32 Error Messages About Vo
552. s the user id and encrypted password pairs The pairs have the following format user id encrypted passwd HTTP Administration 8 3 84 The pairs are copied in from a machine on which the user has a password The etc httpd group File The etc httpd group file contains a group id and a list of user ids in that group in the following format group id user id user id The lists are copied in from a machine that has a similar list Web Page Protection Examples The following etc httpd access file restricts access to vol vol0 home htdocs private spec to only the user bob Directory vol vol0 home htdocs private spec AuthName polard Private Stuff Limit GET require user bob Limit GET Directory The Limit GET and Limit GET directives which might have been imported from an Apache or NCA Web server are not supported To be used on a filer the file does not need to be edited to remove the Limit GET directive the filer ignores the directive and all other directives not mentioned in this chapter The following sample procedure restricts user access to a particular directory 1 Enter the following lines in the etc httpd access file XDirectory vol vol0 home htdocs private specs gt AuthName Social commentary require group engineering lt Directory gt 2 Enter the following line in etc httpd group engineering bob larry nancy rose The ol vol0 home htdocs private specs directory is
553. s v2 df_2gb_lim 18 18 19 10 nfs v3 enable 19 10 nfs webnfs enable 19 11 nfs webnfs rootdir 19 11 nfs webnfs rootdirset 19 11 nis domainname 19 11 nis enable 19 12 no_atime_update 17 9 nosnapdir 9 4 penfsd umask 19 11 raid reconstruct speed 3 6 19 12 raid scrub enable 3 3 19 12 raid timeout 3 5 19 12 telnet hosts 19 19 vol copy throttle 15 10 volume options minra 19 15 no atime update 19 15 nosnap 19 16 nosnapdir 19 16 raidsize 19 17 root 19 17 vol copy throttle 19 20 wafl maxdirsize 17 8 19 21 wafl root only chown 19 21 wafl wcc minutes valid 5 17 5 20 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide P packets responses to 4 14 panic messages 18 19 parity disks 3 1 role 3 2 passwords lost 18 11 pcnfsd umask option 19 11 performance improving 17 3 permissions changing from Windows NT 7 23 for snapshots 9 2 on exported directories 6 4 ping command 18 13 Q qtrees administrative actions 1 7 backup of 12 7 creating 10 6 description 1 7 displaying information about 10 8 moving files in and out of 10 3 oplocks settings 10 7 parameters 10 1 restoring 12 11 13 5 13 6 security style 10 3 use for backups 10 2 use in projects 10 2 what they are 10 1 quota command 11 5 disk setting up 11 1 displaying report 11 7 effects of snapshots on 9 11 effects on clients when exceeded 11 9 how to impo
554. schedule which keeps six daily snapshots and two weekly snapshots snap sched home 2 6 8 8 12 16 20 Snapshots 9 11 e Ifthe data changes very quickly reduce the number of snapshots scheduled For example if a volume is filled and emptied each day for example a volume storing large temporary files for a CAD application it might not make sense to use daily or weekly snapshots at all On a very active volume schedule snapshots every hour and keep them for just a few hours or turn off snapshots For example the following schedule creates a snapshot every hour and keeps three snap sched home 0 0 3 This schedule doesn t consume much disk space and it lets users recover files in recent snapshots as long as they notice their mistake within a couple of hours When you create a new volume on a filer the new volume inherits the snapshot schedule from the root volume After you use the volume for a while check how much disk space the snapshots consume in the volume Displaying Snapshot Statistics The snap list command shows the amount of disk space used by snapshots in a specified volume This command enables you to see how much disk space each snap shot uses and helps you determine an appropriate snapshot reserve Command Output Following is an example of the command output If you don t specify a volume name in the command the output contains statistics about each volume snap list vol0 Volume vol0 used total d
555. se on a former mirror 16 6 resizing 11 6 quotas disk information available through SNMP 4 4 information available through the custom MIB 4 4 R RAID 3 6 RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks accessing information through SNMP 4 4 data reconstruction speed 3 6 disk scrubbing 3 3 displaying information about 17 1 group size characteristics 3 2 groups 1 6 3 1 information in the custom MIB 4 4 options 19 12 spare disk use 3 1 support for multiple groups 3 1 RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks displaying information about 17 3 raid reconstruct speed option 3 6 19 12 raid scrub enable option 3 3 19 12 raid timeout command 3 5 raid timeout option 3 5 19 12 raidsize volume option 19 17 read ahead minimal 17 9 read only bit 5 4 reboot 18 11 rebooting from diskette 18 1 recovering data different methods 13 2 removing a hot spare disk 3 10 volumes from a filer 3 8 renamed volume not exported 18 4 renaming volumes 3 14 Index 9 replicating a volume 16 1 requests replies to 4 14 require group directive 8 3 require user directive 8 3 resolving host names 4 8 restarting a filer 18 3 restore 13 5 restore command data that cannot be restored 13 2 examples 13 7 function keys 13 3 how it differs from ufsrestore 13 5 incremental 13 5 options 13 3 purposes of 13 1 space required 13 5 syntax 13 2 when not to use 13 2 where to enter 13 5 Wi
556. see the sample configuration file in etc syslog conf sample FILES etc syslog conf The syslogd configuration file etc syslog conf sample Sample syslogd configuration file SEE ALSO syslogd messages A 156 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide zoneinfo NAME zoneinfo time zone information files SYNOPSIS etc zoneinfo DESCRIPTION The directory etc zoneinfo contains time zone information files used by the timezone command see timezone They are in standard UNIX time zone file format as described below The time zone information files begin with bytes reserved for future use followed by six fourbyte signed values written in a standard byte order the high order byte of the value is written first These values are in order tzh ttisgmtcnt The number of GMT local indicators stored in the file tzh_ttisstdent The number of standard wall indicators stored in the file tzh leapcnt he number of leap seconds for which data is stored in the file he number of transition times for which data is stored in the file tzh timecnt The number of local time types for which data is stored in the file must not be zero tzh typecnt he number of characters of time zone abbreviation strings stored in the file tzh charcnt The above header is followed by tzh timecnt four byte signed values sorted in ascending order These values are written in standard
557. session An idle session is a session in which a user does not have any files opened on the filer The value of this option ranges from 600 to 4 000 000 effectively infinite The default is 1800 cifs netbios aliases Provides a comma separated list of alternative names for the filer A user can connect to the filer using any of the listed names cifs oplocks enable When cifs oplocks enable is on the default the filer allows cli ents to use oplocks opportunistic locks on files Oplocks are a significant performance enhancement but have the potential to cause lost cached data on some networks with impaired reliability or latency particularly wide area networks In general this option should be disabled only to isolate problems cifs perm check use gid This option affects security checking for Windows clients of files with UNIX security where the requestor is not the file owner In all cases Windows client requests are checked against the share level ACL then if the requestor is owner the user perms are used to determine the access If the requestor is not owner and if perm check use gid is on it means files with UNIX security are checked using normal UNIX rules i e if the requestor is a member of the file s owning group the group perms are used otherwise the other perms are used If the requestor is not owner and if perm check use gid is off7 files with UNIX security style are checked in a way which works bette
558. shd daemon see rshd the routing daemon see routed the SNMP daemon see snmpd etc auth The authentication system e g messages logged for Telnet Sessions cron The system s internal cron facility The evel describes the severity of the message and is a keyword from the fol lowing ordered list higher to lower emerg alert crit err warning notice info and debug Here is a short description of each evel keyword emerg A panic condition that results in the disruption of normal service alert A condition that should be corrected immediately such as a failed disk crit Critical conditions such as hard disk errors err Errors such as those resulting from a bad configuration file warning Warning messages notice Conditions that are not error conditions but that may require spe cial handling info Informational messages such as the hourly uptime message see uptime A 154 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide syslog conf debug Debug messages used for diagnostic purposes These messages are suppressed by default If a received message matches the specified facility and is of the specified level or a higher evel the action specified in the action field will be taken Multiple selectors may be specified for a single action by separating them with semicolon characters It is important to note however that each selector can modify the ones preced
559. sing a virtual LAN Is there a trust relationship between the filer and the domain Yes Have the users No Enter the users Yes Have the users No Establish a trust log in with into the etc log in with relationship DOMAIN passwd file DOMAIN between the user s NAMEN NAMA account domain USERNAME USERNAME and the filer s domain Users Cannot Map a Drive If users get an Access Denied message use the following decision table to trouble shoot the problem Table 18 4 Users Cannot Map a Drive Is the filer in the same domain as the PDC Yes No Does the user have access rights to the share Use Server Manager to add the filer to the domain or establish a trust relationship between the domains Yes No Contact Dell techni cal support as described in Get ting Technical Assistance Give the user rights to the share UNIX cpio Problems The cpio Version Should Support 32 bit Inode Definition Numbers If you copy large amounts of data using the UNIX cpio utility some files might be copied incorrectly This happens in UNIX versions of cpio that still use a 16 bit inode Troubleshooting 18 17 definition number Large file systems require a 32 bit inode definition number The problem generally occurs only on file systems with a large number of hard links Why the Problem Occurs Some versions of cpio work by copying each file with hard links once an
560. sing rsh enter the following command useradmin useradd user name password user name is the new administrative user login name password is the new password associated with the new user name Deleting Administrative Users Description Use the userdel option to delete administrative users created with the useradd option of the useradmin command You can use the userdel option at any time to maintain filer security by keeping the administrative user list current 2 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Caution You are not prompted for a password when deleting a user Step To delete an administrative user enter the following command useradmin userdel user name user name is the login name you want to delete Listing Administrative Users Description Use the userlist option to get a list of administrative users on a filer You can use the userlist option at any time to determine whether you need to add or delete administrative users Step To list one or more administrative users using a console telnet or rsh enter the following command useradmin userlist username list username listis a space separated list of login names you want to display NOTE If you do not specify any user names all administrative users are listed Changing an Administrative User Password Description Use the passwd command from a console telnet or rsh to change your adminis trative
561. snapshot taken in the source volume for the data transfer remains but is deleted and replaced by a new snapshot the next time the mirror is Updated The filer stops reading the etc snapmirror conf file every minute Entering the vol snapmirror off command on the destination filer does not affect SnapMirror on the source filer Other filers can continue to replicate data from the source filer 2 fthe vol snapmirror on command is in the etc rc file remove the command NOTE There is no need to enter thevol snapmirror off command in the X etc rc file By default data replication is disabled 16 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Resuming Data Replication for the Entire Filer Description After you disable data replication you can resume it at any time When data replica tion resumes the filer copies the data from the source volume to the mirror that has changed since the last update Prerequisites In addition to the requirements described in Prerequisites on page 10 you must meet these requirements before you can resume data replication e The mirror must have snapmirrored status If you converted the mirror to a regu lar volume the filer cannot resume data replicating on the regular volume If you want to use the regular volume as a mirror again follow the procedure in Repli cating a Volume so that the filer can create a baseline version of the mirror Do not
562. ss share g user rights cifs access delete share g user DESCRIPTION The cifs access command sets or modifies the share level Access Control List ACL of a share The share argument specifies the share whose ACL is to be modified The user argument specifies the user or group of the ACL entry user can be an NT user or group if the filer is using NT domain authentication or it can be a UNIX user or group or it can be the special all encompassing group everyone The rights argu ment can be specified in either NT or UNIX style NT style rights are No Access Read Change Full Control UNIX style rights are a combination of r for read w for write and x for execute If a share level ACL entry for user already exists on the specified share cifs access updates that ACL entry To display the current share level ACL of a share use Windows Server Manager or the cifs shares command OPTIONS g Specifies that user is the name of a UNIX group Use this option when you have a UNIX group and a UNIX user or NT user or group with the same name delete Deletes the ACL entry for user on share EXAMPLES The following example grants NT Read access to the NT user ENGINEER ING mary on the share releases filer cifs access releases ENGINEERING mary Read The following example grants UNIX read and execute access to the user john on the share accounting filer cifs access accounting john rx A 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N
563. ssion for a Specific Client To terminate a CIFS session for a particular client specify the name of the computer in the command For example the following command terminates a CIFS session for a computer named PETERSPC after 10 minutes cifs terminate PETERSPC t 10 Using the cifs restart Command to Restart CIFS Service To restart CIFS service use the cifs restart command as follows cifs restart CIFS server is registering CIFS server is running Reconfiguring the Filer for CIFS When to Reconfigure a Filer for CIFS You can reconfigure the filer for CIFS service at any time for example if you want to change the authentication method from PDC Primary Domain Controller to UNIX password database How to Reconfigure a Filer for CIFS To reconfigure a filer for CIFS follow these steps 1 Enterthe cifs terminate command to stop CIFS service 2 Enterthe cifs setup command to reconfigure CIFS service e f you enter only valid information when you exit the program the filer auto matically restarts CIFS using the new configuration information f you enter some invalid information for example you mistype a domain name when you exit the program the filer restarts CIFS with the previous configuration 7 40 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 8 HTTP Administration NOTES You can use the filer as an HTTP server only if you purchased the licens
564. st be in an existing snapshot not the active file system on the mirror This is because before the dump command writes data from an active file system to tape the filer must create a snapshot in the volume containing the data The filer cannot create snapshots on the mirror which is a read only volume to be used by the dump command You can back up any snapshot displayed by the snap 1ist command on the mirror You can also create a snapshot on the source volume replicate the snapshot to the mirror and use the dump command to back up this snapshot from the mirror to tape Effect of the Dump Command on the Mirror Update Schedule Running the dump command on a mirror might change the mirror update schedule in the following ways e fthe mirror is scheduled to be updated when a dump command is in progress on the mirror the filer delays replicating data from the source volume until the dump command is finished 16 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide e fyoustart the dump command when the filer is replicating data to the mirror the filer stops the replication and does not update the mirror It restarts replication after the dump command is finished Delaying the mirror update is necessary because when the dump command backs up data from a snapshot the snapshot must exist until the command is completed Dur ing a mirror update the filer deletes existing snapshots on the mirror and cop
565. st may have a single device or a comma separated list of devices note that the list must either contain only local devices or only devices on a remote host and in the latter case must refer to devices on one particular remote host e g tapemachine dev rst0 dev rst1 Each file in the list will be used for one dump volume in the order listed if the dump requires more volumes than the number of names given the last file name will used for all remaining volumes after prompting for media changes Use sysconfig t for a list of local tape devices See below for an exam ple of a dump to local tape For a dump to a tape device on a remote host host must support the standard UNIX rmt remote tape protocol By default dump writes to standard output B blocks Set the size of the dump file to the specified number of 1024 byte blocks If this amount is exceeded dump will close the current file and open the next file in the list specified by the f option If there are no more files in that list dump will re open the last file in the list and prompt for a new tape to be loaded It is recommended to be a bit conservative on this option This is one way to allow dump to work with remote tape devices that are limited to 2 GB of data per tape file Update the file ete dumpdates after a successful dump The format of etc dumpdates is readable by people It consists of one free format record per line subtree increment level and ctime for
566. starting another RAID group Suppose a volume currently has one RAID group of 12 disks and its RAID group size is 14 If you add 5 disks to this volume it will have one RAID group with 14 disks and another RAID group with 3 disks The filer does not evenly distribute disks among RAID groups vol destroy volname destroys the volume with the name volname The disks originally in the vol ume become spare disks Only offline volumes can be destroyed vol lang vo name language code displays or changes character mapping on volname vol lang by itself displays a list of supported languages vol lang volname displays the language of the specified volume vol lang volname language code sets the language of volume volname to the language specified by language code vol rename volname newname renames the volume named volname to the name newname If the volume named volname is referenced in the etc exports file remember to make the name change in etc exports also so that the affected file system can be exported by the filer after the filer reboots The vol rename command does not automatically update the etc exports file vol online vo name brings the volume named volname online This command takes effect imme diately The volume specified in this command must be currently offline or foreign If the volume is foreign it will be made native before being brought online A foreign volume is a volume that consists of disks moved from
567. stem to a remote tape device on a host that supports the rmt remote tape protocol or to a local tape drive connected directly to the system tape The subtree argument specifies a subtree to be dumped This is one way to allow dump to work with remote tape devices that are limited to 2 GB of data per tape file The specified subtree may be in the active file system e g home or in a snapshot e g snapshot weekly 0 home If the subtree is in the active file system dump creates a snapshot named snapshot for dump X where X is a sequentially incrementing integer This naming convention prevents conflicts between concurrently executing dumps The dump is run on this snapshot so that its output will be consistent even if the filer is active If dump does create a snapshot it automatically deletes the snapshot when it completes Another way to allow dump to work with remote tape devices that are limited to 2 GB of data per tape file is to dump to multiple tape files or volumes TheB option to dump specifies the maximum amount of data to be dumped to one vol ume when that much data has been written to one volume dump will start writing to another volume A list of tape devices can be specified as arguments to the f option and the volumes will be written to the devices in that list in order If there are no more devices in the list dump will re use the last device in the list after prompting the user to indicate that they ve put a new ta
568. stem dump restore or you choose to dump multiple file system trees to make the restore process with multiple tape drives parallel you must seg ment your dump to meet these restrictions One way to plan a dump schedule with a UNIX client system is to go to the root mount point of your filer and use the du command to obtain sizes of underlying subtrees on your filer file system Depending on the restrictions of your client s dump and restore capability or recording capacity of the tape device being used you should specify a dump schedule that fits these restrictions If you choose to segment your dump the norewind device see tape can be used to dump multiple tape files to one physical tape again choose a dump size which meets the criteria of your client restore and capacity of your tape drive The following example shows the du output from a filer file system on a cli ent that supports dump and restore that are greater than 2 GB client du s 4108 etc 21608 finance 5510100 home 3018520 marketing 6247100 news 3018328 users You can use a tape device with approximately 10 GB on each tape to back up this filer The dump schedule for this system can use the norewind tape device to dump the marketing and news subtrees to one tape volume then Command Reference A 33 dump load another tape and use the norewind tape device to dump etc finance home and users subtrees to that tape volume CIFS Data The Data ONTAP 5 3 dump com
569. stent directory or a double disk failure If the System does not reboot after a volume failure take the volume off line as follows 1 Bootthe filer from a system boot diskette into maintenance mode 2 Use the vol command to take the failed volume off line 3 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide If the failed volume was the filer s root volume you must designate another volume as the new root volume File Statistics for Volumes How Data ONTAP 5 3 Provides File Statistics The filestats command provides you with a quick way to display a summary of file statistics within a volume on a filer by reading file information from a snapshot that you specify Information Obtained by the Filestats Command The output from the ilestats command provides you with a list containing the fol lowing information about files from a snapshot in a volume e Size e Creation time Modification time e Owner The filestats Command Syntax The filestats command has the following syntax filestats lages ages sizes sizes timetype a m c cr style readable table html volume volume name snapshot snapshot name The volume and snapshot arguments are required volume name is the name of the volume snapshot name is the name of the snapshot Use the ages timetype sizes and style options when you want to list specific file information from a volume For more information about filestats op
570. stination for a network route can have bits or amp mask after it where bits is the number of high order bits to be set in the net mask or mask is the netmask either as a number defaults to decimal precede with Ox for hexadecimal precede with 0 for octal or as a number IP address OPTIONS f Remove all gateway entries in the routing table If this is used in conjunction with one of the commands route removes the entries before performing the command n Prevent attempts to print host and network names symbolically when report ing actions A 82 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide route DIAGNOSTICS add host net destination gateway The specified route is being added to the table delete host net destination gateway The specified route is being deleted destination gateway done When the f flag is specified each routing table entry deleted is indicated with a message of this form network unreachable An attempt to add a route failed because the gateway listed was not on a directly connected network The next hop gateway must be given not in table A delete operation was attempted for an entry which wasn t present in the table entry already exists An add operation was attempted for an existing route entry routing table overflow An add operation was attempted but the system was unable to allocate memory to create the new entry SEE ALSO routed C
571. strictions to the mirror after converting the mirror to a regular volume make sure that the filer on which the mirror resides contains a copy of the etc quotas file from the source filer Whenever you make a change to the etc quotas file on the source filer make the same change to the copy of the etc quotas file on the destination filer Steps Follow these steps to replicate a volume 1 Add the host name of the destination filer to the etc snapmirror allow file on the source filer Edit the etc snapmirror conf file on the destination filer to specify the volume to be replicated and the schedule at which the mirror is updated Enter the vol snapmirror on command on both the source filer and destina tion filer to enable SnapMirror Result The filer reads the etc snapmirror conf file If the filer is a destination filer specified in the etc snapmirror conf file it establishes a connection with the source filer at the time of the scheduled mirror update If a baseline version of the mirror does not exist the filer takes a snapshot of the source volume at the time of the scheduled mirror update and transfers all data in the snapshot from the source volume to the mirror The filer does not display any messages if it can transfer the data successfully You can check the data replication status following the instructions in Checking Data Replication Status The filer makes subsequent updates to the mirror according to the s
572. structions for the options are included in the Installation and Troubleshooting Guide e Technical information files sometimes called readme files may be installed on your root volume to provide last minute updates about technical changes to your system or advanced technical reference material intended for experienced users or technicians Terminology This guide uses the following terms e Filer refers to a PowerVault F720N F740N or F760N storage system e Systemrefers at a minimum to a filer and a connected PowerVault F700N Disk Array Enclosure DAE storage system A tape backup device can also be a component of the system but is not required Notational Conventions You can enter filer commands on either the system console or from any client com puter that can access the filer through telnet In examples that illustrate commands executed on a UNIX workstation this guide uses the command syntax of SunOS 4 1 x The command syntax and output might differ depending on your version of UNIX This guide uses the term type to mean pressing one or more keys on the keyboard It uses the term enter to mean pressing one or more keys and then pressing the Enter key Key Combinations When describing key combinations this guide uses the hyphen to separate individual keys For example Ctrl D means pressing the Control and D keys simultaneously Also this guide uses the term Enter to refer to the key tha
573. su tanta llena a rem 12 15 Prerequisttesc s e ues ed LM e eee s eS 12 16 ReStPIGHOTIS a s ro ever red x doeet eU hs LO ose hie AA 2 16 Nn P a ata AS 2 16 Examples of Level 0 Backups to a Local Tape File 12 16 Examples of Backups to a Remote Tape File o o o 2 16 Example of an Incremental Backup to a Local Tape Drive 12 17 Examples of Backups to Multiple Tape FileS 0 o o 12 17 Example of Backing Up a Directory From a Shapsh0t 2 17 Example of Backups to a Tape Stacker 0 000000 e eee 12 17 Example of Backing Up Multiple Files or Directories in One dump COMIMANG lui ri ue de trao x etate Pe ED Een 2 17 Example of Backing Up Data Without ACLs 0 o ooooooooooo oo 12 18 Example of Specifying a Blocking Factor s ssas aasaran raaa 12 18 Example of Specifying a Tape File Size ooo oooooooooo ooo 12 18 Example of Excluding Files From a Backup 2 0205 12 19 Example of Backing Up to a Tape Stacker Shared by Multiple Filers 12 19 Example of Backing Up the Entire Filer ooooooooooo ooo o 12 21 Chapter 13 Data Recovery ooooooo ooo momo nn nnn 13 1 Introduction to Data Recovery seed eon cte er E OA qub A 13 1 Why You Want to Restore Data From Tape ssaa annaa aaaea 13 1 Files Were Deleted From Disk but Backed Up to Tape 13 1 Files Are Corr pted s ice oerte
574. syslog e Change Password 3 Use Change Password to reset your filer s adminis trative password e Initialize all disks 4 Use Initialize all disks to zero all disks attached to the filer A NOTE This action will result in a loss of all data on the disks 18 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide e Maintenance mode boot 5 Use Maintenance mode boot to go into Maintenance mode and perform some volume and disk operations and get detailed volume and disk information Maintenance mode is special for the following reasons Most normal functions including file system operations are disabled A limited set of commands is available for diagnosing and repairing disk and volume problems You exit Maintenance mode with the halt command Restarting a Shut Down Filer Procedure for Restarting Filer After Unexpected Shutdown Complete the following steps to restart your filer if it shuts down unexpectedly 1 Write down the messages displayed on the console and the message on the LCD if your filer has an LCD 2 Ifthe console is Then e Showing the mon prompt Enter b for boot to reboot the filer e Showing the ok prompt Enter boot to reboot the filer e Unresponsive Reset the filer by turning it off leaving it off for 30 seconds and turning it back on Results The filer boots and displays the system prompt on the console 3
575. system administrative user s password SYNOPSIS passwd DESCRIPTION passwd changes the filer s administrative user s password First it prompts you for the login name if any non root users are configured Then it prompts you for the current password If you type the current password correctly the filer requests a new password The passwd command imposes no minimum length or special character requirements for root As with any password it is best to choose a password unlikely to be guessed by an intruder All non root administra tive user s password should meet the following restrictions it should be at least 6 characters long it should contain at least two alphabets it should contain at least one digit or special character If the filer is booted from floppy disk selection 3 Change password enables you to reset the root password without entering the old password SEE ALSO useradmin A 70 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide NAME ping send ICMP ECHO REOUEST packets to network hosts SYNOPSIS ping s Rrv host packetsize count DESCRIPTION ping ping uses the ICMP protocol s mandatory ECHO REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO RESPONSE from the specified host or gateway EC datagrams have an IP and ICMP header followed by a struct time HO REQUEST val and then an arbitrary number of bytes used to fill out the packet If host responds
576. t ura RCRUM NOS BRE ILS 6 1 Export Specification Determines Access PrivilegeS 6 2 Ore keyword 1S required ust ur eet e RR E RES 6 2 What the list variable represents 000200002 eeee 6 2 You can combine elements in an entry ooo 6 2 Example 1 exporting default filer volume to administration host 6 2 Example 2 exporting home directory to administration fiost and ellentss xia s zen teh etg at Y Na ta 6 2 Rules For Exporting Volumes And Directories 00020000 022 ee 6 3 Export Each Volume Separately llli iile 6 3 Example a dr suat e Ao dien E eot cen 6 3 Nonexample x3 421234 dc ata is 6 3 Filer Must Resolve Host Names 000000 0c cece lle 6 3 Cannot Restrict Access By Host s a seriat eio ia cece eee 6 3 You Can Export Ancestors and Descendants 0 2 0000005 6 3 Examiple e tios het ita dur e eam a vest ce Duel D oe aa ctl us 6 4 INonexambple xxu ERIGI See eS 6 4 XXI Filer Determines Permissions by Matching Longest Prefix 6 4 Example ioi ie e eod ET eor dg ede br ete ga M 6 4 Edit etc exports After Changing Volume Names 005 6 4 Default etc exports Entries re nesi yaris arkaa RR Ret REA 6 5 vol volO and vol vol0 home Are Exported by Default 6 5 Example of Default exportfs File 2i 6 5 Restricting Access to Volumes and Directories ooooooocccooo o 6 5 Use Export Options to Rest
577. t source destination Specifying the Snapshots to Copy The S and s arguments specify the snapshots to copy Table 15 2 describes the snapshots to copy and the resulting snapshots on the destination volume depending on the argument Table 15 2 Command Syntax for Copying One Volume to Another Snapshots to copy from Snapshots in the snapshot file Argument used the source volume system of the destination volume None The snapshot taken after A snapshot named you enterthe vol copy snapshot for backup n where n start command is a number starting at O S All snapshots in the snap All snapshots in the source vol shot file system of the ume and source volume and the snapshot for backup n where n snapshot taken after you is a number starting at O enter the vol copy start command s followed by The specified snapshot The specified snapshot the name of the snapshot NOTE The vol copy start S command does not copy any snapshots that are created when the copying is in progress For example if the copying lasts from 11 45 p m to 1 00 a m the next day and the filer creates a snapshot named nightly 1 at midnight the filer does not copy the nightly 1 snapshot Specifying the Volumes Involved in the Copy The source and destination arguments are the names of the volumes If a volume is on a different filer precede the volume name with the filer name and a colon For examples illustrating how to specify volume names see Ex
578. t The filer displays a warning message and prompts you to confirm your decision for reverting the volume Between the time you enter the vol snaprestore command and the time when reversion is completed the filer stops deleting and creating snapshots 3 Enter y to confirm that you want to revert the volume Result The filer displays a list of snapshots for you to choose from 4 Enter the name of the snapshot for reverting the volume and go to Step 7 Result The filer displays the name of the volume and the name of the snapshot for the reversion Then it asks whether you want to reboot the filer to proceed with the reversion 5 Enter the following command vol snaprestore volume s snapshot volume s snapshot volume is the name of the volume to be reverted Enter the name only not the complete path snapshot is the name of the snapshot for volume reversion You can enter multiple pairs of volume name and snapshot name in the command Result The filer displays a warning message and prompts you to confirm your decision for reverting the volume Between the time you enter the vol snaprestore command and the time when reversion is completed the filer stops deleting and creating snapshots 3 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Enter y to confirm that you want to revert the volume Result The filer displays the name of the volume and the name of the snapshot for the re
579. t Directories Created llle 2 12 Permissions for the Default DirectorieS oo o oooo oooooooo 2 12 Accessing the Directories sessi s e ep sd th deer dud dod 2 13 Contents of the ete Directory 2 2 cide sce ved eb me Re woes 2 13 How The home Directory Is Used 0 esee 2 14 Melee iust eo Me Echt t cd E e Md Mane us AS 2 15 How the Filer Uses the etc rc File loli 2 15 Procedure for Editing the e tc rc File renato ra pde 2 15 Default te re Fil Contents a cas haw aa ek bbe que RU 2 16 Explanation of Default etc rc Contents 0 0 0 2 16 Changing SNMP Commands in etc rc 6 elles 2 18 XI Naming Conventions for Network Interfaces o o oooooooooooo ooo 2 19 Interface Types the Filer Supports ilii illie 2 19 How Interfaces Are Numbered hb a cach 2 19 How Multiple Ports Are Identified n on llle 2 19 How Interfaces Are Named coi ei Res e DERE xe 2 19 Virtual Interface Names seperate eee eee 2 20 About Using Interface Names in Scripts 0000020002 2 20 Eller Host NameS iy cioe ice e t wre i o ee e ede e pd 2 20 Host Name Example 00 0000 eee 2 20 Reasons to Follow a Special Recovery Procedure o ooo oooo o o o o 2 21 Procedure When the Filer Does Not Boot 2 2200005 2 21 Procedure When Administration Host Cannot Access the Filer 2 21 Core Files s sector et cep d dele ooh ic eis d d op tut 2 22 Abou Core FIGS ob
580. t any arguments For example quota vol0 quotas are on voll quotas are initializing 24 done vol3 quotas are off Use the following command to disable quotas for a volume quota off volume Because the filer remembers whether quotas are on or off even after it reboots there is no need to add a quota command to etc rc Quotas and Maximum Number of Files11 5 Resizing Quotas The quota resize command updates active quotas without recalculating disk usage and is faster than quota off followed by quota on An active quota is one that appears in the output of the quota report command discussed in Dis playing Information about Quotas You use the quota resize command after changing limits for a group or user For example jdoe has a disk quota of 500 MB as shown in the following example Quota Target type disk files vol home user jdoe user 500M 10K user 10M 10K Use the quota resize command to update the quota if jdoe s disk quota were increased as shown in the following example Quota Target type disk files vol home user jdoe user 600M 10K user 10M 10K How Quota Resize Affects Newly Added Quota Targets The quota resize command usually ignores newly added quota targets For each entry that it skips the quota resize command prints the following message quota resize new entry on line n in etc quotas where n is a line number The quota resize command does not ignore newly added quota targets
581. t are special to filers are explained in Table 1 6 1 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 1 6 Data Organization Management Concepts Data Organi zation concept Explanation Data Organization Administrative Actions volume An independent file system qtree A special subdirec tory of the root directory of a vol ume It has the following special attributes e Asecurity style e ACIFS oplocks setting Diskspace and file limits Data Access Management You can specify the following features for a volume e A security style which deter mines whether a volume can contain files that use UNIX secu rity Windows NT File System NTFS security or both type of files Whether it uses CIFS oplocks Disk space and file limits This enables you to customize vol umes for the needs of your users You can specify the following features for a qtree e A security style like that of volumes e Whether it uses CIFS oplocks Disk space and file limits This enables you customize areas for projects and to keep users and projects from monopolizing resources Data ONTAP 5 3 manages access to data by performing the following operations Checks file access permissions against file access requests Checks write operations against file and disk usage quotas that you set Takes snapshots and makes them available so that users can access
582. t cn potat lot ette E M d ERR ekz 2 33 Listor timed ODtIOLIS 25 o ee Dee Te TCR CIEN eb SCA 2 33 Synchronizing Filer Syste m Time ise at bE GER os hae dos x 2 33 ESCAPA E cq bene bues dub coni siis 2 33 Prerequisites is t bubus tt bath ER GE bb ta 2 33 SIGDBS ec tth em iosuada O O e DIDI Re 2 34 Using options Command Options to Maintain Filer Security 2 35 What the Options to the options Command Do ooo oooooooo o 2 35 Software LICENSES s 8 ecu as amc RI MERI Eas ERA quise 2 36 About Software Licenses liliis 2 36 Enablitig SerVIGes ra x e tee BRUDER e opas tet edt 2 36 Displaying Current License CodeS n nana illii illii sls 2 37 Disabling a License liu steep b CES E trece 2 38 Replacing License COdesS o o oooooooooooo eee 2 38 Disk and File System Management 3 1 Disk Concepts best oet axe rr sm apum des to ek 3 1 Chapter Contents oa t etes epe e EE 3 1 Understanding RAID Groups a s cas slait aaa taag es 3 1 About Disk Addresses 0 000 cc eee 3 2 Use Disk Scrubbing to Protect Data From Media ErrorS 3 3 xiii Xiv Understanding Hot Spare Disks n annaa aaa aana eee 3 4 Understanding Hot SWap utr CREER Fey ree eq ORI aM 3 4 Understanding Usable Space on Each Disk annaa ananuna anaana 3 4 Handling Disk Failures 2 e ta EEX Rp cR RA Ren esie 3 4 Effects of Disk Failure on Filer Operation oooooooooooooooo o 3 5 MOS GO Ccepts
583. t generates a carriage return although the key is named Return on some keyboards gt gt Typographical Conventions Typographical conventions used in this guide are shown in the following table Convention Italic type Type of Information Words or characters that require special attention Monospaced font Bold monospaced font File names Placeholders for information you must supply For example if the guide says to enter the arp d hostname command you enter the characters arp d followed by the actual name of the host Man page names Book titles in cross references Command and daemon names Information displayed on the system console or other computer monitors The contents of files Words or characters you type What you type is always shown in lowercase letters unless you must type it in uppercase letters Special Messages This guide contains special messages that are described as follows NOTE A NOTE contains important information that helps you install or operate the system efficiently CAUTION A CAUTION contains instructions that you must follow to avoid damage to the equipment a system crash or loss of data WARNING A WARNING contains instructions that you must follow to avoid personal injury vii viii Chapter 1 Contents Introducing Dell Filers 1 1 ABDOU RIETS s atis hoe wid es cte Ree a RD Seat o a e o edd d n 1 1 Whata F
584. t is transferred How WebNFS Restricts File Access WebNFS access does not use the mount command to enable access to a subtree and does not consider UID GID mappings 6 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Requests are restricted as follows e Requests are honored only for files in subtrees that have been exported e fa subtree has been exported with the o access option files in that subtree are not available through WebNFS Setting Up WebNFS Procedure for Setting Up WebNFS To set up WebNFS perform the following steps 1 Enter the following command to turn on WebNFS options nfs webnfs enable on 2 If you Want to specify a public directory known as the root directory for WebNFS access Then Enter the following commands replacing directory with the path to the root directory options nfs webnfs rootdir directory options nfs webnfs rootdir set TRUE Results All NFS lookups are done relative to the root directory All WebNFS cli ents can access files and directories under the root directory Do not want to specify a public directory for WebNFS access Do nothing Example of Specifying WebNFS Root Directory To use the vol volO webfiles directory as the WebNFS root directory you enter the following commands options nfs webnfs rootdir vol vol0 webfiles options nfs webnfs rootdir set TRUE NFS Administration 6 13 Managing WebNFS Task
585. t produce output as follows cifs sessions sam users shares files opened HAWLEYHOME sam ENG USERS Read denyW NSAMNSROVFFASWAREPPRODXCOMMONNMHTTPDMttpd fast c HAWLEYPC sam ENG USERS The s option displays security information for a specified connected user If you do not specify a user or workstation name the command displays security infor mation for all users Executing the command s might produce the following cifs sessions s users Security Information Command Reference A 11 cifs sessions WIN 95 AGuest nobody guestl AXKXAXKAXKAXKAXKXKAXA UNIX uid 1208 user is a member of group nobody 65535 NT membership NT DOMAIN Domain Guests BUILTIN Guests User is also a member of Everyone Network Users KEKKKKKKKKKKKKEE A 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide cifs setup NAME cifs setup configure CIFS service SYNOPSIS cifs setup DESCRIPTION The cifs setup command performs the initial configuration of the filer for CIFS You must have installed the CIFS license before you enter this command You must run the cifs setup command from the console or from a telnet connection you can t enter the command through rsh FILES etc cifsconfig cfg general configuration information etc cifssec cfg NT domain machine account information etc filersid cfg local machine SID etc Iclgroups cfg local NT group information etc usermap cfg multiprotoco
586. tBIOS scope other than the default one its scope ID must be set to the scope ID of that scope The scope ID can be changed only when CIFS is not running cifs search domains Specifies a list of domains that trust each other to search for a mapped account The argument for the option is a comma separated list that is searched in order If no list is supplied all domains are searched You use this option to control searches if you used an asterisk for a domain name in the usermap cfg file cifs show snapshot By default this option is FALSE The snapshot directory snapshot is no longer shown at the root of a share This is a change in behav ior from previous versions Setting this to TRUE will restore the old behavior On Windows NT 4 or Windows 95 clients the user can access snapshots by entering WileNshareN snapshot or snapshot or snapsht in the Start Run menu Snapshots can also be accessed lower in the share by providing a path to a lower directory Snapshots can be accessed through DOS on any system by chang ing to the snapsht directory NOTE When this option is TRUE it can confuse programs like Fast Find that don t know about snapshots cifs symlinks cycleguard The cifs symlinks cycleguard option on by default eliminates the possibility of traversing directories cyclically during the process of following symbolic links With this option set to on if the target of the symlink resolves to a directory that is d
587. ta in case of a filer or power failure NVRAM card Adapter card that contains the filer s NVRAM cache panic A serious error condition causing the filer o halt similar to a software crash in the Microsoft Windows9 operating sys em environment parity disk Disk on which parity information is stored for the RAID 4 disk drive array Used to reconstruct data in failed disk blocks or on a failed disk PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect The bus architecture used in newer filers PDC Primary Domain Controller The domain controller that has negotiated to be or has been assigned as the primary authentication server for the domain POST Poweron self tests The tests run by the filer after the power is turned on PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit A link with a static route defined in advance usually by manual setup qtree A directory on which you can impose tree quotas created by the quota qtree command RAID Redundant arrays of independent disks A technique that protects against disk failure by computing parity information based on the contents of all the disks in the array The filer uses RAID Level 4 which stores all parity information on a single disk RAID disk scrubbing The process in which the system reads each disk in the RAID group and tries to fix media errors by rewriting the data to another disk area SCSI adapter An expansion card that supports the SCSI disk drives and tap
588. targets e a file or subdirectory whose GID matches the group the group s name e the group s GID The methods are equivalent A file or directory is used only as the source of a GID there are no quota implications for that file or directory The GID of the group must not be 0 Quota Target for a Tree Quota To create a tree quota use the quota qtree command to create a directory in the root directory of a volume The quota target in the quotas file for a tree quota is the complete path name of this directory Quota Target for Default Quotas Use an asterisk in the Quota Target field to specify a default for the user or group quotas Defaults do not apply to tree quotas The default value applies to the following users or groups New users or groups that are created after the default entry has taken effect For example if the maximum disk space for default user quotas is 500 MB any new user can use up to 500 MB of disk space Users or groups that are not explicitly mentioned in the quotas file For example if the maximum disk space for default user quotas is 500 MB users for whom 11 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide you have not specified a user quota in the quotas file can use up to 500 MB of disk space To override a default for a specific user or group specify a quota for that user or group Type Field You can enter one of the following values in the Type f
589. tatus offline diag eom Writes count end of filemarks beginning at the current position on tape Forward spaces over count filemarks Positions the tape on the end of tape side of the filemark Backward spaces over count filemarks Positions the tape on the beginning of tape side of the filemark Forward spaces count records Positions the tape on the end of tape side of the record s Backward spaces count records Positions the tape on the beginning of tape side of the record s Erases the tape beginning at the current tape position When the erase completes the tape is positioned to beginning of tape Rewinds the tape positioning the tape to beginning of tape Displays status information about the tape unit Rewinds the tape and unloads tape media Enables or disables display of diagnostic messages from tape driver Enabling diagnostic messages can be helpful when attempt ing to diagnose a problem with a tape device Specifying a count of 1 enables display of diagnostic messages a count of 0 dis ables diagnostic messages Diagnostic messages are disabled by default Positions the tape to end of data end of media if tape is full Command Reference A 53 mt EXAMPLES The following example uses mt to display status information for the no rewind tape device unit zero highest format density filer mt f nrst0a status Tape drive Exabyte 8505 8mm Status ready write enabled Format EXB 8500C w
590. tc rmt is normally run by the rshd daemon see rshd as a result of a remote machine making a request to rshd to do so The etc rmt command accepts requests specific to the manipulation of mag netic tapes performs the commands then responds with a status indication This protocol is provided by rmt commands on many UNIX systems although UNIX systems may support more commands and may give more different error codes All responses are in ASCII and in one of two forms Successful commands have responses of Anumbemn number is an ASCII representation of a decimal number Unsuccessful com mands are responded to with Eerrornumber nerrormessage n errornumber is one of 2 ENOENT The tape device specified in an open request did not have a valid syntax 6 ENXIO The tape device specified in an open request does not exist 5 EIO An I O error occurred when performing the request 25 ENOTTY An invalid tape operation was specified in a perform special tape operation request errormessage is a UNIX style error string for the error specified by error number A 166 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide rmt The protocol is comprised of the following commands which are sent as indi cated no spaces are supplied between the command and its arguments or between its arguments and n indicates that a newline should be supplied Odevice nmode n Open the specified devi
591. te of the mirror it must recreate the base line version of the mirror Snapshot deletions are irrevocable If you delete a snapshot you cannot recover the snapshot by using SnapRestore After you revert a volume to a selected snapshot you lose all the snapshots that were taken after the selected snapshot e Reverting the root volume causes the filer to reboot with configuration files that were in effect when the snapshot was taken Steps To revert one or more volumes perform the steps that follow At any time before you enter y in the last step if for some reason you do not want to proceed with the vol ume reversion enter Ctrl C 1 Notify network users that you are going to revert a volume so that they know the current data in the volume will be replaced by that of the selected snapshot NFS users can unmount the files and directories in the volume before the reversion If Disk and File System Management3 25 they do not unmount the files and directories they might see the Stale file han dle error message after the volume reversion 2 f you know the name of the snapshot for reverting the volume go to Step 5 If you want to review the list of snapshots available for volume reversion enter the following command vol snaprestore volume volume is the name of the volume to be reverted Enter the name only not the complete path You can enter multiple volume names in the command separated by spaces Resul
592. te schedule 16 6 examples 12 16 exclude list 12 12 12 15 excluding certain types of data 12 3 how it works 12 2 how it works with SnapMirror 16 6 incremental backup 12 4 multiple tape files 12 6 options 12 14 syntax 12 13 using snapshot 9 1 where to enter 12 4 Windows NT ACL information 12 5 12 14 dump level 12 14 dumpdates file updating 12 15 E environmental adapter filer main unit 1 4 error messages serious 18 19 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide errors caused by copying a volume 15 8 caused by exceeding disk quotas 11 9 displayed by netstat 18 13 displayed by nvfail 4 30 Ethernet setting media type on 4 15 event auditing CIFS configuration 7 29 event log CIFS access 7 26 default 7 26 events CIFS viewing 7 32 explicit routes in routing table 4 12 F file locking differences between NFS and CIFS 5 1 file names CIFS preserving case 5 15 conversion 5 6 DOS forcing to lowercase 5 14 legal characters 5 6 maximum length 5 5 used by NFS and CIFS clients 5 6 file space incorrect display 18 18 file system inconsistent 18 8 maximum number of files 11 10 protection through RAID scrubbing 3 3 filer description changing and viewing 7 2 restarting 18 3 filer information overall displaying 17 2 filer main unit components 1 3 filer system load systat command 3 6 FilerView use for fi
593. ted wins wins Reasons to Use the ifconfig Command You use the ifconfig command for the following purposes e changing the interface s IP address network mask or broadcast address setting the media type on an Ethernet interface setting the maximum transmission unit MTU configuring the interface up or down Changing the Interface s IP Address Network Mask or Broadcast Address The following examples show configuring an Ethernet interface and a virtual interface on a filer ifconfig el 292 9 299 6 ifconfig e2 netmask 255 255 0 0 ifconfig e3 broadcast 292 9 299 255 The interface names on your system might be different depending on your specific filer For information about interface naming conventions refer to Naming Conven tions for Network Interfaces in Chapter 2 Setting the Media Type on an Ethernet Interface The following example shows configuring an Ethernet interface on a filer ifconfig el mediatype tp Network Administration 4 15 The media types you can use depend on the type of Ethernet card The possible types you can enter in the ifconfig command are the same as those you can select when running setup They are described in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Media Types on an Ethernet Interface Media type Description 100tx 100Base T 100tx fd 100Base T full duplex tp 100Base T tp fd 10Base T full duplex auto 100Base T 100Base TX Ethernet using Auto Negotiation 1000fx Gigabit Ethern
594. ted and the existing ones are renamed If for exam ple you specified that a maximum of 8 hourly snapshots were to be saved A 92 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide snap using the sched command then on the hour hourly 7 would be deleted hourly 0 would be renamed to hourly 1 and so on USAGE snap list vo name displays a single line of information for each snapshot Along with the snap shot s name it shows when the snapshot was created and the size of the snapshot If you include the vo name argument list displays snapshot infor mation only for the specified volume With no arguments it displays snapshot information for all volumes in the system The following is an example of the snap list output on a filer with two volumes named engi neering and marketing Volume engineering used total date name 0 0 0 0 Nov 14 08 00 hourly O 50 50 0 0 Nov 14 00 00 nightly O 67 50 0 0 Nov 13 20 00 hourly 1 75 50 0 0 Nov 13 16 00 hourly 2 80 50 0 096 Nov 13 12 00 hourly 3 83 50 1 0 Nov 13 08 00 hourly 4 86 50 1 0 Nov 13 00 00 nightly 1 87 50 1 096 Nov 12 20 00 hourly 5 Volume marketing used total date name 0 0 0 0 Nov 14 08 00 hourly O 17 16 0 0 Nov 14 00 00 nightly O 28 16 0 0 Nov 13 20 00 hourly 1 37 16 0 096 Nov 13 16 00 hourly 2 44 16 0 0 Nov 13 12 00 hourly 3 49
595. termining Access Times oooooccococc sls 9 18 From an NES client sid ee a das 9 18 From a GES cli io 9 18 XXIX Chapter 10 XXX qtree Administration Le 10 1 ADOUU GITGES us rdi A USER ne ded Ree yee bY mp TEST ade 10 1 qtres Parameters ditus ai G4 REI puehee bes 10 1 Volumes and gtrees c eia Ret UE Rede lea M deg 10 1 Uses of dtrees x use OPERI WR RO REDE as 10 1 PA uH 10 2 What You Can Do With qtreeszsss sext Vad cexk Pe ate eee EIER 10 2 Usingra dtree fora Project coito BRE RUPEM Der be bEDTA 10 2 Using a atree for Backups t aeina mma g aia aiga paai gaidh A eip eoi 10 2 qtree and Volume Defaults nnana anaana 10 2 Moving Files Between qtrees liliis eres 10 3 QUES Security Styles 2 1 LU ERREUR VER em dr ed 10 3 Types oR Security Styles oid a NO EXER e Tue nihi 10 3 qtree Security Styles in Detail cuero casaca geen cue beer xd 10 3 qtree File Access MoOdelS ooooooccooco cee tetas 10 5 Kinds of File Access Models 00000 0000 cece eee eee 10 5 CIFS Access to Windows Files 0 000000 0000 cee eee 10 5 CIFS Access to UNIX FES au ireann eee 10 5 NFS Access to Windows Files liliis 10 5 NESsAccess to UNIX Elles i i i d RR PR Edere ser ld 10 6 Creating a Grecia ert ete d eet ets 10 6 How to Create a gtree liiis ees 10 6 Results ce dsascexes AS AEISEASA BV Ema 10 6 Creating a atree in the Root Volume 0 0 0 oo 10 6 Creating a atree
596. termining access for both NFS and CIFS requests If you change the security style of a qtree or a volume from ntfs to UNIX the filer disregards the Windows NT permissions that were established when the qtree or volume used the ntfs security style ntfs For CIFS requests Windows NT permissions determine user access For NFS requests the filer generates and stores a set of UNIX style permission bits that are at least as restrictive as the Windows NT permissions The filer grants NFS access only if the UNIX style permission bits allow the user access If you change the security style of a qtree or a volume from UNIX to ntfs files created before the change do not have Windows NT per missions For these files the filer uses only the UNIX style permission bits to determine access mixed Some files in the qtree or volume have the UNIX security style and some have the ntfs security style A file s security style depends on whether the permission was last set from CIFS or NFS For exam ple if a file currently uses the UNIX security style and a CIFS user sends a set ACL request to the file the file s security style is changed to ntfs If a file currently uses the ntfs style and an NFS user sends a set permission request to the file the file s security style is changed to UNIX If you do not specify UNIX ntfs or mixed in the qtree security command the security style for name is displayed If you omit name the security styles for all qtree
597. tes and their status Each route consists of a destination host or network and a gateway to use in forward ing packets The flags field shows a collection of information about the route stored as binary choices the flags are 2 Protocol specific routing flag 2 for ARP entries means that the entry is published Use of this route will cause a new route to be generated and used The route was created dynamically by a redirect The route is to a gateway A 56 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide netstat The route is to a host otherwise it s to a net The route includes valid protocol to link address translation The route was modified dynamically by a redirect The route has timed out The route was manually added with a route command see route cn DW 2r r The route is usable up Direct routes are created for each interface attached to the local host the gate way field for such entries shows the address of the outgoing interface The refcnt field gives the current number of active uses of the route Connection oriented protocols normally hold on to a single route for the duration of a connection while connectionless protocols obtain a route whenever they transmit to a destination The use field provides a count of the number of packets sent using that route The interface entry indicates the network interface utilized for the route When netstat is invo
598. tes the etc dumpaates file f specifies the tape file b specifies the blocking factor Arguments The 0 and u options do not have arguments Data Backup 12 13 The argument for the f option is rst Oa the tape file name and the argument for the b option is 63 blocking factor The rst 0a and 63 arguments must be listed in the same order as the f and b options Path The path name is vol volO which means that all files and directories in the vo O vol ume are backed up to tape NOTE The dump command consists of more options than those described in this X section All options are described in greater detail in the next section Descriptions of dump Options Table 12 1 describes the meanings of the dump command options Table 12 1 dump Command Descriptions Option Meaning Dump It is mandatory It can be a number from 0 to 9 Level 0 is a full level backup levels 1 through 9 are for incremental backups A The dump command does not back up Windows NT ACLs b It is the blocking factor It takes a number as an argument which is the number of 1 KB blocks in each write If you use a local tape drive for backup the number should be from 4 to 64 If you use a remote tape device for backup the number must be from 4 to 256 The dump command generates an error message if you specify a number that is out of range for your tape drive The default argument is 63 B It takes a number as an argument which is the num
599. tfs command or the filer is rebooted When the filer is rebooted it exe cutes the exportfs a command from the etc rc script to export all files and directories listed in the etc exports file Each export entry is a line in the following format pathname option option The following list describes the fields in an export entry pathname path name of a file or directory to be exported option the export option specifying how a file or directory is exported You can specify the option in one of the following formats access hostnamel hostnamel Give mount access to each host listed Alternatively you can specify a net group instead of a host in the list The netgroup must be defined in the etc netgroup file Whether the hosts can mount pathname with root access read and write access or read only access depends on how you use the root rw and ro options as described below anonzuid If a request comes from user ID of 0 root user ID on the client use uid as the effective user ID unless the client host is included in the root option The default value of uid is 65534 To disable root access set uid to 65535 To grant root access to all clients set uid to O ro Export the pathname read only If you do not specify this option the path name is exported read write rwzhostname hostnamel Export the pathname read only to all hosts not specified in the list and read write to the hosts in the list Netgroup n
600. that all the disks in a volume were transferred If the problem persists it might mean that disks were damaged Complete the following steps to resolve the problem 1 Display the boot menu from diskette as described in Booting From System Boot Diskette then choose Maintenance mode boot 2 Usethe vol offline command to take the volume off line 3 Reboot the filer the volume specified in Step 2 is off line 4 Add missing disks if possible then bring them on line otherwise follow these steps a Replace any broken disks b Destroy the old volume C Create a new volume d Usethe restore command to restore the contents of the old volume from a backup tape Inconsistent File System Inconsistencies Seldom Occur The file system rarely becomes inconsistent However an inconsistent file system can be a result of combined disk and NVRAM failure Contact Technical Support if an Inconsistency Occurs If your file system becomes inconsistent contact Dell technical support for assis tance as described in Getting Technical Assistance 18 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Disk Operations in Maintenance Mode Maintenance Mode Operations Maintenance mode enables you to perform the following operations to troubleshoot disk problems e Obtain detailed device information for each disk with thedisk list command e Check access to a particular disk with the disk chec
601. that exports the home directory to the 123 45 670 subnet with the 255 255 255 0 netmask home rw 123 45 670 24 home rw 123 45 67 24 home rwz network 123 45 670 netmask 255 255 255 0 home rw 123 45 670 255 255 255 0 FILES etc exports directories and files exported to NFS clients etc hosts host name database SEE ALSO exportfs reboot hosts netgroup rc A 124 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide group NAME group group file SYNOPSIS etc group DESCRIPTION The etc group database contains information for each group in the following form groupname password gid userlist The following list describes the required fields groupname The name of the group password The group s password in an encrypted form This field may be empty gid An interger representing the group each group is assigned a unique integer userlist The user list is a comma separated list of users allowed in the group EXAMPLE Here is a sample group file project asderghuloiyw 12 dan dave myproject 11 steve jerry SEE ALSO nis nsswitch conf quota cifs_access cifs_setup Command ReferenceA 125 hosts NAME hosts host name data base SYNOPSIS etc hosts DESCRIPTION The hosts file contains information regarding the known hosts on the network For each host a single line should be present with the following information Internet address official hostname al
602. the command displays statistics at the specified intervals f you do not specify a time interval the command displays CIFS statistics that have accumulated since the last reboot 7 34 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Example Of cifs stat Output The following command displays statistics every second cifs stat 1 GetAttr Read Write Lock Open C1 Direct Other 175 142 54 70 254 643 50 232 76 123 44 321 154 17 132 120 34 LII 12 435 76 Table 7 7 describes the fields Table 7 7 cifs stat Command Output Fields Field Description GetAttr Attribute operations Read Read data operations Write Write data operations Lock Lock operations Open Cl Open and close operations Direct Directory operations Other Other operations such as deletes and logoffs Displaying CIFS Session Information CIFS Session Information You Can Display You can display information about connected users and the number of shares and open files for each user You can also display information about a specific connected user Displaying Information With the cifs sessions Command The cifs sessions command syntax is as follows cifs sessions username Displaying Information About All Connected Users To display information about all connected users use the following command syntax cifs sessions CIFS Administration 7 35 Sample output is Server Registers as SILVER in group WN
603. the df Command With gtrees 0 0 00000 eee 11 11 Data B ckup iu ocius eo ea a 12 1 Introduction to Data BaCkup ici A ey RR 12 1 Meaning of Data Backup ooooooooooco eee 12 1 Why You Want to Back Up Data From Disk to Tape 12 1 Different Methods for Backing Up the Filer oo o ooooooo o oo o 12 1 How the dump Command WorkS ooo oooooooooooo eae 12 2 Purpose of the dump Command oo 12 2 What the dump Command Can Back Up 00002000005 12 2 How the dump Command Uses Snapshots to Back Up Data 12 2 XXXI XXXII Metadata Being Backed Up nananana aaan 12 2 How to Exclude Certain Types of Data From the Backup 12 3 Windows NT AGES oh soe tr ee oe as weeds 12 3 Exclude List a E a a SEIN ES S 12 3 Devices Used by the Dump Command 0000000 020s 12 3 Ineremental Back psus etenim ac t db aaa 12 4 Where to Enter the Dump Command 0000000 c eee eee 12 4 Benefits of Entering the dump Command Through rsh 12 4 Benefits of Entering the dump Command on the Console 12 4 Format ot the Backup Data aia od VR EE Ei ERIS DEB LEN 12 5 About THS SECON si stess etr btt bbs eap fuot Role pde Y we 12 5 Backup DatatRormat sta See anh tie adh As a add ei ae 12 5 Five Passes of the dump Command 00 0000 eee eee 12 5 EXAM Gs o ost rantur sth uice ae irt A S d AM ae As sets 12 5 How the d
604. the filer runs the routed daemon a simple routing daemon which is enabled at boot time This daemon listens for Routing Information Protocol RIP packets being exchanged between routers on the network to determine which rout ers are alive From the routers that are alive the routed daemon selects the one with the highest preference to use as the filer s default router However the filer doesn t rely on the routed daemon to construct the routing table The function of the filer s routed daemon is to check the status of the default router Refer to the route 1 routed 1 and dgateways 1 man pages to learn more about routing on the filer 4 12 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide You turn the routed daemon Off and On with the routed command To turn the routed daemon Off enter routed off To turn the routed daemon back On enter routed on NOTE If you turn the routed daemon Off by editing etc rc in the root volume man ually designate a default router in etc rc Displaying Routing Status To display the status of the default gateway list use the routed status command The n option forces the command to display numeric values for gateway names An example of the routed status display is as follows routed status RIP snooping is on Gateway Metric State Time Last Heard karl 1 ALIVE Wed Mar 9 03 38 41 GMT 19
605. the newly active quota is recalculated Displaying Information About Quotas The quota report command displays the current consumption of files and space for each quota target and for each user and group that is under quota restrictions For example if a user quota is specified in the quotas file for a user named jdoe the quota report shows how many files and how much disk space have been used by jdoe The Quota Specifier column in the quota report shows the same information as the Quota Target column in the quotas file with the following exception If a user or group is under default quota restrictions quota report displays infor mation about the user or group as if the user or group had an entry in the quotas file In this case the Quota Specifier column in the quota report is blank With a path argument quota report displays information about all quotas that apply to the specified file Creating a User Quota Follow these steps to limit disk space used by a user named jdoe 1 Decide who should be limited by a disk quota In this example the user is the owner of vol home user jdoe The filer restricts disk usage of files with the same UID as vol home user jdoe 2 Add the following line to the quotas file vol home user jdoe user 300M 20K Substitute the values you want for 300M and 20K You can also use the UID of jdoe or the name jdoe if you have set up a passwd file on the filer or the NIS data base If you want the rest
606. the problem CAUTION Check the etc messages file on the root volume once a day for important messages You can automate checking this file with a script on a remote host that periodically searches the file and then alerts you Filer Reconstructs Data After Disk Is Replaced After you replace a disk the filer detects the new disk when the system boots The filer starts file service and reconstructs the missing data in the background with mini mum interruption to service Disk Failure With a Hot Spare Disk About This Section This section describes how the filer reacts to a disk failure when a hot spare disk is not available 18 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide JA Filer Replaces Disk With Spare and Reconstructs Data If a disk fails the filer replaces the failed disk with a hot spare disk reconstructs the missing data on the hot spare disk in the background so that the interruption to file service is minimized logs the activity in the etc messages file on the root volume The filer does not shut down automatically CAUTION After the filer is finished reconstructing data on the hot spare disk replace the failed disk with a new hot spare disk as soon as possible so that there is always a hot spare disk available in the system For infor mation about replacing a disk refer to Disk Management Tasks in Chapter 3 If a second disk fails and there is no hot s
607. the same as Windows NT use qtree security vol users docs ntfs Example With a Volume To change the security model of the root directory of the users volume to mixed so that outside of a qtree in the volume one file can have NTFS security and another UNIX security use qtree security vol users mixed NOTE When you create an NTFS qtree or change a qtree to NTFS by default every Windows user is given full access You must change the permissions if you want to restrict access to the qtree for some users If you do not set NTFS file security on a file UNIX permissions are enforced Modifying qtree Oplocks Settings When to Change Oplocks Settings You might want to change qtree oplocks settings when you add or remove software or when the kind of data you are using changes For detailed information about oplocks see Using Oplocks in Chapter 7 gtree Administration 10 7 Changing Oplocks Settings To change the oplocks setting of a qtree follow these steps 1 Make sure that the cifs oplocks enable option is set the way you want 2 Use the qtree oplocks command as follows qtree oplocks name enable disable The command takes effect immediately NOTE If you disable the oplocks feature on a qtree existing oplocks in the qtree are X not broken Example With A qtree To enable oplocks in the vol users docs qtree if oplocks are disabled and the cifs oplocks enable option is set to On enter the following command
608. then Unix user set to root by wafl nt admin priv map to root on Jan 4 15 21 38 PST CIFSAuthen Login accepted Step to Turn Off CIFS Login Tracing To turn off CIFS login tracing enter the following command options cifs trace login off 5 26 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 6 NFS Administration This chapter has the following three sections e Managing NFS Exports e Configuring a Filer for WebNFS Displaying NFS Statistics Managing NFS Exports Introducing the etc exports File etc exports Controls Client Access to Directories The etc exports file controls how NFS clients access filer directories You add entries to the etc exports file for all the directories you want to export Format for etc exports Entries The format of the entries in the etc exports file is as follows filer directory path export specification Filer Directory Path Format The filer directory path specifies which directory is made available to clients The for mat is as follows vol volume name directory Examples The following lines show examples of filer directory paths vol vol0 home vol users local jarnold NFS Administration 6 1 Export Specification Determines Access Privileges The export specification specifies the privileges that clients have to mount and access the filer directory path The format is as follows root
609. this activity in the etc messages file and does not automatically shut down If you turn off the filer while it is in degraded mode it stops data reconstruc tion After you turn the filer back on the filer restarts the data reconstruction process from the beginning Except for a loss in performance while data is rebuilt on the hot spare disk the failure of a single disk is transparent to the user The filer exits degraded mode and returns to normal operation after it finishes reconstructing the data Dell recommends that you replace the failed disk with a new hot spare disk after the filer finishes reconstructing data This way the filer continues to have a hot spare disk that it can use in case another disk fails Disk and File System Management 3 5 The sysconfig r command displays which disk is reserved as the hot spare disk In addition to disk failure and hot spare disk replacement activity the etc messages file logs any failure in a periodic check of the hot spare disk Command to control RAID data reconstruction speed You can control the speed of RAID data reconstruction by entering the following command options raid reconstruct speed speed where speed is a number ranging from 1 slowest to 10 fastest Because RAID data reconstruction consumes CPU time sometimes increasing the speed of data recon struction slows the filer s network operations The default speed is 4 which means approximately 4096 of the CPU time is used
610. tial Caching Windows verifies each request for access to files Each access usually takes between 10 and 500 milliseconds and can take longer because contacting a domain controller to create a WAFL credential is time consuming To reduce the time spent in contact ing a domain controller the filer can cache the WAFL credential in a credential cache This cache is called the WAFL credential cache How to Manage the WAFL Credential Cache The Default Configuration The default configuration stores each WAFL credential for 20 minutes This is gener ally sufficient for most situations Two Ways to Manage the WAFL Credential Cache You can manage the cache globally with options and specifically with the wcc com mand This enables you to add entries to and remove entries from the WAFL credential cache and to troubleshoot file access problems that might be caused by mapping problems NOTE If you make changes to the WAFL credential cache and an NFS client has cached information it can take a noticeable amount of time for the changes to become visible Global Cache Management Options If the default configuration does not work well for your site you can use an option to set how long each WAFL credential cache entry is valid You can also trace CIFS logins as an aid to debugging mapping problems e To set how long each WAFL credential cache entry is valid use the wafl wcc minutes valid option as described in Setting How Long Each Wafl
611. tics Description This procedure displays WAFL credential cache statistics in detail You can do this at any time to monitor the WAFL credential cache Step To display statistics about the WAFL credential cache enter the following command wcc d You can get more detailed information by appending v to the command line File Sharing Between NFS and CIFS Usersb 21 Sample Output The following sample output shows the output of statistics with the d option wcc d mday UID 10050 from 10 100 4 41 gt NT DOMAIN mday Total WCC entries 3 oldest is 127 sec Total Administrator privileged entries 1 indicates members of BUILTIN Administrators group The following sample output shows the output of statistics with the v option used twice cc dvv mmm UID 1321 from 10 100 4 41 gt NT DOMAIN mmm kCckckckckckckck ck ck KKK KK UNIX uid 1321 NT membership T DOMAIN mmm T DOMAIN Domain Users T DOMAINNSU Users T DOMAIN Installers T DOMAINNtglob T DOMAINNEngineering BUILTIN Users User is also a member of Everyone Network Users Authenticated Users KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK mday UID 10050 from 10 100 4 41 gt NT DOMAIN mday KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK UNIX uid 10050 5 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide hawleyr NT membership NT DOMAIN mday NT DOMAIN Domain Users NT DOMAIN Domain Admins NT DOMAINNSU Use
612. ting From Diskette To display the boot menu from a diskette perform the following steps 1 Insert the diskette labeled System Boot Disk 1 into the filer s diskette drive NOTE The Data ONTAP 5 3 system boot diskettes are specific to the model of X filer that you are updating You received diskettes appropriate to the model you are updating If you have different models be sure to check the diskette labels to make sure you re using the correct diskettes for the filer 2 From the system console enter the reboot command or if the system is pow ered off power it on Result The filer begins the boot process 3 When the filer s LCD prompts you to remove the diskette and insert the diskette labeled System Boot Disk 2 into the filer s diskette drive 4 Press the Enter key on your console Result The filer boots and if it can displays the following boot menu 1 Normal Boot 2 Boot without etc rc 3 Change Password 4 Initialize all disks 5 Maintenance mode boot Selection 1 5 5 Choose one of the boot types shown below by entering the corresponding number Normal Boot 1 Use Normal Boot to run the filer normally but from a diskette e Boot without etc rc 2 Use Boot without etc rc to troubleshoot and repair configuration problems NOTE Booting without etc rc causes the filer to use only default options X settings disregard all options settings you put in etc rc and disable some services such as
613. tion The command snmp init 1 should be the last samp command in the filer s etc rc file On a query init will return the value O if the SNMP daemon has not yet been initialized Otherwise it will return the value 1 location ocation traphost Used to set the location name returned by the SNMP agent as the System sysLocation O MIB II variable add delete hostname ipadaress To add or delete SNMP managers who will be the recipient of the filer s Trap PDU s Specify the word add or delete as appropriate followed by the host name or address If a host name is specified it must exist in the etc hosts file For example to add the host alpha use the following command snmp traphost add alpha No traps will be sent unless at least one trap host is specified Up to a maximum of 8 trap hosts are supported On a query the traphost option will return a list of registered trap hosts followed by their IP addresses If a host name cannot be found in etc hosts for a previously registered IP address its name will default to a string representation of its IP address traps on off reset delete turns all traps on or off or resets or deletes them Command Reference A 95 snmp traps trapnamel parameter value on off reset delete affects a specified trap It assigns a parameter and value or turns it on or off or resets or deletes it You can trap on any MIB variable but to do so you need a trap data pa
614. tions see the section filestats Command Options Example With No Options Specified The following example shows sample output from the filestats command without any options tpubs cf2 gt filestats volume vol0 snapshot hourly 1 VOL vo10 SNAPSHOT hourly 1 INODES 274528 COUNTED INODES 875 TOTAL BYTES 458354190 TOTAL KB 143556 Disk and File System Management3 15 FILE SIZE CUMULATIVE COUNT CUMULATIVE TOTAL KB 1K 465 1576 10K 832 3356 100K 853 3980 1M 856 4660 10M 864 32808 100M 875 143524 1G 875 143254 MAX 875 143254 AGE ATIME CUMULATIVE COUNT CUMULATIVE TOTAL KB 0 0 0 30D 841 132780 60D 850 132932 90D 859 143464 120D 875 143528 MAX 875 143528 UID COUNT TOTAL KB 0 873 143528 20041 2 0 GID COUNT TOTAL KB 0 851 41556 30 21 1972 1 3 0 Use File Statistics for Snapshot Management File statistics help you determine when to schedule snapshots by enabling you to see when most file activity takes place on a volume Using the filestats command also helps you determine snapshot disk consumption Example With Ages Option Specified Enter the filestats command with the ages option to display a daily breakdown of file changes in a volume as shown in the following example filestats ages 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 9D 10D 11D 12D 13D 14D volume vol0 snapshot hourly 0 e Usethe daily age breakdown displayed in the CUMULATIVE TOTAL KB column of the AGE output to det
615. tions within the time period that you specified before the actual shutdown NOTE Clients using Windows 9x or Windows for Workgroups can display the CIFS shutdown messages only when the clients WinPopup program is config ured to receive messages The capability to display messages from the filer is built into Windows NT For More Information For more information about cifs terminate refer to the section Stopping and Restarting CIFS Sessions in Chapter 7 Filer Administration Basics 2 11 Understanding the Filer Default Configuration About the Default Configuration The default configuration of a filer depends on whether the filer is running NFS CIFS or both and NIS Although the default configuration is usable for small sites it is probably not secure enough for large sites or for sites connected to the Internet Subsequent sections in this chapter describe in greater detail how you might want to modify the default configuration to suit your needs Default Exported and Shared Directories Default Directories Created When setup finishes two default directories are made available for access by cli ents The default directories are the root directory e the home directory Permissions for the Default Directories Table 2 5 shows the permissions that are assigned to the default directories when setup finishes Table 2 5 Permissions for the Default Directories From this This directory client
616. to examine the file for inconsistencies before you remove the nvfail extension and make the file accessible again How nvfail Works When you enable nv ail the following process shown in Table 4 8 takes place during boot up Network Administration 4 29 Table 4 8 Enabling the nvfail Option M Then The filer detects no NVRAM errors File service starts normally The filer detects NVRAM errors and a The filer returns a stale filehandles you use the optional ESTALE error to NFS clients trying nvfail rename file to access the database causing the application to hang crash or shut down and sends an error message to the filer console and log file b The filer renames database files specified in the nv ail rename file by appending nvfail to the original file name making those files unavail able to both CIFS and NFS clients The filer detects NVRAM errors and a The filer returns a stale filehandles you do not use the optional ESTALE error to NFS clients trying nvfail rename file to access the database causing the application to hang crash or shut down and sends an error message to the filer console and log file b No database files are renamed When the application restarts files are available to both CIFS and NFS cli ents even if you have not verified that they are valid Where to Look for Database File Verification Instructions See the documentation for your specific database software for
617. tomatically start HTTP service after each reboot add options httpd enable to etc rc SnapMirror snapmirror license enabled snapmirror enabled SnapRestore snaprestore licens nabled snaprestore is enabled Example The following example shows how to activate several protocols with one command license nfs ABCDEFG CIFS HIJKLMN http PORSTUV Displaying Current License Codes To display licensing information enter the License command without parameters as follows filer license nfs ABCDEFG cifs not licensed http PORSTUV snaprestore not licensed Filer Administration Basics 2 37 Disabling a License To disable a license enter DISABLE as the code for the protocol For example to dis able your filer s license for NFS enter license nfs DISABLE After you disable a license your filer stops service for the corresponding protocol You can restart the service by reentering the license code Replacing License Codes If you misplace a license code contact Dell technical support to obtain a copy 2 88 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 3 Disk and File System Management Disk Concepts Chapter Contents This chapter covers the following topics Understanding RAID groups About disk addresses Use disk scrubbing to protect data from media errors Understanding hot spare disks e Understanding hot swap Using disks of various size
618. tor and Command Reference Guide Example of Excluding Files From a Backup dump OufX rst0a tmp o core backup usrN vol voll The command performs a level 0 backup of the vol vol1 volume which excludes the files that meet one of these requirements The name is tmp The name ends in o for example program o The name begins with core for example core small The name contains backup for example spec backup 1 The name is usr Example of Backing Up to a Tape Stacker Shared by Multiple Filers This section provides a sample schedule for backing up the following filers to the same tape stacker e filer1 which contains 3 volumes e filer2 which contains 2 volumes e filer3 which contains 2 volumes The schedule uses the following assumptions e Thelevel 0 backup takes 10 hours The tape stacker is attached to filer1 and the tape stacker contains two tape drives Rooton each filer has the permission to write to filer1 According to this schedule the filers perform the following types of backups e The filers fully back up each volume once a week e The filers perform a level 1 backup and a level 2 backup for each volume every week e The filers do not rewind the tape for each level 1 backup so that the subsequent level 2 backup can be written immediately after the level 1 backup on the tape Table 12 2 shows the sample backup schedule Data Backup 12 19 Table 12 2 Sa
619. try to assign the snapmirrored status to the volume because you cannot set the snapmirrored volume option to On e Ifthe mirror never lost the snapmirrored status but you took the mirror off line you must put it back on line Step To resume data replication for the entire filer enter the vol snapmirror on com mand on the destination filer to enable SnapMirror Result The filer reads the etc snapmirror conf file to determine whether it needs to create a baseline version of a mirror or to update a mirror Disabling Data Replication for One Volume Description You can stop data replication for a particular volume if you decide that there is no need to update the mirror For example you might want to change the mirror to a regular volume You can disable data replication at any time even when data transfer is underway The destination volume remains the same as before the transfer The snapshot taken in the source volume for the data transfer remains but is deleted and replaced by a new snapshot the next time the mirror is updated Data Replication Using SnapMirrot6 13 Steps to Disable Data Replication for One Volume Follow these steps to disable data replication for one volume These steps disable vol ume replication until you reenable it 1 Comment out the entry in the etc snapmirror conf file by preceding the entry with a pound sign f 2 Enterthe vol snapmirror on command to make the filer reread the etc sna
620. ts from a hidden sub directory that appears to a CIFS client as snapsht and to an NFS client as snapshot These hidden sub directories are special in that they can be accessed from every directory but they only show up in direc tory listings at an NFS mount point or at the root of CIFS share Each volume on the filer can have up to 20 snapshots at one time Because of the copy on write technique used to update disk blocks deleting a snapshot will gen erally not free as much space as its size would seem to indicate Blocks in the snapshot may be referenced by other snapshots or by the active file system and thus may be unavailable for reuse even after the snapshot is deleted The snap commands are persistent across reboots Do not include snap com mands in the etc rc If you include a snap command in the etc rc file the same snap command you enter through the command line interface does not persist across a reboot and is overridden by the one in the etc rc file Automatic snapshots Automatic snapshots can be scheduled to occur weekly daily or hourly Weekly snapshots are named weekly N where Nis 0 for the most recent snapshot 1 for the next most recent and so on Daily snapshots are named daily N and hourly snapshots hourly N Whenever a new snapshot of a particular type is created and the number of existing snapshots of that type exceeds the limit specified by the sched option described below then the oldest snapshot is dele
621. tus time age crtimeage File creation age Boolean Expressions to Use With the expr Option You can use the following standard Boolean expressions as arguments to the expr option as shown in Table 3 3 Table 3 3 expr Option Boolean Expressions Argument Argument amp amp gt lt gt l gt NOTE Enclose the entire Boolean string following the expr option in quotation marks Attributes you use in the string must be enclosed in braces Example of the expr Option For example if you want to restrict the filestats command output to include only files whose size is greater than 10 000 bytes and whose UID is 5150 enter the follow ing command filestats expr size gt 10000 amp amp uid 5150 volume vol0 snapshot hourly 0 Volume Reversion Using SnapRestore About SnapRestore The filer s SnapRestore M feature enables you to revert a volume to the state it was in when a particular snapshot was taken Without this feature you would need to use one of the following methods to restore data to a volume e Restoring files from tape Copying files from a snapshot to the active file system Disk and File System Management3 21 Using either of these methods takes a longer time than reverting the volume This is because with SnapRestore no data needs to be copied the file system is just put back in its earlier state SnapRestore is a licensed feature You must purchase and install the license c
622. twork Administration 4 21 Switch 1 Switch 1 fails e0 el e2 e3 eo el e2 e3 Firstlev1 Firstlev2 Firstlev1 Firstlev2 Secondlev Secondlev Figure 4 5 Second Level Virtual Interface on a Single Filer In Figure 4 5 Secondlev is the second level virtual interface and is composed of the two virtual interfaces Firstlevl and Firstlev2 Firstlevl is initially the active interface if Switch 1 drops both links Switch2 and Firstlev2 take over and main tain the connection to the network Virtual Interface Management Use the vif Commands to Manage Virtual Interfaces You manage virtual interfaces with the vif command This command enables you to perform the following actions Create either a single mode or a multiple mode trunk e Specify a preferred link to activate in a single mode trunk Add physical interfaces to a trunk Display the status of a virtual interface Display virtual interface statistics such as the number of packets received and transmitted on each link that makes up a virtual interface You can specify the time interval in seconds at which the statistics are displayed Destroy a trunk Put These vif Commands in etc rc The following commands are not persistent vif add vif create vif favor Put these commands in the etc rc file to make them persistent across reboots 4 22 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N S
623. u Can Export Ancestors and Descendants The filer permits directories that have exported ancestors to be exported In many implementations of the UNIX operating system you cannot export a directory that has an exported ancestor in the same file system NFS Administration 6 3 64 Example The following lines show exports that the filer allows vol vol0 access adminhost root adminhost vol vol0 hom access blender mixer Nonexample The following lines show exports that are not allowed on some UNIX systems home root adminhost access blender mixer home local root adminhost access blender mixer Filer Determines Permissions by Matching Longest Prefix The filer uses the longest matching prefix in determining permissions In the preceding example e A client mounting vol vol home user1 gets permissions for vol vol0 home because vol vol0 home is the longest matching prefix e Aclient mounting vol vol0 gets access adminhost root adminhost permissions NOTE Because of the way the filer determines permissions it makes little sense to give a client greater permissions at a higher level in the file system Example The following lines show an etc exports file that creates a security breech by enabling any host to mount the vol vol0 directory while restricting specific hosts to mounting the vol vol0 home directory In this example any host can gain access to the vol vol0 home directory by mounting the vo
624. u can create manually is 28 disks e The maximum RAID group size is 52 disks Occasionally you might encounter situations in which you want to specify a RAID group size other than the default For example you might want to configure a filer with smaller RAID groups for the following reasons Using smaller RAID groups reduces disk reconstruction time if a disk fails Using smaller therefore more RAID groups provides higher reliability by reduc ing the risk of data loss due to multiple disk failure Conversely configuring with larger therefore fewer RAID groups in a filer uses fewer disks for parity leaving more disks available for data storage Parity disks In each RAID group the filer assigns the role of parity disk to the largest disk in the RAID group After a data disk failure the filer uses the parity disk in con junction with the other data disks to reconstruct the failed disk s data and optionally write it to a hot spare disk The parity disk must be at least as large as the largest data disk For more information about how the filer recovers from disk failures by using the par ity disk or hot spare disk refer to Handling Disk Failures About Disk Addresses You identify a disk by its address which is listed in the HA Disk_ID column of the output of the sysconfig r command In this output listing HA refers to the host adapter and Disk_ID refers to the disk ID number You use the disk address to i
625. u can easily change the limits on the qtree For instructions about managing space using qtrees see Chapter 11 Quotas and Maximum Number of Files Using a qtree for Backups You can back up individual qtrees You would do so to e add flexibility to backup schedules modularize backups keep the size of each backup to one tape For details see Chapter 12 data backup qtree and Volume Defaults Volumes and qtrees have the default values shown in Table 10 1 10 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 10 1 qtree and Volume Defaults Parameter qtree default Volume default oplocks On On security The style of the volume s root directory UNIX Moving Files Between qtrees In UNIX you cannot move a file into or out of a qtree with a rename operation As a result the mv command on some UNIX systems fails if you try to move a file into or out of a qtree You can always move the file by copying it then deleting the original In Windows you can move a file into or out of a qtree qtree Security Styles Types of Security Styles There are three kinds of security styles described briefly in Table 10 2 Table 10 2 qtree Security Styles Style Behavior NTFS Exactly like Windows NT NTFS Files and directories have Windows NT file level permission settings NOTE To use NTFS security make sure that the filer is licensed for CIFS UNIX Exactly like UNIX
626. ua endete a aen ERA 19 16 DESCAPIO Me qs o zai Lie a RES I 9 16 ibiepivirai lO BLOM desc ache aont ERU EO lo tae eat qd 9 16 D taultazcvs co See mere e Se ER Rd 19 16 D SerTIDtIOIe s 5 re rei et Re Cc nO CE d cett dtt 9 16 The raidsize Optlon is ess GRY bee AX GI EGGS b a ek eA 19 17 Deta lt a jb p RT Re AR he et ined 19 17 Description rars Sure edet oe eR e eu din hit a 9 17 The root ODtion us focus pi Reb a 19 17 Detalla eui ed xd ttt Mee eie e 19 17 26S CTIBU OLD n me ec codes ee qe eme p ets ades 19 17 The snapmirrored Option liliis ees 19 17 Default dina edad et oh Detto cei dece dls deer a lad deat 19 17 28S6rlptIOnas sus e er eR A putes iue 19 17 Miscellaneous Opt e eher e CRUS a ES 19 17 What the Miscellaneous Options Do n aasan aaa aaaea 19 17 The console encoding Option 0 0000 eee 19 18 Default kiss stie a tede ahd gles back t eludet dud dog 19 18 DESChPUON asa ud d RS A ae pisce eua Sors dtes 19 18 xlv xlvi The The The The The The The The The The The The The The ip tmatch any if ddr Option s ie sisses as eh eat Bad gp 19 18 Default te et pese eer ier ONE S ditate 19 18 Descriptions Seer n eoe cete bbs ee os AS 19 18 ip path mtu discovery enable Option 2 000005 19 18 Default urs nts tte a BEL leg PS 19 18 DeseriptlQris s a atri ts rza tondeuse potes etse st 19 18 rshienable GOptlonu as ues e Eme EIER ERE ER ES
627. ualifier to narrow a match P qual can be an IP address in any of the following formats e Aregular IP address specified as numbers separated by periods dot notation with an optional subnet address For example 192 4 1 0 24 narrows possible matches to the 192 4 1 0 class C subnet e A host name e Anetwork name e A network name with a subnet specified in dot notation For example corpnet 255 255 255 0 specifies the corpnet subnet NFdomain Specifies the domain to match or the domain to use for a mapped UNIX account The default is the domain in which the filer is installed NTUser Any usertype account name If the name contains a space put the name in quotation marks direction Restricts the direction of the mapping By default mappings are bidirectional You can use one of three symbols e gt means NT to UNIX mapping only e lt means UNIX to NT mapping only e means bidirectional mapping Use this to explicitly indi cate a bidirectional mapping UnixUser A UNIX account name The following symbol conventions are in effect An asterisk matches any name For example to map all unmapped users to the UNIX nobody account add the following line nobody The null string matches no name and rejects any user For example to prevent access completely add the following line wn This line prevents the default mapping of Windows NT users who have an account map to a UNIX account of
628. ubtree dumps Backs up all files and directories in qtree O of the specified volume Otree 0 is a qtree that is not created by you with the qtree command In each volume the files and directories that do not belong to a qtree you create are considered to be in qtree 0 Follow the Q option with the path name of a volume for example vol vol1 Specifies an exclude list which is a comma separated list of strings If the name of a file matches one of the strings it is excluded from the backup The following list describes the rules for specifying the exclude list The name of the file must match the string exactly An asterisk is considered a wildcard character The wildcard character must be the first or last character of the string Each string can contain up to two wildcard characters If you want to exclude files whose names contain a comma precede the comma in the string with a backslash You can specify up to 32 strings in the exclude list To make a level 0 dump of the entire file system to a remote tape device with each tape file in the dump being less than 2 GB in size use filer dump OufbB adminhost dev rstO 63 2097151 Command Reference A 31 dump To make a level 0 dump of home on a 2 GB tape to a remote tape device use filer dump OufbB adminhost dev rstO 63 2097151 home To make a level 0 dump of home on a 2 GB tape to a local tape drive no rewind device unit zero highest density use filer
629. um tape file size in the dump command the command writes to the next tape file when the backup data reaches that size regardless of the amount of space left in the current tape 12 6 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide A tape can contain multiple tape files but any tape must contain at least one com plete tape file Different Types of Tape Files The dump command can use these types of tape files e Local or remote Refer to Devices Used by the Dump Command for more information about where the tape devices can be located e Rewind or norewind If the tape file is a rewind file the filer rewinds the tape after it finishes writing the tape file If you want the dump command to write multiple tape files on the same tape specify norewind tape files in the dump command The name of a norewind tape file begins with an n for example nrst 0a the name of a rewind tape file begins with an r for example rst 0a Unload reload tape files These tape files apply only if you are backing up to tapes in tape stackers When you use these tape files the dump command unloads the tape when it reaches the end of tape and then the tape stacker reloads another tape The name of an unload reload tape file begins with a u for example ur st Oa An unload reload tape file cannot be a norewind tape file For example do not specify unrstOa NOTE If the tape stacker is attached to a remote
630. umes The schedule uses the following assumptions e A low rate of change enables you to fit multiple incremental backups on one tape e Two incremental backups performed on each volume each week offer sufficient data protection due to a low rate of change e Thelevel 0 backup takes 10 hours According to this schedule the filer performs the following types of backups The filer fully backs up each volume once a week e The filer performs a level 1 backup and a level 2 backup for each volume every week e The filer does not rewind the tape for each level 1 backup so that the subsequent level 2 backup can be written immediately after the level 1 backup on the tape Data Backup 12 21 Table 12 3 shows the sample backup schedule Table 12 3 Sample of Backing Up the Entire Filer Day of week dump commands Sunday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol6 urstla vol vol4 vol voll Monday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol7 urstla vol vol5 vol vol2 Tuesday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol voll urstla vol vol6 vol vol3 Wednesday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol2 urstla vol vol7 vol vol4 Thursday dump dump dump Ouf luf 2uf urst0a urst0a urst0a nrstla vol vol3 urstla vol voll vol vol5 Friday du
631. umes you want to configure keep the fol lowing considerations in mind Configuring with more volumes provides more flexible quota and snapshot configuration requires more export points Configuring with larger volumes increases the time needed to restore a volume from tape e The maximum number of volumes per filer is 23 The maximum recommended volume size is 250 GB For instructions about specific volume configuration procedures see Volume Man agement Tasks Installing a Foreign Volume You can remove an entire volume from one filer and install it in another which makes the moved volume a foreign volume to the filer Example For example you might want to move a volume to a different filer to replace the volume s PowerVault 700N storage system with one that has a greater storage capacity gain access to the files on a dead filer When a filer detects a foreign volume at boot time it places the foreign volume off line You can then bring the foreign volume on line For more information about install ing and bringing up a foreign volume on line refer to Adding a Foreign Volume 3 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Procedures for Managing Disks and Volumes Section Contents This section provides step by step procedures for performing many filer management tasks from the command line on a filer administration host or client It is organized into
632. ump Command Writes and Stores Data on Tape 12 6 About THIS Section sre nagar aa eae wees dus dala webs meade Ne 12 6 Meaning ot Tape BIOGK io vk Bk oh dod ane eee eae eee 12 6 Meaning ot Tape Files 3 ch end oer e Rue t ee ett tu 12 6 When the Dump Command Writes to Multiple Tape Files 12 6 Different Types of Tape Files liiis ese 12 7 Determining the Amount of Backup Data 0 000 000 000 e eee 12 7 26SCEIDTOLDI 24 utet dos Burana ities Ashen ont feet oto utn aang Catia ED 12 7 Step for Estimating the Amount of Data If You Back Up A gtree 2 7 Steps for Estimating the Amount of Data if You Back Up Data Noti Arte cri ee e bcm CERE RHET 12 8 If the Filer Is Mounted on an NFS Client oooooooooooo o 2 8 If the Filer Is Shared by a CIFS Client o o ooooooooooo o o 2 8 Determining the Number of Tapes for the Backup naana anaana raaa 12 8 Ibrstsre Tortor 12 8 PrerequisSites o RIED bii emi pice ER e 12 9 STEPS o eeu sd duret Latte eei d e et C RD eed toon as al ead 12 9 Prerequisites for the dump Command 00 elles 12 9 About ELHIS SeGHOnc i23 idad dar 12 9 General Prereg isltes usos desee oet doe dc dd ges 12 10 Prerequisites for Backing Up to a Nonqualified Tape Drive 12 10 Prerequisites for Backing Up to a Remote Tape Drive 12 10 Recommendations for Performing a Backup 0 iliis 12 11 About This Section
633. unk when you cease needing it or want to use the interfaces for other purposes than a trunk After you complete this procedure the interfaces in the trunk act individually rather than as links in a trunk Prerequisites Before you destroy a trunk you must configure it down using the ifconfig down command Step To destroy a trunk enter the following command vif destroy trunk where trunk is the name of the trunk Database File Protection How Data ONTAP 5 3 Provides Database File Protection Data ONTAP 5 3 provides database file protection through the nvfail option of the vol options command The nvfail option enables a filer to detect NVRAM incon sistencies at boot time Use it to warn database administrators of NVRAM problems that could compromise database validity If the filer finds any problems database instances hang or shut down and the filer sends error messages to the console to alert you to check the state of the database How to Provide Additional Protection for Database Files You can provide additional protection to specific database files by adding them to an optional file you create called etc nv ail rename When you enable nvfail and the filer detects NVRAM errors at boot up the filer renames any database files speci fied in the nv ail rename file by appending nvfail to the original file name When the filer renames a database file the database cannot restart automatically This gives you the opportunity
634. uota Target for a Tree Quota 1 eee 11 2 Quota Target for Default Quotas 0 2 0 eee 11 2 Typesblelq zu dct ape ana eile AeA And one de cde at ERN Se aah ay A 11 3 DiskiField vs rti erect ly Melero a tem am vb ots ree 11 3 Riles Fieldin aw es chines Coi roo dd de de Me ied s Man 11 3 Sample Quotas Files dai RIRRLT ARENIS e eT eS 11 4 The Quota Commands arenie mte Sea m ER al ah ma ks 11 5 Enabling or Disabling Quotas iilis 11 5 RESIZING QUOTAS x ees e Rue eed dr M tet 11 6 How Quota Resize Affects Newly Added Quota Targets 11 6 Creating an Active Quota for a Quota Target o 11 6 Displaying Information About Quotas llle 11 7 Creating aiU Ser QUO is uno End XXE Request eed 11 7 Creating a Group QUOTA vs re esee A e RS URS Led 11 8 Removing Quota Restrictions 0 0 0 eee 11 8 When Quotas Are Exceeded o o o oooooooo eee 11 9 Messages Displayed by the Filer When Quotas Are Exceeded 11 9 Messages Displayed on NFS Clients 0 0 000000 cee eee 11 9 Messages Displayed on CIFS Clients n nannaa anaana 022 e ee 11 10 Increasing the Maximum Number of Files o o oo oo oooooooo o o o 11 10 About Increasing the Maximum Number of Files 11 10 Viewing the Number of Files in a Volume 0 0000000000 11 10 AS ss s cetus cetus mul te O O sc pr pes eee Maen 11 11 About the df Command ereet nre a nnie eens 11 11 Using
635. up 8 2 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide The etc httpd access File The etc httpd access file contains directives that govern authentication for each direc tory The filer supports the following directives e directory AuthName require user require group These directives are compatible with the Apache Web server directives but the filer ignores all other directives The Directory Directive Specifies a directory tree to be protected and encloses all other directives The syntax of the directory directive is as follows Directory directory name directive Directory The AuthName Directive Specifies a realm that is an alias for the directory that appears instead of the direc tory name in the browser s password dialog box when a user tries to access the directory Whatever follows AuthName is the name of the realm The name of the realm can contain spaces The syntax of the AuthName directive is as follows AuthName realm name The Require User Directive Specifies the users who can access the directory The syntax of the require user directive is as follows require user user id user id The Require Group Directive Specifies the groups that can access the directory The syntax of the require group directive is as follows require group group id group id The etc httpd passwd File The etc httpd passwd file contain
636. usable data in YA the destination volume Controlling the Speed of a Volume Copy Operation You can control the speed of a volume copy operation in two ways Before you enter the vol copy start command use the following com mand syntax to set the default speed for all volume copy operations options vol copy throttle value The value variable specifies the speed which ranges from 10 full speed to 1 one tenth of full speed e fa volume copy operation is in progress use the following command syntax to set the speed of a specific operation vol copy throttle operation number value In this case because a volume copy operation is in progress and you do not have access to the filer prompt you must enter the vol copy throttle com mand through rsh The operation_number parameter specifies the volume copy operation whose speed you want to adjust If you do not specify an operation number the com mand applies to all volume copy operations that are in progress The value variable specifies the speed which ranges from 10 full speed to 1 one tenth of full speed NOTE The speed for reading data from the source volume and the speed for writing X data to the destination volume can be different In this case the smaller of the two values determines the time required for the filer to finish copying the data 15 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Displaying the Default S
637. user is instructed by the application to choose another file name This section describes how both NFS and CIFS users can use file names that differ only by case When a client creates a file name the filer preserves the case For example if a CIFS client creates Spec txt the file name is displayed by both CIFS and NFS clients as Spec txt f an NFS user later creates a file named spec txt NFS and CIFS clients see the file names as follows e On NFS clients one file is displayed as Spec txt and the other is displayed as spec txt That is the file names are displayed in the same way as they were created e OnCIFS clients even those that support long names one file is displayed as Spec txt and the other is displayed as Spec 0 txt Languages and Character Sets File Names Languages and Character Sets File names in languages other than English can use characters that have diacritic marks or accents or can use characters that are not even in the Roman alphabet UNIX and Windows systems can create file names with no restrictions provided that they do not violate the naming conventions of the operating system that they were created in The language you select affects multiprotocol behavior and the code page for Windows 98 and older clients File Names Use Character Sets To make sure that file names stored on the filer are usable by both UNIX and Win dows applications you must choose a character set that contains the characters in
638. utomatically Prerequisites You must have available the name of at least one time server You can get a list of NTP Network Time Protocol time servers which SNTP can use from http www eecis udel edu mills ntp servers htm Filer Administration Basics 2 33 Steps To set the t imed options so that you can synchronize filer time perform the following steps 1 Turn on the timed daemon by entering the following command options timed enable on 2 If desired turn on console logging of time changes initiated by the timed dae mon by entering the following command options timed log on 3 Specify the maximum discrepancy allowed before time is not synchronized by entering the following command options timed max skew nu nis the number of units specified by u u is one of the following e sfor seconds e mfor minutes e h for hours The default is 30m which stands for 30 minutes 4 Specify a protocol by entering the following command options timed proto protocol protocol is one of the following rdate for the protocol used by the rdate command ntpfor SNTP The default is ntp 5 Specify a synchronization schedule by entering the following command options timed sched schedule schedule is one of the following hourly to synchronize hourly e multihourly to synchronize every six hours e daily to synchronize every day at midnight e a number followed by m to specify an interval of minutes or h to specify an interva
639. version Then it asks whether you want to reboot the filer to proceed with the reversion Enter y to confirm that you want to continue with the reversion Result The filer reboots Disk and File System Management3 27 3 28 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide CHAPTER 4 Network Administration Working With Large Files About Large Files You can have large files on your filer The maximum size of a large file is determined by the smaller of the following two values e Maximum file size supported by your server e Maximum file size supported by your clients However if the maximum file size on your client is larger than the maximum file size on your server and you enter a command to display the volume size on your server the file size is displayed incorrectly In this case the maximum file size appears as 2 GB even though the file on the client is larger than 2 GB Software Requirements To use large files ensure that your system meets the following requirements e Filer operating system Data ONTAP 5 3 e NFS version 3 enabled e UNIX host and clients Solaris 2 6 or later e Windows NT host and clients 4 0 or later How to Enable NFS To enable NFS version 3 use the options command to set the nfs v3 enable option to On Network Administration 4 1 Using SNMP About SNMP You use SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol to direct a process called an agent on
640. volume use the df i pathname command which shows how many inodes have been used or use themaxfiles volume command For example both of the following commands show that the home volume has used 2 872 inodes df i vol home Filesystem iused ifree iused Mounted on vol home 2872 118090 28 vol home maxfiles home Volume home maximum number of files is currently 120962 2872 used 11 10 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Information generated by the max f iles command is available through SNMP using the Dell custom MIB For more information about the MIB see About the Dell Cus tom MIB in Chapter 4 The df Command About the df Command To verify the amount of free disk space on the filer enter the d command on the filer Information generated from the d command is also available through SNMP using the Dell custom MIB which is described in About the Dell Custom MIB in Chapter 4 With the i option the command displays the number of used inodes and the num ber of available inodes Following is an example of the df i command df i vol home Filesystem iused ifree iused Mounted on vol home 240843 121525 66 vol home The total amount of disk space shown in the d output is less than the sum of avail able space on all disks installed in the volume NOTE As with the UNIX FFS Fast File System the filer reserves 10 percent of the total disk space
641. weekly 0 home users From the weekly snapshot the command performs a level 0 backup of the vol vol1 home users qtree Example of Backups to a Tape Stacker dump Of urst0a urst0a urst0a nrst0a vol voll The command backs up the vol vol volume to a tape stacker After the com mand finishes writing a tape file it unloads the tape and reloads another tape After the command finishes writing the fourth tape file it does not rewind the tape Example of Backing Up Multiple Files or Directories in One dump Command dump Oufnl rst0a user 1 3 5 vol voll home The n option specifies the name of the backup user 1 3 5 which is recorded in the etc dumpdates file If you do not specify a name the dump Data Backup 12 17 command fails The 1 option specifies that you interactively enter the names of individual files and directories to be backed up from the vol vol1 home directory The filer displays some messages and a prompt for the names of the files and directories you want to back up Enter each name as a path name relative to the dump path in the dump command Do not specify 7 or specify a directory that contains symbolic links To end the list of names use a blank line or press Ctrl D Then the dump command displays messages about the progress of each pass of the command The following example shows how to enter the relative path names for the direc tories to be backed up The example ends the list of path names with a blan
642. write performance WINS Windows Internet Name Service workgroup A collection of computers running Microsoft Windows NT or Windows for Workgroups operating systems that is grouped for browsing and sharing Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Index A access events CIFS auditing 7 26 access logging CIFS disabling 7 29 enabling 7 29 access rights assigning rights to users 7 20 CIFS shares 7 20 active event log CIFS default 7 26 specifying 7 30 adding a foreign volume 3 13 adding disks to a volume 3 12 administration host accessibility problems from 18 10 administration tasks periodic 1 9 AuthName directive 8 3 Autosupport 19 1 autosupport options 19 1 autosupport doit option 19 2 autosupport enable option 19 2 autosupport from option 19 2 autosupport mailhost option 19 2 autosupport noteto option 19 3 backup amount of data 12 7 data format 12 5 data not in atrees 12 15 devices 12 3 excluding files 12 15 incremental 12 4 metadata 12 2 name in the etc dumpdates file 12 14 qtrees 12 7 reasons for 12 1 specifying files and directories 12 14 use of nonqualified tape drives 12 10 Windows NT ACL information 12 5 blocking factor definition 12 6 how to specify 12 14 specifying when restoring data 13 3 when backing up to remote tape drives 12 10 booting from diskette 18 1 with nvfail enabled 4 2
643. x pae der en tio ts n tad anat dien AY rte t Nan 3 6 Section Contents set evan p a REESE sees 3 6 Understanding VOlUMES a n iet td atte reacia cd 3 6 Determining the Number of Volumes to Use o oooooooooo oo 3 7 Planning a Multiple Volume Configurati0M ooo oooooooooooooo ee 3 8 Installing a Foreign VOlUME ais matr Reo rr le tege deles Yang 3 8 Procedures for Managing Disks and Volumes illii lisse 3 9 Sectiom Gohtents iu rrr e e eC TENERO Spe code es 3 9 Disk Management Tasks illis 3 9 About HISSSeGHonz is ioc eter IRE NEU etate detti 3 9 Setting the Size of a Volume s RAID Groups iliis siis 3 9 Changing the Size of a RAID Group After Creating It 3 9 Installing New DISKS eo Ee ah Gd Pea 3 10 Adding Disks to Volumes ooo 3 10 Removing a Falled DISK i cua Emm Racks ERE GRIS 3 10 Removing a Hot Spare DISK 2 s edem eee Dre e e d 3 10 Removing an Active File System Disk liliis 3 11 Volume Management Tasks llis sls 3 11 INTOdUCION une IA dl en a 3 11 Creating Molurries camisa E EE Gor EAR dad CAES 3 11 After Creating a New Volume 0 00 002 eee 3 12 Adding Disks to a Volume ooooocccocco llle 3 12 Monitoring volimesStatusose t e Mee ESL e ad 3 12 Setting Volume Options sis iiec bee etae eee d e og ORAS 3 12 Converting a Mirror Into a Regular VoluMe oooooooooooooo 3 12 Making a Volume Inactive l l 3 13 Reactivatin
644. xample An example of the display is uptime 8 54am up 2 days 22 23 3122520 NFS ops Displaying Network Statistics Use the netstat Command You use the net stat command to display network statistics About the netstat Command The netstat command displays network related data in various output formats The netstat iandnetstat I options show the state of all network inter faces or one specific interface respectively The netstat r command shows the filer s routing table For information about troubleshooting network problems see Network Problems in chapter 18 For more information about the net stat command see the netstat 1 man page Displaying Interface Statistics Use the ifstat Command The ifstat command prints perinterface statistics not reported by commands such as netstat This includes some statistics maintained by the networking code as well as statistics maintained by the driver and by the networking card The output of the ifstat command might contain many fields because different types of interfaces for example Ethernet and Gigabit GB Ethernet have different statistics ifstat Syntax The syntax for the ifstat command is 17 4 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide ifstat z a interface The z option zeros or clears the statistics The a option lists statistics for all the filer s interfaces The interface option indicates the type of i
645. ximum number of disks in each RAID group in the volume The maximum value of raidsize is 28 The default value is 14 ndisks is the number of disks in the volume including the parity disks The disks in this newly created volume come from the pool of spare disks The smallest disks in this pool join the volume first unless you specify the Osize argument size is the disk size in GB and disks within 1 GB of the specified size are used in this volume If you use the d diskname argument the filer creates the volume with the specified spare disks You can specify a space separated list of disk names If you use the 4 anguage code argument the filer creates the volume with the language specified by the language code The default is the language of the root volume of the filer Language codes are C POSIX da Danish de German en English en US English US es Spanish fi Finnish fr French he Hebrew it Italian ja Japanese euc j ja JPPCK Japanese PCK sjis no Norwegian A 106 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide vol nl Dutch pt Portugese sv Swedish To use UTF8 as the NFS character set append UTF 8 vol add volname ndisks O size d diskname adds disks to the volume with the name volname Specify the disks in the same way as for the vol create command When adding disks to a volume the filer fills up one RAID group with disks before
646. y the Descend Into Subdirectories check box is enabled Select this check box to apply the changes you make recursively to the con tents of any directory you selected Links are not changed but their targets are Changing the Permissions of Multiple Items You can change the permissions of several items at once by selecting them then dis playing SecureShare Access by following Steps 2 through 4 in Displaying SecureShare Access In the multiple item display the following conditions are in effect that are different than the single item display Permissions DOS attributes or characteristics for example whether an item is a directory that are common to all the items you selected appear with a white background Permissions DOS attributes or characteristics for example whether an item is a directory where one item differs from the rest of the items you selected appear with a light gray background Permissions or DOS attributes that you set apply to all items you selected e Turning one of the check boxes gray preserves the permissions on any of the selected items Sending a Message to All Users on a Filer When to Send a Message You might want to send a message to all users on a filer to tell them of important events The message appears in an alert box For example you might need all users to close any open files on the filer but not want to stop CIFS services and therefore not take advantage of the mess
647. y 0 snapshot the filer reboots with the old IP address for the interface e The options used for the entire filer are reverted to the settings that were in effect when the snapshot was taken Recommendations Avoid reverting the configuration files To avoid reverting the configuration files follow one of these steps e Store all data that might need to be reverted in a volume other than the root vol ume This ensures that you never need to revert the root volume e fthe data you want to revert resides in the root volume back up the etc direc tory to another volume or another filer before using SnapRestore After you revert the volume restore the etc directory and reboot the filer If you back up the etc directory to another volume you can use the vol options volume root command to make the filer reboot with that vol ume as the root volume In this way when the filer reboots during the reversion it can use the correct settings in the etc directory Effects of SnapRestore on Filer Backup and Recovery Because all files in a reverted volume have timestamps that are the same as those when the snapshot was created the filer s dump and restore commands might be affected Incremental backup and restore operations can no longer rely on the times tamps to determine what data needs to be backed up or restored Recommendation After you revert a volume perform a level 0 backup of the vol ume After the level O backup is finished t
648. y bit has been set NFS deletes follow NFS conventions That is deletes are allowed if the user has write permission in the parent directory e If the bit was turned on by an NFS client that turned off all write permission bits removing or renaming the file is allowed if the user has sufficient permission to do so This is because file systems on UNIX systems allow removing or renaming a file that has no write permission bits set e If the filer is using UNIX style security CIFS clients are also allowed to delete a file with the read only bit set This is required for compatibility with standard UNIX source control programs such as RCS e lfthe filer is configured with PC style security the read only bit is enforced Naming Files Used by Both NFS and CIFS About File Naming Conventions File naming conventions depend on both the network clients operating systems and the file sharing protocols For example file names are case sensitive for clients run ning UNIX and are case insensitive but case preserving for clients running Windows operating systems Maximum Length of File Names On the filer the maximum length of a file name is 255 characters for NFS clients and CIFS clients that support the PC s long file name format Some CIFS clients such as MS DOS and Windows 3 x clients support only file names in the 8 3 format 8 charac ters for the file name and 3 characters for the file name extension In any directory File Shar
649. y on for the home volume enter the following commands quota off home quota on home Alternatively if the service group is already under quota restriction for example if the group s files are already restricted by a default group quota enter the fol lowing command so that the group quota you just created can take effect quota resize home Removing Quota Restrictions To remove quota restrictions follow these steps 1 Remove the appropriate line or lines from the quotas file 2 Usethe quota offand quota on commands including the volume name For example enter the following commands quota off home quota on home 11 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide When Quotas Are Exceeded This section describes how the filer responds when quotas are exceeded and what users see on the client systems Messages Displayed by the Filer When Quotas Are Exceeded When it receives a write request the filer first determines whether the file to be writ ten is in a qtree If the write would exceed the qtree quota the filer logs the following error message tid tree id tree quota exceeded on volume name If the qtree is not full but the write would cause either the user or group quota to be exceeded the filer logs one of the following errors uid user id disk quota exceeded gid group id disk quota exceeded where user id is the user s UID and group id is the group s GID To t
650. you use NIS to authenticate users How The home Directory Is Used How the home directory is used depends on the file sharing protocol used by the cli ent Table 2 8 describes how NFS and CIFS clients use the directory File sharing protocol CIFS only NFS only All All CIFS only NFS only All CIFS All All CIFS 2 14 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Y Table 2 8 Using the home Directory For NFS clients For CIFS clients The home directory is exported with read and write permissions to all NFS clients and with root access to the administration host Clients can mount directories after the filer host name is added to the filer etc hosts file or to the client s name server The svtx bit also known as the sticky bit is set on the home directory to prevent users from deleting each other s files This is a safe configura tion for networks that use UNIX permissions to provide security for network accessible files You can Clear the sticky bit with the chmod command The home directory can be shared by CIFS users as the home share imme diately after setup finishes Before users can read and write files in the home share you must follow the procedures in the section Creat ing a Home Share for Each User in Chapter 7 By default CIFS users can write and delete their own files in home For more information about access rights re
651. your filer When the filer runs this command from etc rc on the root volume on a filer without an NFS license the command fails and the following messages appear NFS service is not licensed Use the license command to license it NFS server is NOT running Changing SNMP Commands in etc rc Regardless of whether SNMP is enabled at your site add the following commands to etc rc on the root volume snmp contact your email and telephone number snmp location location of your filer snmp init 1 For example snmp contact jdoe abc com 555 555 1212 snmp location ABC corporation engineering lab snmp init 1 2 18 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Naming Conventions for Network Interfaces Interface Types the Filer Supports The filer supports the following interface types Ethernet e Gigabit Ethernet e Virtual How Interfaces Are Numbered Interface numbers are assigned based on the slot in which the interface card is installed For more information about how network interfaces are numbered refer to the hardware guide for your specific filer How Multiple Ports Are Identified Some Ethernet interface cards support four ports These cards are referred to as quad port interfaces The filer uses a letter to refer to each port on a quad port inter face Table 2 10 shows the relationship of port numbers to letters Table 2 10 Relationship of Port Numbe
652. ys tem It includes all major languages A variety of character sets used by UNIX Can include single byte and multibyte characters An ASCII compatible multibyte Uni code encoding NFS console and log files qtree names snapshot names and volume names WIN 32 applications and file names in the following systems e Windows NT e Windows 9x NFS console and log messages Some Solaris clients 5 8 Dell PowerVault 720N 740N and 760N System Administrator and Command Reference Guide Table 5 1 Character Sets Supported continued Character set type Description Used by OEM Single or multiple encodings for e DOS older clients e Windows 9x except for file names e NT system and domain name Languages Supported The filer supports the languages shown in Table 5 2 The language code for each lan guage appears next to the language To override the normal UNIX character set so that a UNIX system uses UTF8 code add UTF8 to the language code You use a language code to specify a language with the vol lang command as described in Setting the Language of a Volume Table 5 2 Supported Languages Language Language Code Danish da Dutch nl English en English US en_US Finnish fi French fr German de Hebrew he Italian it Japanese euc ja Japanese PCK sjis ja JPPCK Norwegian no Portuguese pt POSIX ASCII only for DOS and ISO Latin1 for C NFS Equivalent to the Sun locale File Sh
653. ystem Administrator and Command Reference Guide Creating a Single Mode Trunk Description Use this procedure to create a trunk in which only one interface is active at a time thereby ensuring access to a network After you complete this procedure the inter faces you specify are combined into a trunk in which one interface is active and the others are ready to take over in case of failure of the active interface Prerequisites You need the following items to complete the procedure e Aname for the trunk that meets the following criteria t must begin with a letter t must not contain a space t must not already be in use for a virtual interface Trunk names are case sensitive e Alist of the interfaces you want to combine into the trunk Step To create a trunk in which only one interface is active at a time enter the following command or put it in the etc rc file vif create single trunk interfaces where trunk is the name of the trunk and interfaces is a list of the interfaces you want the trunk to consist of Example The single mode trunk shown on Single Mode Trunks was created with the follow ing command vif creatre single SingleTrunk1 e0 el Specifying a Preferred Link in a Single Mode Trunk Description Use this procedure to specify an interface you prefer to be active in a single mode trunk For example if you are replacing or upgrading a physical interface and want the new int

Dell 720N Laptop User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents